Home

Steinberg WaveLab Elements 7

1. WaveLab 7 372 Audio Plug ins The Gate section Gating or noise gating is a method of dynamic processing that silences audio signals below a set threshold level As soon as the signal level exceeds the set threshold the gate opens to let the signal through The Gate trigger input can also be filtered using an internal side chain The following parameters are available Threshold 60 to 0dB Determines the level where Gate is activated Signal levels above the set threshold trigger the gate to open and signal levels below the set threshold close the gate State LED Indicates whether the gate is open LED lights up in green closed LED lights up in red or something in between LED lights up in yellow Side Chain button This button activates the internal side chain filter You can use this to filter out parts of the sig nal that might otherwise trigger the gate in places you not want it to or to boost frequencies you wish to accentuate allowing for more control over the gate function LP low pass BP band pass HP high pass These buttons set the basic filter mode Center 50 to 22000Hz Sets the center frequency of the filter Q Factor 0 001 to 10000 Sets the resonance or width of the filter Monitor On Off Allows you to monitor the filtered signal Attack 0 1 to 100ms Sets the time it takes for the gate to open after being triggered Hold 0 to 2000ms Determines how long the gate stays op
2. Related topics Playback speed Recording Dialog Command bars 5 5 Specific tool windows Specific tool windows are windows that are specific to the current Workspace They can perform useful tasks in the active Workspace They can be docked and un docked and saved in your custom layouts Audio File Workspace specific tool windows The following specific tool windows are available within the Audio File Workspace Basic Audio CD Error detection and correction File Browser Marker Window Master Project Metadata window Sample attributes Scripting window Audio File Workspace Spectrum editor 5 5 1 Basic Audio CD This specific tool window allows you to burn basic Red Book compatible audio CDs You create your audio CD by adding Audio Files to create a list of tracks Each track contains a reference to the external Audio File This means that you can save your Basic Audio CD layout as its own session and continue editing individual tracks for example Once you are happy with your CD layout you can choose to check the cd for conformity to the Red Book standard burn the CD or export it to the Audio Montage Workspace to edit further You can also choose to consolidate the Audio Files in the CD into a single Audio File with track markers Adding tracks to your audio CD To create tracks in your audio CD e Drag Audio Files directly drag Audio Files directly from your computer s file browser into the window You ca
3. The settings for error detection and correction are organized within the following groups of controls Detection tab choose the method used to detect any errors Each different method has its own settings to determine when it will detect an error Click Detection 1 and 2 will search for clicks in certain frequency ranges while Digital Click Detection looks for clicks that are caused by clicks typical to digital errors Correction tab specify the method used to correct any errors Search Area tab specify the range of audio you wish to search for errors Options tab this provides a range of preferences for playing back viewing and marking any errors found Browse amp Correct panel step through your defined search region detecting each error in turn You can choose to correct any errors or mark them for later correction There are controls to skip between error markers and make fine adjustments to the selection You can also automatically detect and correct all marked errors in the search region Strategies to detect and correct errors There are several strategies that you can employ when detecting and correcting errors Define an audio selection where you have identified an error then click Correct or Mark for subsequent correction WaveLab 7 5 7 Tools 137 e Use the function Detect next error to let WaveLab automatically find the next error y and then click Correct or Mark for subsequent correcti
4. This window allows you to write and execute scripts in the Audio File Workspace The inbuilt text editor helps you when writing scripts by highlighting the different parts of the script with colors making it more readable A script can also be written in another text editor and loaded via the File menu To run a script from within the script window choose Functions gt Execute script For a general description of scripting see Scripting For an overview of the scripting lan guage see ECMAScript Reference You can access this dialog from the Audio File Workspace via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Script Note To view trace or log messages when executing scripts that contain the logWin dow function ensure that the Log window is visible and that it s warning filter buttons A O are selected For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Scripting ECMAScript Reference Log window WaveLab 7 124 Audio File editing 5 5 8 Spectrum editor This specific tool window allows you to select and perform operations on an Audio File via its audio spectrum It uses high quality linear phase filters to process a spectrum selection both in the time do main and in the frequency domain This can be useful for advanced audio restoration tasks like removing noise from a specific source in a recordi
5. 56 WaveLab Concepts copy them for use on another computer They are also useful when used in conjunction with batch conversions and Scripting Working with Presets When working with Presets you save edit and load them from their own pop up menu De pending on the context the available functions sometimes vary but generally you can e Save Save As creates a new Preset file by saving the currently selected settings to your hard disk Explore presets opens the folder where any existing Presets are stored This allows you to delete duplicate and organize your settings into sub folders using the flexibility of the operating system s file browser Restore factory settings restores the current settings to the factory default Preset list select a Preset from the list of those currently available Store restore temporary presets when available use the temporary slots provided to save your settings for the duration of the session This is useful if you want to quickly test and compare different settings Select the option Store temporarily and from the submenu select the number under which you want to save 1 5 To quickly load the saved settings again select the corresponding number from the Restore submenu Define shortcut for the current setting when available this allows you to assign a shortcut to the current preset using either a key shortcut keyword or via a MIDI trigger For example if you have a p
6. Related topics Scripting 4 8 Rendering To Render effects into a temporary or final file you use the Render function note that the Save function from the File menu does not Render The Render function is part of the Master Section and in other applications is sometimes referred to as bouncing down or mixing down Rendering a file prints all audible settings and effects that the audio is being routed through in the Master section to the resultant Audio File This includes any plug ins the level of the faders and any dithering you have set in the Master Section In WaveLab you normally use the Render function to e Mix down a file in a Wave window to a new Audio File complete with Master Section effects dithering and other settings e Mix down a complete Audio Montage to an Audio File WaveLab 7 62 WaveLab Concepts e Apply all settings in the Master Section to a file in a Wave window When you render a file you can choose the format of the new Audio File and whether you wish to create a new file or render the file in place When the file is rendering you will see a progress bar in the status bar In WaveLab you can also view this Progress bar in the Background tasks window a shared tool window that can be set to float independently This allows you to monitor the progress of rendering pause and if necessary cancel the rendering process Rendering tips When you are new to the rendering process in WaveLa
7. The Transport menu gives access to and shows keyboard shortcuts to the same functions that are available in the transport toolbar The Transport toolbar gives quick access to most of these functions If the toolbar is hid den select Workspace gt Command bars gt Transport commands Transport functions operate on the current Audio File The basic transport functions are e Loop On Off Toggles looping on off for the currently selected Audio File or montage e Start of file 4 End of File gt Move the cursor to the beginning or end of the currently selected Audio File e Skip forward gt Skip backward Skip the cursor forwards or backwards within the currently selected Audio File e Play gt Begin playback of the current Audio File e Stop Stop playback of the current Audio File A second click moves the cursor to the beginning of the last start position A further click returns the cursor to the start of the file e Record Y Opens the recording window from which you can start recording Additional transport functions such as start skip and stopping playback options are also available from the transport command bar In WaveLab additional playback speed and jog shuttle shortcuts are also provided For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help WaveLab 7 5 5 Specific tool windows 117
8. e Use the function Detect all errors to let WaveLab automatically find all errors in the predefined range Then browse the marked errors removing or adjusting each audio range in turn and click Correct to correct any specific errors or you can use the option Correct all You can access this dialog by choosing Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Error Correction For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Marker types 11 3 9 Master Project This Specific tool window allows you to access and open all the files related to a project from one place the Master Project window If you are working on a large project that consists of several montage files Audio Files and editing notes all the files belonging to an album project for example you may find it useful to open them from this window You can organize the files in folders and sub folders as you wish with each file annotated with a note using the text editor provided You can place documents from any draggable location into the Master Project and of course drag files from the Master Project back to external locations Each file is listed with the pathname of the enclosing Folder and an editable Comment field As in a standard file system you can t put two files with the same name in the same folder The entire contents of a Master Project
9. Effects can be added to Clips or Tracks Each independent Clip and or audio track in the Montage can be independently processed by up totenVST effect plug ins Effects are configured either as Inserts when all sound is processed by the effect or as Send effects See Effects for more information Using markers in the montage Markers work in much the same way as in the Audio File Workspace however there are some additional functions available that are useful for working with Clips You can for example bind a marker to a Clip so that it moves with the Clip For more information use What s this or see Using markers in the Audio Montage Workspace in Markers for more details Mixing down The Render function The Render function in the Master Section allows you to mix down the whole Montage or sections of it to a single Audio File or to several files in case of a multichannel Montage It also allows you to render to a basic audio CD or CD image and cue sheet or even a new Audio Montage This can be useful for example when you wish to print any effects to file The Render function can be used in many ways e It s useful if you want to burn a CD from a CPU intensive Montage as it allows you to first render all track and Clip effect processing to recreate a new montage and then burn the CD in a second pass e Surround channels can be rendered as multiple files retaining the stereo mono status of the individual surround channels
10. Loads the time stretch preset and applies its setting to an audio range pitchCorrection presetName Loads the pitch correction preset and applies its setting to an audio range pitchQuantize presetName Loads the pitch quantize preset and applies its setting to an audio range WaveLab 7 68 WaveLab Concepts changeLevel dbValue Changes the level of the selected audio range fadeln shape and fadeOut shape Applies a fade on the selected audio range shape can be one of the following e linear e sinus squareRoot sinusoid e log e exp e expp Example activeWave fadeIn squareRoot levelEnvelope presetName Loads the envelope shape and applies its setting to an audio range morph presetName Loads an effect morphing preset and applies it according to its settings invertPhase Inverts the phase of the samples in the audio range reverse Reverses the order of the samples in the audio range cut Cuts the selected audio range copy Copies the selected audio range paste Pastes audio from the clipboard to the current cursor position trimQ Trims the selected audio range remove Deletes the selected audio range removeSmooth Deletes the selected audio range and cross fades the resulting regions together mute Mutes the selected audio range swapChannels Swaps stereo channels undo Undoes the last command removeDcOffset Removes the DC offset in
11. and the splash screen to examine the version number and build date WaveLab 7 12 3 Sonnox DeClicker 327 Qu e Input Level Meter The Input Meter is designed to give exactly 1dB per LED for the top 18dB of dynamic range and 2dB per LED thereafter This gives a clear and intuitive impression of the working headroom Input Gain Trim Touch Pad dB This allows you to adjust the input signal level by up to 12dB Sensitivity Fader and Touch Pad Pop Click Crackle This controls the sensitivity of the detection circuits Fully sensitive might allow the detection circuit to react to low level signals and possibly mis classify programme as pops or clicks Stronger pops and clicks will require a less sensitive setting In Button Pop Click Crackle This button enables the pop click or crackle removal processing It is important to note that with this button off i e the repair processing is disabled the pop click or crackle detection circuit is still enabled and the detect display will still show the degree of event detection Detect Meter Display Pop Click Crackle The Detect meter display combines two indications The main rising column indicates the sum of the energy of events that have been detected With the In button de selected i e the repair circuit disabled this column is colored orange red With the repair circuit active the column is colored blue The bottom segment of the meter is an indicatio
12. e Sync button The buttons below the Delay knobs are used to turn tempo sync on or off for the re spective delay e Feedback 1 amp 2 The Feedback controls set the number of repeats for each delay e Filter Lo 1 amp 2 These filters affect the feedback loop and allow you to roll off low frequencies up to 800Hz The buttons below the knobs activate deactivate the filter e Filter Hi 1 amp 2 These filters affect the feedback loop and allow you to roll off high frequencies from 20kHz down to 1 2kHz The buttons below the knobs activate deactivate the filter e Pan 142 These controls are used to set the stereo position for each delay e Mix 148 2 Use these controls to set the level balance between the dry signal and the effect If StereoDelay is used as a send effect set them to the maximum value 100 as you can control the dry effect balance with the send Note that the delay can also be controlled from another signal source via the side chain input When the side chain signal exceeds the threshold the delay repeats are silenced When the signal drops below the threshold the delay repeats reappear Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets WaveLab 7 364 Audio Plug ins 12 29 Steinberg Stereo Enhancer O 1 Steinberg StereoEnhancer Ys 00 E This plug in will expand the stereo width of stereo audio material lt cannot be used with mono files The following
13. e Windows XP C Documents and Settings User Name Application Data Steinberg WaveLab 7 Presets e Mac OS X root User Name Library Prefences WaveLab 7 Presets You can also find this folder by using the Open active settings folder link in the preferences pane This opens your file browser to wherever the main Presets folder is currently located Inside this Presets folder each type of preset file has its own folder For ex ample all the presets for the Normalizer are stored within C Users User Namef AppDatal Roaming Steinberg WaveLab 7 Presets Normalizer on Windows 7 When you open the Normalizer dialog and choose a preset via the pop up menu the files in this directory will appear as available presets The reason each preset type has its own dedicated folder is so that WaveLab can locate them automatically when you open the preset pop up menu You can organize your presets into sub folders so they appear as sub menus This can be useful if you wish to organize a lot of presets into your own categories You can continue to nest folders inside one another to build a standard tree structured menu system Below is an example of how this looks for a set of window layout presets lA Save as Restore layout before last applied preset Save current layout as default A Explore presets Editing Ca Film 3 Mastering gt Colin Mixing gt Ga Philippe B est Ca Tim gt E all meters E meters on one monitor
14. ee MIOS aq Getting into the details w WAVELAB Audio Editing And Mastering Suite Q steinberg The information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH The software described by this document is subject to a License Agreement and may not be copied to other media except as specifically allowed in the License Agreement No part of this publication may be copied reproduced or otherwise transmitted or recorded for any purpose without prior written permission by Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH All product and company names are or trademarks of their respective owners Windows XP is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation Windows Vista and Windows 7 are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries The Mac logo is a trademark used under license Macintosh and Power Macintosh are registered trademarks MP3SURROUND and the MP3SURROUND logo are registered trademarks of Thomson SA registered in the US and other countries and are used under license from Thomson Licensing SAS Release Date August 31 2010 Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH 2010 All rights reserved Contents 1 WaveLab 7 Help 2 Getting Help 4 2 1 Hep TL ne ce o gee eee Se ae Mok A Oe jee Gees Using the interface 3 1 About Tool WINdOwWS e a ss oras otahi a sadida Sean Ea a a a 3
15. ming muting crossfading appending prepending silencing and repeating an audio selec tion for example It is well worth exploring the tools available in this menu There a number of options available that affect editing in the waveform window See Audio File editing preferences for more information on the various preferences available Editing Shortcuts You can navigate through your Audio File by dragging the Time Selection cursor Alternatively you can use the following keyboard shortcuts e Use the Left Arrow and Right Arrow to move the cursor one pixel in either direction e Use Ctrll Command Left Arrow and Right Arrow to move the cursor twenty pixels in either direction You can also use the Page up and Page Down keys e Use the Home and End keys to navigate to the beginning and end of the wave You can also scroll and zoom within the Audio File Workspace using several other mouse and keyboard shortcuts See Zooming and scrolling for more detailed information WaveLab 7 5 1 Offline processing 91 To audition your Audio File hold down Alt Option and click anywhere in the waveform to begin playback Dragging can also be used with several editing functions in the Audio File Workspace See Audio File Workspace in Dragging operations for more information Related topics Offline processing Analysis Metering Transport controls Specific tool windows Shared tool windows Mix dialog The Spec
16. that is wherever you see this icon and a menu containing Save as For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Presets WaveLab 7 11 1 Dialogs 277 11 1 80 Save picture of active window This dialog allows you to save a picture of the active WaveLab window You can save the picture with or without the enclosing window frame and the resulting picture can be copied to the clipboard or saved to a file If the second option is selected you can specify where the picture is saved and the format BMP JPG JPEG and PNG formats are offered You can access this dialog from most Workspaces in WaveLab via View gt Save picture of active window For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics 11 1 81 Scripting window Audio Montage Workspace This window allows you to write and execute scripts in the Audio Montage Workspace The inbuilt text editor helps you when writing scripts by highlighting the different parts of the script with colors making it more readable A script can also be written in another text editor and loaded via the File menu To run a script from within the script window choose Functions gt Execute script For a general description of scripting see Scripting For
17. 248 Interface Elements the Macintosh only if a shortcut is made up of two or more keystrokes the main menu only displays the first keystroke this is a Mac OS X limitation To reset some or all types of shortcuts to their factory defaults use the Reset button To generate a reference of your customized shortcuts use the Summary button to either view a webpage summary or to print out a list of all your command shortcuts You can access this window from within various other dialogs in WaveLab when you see the icon or by choosing Options gt Customize Commands For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Definition of shortcut s Command bars 11 1 21 Data CD DVD This dialog allows you to arrange files and folders into a structure that you can later write as a data disk You can prepare a disk for a variety of media CD DA DVD or Blu ray Disk The list of media devices displays the amount of data that will fit on each type of disk As you add files an indicator on the left and a text display at the bottom display how full your new disk is You can enter a name for your disk and change the disk file structure before writing your data to an ISO image or writeable optical disk Note Although you can prepare a disk in any format the types of physical disk you can burn will be limited by t
18. Audio Streaming Settings 0 ee eee eee 242 PU es es ea We BSE oe ae NK Be Se ea edd 243 Batch Conversion y ss ee ee AAA RSD 244 Basic Audio CD Settings 6 a a eee 4 A oR SE oe OSs 244 a 6 be a te ke ik ae ak ee ee A EO 245 cy A wad ee a ee ee 245 CD Text Browser 24 abd Seka eee eee ee eed Kew ees 246 cr ek oo he ab oe ap ane Bre Se hod oa ere SSG Be 246 Copy audio information oko Oh eee eb ee bw eee 4 247 Customize Commands kas kOe a A A Al 247 ENS Se aie had wi ce A A Hh 248 DYD Audio ptos so ao ee ee A Re ee E a 250 DVD Audio Creation circa wee awe beds 250 Document list dialog a se ak dorioa ia Se ce A HS 250 Du kng ARIES nS td eae RO a 251 Effect morphing oc o ee ee ee a E 251 Edit playback NOES 0230 0 ae ee ee ee A a we ER ee 252 Error detection and correction o ooo eee es 252 Configure external tools o ee a 253 Folder Preferences dialog o ooo ee es 254 Frequency FaNG so a soea currar a aa 254 PIPE lt a e iot adapa a Dee Ao den 254 Change Level ecas eroro ER da i ole ey 255 File attributes OGG WMA 0 00000 c eee eee 255 Global analysis KOSS ba ee ee ee eee PESOS oS 256 limpo a aos SC ia a ak Be ek A ak ES Gals 257 Insert Audio Files 2 2 0 ee ee 257 Level envelope anaa 258 Loop Tone Uniformizer aaan aa a 258 Loudness distribution lt lt o o sacra ee 259 Loudness normalizer sc ee aa 260 Global Preferences ii AA a 260 Convert mar
19. Bandpass Low pass High pass Related topics The Spectrum display Spectrogram options Spectrum editor 4 12 About Regular Expressions At various places in WaveLab you can use Regular Expressions to build complex text match ing capabilities into your conversion and renaming processes A regular expression is a set of text symbols that describe a method to find a specific text string within a large body of text and then apply a specific operation to this text string Regular expressions are available for the advanced user to perform powerful string search replace operations for example in batch renaming or batch processing Throughout WaveLab wherever you see this bulb icon there is a field where you can create your own regular expressions A fly out menu containing shortcuts to build up the basic syntax of an expression is also available WaveLab 7 84 WaveLab Concepts It is beyond the scope of this Help system to describe this subject thoroughly there are good internet resources available but please read on if you wish to check out the basic building blocks used in regular expressions Common expressions A regular expression is a formula composed of characters that have special meanings called operators Other characters are just plain letters and numbers that are searched for The search engine browses the target text one character at a time and stops as soon as it finds a sequence of characters that matches t
20. By using the Add snapshot and Erase last snapshot buttons you can take and erase snapshots of the current spectrum These will be superimposed over the current peak spec trum graph in a color you can customize until you click the icon again to take a new snapshot One use for this is to check the effects of adding EQ for example Up to five snapshots can be superimposed on the display the sixth snapshot replaces the earliest one in the display and so on Don t confuse the order of snapshots with the numbered buttons these are Spectrometer presets see below Zooming You can adjust the frequency scale and range in the Settings dialog as described below but it s also possible to temporarily zoom in on a frequency area of interest This is done by clicking and dragging a rectangle in the Spectroscope display When you release the mouse button the display is zoomed in so that the enclosed frequency range fills the window To return to full scale display select Zoom out fully from the Functions menu or double click anywhere on the display Making settings You can adjust the behavior and display of the meters as desired and assign up to five sets of Spectrometer settings to the Preset buttons for instant access Open the Settings dialog by selecting Settings from the Functions menu or clicking the tool icon Note that you can apply your settings without closing the dialog by clicking the Apply button If you want to st
21. For the high band you can select between three types of shelving filters a Peak and a Cut filter When Cut mode is selected the Gain parameter is fixed Shelf adds resonance in the opposite gain direction slightly below the set frequency Shelf ll adds resonance in the gain direction at the set frequency Shelf III is a combination of Shelf and II Output 24 to 24dB This knob on the top right of the plug in panel allows you to adjust the overall output level Auto Gain button When this button is activated the gain is automatically adjusted keeping the output level constant regardless of the EQ settings Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets 12 32 Steinberg Test Generator e 1 Steinberg TestGenerator 4s 00 E triangle square sawtooth white pink brownian NTL EN MM ii 100 Hz 440 Hz 1000 Hz 10000 Hz 1000 0 Hz 12 dB 46 dB 3 dB 0 dB 3 00 dB This utility plug in allows you to generate an audio signal which can be recorded as an Audio File The resulting file can then be used for a number of purposes e For testing the specifications of audio equipment e For measurements of various kinds such as calibrating tape recorders WaveLab 7 12 33 UV22HR Dithering 369 e For testing signal processing methods e For educational purposes The TestGenerator is based on a waveform generator which can generate a number of basic waveforms such as sine and saw as
22. Higher frequencies in the region will be more attenuated e High pass filter Lower frequencies in the region will be more attenuated For the Low and High pass filters a low Filter steepness setting is normally used around 6 to 18dB Blur peaks This filter operation analyzes the region to find the frequencies with the highest level The level of these frequencies will be attenuated or boosted according to the set Gain value If the gain is negative these frequencies will be blurred and disappear in the mix as a whole The purpose of the filter is to mask the loudest frequencies e g it could be used to eliminate a sudden burst of pitched but unwanted sound in the audio material like acoustic feedback This mode works best with the Infinite steepness setting which is automatically selected when Blur peaks is used You can however freely set any Filter steepness setting The filter type options are not available when this mode is selected Dispersion This is a special filter that smears the dynamics and pitch of the region without changing the actual frequency content This works best on lower frequencies to mask the identity of a signal without changing the frequency spectrum This mode works best with the Infinite steepness setting which is automatically selected when Dispersion is used You can however freely set any Filter steepness setting The filter type options are not available when this mode is selected Disp
23. Master Project Related topics About Tool Windows 11 3 1 File Browser This dialog allows you to browse files directly from within WaveLab rather than using your operating system s file browser It provides you with all the standard browsing functions such as List and Icon views as well as additional controls to audition Audio Files and any marker defined regions You can use it to open or insert an entire file or a specific region of a file by dragging and releasing the file in the location you wish to insert the file In the Audio Montage Workspace you can also choose to only view certain types of WaveLab specific files The File Browser can be very useful in speeding up the process of auditioning a long list of sound files It can also be used to drag to windows such as Data CD DVD including dragging folders WaveLab 7 300 Interface Elements The playback functions Play file gt Once you have selected a file in the File Browser list you can audition it by clicking Play in the File Browser s toolbar Click again to stop Auto play You can also have files play back automatically as soon as they are selected To do this activate Auto Play mode Tip To audition a long list of Audio Files enable Auto play and use the UP and DOWN cursor keys to step through each Audio File in quick succession Opening and inserting a file or region Once you have chosen a file you wish to open double click it to open the file in
24. Metering WaveLab 7 5 3 Metering 111 5 3 2 Spectroscope The Spectroscope shows a continuous graphical representation of the frequency spectrum analyzed into 60 separate frequency bands represented as vertical bars Peak levels are shown as a short horizontal lines above the corresponding band indicating recent peak maximum values The Spectroscope offers a quick spectrum overview For a more detailed analysis of the audio spectrum use the Spectrometer The Spectroscope can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used ei ther as a floating window or docked in the Workspace lt can also be docked in the Control Window Related topics Metering Spectrometer 5 3 3 Oscilloscope The Oscilloscope offers a highly magnified view of the waveform around the playback cursor position If you are analyzing a stereo file the Oscilloscope normally shows the separate levels of the two channels However if you activate the option Show Sum and Subtraction on the Functions menu or click the icon the upper half of the Oscilloscope shows the sum of the two channels and the lower half shows the subtraction Making settings By opening the Settings dialog you can adjust the display colors and choose to activate Auto zoom or not With Auto zoom activated the display is optimized so that the highest level reaches the top of the display at all times The Settings dialog can be access
25. Montage Workspace in Markers for more details You can access this specific tool window within the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Markers For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help WaveLab 7 164 Audio Montages Related topics Specific tool windows Markers Marker types Convert marker type Text format 6 4 5 History This specific tool window allows you to view a history of all your recent editing operations You can revert the current montage to a previous state by selecting the operation you want to return to and double clicking on it You can then use the redo command Edit gt Redo to return to any state Use the history menu options Edit gt History gt to undo all operations redo all operations or clear the history There are a couple of history options available in the Audio Montage preferences window You can choose to empty the history each time you save a montage file and also to group similar types of sequential operations into a single operation Both of these options enable you to use less memory when storing the operation history You can access this window in the Audio Montage Workspace via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt History For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this qu
26. Removing Groups 1 Select the Group by clicking on its name in the Groups view list 2 Pull down the Grouping menu and select Remove selected group The Group is removed the Clips are not affected Using Groups There are some important things to remember when using Groups e A Clip cannot be part of more than one Group If you add a Clip to a Group it is automatically removed from any other Group it is part of e It is possible to create nested Groups by adding a Group to another Group e You can temporarily turn off a Group by deactivating the checkbox to the left of a Group in the list When a Group is deactivated you can move individual Clips in the Group as if they were not grouped e You can select a specific color for a Group to make it easy to discern it in the track view WaveLab 7 320 Interface Elements e Double click to rename a Group e You can nest a Group inside another Group by dragging it e The Render option is available to render all Groups as individual files Render dialog You can access this window in the Audio Montage Workspace via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Groups For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Specific tool windows Render Montage window WaveLab 7 Chapter 12 Audio Plug ins Steinberg created Virtual Studio Technology V
27. WaveLab 7 4 6 Offline processing 51 You can view exact time information on the original audio selection you wish to stretch and choose the amount you wish to stretch it in seconds beats per minute or as a percentage You can also choose which method WaveLab uses to stretch the audio and the quality speed of the processing If you select Use modulation envelope you can vary the time stretch over time using an envelope editor that becomes available When choosing a method it is useful to experiment with the different algorithms available to find which one suits your source material the best Use What s this to find out more information on each method and determine which one will produce the best time stretch without introducing unwanted artifacts This function is useful if you want to speed up or slow down a recording to match other material such as matching the tempo of two drum beats or fitting an audio track to a section of video for example Time stretching is also available as a batch processing plug in in the Batch Processor Workspace In addition Time stretching for a Clip is available from the Focused Clip window Note that for batch processing and Clip processing the modulation envelope option is not available You can access this dialog from the Audio File Workspace by choosing Process gt Time stretching For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark
28. WaveLab 7 6 4 Specific tool windows 159 Related topics Playback speed Recording Dialog Command bars 6 4 Specific tool windows Specific tool windows are windows that are specific to the current Workspace They perform useful tasks in the active Workspace They can be docked and un docked and saved in your custom layouts Audio Montage Workspace specific tool windows The following specific tool windows are available within the Audio Montage Workspace File CD File Browser Marker Window History Clips Focused Clip window Notes Master Project Scripting window Audio Montage Workspace Groups DVD Audio Navigator Zoom Effects Snapshots 6 4 1 File This specific tool window helps you to manage files that are used in the current Audio Mon tage It displays all current files that are being used by Clips in the current montage along with their location size and last modified date In addition a number of file operations are available e add one or more Audio Files to a montage this will open the Insert Audio Files window when one than one file is selected WaveLab 7 160 Audio Montages e replace individual files in a montage this will update any Clip references e rename a file this updates all internal Clip references e select Clips that are referenced by a specific file e open a file in the Audio File Workspace and view the file in your computer s file browser This window is a u
29. e You can create a CD image and cue sheet e You can create a Basic Audio CD WaveLab 7 147 e lt allows you to render a whole Montage to a single file or various parts to multiple Audio Files in one operation for example rendering regions Groups or Clips For more information see Rendering and Render Montage window CD Preparation The Audio Montage Workspace is an especially powerful tool when it comes to authoring professional Audio CDs You can easily author a CD using the CD window This window contains a variety of tools for authoring and burning CDs including a CD Wizard to get you started full CD playback previewing the ability to add and edit CD Text the generation of CD reports and the ability to check the conformity of your disk to common standards In conjunction with the Marker Window you can edit create and delete different Track marker types with precision giving you the ability to create gap less CDs and control the pauses between track etc Any changes you make to Track markers will be reflected in the CD window too Once you are happy with your CD layout you can burn a CD directly from the CD window or save a DDP image using the Write Audio CD window For more information on burning CDs see Authoring CDs and DVDs and the CD window DVD Audio burning You can also author and burn DVD Audio disks in the Audio Montage Workspace This is done using the dedicated DVD Audio window The process is similar to cre
30. gt Open as For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio File Format Dialog 11 1 88 Spectrogram options This dialog allows you to adjust how the Spectrogram is displayed You can adjust the visual style of the spectrogram and its resolution You can also specify a cut off point above which frequencies are displayed and to plot them using a linear or logarithmic scale This can be useful for isolating a certain range of frequencies for example in sound restoration you may wish to focus on a high frequency band which is more accurately displayed using a linear scale You can access this dialog from both wave windows in the Audio File Workspace via the Spectrum tab gt Edit settings For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics The Spectrum display Spectrum editor 11 1 89 Surround Panner This dialog allows you to adjust the pan of your audio between surround sound channels In the graphic display the positions of the clip left right audio channels are shown as small squares The proportional signal levels from the individual speakers are indicated by colored lines from the speakers to the center of the display The graphic display shows the surround imaging of either the
31. position If you are analyzing a stereo file the Oscilloscope normally shows the separate levels of the two channels However if you activate the option Show Sum and Subtraction on the Functions menu or click the icon the upper half of the Oscilloscope shows the sum of the two channels and the lower half shows the subtraction Making settings By opening the Settings dialog you can adjust the display colors and choose to activate Auto zoom or not With Auto zoom activated the display is optimized so that the highest level reaches the top of the display at all times The Settings dialog can be accessed through the Functions gt Settings menu or by using the icon The Oscilloscope can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces lt can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace lt can also be docked in the Control Window Related topics Metering 9 2 4 Bit Meter The Bit Meter shows the resolution or the number of bits used in the digital audio being monitored Normally the maximum number of bits in an Audio File is the same as the resolution of the Audio File e g a 16 bit Audio File shows that up to 16 bits are used but sometimes this is not the case As soon as you perform any kind of real time processing on an Audio File the audio data is treated at a much higher resolution 32 bit floating point to allow for pristine audio quality Examples of such processi
32. the changes You can access this dialog in various places throughout WaveLab e from any Workspace via Utilities gt Batch file renaming e from the Marker window via Functions gt Batch marker renaming e from the Clips window in the Audio Montage Workspace viaFunctions gt Batch clip renaming For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Batch Conversion Marker Window About Regular Expressions Regular Expressions 11 1 16 CD Text Editor This dialog allows you to add CD Text data to an audio CD CD Text is an extension of the Red Book Compact Disc standard and allows you to store text information on an audio CD Information such as the disk title songwriter composer and disc ID can be added for example The text data you enter is displayed by CD players that support the CD Text format WaveLab 7 246 Interface Elements In WaveLab you can add information about the disk itself and each individual track This information is entered in a series of text fields that scroll together horizontally There is one pane of fields for the disk itself and a pane for each track You can scroll between these with a slider bar Buttons allow you to copy between fields to make entering information easier Tip Make sure the Enable CD Text Burning checkbox is ticked before burning an audio CD if you wi
33. while lower values lead to a clearer sound Hi Level Affects the decay time of high frequencies Normal room reverb decays quicker in the high and low frequency range than in the mid range Lowering the level percentage causes high frequencies to decay quicker Values above 100 cause high frequencies to decay more slowly than the mid range frequencies Lo Level Affects the decay time of low frequencies Normal room reverb decays quicker in the high and low frequency range than in the mid range Lowering the level percentage causes low frequencies to decay quicker Values above 100 cause low frequencies to decay more slowly than the mid range frequencies Mix Determines the blend of dry unprocessed signal to wet processed signal When using Room Works SE inserted in an FX channel you will most likely want to set this to 100 or use the Send button Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets WaveLab 7 12 28 Stereo Delay 363 12 28 Stereo Delay e 1 Steinberg StereoDelay Ys E Delay Feedback Lo filter Hi i Delay Feedback Lo filter Hi 250 0 50 0 50 0 16128 0 250 0 50 0 50 0 16128 0 a a a a A a A a a A p y Ed y gt gt Ed y v StereoDelay has two independent delay lines with freely specified delay time settings The following parameters are available e Delay 1 amp 2 Using these controls you specify the base note value for the delay time in milliseconds
34. 2 Shared tool windows 195 Docking windows 7 2 1 Background task monitor This specific tool window allows you to view all background rendering processes that are in progress You can adjust the priority with which they are processed pause or cancel them It is useful if you have a number of lengthy processes underway and want to free up some processing power to focus on editing You can either lower the priority of a task so it does not use as much of the computer processor s capacity or pause the task temporarily You can access this window by choosing Workspace gt Shared tool windows gt Back ground task monitor It is available in the Control Window Audio File Workspace and Audio Montage Workspace You can also access this window in the Control Window by choosing Utilities gt Background task monitor You can choose to automatically open the Background task monitor when a rendering pro cess begins To enable this option select the checkbox via Options gt Global Preferences gt Options gt Make the Background Task Monitor visible when a task starts Since this window is a Shared_tool_window the location where it opens may vary For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Specific tool windows Control Window Rendering 7 2 2 Log window This shared tool window allows you to view log messages t
35. 4 6 3 Normalize Level This dialog allows you to change the peak level of your Audio File Enter the desired peak level in dB that you wish the audio selection to have You can also use Find current peak level to obtain a report on the peak level of the current audio selection or the peak level in the whole file if Process whole file if there is no selection is selected in the preferences You can choose to apply the same gain to both stereo channels Stereo Link or mix down to a mono file Mix to Mono with the assurance that no clipping will occur when both channels are mixed together To normalize the selected audio enter the desired peak level and click Apply You can access this dialog by choosing Process gt Level Normalizer in the Audio File Workspace This function is also available as a batch processing plug in You can access it from Batch Processing Workspace gt Plug ins window gt Multipass Plug ins gt Normalizer For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio File editing Value editing WaveLab 7 4 6 Offline processing 49 4 6 4 Silence Generator This dialog allows you to generate silence either by replacing an audio selection or by specifying a duration You can also specify a cross fade at each end of the silent region for a smoother transition Radio buttons d
36. 6 dB 3 seconds This means there are 3 times more 6 dB material than O dB material You will see a peak of about 33 at O dB and another peak of 100 at 6 dB This analysis is useful for learning about how the loudness of your music is distributed You can access this dialog in the Wave File Workspace via Analysis gt Loudness distri bution For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Loudness 4 3 Authoring CDs and DVDs WaveLab provides extensive tools for authoring all types of audio and data CDs or DVDs Depending on your connected optical hardware you can burn CD R CD RW and DVD R DVD R disks WaveLab allows you to author professional audio CD and DVD Audio disks with full control over track indexes CD Text PQ and ISRC EAN codes etc You can validate your disks before burning to make sure they conform to valid CD standards such as the Red Book standard or choose to author using newer formats with CD Text support or gapless tracks When it comes to outputting your final disk you can choose to output your audio CD as a DDP image or burn it straight to optical media If you are creating a DVD A you can output to AUDIO_TS and VIDEO_TS folders or burn a DVD straight from within WaveLab You can also burn a data CD or DVD directly from the application or save them as ISO disk images Important note for M
37. Audio Montage Workspace Control Window 4 9 1 WaveLab Scripting Language WaveLab s scripting language varies slightly between Workspaces This Help entry briefly introduces you to the commands that are available in each Workspace and to those that are global Global Commands These are scripting commands that are available in all scripting contexts logWindow Object representing the Log window where you can output messages to If the log window is not open all functions are ignored as they are not visible anyway Functions printinfo messageString Outputs an informal message to the Log window The mes sage argument must be typed as a String i e between inverted commas Example logWindow printInfo start printWarning messageString Outputs a warning message to the Log window printError messageString Outputs an error message to the Log window clear Clears the log window Example logWindow clear WaveLab 7 66 WaveLab Concepts Audio File Scripting Commands Objects activeWave Object representing the active Audio File Many functions make use of presets as an argument For example the normalize function accepts a preset as an argument activeWave normalize myPreset The advantage is that you don t need to specify many parameters in your scripts instead you can use the corresponding dialog to define the settings of a particular function and then save them as a preset file
38. Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets Dithering WaveLab 7 Chapter 13 Utilities WaveLab s Utilities menu contains a number of useful tools accessible from all Workspaces This page contains links to information about them CD DVD utilities Import Audio CD Burn Audio CD from DDP Image Data CD DVD Batch utilities Batch Conversion Batch Renaming Utility windows Log window Background task monitor Timecode 13 1 Import Audio CD This dialog allows you to import one or more tracks from an audio CD Once you have identified the source CD you can select the track or tracks to import You must specify a folder location and file format before the file or files can be saved to disk Actions tab Specify the optical disk drive from the drop down list and the disk reading speed The title and track details are automatically completed If no track names appear click amp to refresh CD reading 380 Utilities From this list you can select the tracks or define the start and end points of a single track The Rename tracks menu option automatically adds the track order number to the name in a range of different styles You can select a track name for text editing by double clicking In Output accept the default Folder location or choose another Clicking produces the Audio File Format dialog for changing details of the Audio File s format Options tab This accesses a list of tickabl
39. Auto mode Sets the amount of time it takes for the gain to return to its original level when the signal drops below the threshold level If the Auto button is activated Compressor will automatically find an optimal release setting that varies depending on the audio material Analysis 0 to 100 Pure Peak to Pure RMS Determines whether the input signal is analyzed according to peak or RMS values or a mixture of both A value of O is pure peak and 100 pure RMS RMS mode operates using the average power of the audio signal as a basis whereas Peak mode operates more on peak levels As a general guideline RMS mode works better on material with few transients such as vocals and Peak mode works better for percussive material with a lot of transient peaks Live button When this button is activated the look ahead feature of Compressor is disengaged Look ahead produces more accurate processing but adds a certain amount of latency as a trade off When Live mode is activated there is no latency which might be better for live processing Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets 12 9 Steinberg DeEsser e 1 Steinberg DeEsser Ys 00 E Reduction Threshold 4 0 4 auto Release 150 A de esser is used to reduce excessive sibilance primarily for vocal recordings Basically it is a special type of compressor that is tuned to be sensitive to the frequencies produced WaveLa
40. Batch Processors Workspace Select a category of plug ins from the Plug ins accordion Double click to add the plug in at the end or drag the plug in into position in the batch processor chain WaveLab 7 7 1 Specific tool windows 187 To remove a plug in Right click on the plug in to use the pop up menu Remove option or drag it back onto the plugin window Master Section presets These are Master Section presets not to be confused with individual plugin presets so it s always a chain even if it s a chain with one member As these presets can contain multiple effects they can be put to powerful use in batch processing Master Section Plug ins These are all the plug ins available from the Master Section sorted in the same manner Monopass Plug ins Monopass plug ins only require one pass when processing A Monopass plug in effect processes the signal then outputs it to any subsequent plug in This is like real time plug ins The following Monopass plug ins are available in the Batch Processor Workspace Audio Injector Trimmer Resizer Fade In Instructor Time Stretch Pitch Correction Multipass Plug ins Multipass plug ins require two or more passes an analysis pass followed by a process pass before processing the audio Some are unique to the Batch Processor while others are also found as Offline Processors in the Audio File Workspace The following Multipass plug ins are available in the Batch Proces
41. DIES a oa A om A a 410 O ee ae ee as 3 ees 410 Sample tate lt oh eee ee eee ee Pe eS Ee Se RS RS E 410 SMPTE MINSA sa Sue AS cee o Gee Os 410 Sound Designer Il files 2 6442 ce tte eee bead eee ewe ods 411 ole UC A a a ee ea p i ap ee ee eee 411 S nJava fles see hae RR ORS BRE PES S EUR OSES 411 TODO UA si a Wie a aos A Ata RIA a Slt a 411 Vex Excel Hee lt lt of ee te et be AE ee OP eh Ga ew aed i 411 CS i hae eS EI 412 WaveLab 7 CONTENTS xi 15 74 15 75 15 76 15 77 15 78 15 79 15 80 PEA ao ia a ee eK EAE A AA em oe a ele oh 412 WAN IN se io Yes Be inser EA 412 AU IES i a ee A ES ee REE BED AS Cee A 413 pc 2 oak Soe 0h IN 413 We sir ok Ue eS lek ee ae ee eee AS G 413 A ax Gp a cis yah in ih A di eae ro 413 ENCON oa ds EE Os Ea Se BS A 413 WaveLab 7 Chapter 1 WaveLab 7 Help Welcome to the WaveLab Help browser You can expand the tree structure in the panel on the left under the Contents tab to find individual Help topics You can also use the Index and Bookmarks tabs in addition to a powerful Search feature under the Search tab Please see Getting Help for more ways of using the Help browser and other help features available throughout WaveLab For a quick overview of the features provided in WaveLab see Features Overview Top level topics Getting Help Using the interface WaveLab Concepts Audio File editing Audio Montages Batch Processing Podcasts Control Window Master Section Master Pr
42. File editing Value editing 7 3 0 9 Stereo to Mono This dialog is exclusive to the Batch Processor Workspace and allows you to mix a stereo signal down to a mono one while being certain not to clip while mixing channels You can choose to use the same peak level that the stereo file contains or set the gain to be applied and or the maximum level to be reached in the resulting mono file You can access this dialog from the Batch Processor Workspace via Plug ins window gt Multipass Plug ins gt Stereo to Mono WaveLab 7 7 3 Batch Processing Plug ins 201 For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Batch Processing Plug ins 7 3 0 10 Pan Normalizer This dialog allows you to ensure that both channels of a stereo file have the same level or loudness Since loudnesss is more important than peak volume in the perception of sound this is a powerful tool to get the best possible stereo balance This process uses two passes to first analyze the audio and then render any level changes required You must have a stereo selection in a stereo file to apply this process You can access this dialog from the Audio File Workspace via Process gt Pan Normalizer This function is also available as a batch processing plug in You can access it from the Batch Processor Workspace via Plug ins window gt Multipass P
43. For more information see Getting Help Related topics 11 1 57 Mix dialog This dialog allows you to specify a change in gain while pasting audio You can adjust the gain of the copy of audio contained in the clipboard and or the audio at the destination so you can control how the two components mix together WaveLab 7 11 1 Dialogs 267 You can access this dialog from the Audio File Workspace via Edit gt Paste special gt Mix For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics 11 1 58 Pitch bend This dialog allows you to change the pitch of a sound over time Note that changing the pitch using Pitch bend will affect its duration unless length preservation is activated Using an envelope you can draw the curve you wish the pitch to follow The pitch offset is displayed along the vertical ruler of the envelope and the range the envelope effects can be adjusted using the spin control Positive pitch values produce sounds with a higher pitch and of shorter length negative values produce sounds with a lower pitch and of longer length If length preservation is activated you can choose the algorithm that is used to perform the pitch bend operation Depending on the type of audio material you are processing choose the appropriate mode For more information on the different modes use the What s This tool
44. For more information see Getting Help Related topics Specific tool windows 11 3 6 Marker Window The marker window is a specific tool window that allows you to create edit and use markers while working on an audio waveform WaveLab 7 11 3 Specific tool windows 307 From the Functions menu you can also access useful functions to convert marker types rename multiple markers and export the marker list as text The Marker list The marker window contains a list of any markers placed in the currently active file along with their corresponding details Click on a column header to sort the list in ascending or descending order based on the values in that column You can also use the Filter menu to toggle which types of markers are displayed in the list From this list of markers you can use the fields controls and menus to e Create a new marker at the playback head position click on a marker icon at the top of the window or choose a marker type from the Insert menu to drop a marker at the current playhead location Create a pair of markers from a selection make a selection in the waveform and then click on a pair of marker icons at the top of the window or choose a Create region command from the Insert menu to drop a pair of markers at either side of the current selection Start playback It is possible to start playback at the selected marker position with or without pre roll by clicking on the leftmost icons C
45. Hold down the Shift key to do the same thing while maintaining the edit cursor in the same position e Zoom by dragging the thumb edges of the scroll bars in the Audio File and Montage windows e Zoom by acting on the wheel controls in the bottom right corners of the Audio File and Montage windows by click and drag or using the mouse wheel e Zoom and scrolling can be undone or redone by the View gt Navigate backwards forwards commands Changing the Zoom level e you can make quick changes to the zoom level using the View All 2 or Zoom In 1 1 buttons in the control bar Scrubbing the vertical or horizontal Zoom Wheel located in the bottom right hand corner of Main wave window also alters the zoom level Related topics Shortcut system WaveLab 7 26 Using the interface WaveLab 7 Chapter 4 WaveLab Concepts WaveLab is an incredibly powerful tool and has many features which can be used for a wide variety of audio editing mastering and mixing purposes This section provides you with links to some of the main concepts used throughout WaveLab Understanding these concepts can help you to get the most out of WaveLab Related topics Features Overview Analysis Authoring CDs and DVDs Markers Metering Offline processing Presets Rendering Scripting The Spectrum display Spectrum editor About Regular Expressions 4 1 Features Overview WaveLab 7 Pro Audio Editing and Mastering Suite WaveLa
46. If a window is active the Help window opens to the relevant entry If a dialog box is open the dialog is described Getting Help Related topics Help menu Command bars 2 1 Help menu The Help menu gives you a convenient point of access to WaveLab s Help system Help about the active window Select this or press F1 Command to give help on the active window If a dialog box is open the dialog is described Contents This lists the Help contents as a tree structure in the Contents window Like many WaveLab windows you can make this a floating window if you want to park it in a convenient place on screen Index This accesses an Index to Help entries Type in the Look for box or scroll down the alphabetical list If there is more than one entry for the Index item you ll be given a choice of entries to be displayed in the Choose Topic box Search Type the name of the topic you wish to find in the Search for box If more than one topic is found to match the search string a list is displayed click on the most likely entry to display the topic If there are too many entries you can refine the search by clicking on Advanced search Bookmarks Click the Add button to add the displayed topic to the list of Bookmarked favorites Now you can return to the entry speedily What is this This gives a short Tooltip explanation by pointing and clicking on the interface fea
47. Loudness Nor malizer For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help WaveLab 7 202 Batch Processing Related topics Loudness DC Offset Loudness distribution 7 3 0 12 DC Remover This dialog is exclusive to the Batch Processor Workspace and allows you to eliminate any DC Offset from an Audio File It can be useful to apply this plug in first in a batch before other plug ins to avoid further processing a file containing any DC Offset For example an Audio File that has a DC offset will not be at its loudest possible volume when normalized because the offset consumes headroom You can access this dialog from the Batch Processor Workspace via Plug ins window gt Multipass Plug ins gt DC Remover For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Batch Processing Plug ins DC Offset 7 3 0 13 Loudness Restorer This dialog is exclusive to the Batch Processor Workspace and allows you to restore the loudness of an Audio File The Loudness Restorer plug in must be used as a pair the first instance is used to read the audio signal the second instance uses this information to adjust the loudness or peak level of the file To use the plug in 1 Place an instance of the plug in in the batch chain an
48. Marker Window when editing in the Audio Montage Workspace e L Bind selected marker to start of focused clip e I Bind selected marker to end of focused clip e amp Detach selected marker from its associated clip e Y Bind selected marker to audio samples of focused clip Related topics Marker types Marker Window WaveLab 7 4 4 Markers 37 4 4 1 Marker types Markers have a variety of uses in editing and playback such as indicating cue points absolute time locations highlighting problem sections and for visually separating tracks WaveLab provides a set of specialized markers for creating CD DVD A tracks muting or skipping sections and for use with the Error Correction tool Basic markers e Y Generic markers these are mainly used for locating certain important positions and for editing for selecting all the audio between two points for example Generic markers can be created directly during recording e Y Temporary markers these markers can be used for any purpose but they only persist while a file is open so are self clearing when the file is closed CD DVD A authoring markers e gt 4 CD Track start and end markers these denote where a CD track begins and ends They also serve for DVD A disks CD DVD markers must be used as a pair CD Track splice markers a CD track splice is used when a CD track starts just where another one ends They also serve for DVD A disks e gt CD Track ind
49. Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces lt can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace It can also be docked in the Control Window Related topics Metering 6 5 4 Bit Meter The Bit Meter shows the resolution or the number of bits used in the digital audio being monitored Normally the maximum number of bits in an Audio File is the same as the resolution of the Audio File e g a 16 bit Audio File shows that up to 16 bits are used but sometimes this is not the case As soon as you perform any kind of real time processing on an Audio File the audio data is treated at a much higher resolution 32 bit floating point to allow for pristine audio quality Examples of such processing include level adjustments effects the mixing of two or more files etc In fact the only time when a 16 bit file is played back at 16 bit resolution is if you play it without any fades or effects and with the Master Faders set to 0 00 no level adjustment You can try this out for yourself by playing back a 16 bit Audio File and viewing the Bit Meter as soon as you adjust the Master Faders note that 24 bits are used and the inter indicator is lit more on this below How to read the Bit Meter e The innermost meters closest to the bit scale show the number of bits in use You can adjust this display in the Settings dialog e The outer meters are history meters showing how many bits were recently in use
50. Preset list select a Preset from the list of those currently available e Store restore temporary presets when available use the temporary slots provided to save your settings for the duration of the session This is useful if you want to quickly test and compare different settings Select the option Store temporarily and from the WaveLab 7 102 Audio File editing submenu select the number under which you want to save 1 5 To quickly load the saved settings again select the corresponding number from the Restore submenu Define shortcut for the current setting when available this allows you to assign a shortcut to the current preset using either a key shortcut keyword or via a MIDI trigger For example if you have a preset to normalize audio at 0 1 dB and you assign it a key shortcut then everytime you execute the shortcut the preset is applied to the audio selection without the need to open the dialog VST 2 Presets VST plug ins have their own preset handling When you click the preset button for this type of effect the following options are available Load Save Bank this allows you to load and save complete sets of presets The file format is compatible with Cubase Load Save Default Bank this loads the default bank of presets or saves the current set of presets as the default bank Load Save Effect this loads or saves one preset at a time The file format is again compatible with Cubase Edi
51. SUE cs ee On ee aa a a Se Sea ne alt cee 150 6 1 2 SOO o a Pe e a Bee eke ed eee eee ai 151 6 1 3 OSI ask tao as AA Be oo a ed 152 6 1 4 BIC MBE sei ea oke bee eee be eae ee eG Gwe 152 6 1 5 PRES SCORE a i o eee a ee ee Ae M a A 153 6 1 6 a os Baws be eae Ree 155 6 1 7 WHAVOSCOME crota ee a A eh a ee 156 6 2 A ee ee he Gok a ae Moe aoe ets de Ee a ee 156 6 2 1 Meta normalizer 6 ee ee 157 6 2 2 Configure external tools 4 4 2 6 545 bs G edb ee ee dhe s 157 6 3 Transport controls oo ee ee a a ee ee ew 158 6 4 Specific lool WINJOWS eS Akos cada A aue we Gee OES 159 6 4 1 UE Ese dedos a Melee ek ao Seer Se abd pe Gleaner Adee 159 6 4 2 A eau Mrs AREA 160 6 4 3 ao socs we Bs ae a eae wk A a a 162 6 4 4 Marker WINdOW a ea a ra a ee a ee a aa 163 6 4 5 PU 200 o SD be a Od Bw ee Bled Bed 164 6 4 6 E chin Sh atk Set Boa E A 164 WaveLab 7 iv CONTENTS 6 4 7 Focused Clip window ic eh we eal ee ee a AA e 165 6 4 8 o A eee Ad a ee ede ee ee a 166 6 4 9 Scripting window Audio Montage Workspace 166 GATO OUPS ccoo a Ge OOO ESS OE Era we OA eG ees Ged 167 6411 PVD sai rara hk ee DR HO SO 168 DA MIO eso AAA ee S 169 64 13 ZOOM ones he RE Ee Rte ee bw eee ee eee eo 170 Peet EMSC coros gia acd wae ae ee ee od be ee e 170 64 15 Spapshols 6144554522 2A See eR ee eR ee ee 171 6 5 Shared tool windows sca a sadaa ee 171 6 5 1 Phasescope oea ce otan Pie PA ae a we ek a we 172 6 5 2 UO es a hee ee GS oe ans eck Ge ee eee re
52. Since each type of preset is unique you don t need to specify a full path name to the preset Only specifying the preset name is enough there is no need for its extension Since presets can also be stored in a sub folder you can use a relative path name if necessary So if for example you wanted to normalize a file using a preset you had defined in the Nor malize level dialog and saved in a sub folder as a preset it would look like this activeWave normalize mySubFolder myPreset All audio processing functions operate on the selected audio range If there is no selection the whole file range will be processed if that editing option is selected in Audio File editing preferences If the cursor or selection is in one channel only only that channel is processed In other words it operates exactly the same as if you were applying a process from within a dialog All positions and sizes are measured in sample units If you wish to specify a time range in another unit you will need to convert it from samples var twoSeconds 2 activeWave sampleRate Functions size Returns the number of samples in the Audio File sampleRate Returns the sample rate of the Audio File numChannels Q Returns the number of channels of the Audio File cursorPosition Returns the current cursor position in samples setCursorPosition pos Sets the current cursor position at a certain sample location selectionStart Returns the ind
53. Source and Target regions You can also choose to apply processing to a single spectrum region using a variety of different modes See Spectrum Processing Modes for information on each mode type Master Section use this part to process and route selected spectral audio regions through the Master Section and its effects plug ins This allows for frequency selective processing A selected region s frequency spectrum can be routed to the Master Sec tion where you can choose to process it separately from the non selected frequency spectrum The signal is split so that one part region spectrum or non selected spec trum is sent to the plug ins while the other part can be mixed with this processed signal after the Master Section output Using the Spectrum editor You can use the Spectrum editor in two main operational modes Region copying and filtering Operations tab This is mainly intended for audio restoration applied over brief time ranges Selections can be copied pasted and filtered This type of processing is mainly used to reduce remove or replace unwanted sound artifacts in the audio material and can be carried out with great precision This could be useful for example to replace part of a live recording that contains an unwanted noise such as a mobile phone ring tone with a copy of a similar region of the spectrum that only contains a clean signal In general the spectral Copy Paste combination gives the best results given t
54. This keeps the compressor limiter from unnecessarily limiting the overall signal dynamics Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets WaveLab 7 340 Audio Plug ins 12 10 Steinberg Mono Delay e 1 Steinberg MonoDelay Ys 0 E Delay Feedback Lo filter Hi 250 1 40 0 50 0 20000 0 A a A a This is a mono delay effect using freely specified delay time settings The following parameters are available e Delay Sets the base note value for the delay from 0 1 to 5000 milliseconds e Feedback Sets the number of repeats for the delay e Filter Lo This filter affects the feedback loop of the effect signal and allows you to roll off low frequencies from 10Hz up to 800Hz The button below the knob activates deactivates the filter Filter Hi This filter affects the feedback loop of the effect signal and allows you to roll off high frequencies from 20kHz down to 1 2kHz The button below the knob activates deacti vates the filter e Mix Sets the level balance between the dry signal and the effect If MonoDelay is used as a send effect set this to the maximum value as you can control the dry effect balance with the send Note that the delay can also be controlled from another signal source via the side chain input When the side chain signal exceeds the threshold the delay repeats are silenced When the signal drops below the threshold the delay repeats reappe
55. This opens your file browser to wherever the main Presets folder is currently located Inside this Presets folder each type of preset file has its own folder For ex ample all the presets for the Normalizer are stored within C Users User Namef AppDatal Roaming Steinberg WaveLab 7 Presets Normalizer on Windows 7 When you open the Normalizer dialog and choose a preset via the pop up menu the files in this directory will appear as available presets The reason each preset type has its own dedicated folder is so that WaveLab can locate them automatically when you open the preset pop up menu You can organize your presets into sub folders so they appear as sub menus This can be useful if you wish to organize a lot of presets into your own categories You can continue to nest folders inside one another to build a standard tree structured menu system Below is an example of how this looks for a set of window layout presets lA Saveas dl Restore layout before last applied preset Save current layout as default A Explore presets Editing 2 Film 3 Mastering gt Colin C Mixing gt Ga Philippe B _last_ Ca Tim gt E all meters E meters on one monitor Related topics Scripting 5 1 16 Rendering To Render effects into a temporary or final file you use the Render function note that the Save function from the File menu does not Render The Render function is part of the Master Section and in other app
56. Workspace Normalize Level Stereo to Mono Pan Normalizer Loudness normalizer Fade out DC Remover Loudness Restorer Metapass Plug ins Metapass plug ins are unique to the Batch Processor and require several passes before processing the audio After analyzing the audio a metapass plug in takes into account all other plug ins in the effects chain before processing the audio The following Metapass plug ins are available in the Batch Processor Workspace Meta Normalizer Meta Leveler Related topics Audio Plug ins Offline processing 7 3 0 1 Audio Injector This dialog is exclusive to the Batch Processor Workspace and allows you to insert an Audio File at the beginning and or end of the Audio File being processed The inserted file can also be cross faded with the original Audio File if required You can access this dialog from from the Batch Processor Workspace via Plug ins window gt Monopass Plug ins gt Audiolnjector For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Batch Processing Plug ins WaveLab 7 198 Batch Processing 7 3 0 2 Trimmer This dialog is exclusive to the Batch Processor Workspace and allows you to remove a spec ified duration from Oms to 60s of audio from the head and or tail of an Audio File You can access this dialog from the Batch Processor Workspace via Plug
57. Workspace This allows complex processing to be applied to a list of Audio Files See Batch Processing for more information 14 7 play back with real time effects You can play back Audio Files with real time effects using the Master Section Plug in effects supplied with WaveLab or available from third parties are inserted into the audio signal path via the Master Section effects slots See Master Section and Audio Plug ins for more information 14 8 record new Audio File Use the Record button on the Transport toolbar or select Record from the Transport menu This opens the Record dialog where you can set up a new Audio File and begin to record Once recorded the new file appears in a Wave window where you can edit it or add it to a Montage using Edit gt Create Montage from Audio File See Recording Dialog for more information 14 9 convert the sample rate of an Audio File There are two ways to do this WaveLab 7 390 How dol e From within the Audio File Workspace choose Process gt Convert Sample Rate e You can also convert the sample rate in real time using a resampler plug in such as Crystal Resampler which is included in WaveLab See Crystal Resampler See Render Wave window for more information on applying VST effects Power users may wish to use the facilities available in the Batch Processor Workspace This allows complex processing to be applied to a list of Audio Files See Bat
58. You can also adjust the quality used when processing the pitch bend The quality setting and the selected mode will affect the processing time for this effect This function could be used for creating the classic tape stop effect or for blending the tempo pitch of one track into another for example You can access this dialog from the Audio File Workspace via Process gt Pitch bend For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Adjusting Envelopes 11 1 59 Pitch correction This dialog allows you to detect and change the pitch of a sound without affecting its length e Amount of Shift use these controls to find out the current pitch of the audio and if desired calculate the required shift to match a specific pitch e Method use these controls to adjust the method and quality you wish to use when processing the pitch change You can also choose how the length of the sound is affected by the operation By default this process will not change the length of the sound This tool could be useful for fixing an off key vocal note in a live recording or tuning the pitch of a kick drum sample to fit a particular song for example You can access this dialog from the Audio File Workspace via Process gt Pitch Correc tion WaveLab 7 268 Interface Elements Pitch correction is also available as a ba
59. a file without introducing clipping exceeding OdB for example To change the level enter the desired gain and click Apply You can access this dialog by choosing Process gt Change level in the Audio File Workspace For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio File editing Value editing WaveLab 7 48 WaveLab Concepts 4 6 2 Level envelope This dialog allows you to create a volume envelope which can be applied to a selected range or a whole Audio File This could be useful if you need to even out loud and quiet parts for example You can edit the envelope by e Double clicking on the line to add a point double click on a point to remove it e Selecting multiple points using Shift click allows you to move the selection as a group You can also use the controls to delete or reset points in the envelope Use the envelope smoothing button to toggle the envelope points between a straight polygonal line or a curved path Click Apply to apply the envelope to the audio selection or file You can access this dialog in the Audio File Workspace via Process gt Level envelope For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio File editing Adjusting Envelopes
60. a long comment that wraps onto more than one line WaveLab 7 64 WaveLab Concepts Scripting window contexts It is important to note that certain scripting commands are only available in the Audio File Workspace and others only in the Audio Montage Workspace Others are global meaning you can use them in either Workspace To begin exploring the WaveLab Scripting Language in more detail see the WaveLab Scripting Language A basic scripting example Below is a basic scripting example which uses some WaveLab scripting functions to perform some simple operations on an Audio File in the Audio File Workspace The script first displays information about the Audio File fades in the start and fades out the end of the file and then adds ten markers at 1 second intervals Examine it line by line and read the comments for each operation to see how it works To run this script open an Audio File that is at least 10 seconds long open the Log window via the Utilities menu copy and paste this script into the Script window choose Functions gt Execute Script clear the log window logWindow clear show some information about the active wave file in the log window logWindow printInfo This wave file has activeWave size samples logWindow printInfo Its sample rate is activeWave sampleRate logWindow printInfo It has activeWave numChannels channels Work out how long the file is in
61. a number of copies of a Clip and lay them out at various intervals on the current track of your audio montage You can specify the number of clones to produce and control their placement alignment and spacing You can access this dialog in the Audio Montage Workspace by right clicking on the track s waveform and choosing Repeat clip from the Clip context menu For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio Montages Clip 11 1 65 Recently used files This dialog allows you to view all the files you have recently used in WaveLab You can use it to find a specific file and open it Information on the full path of each file its name and the date it was last accessed is displayed To find a file quickly begin typing the name of the file You can also choose to remove individual files from the list or those that can no longer be located by the application The number of recently opened files remembered by WaveLab is set in the Global Preferences You can access this dialog from all Workspaces via File gt Edit list of recently opened files You can also open it from various menus that list recently used files such as the File gt Favorites files For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related
62. a recording to match other material such as matching the tempo of two drum beats or fitting an audio track to a section of video for example Time stretching is also available as a batch processing plug in in the Batch Processor Workspace In addition Time stretching for a Clip is available from the Focused Clip window Note that for batch processing and Clip processing the modulation envelope option is not available You can access this dialog from the Audio File Workspace by choosing Process gt Time stretching For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Adjusting Envelopes 11 1 94 Track dispatching This dialog allows you to control the output of different tracks in your audio montage The purpose of this dialog is to provide an answer to the question Into which lt b gt output lt b gt channel will the mono channel or the left and right channels be mixed WaveLab 7 11 1 Dialogs 285 For instance in the case of surround output there can be six destinations for a track channel Track allocation is dependent on the mode and how many channels you have selected when defining your Audio Montage settings This in turn defines how many outputs are available from this dialog For playback your soundcard must also have the available number of cor responding channels These are set up in the Au
63. accessed by the current user the default That is each user has his her own private settings e any specific location of your choice This allows you to customize it for your own re quirements e a location relative to the application This allows you to use the application from an USB dongle Default locations By default the main Presets folder is found at e Windows 7 C Users User Name AppData Roaming Steinberg WaveLab 7 Presets e Windows XP C Documents and Settings User Name Application Data Steinberg WaveLab 7 Presets e Mac OS X root User Name Library Prefences WaveLab 7 Presets You can also find this folder by using the Open active settings folder link in the preferences pane This opens your file browser to wherever the main Presets folder is currently located Inside this Presets folder each type of preset file has its own folder For ex ample all the presets for the Normalizer are stored within CA Usersl User Namef AppDatal Roaming Steinberg WaveLab 7 Presets Normalizer on Windows 7 When you open the Normalizer dialog and choose a preset via the pop up menu the files in this directory will appear as available presets The reason each preset type has its own dedicated folder is so that WaveLab can locate them automatically when you open the preset pop up menu You can organize your presets into sub folders so they appear as sub menus This can be useful if you wish to organize a lot of presets into
64. adjust default settings for how WaveLab works with audio Clips and effects plug ins in an audio montage as well as to define backup and display options You can access this dialog from the Audio Montage Workspace via Options gt Audio Mon tage preferences For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Workspaces 11 1 50 MP2 encoding This dialog allows you to specify the encoding options when you save an MP2 Audio File You can select the bit rate and stereo encoding format as well as define other options You can access this dialog via Save as gt Output Format select type MPEG 1 Layer 2 gt Encoding gt Edit and from most places where you can select an output file format such as the Render dialog For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics MP2 files 11 1 51 MP3 attributes This dialog allows you to enter edit the meta tags ID3 tags for an MPEG 3 encoded file You can access this dialog via Edit gt File attributes when you have an MP3 file open in the Audio File Workspace For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics MP3 files 11 1 52 M
65. an overview of the scripting lan guage see ECMAScript Reference You can access this dialog from the Audio Montage Workspace via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Script Note To view trace or log messages when executing scripts that contain the logWin dow function ensure that the Log window is visible and that it s warning filter buttons A 9 are selected For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Scripting ECMAScript Reference Log window 11 1 82 Scripting window Audio File Workspace This window allows you to write and execute scripts in the Audio File Workspace The inbuilt text editor helps you when writing scripts by highlighting the different parts of the script with colors making it more readable A script can also be written in another text editor and loaded via the File menu To run a script from within the script window choose Functions gt Execute script WaveLab 7 278 Interface Elements For a general description of scripting see Scripting For an overview of the scripting lan guage see ECMAScript Reference You can access this dialog from the Audio File Workspace via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Script Note To view trace or log messages when executing scripts that contain the logWin dow function ensure that the Log window is visible and t
66. and full scripting for professional users A totally flexible and customizable GUI store master project custom file sets save multiple Workspace layouts and tabs Menus keyword commands and MIDI shortcuts may all be customized Suite of offline processors provided including effect morphing pitch bend error de tection and correction and high end DIRAC time stretching and pitch correction Full range of different marker types for looping CD creation tagging errors etc Full range of tools Auto split Audio File comparison signal generation programming utilities etc Author and publish podcasts directly from within the application All major Audio File formats are supported including WAV AIFF AU MP3 MP2 Og gVorbis Windows Media 9 AES 3 RIFF64 Sony Wave64 Raw 4 2 Analysis WaveLab provides you with a comprehensive set of tools for analyzing your audio and di agnosing any errors You can view your Audio File in many different ways using the suite of audio meters via its frequency spectrum or even in three dimensions There are also several tools to interrogate any sample of your audio and find any errors or anomalies In WaveLab WaveLab 7 4 2 Analysis 29 you can even compare two Audio Files with the Audio file compare tool and view audio ina Spectrum or Loudness view for greater precision when editing Below you can find links to some of these tools used in WaveLab Most of them can be found in the Analys
67. and recall them for later use Presets Glossary contents 15 59 Processor cores Processor cores Modern computers are often designed with a multi core processor with two or more cores i e independent processors in a single physical package A dual core processor contains two cores and a quad core processor contains four cores with the aim of improving computational performance The performance gains of multi core processors depend on whether the software has been implemented to take advantage of this architecture In WaveLab the multi core approach allows you to simultaneously encode as many files as there are CPU cores for example leading to significant performance increases Batch Conversion Glossary contents 15 60 Quantization Quantization is the process by which measurements are rounded to discrete values In digital audio the continuously varying voltages of an analog signal are quantized to discrete digital values represented in binary numbers In 8 bit audio sample values range from 128 to 127 in 24 bit audio sample values range from 8288608 to 8288607 In analog to digital conversion and compression differences between the actual analog value and the quantized digital value is called quantization error This error is due either to rounding or truncation and can give rise to quantization noise which may be reduced by using dithering techniques Dithering Glossary contents WaveLab 7 15 61 Raw PC
68. are being used by Clips in the current montage along with their location size and last modified date In addition a number of file operations are available e add one or more Audio Files to a montage this will open the Insert Audio Files window when one than one file is selected e replace individual files in a montage this will update any Clip references e rename a file this updates all internal Clip references WaveLab 7 312 Interface Elements e select Clips that are referenced by a specific file e open afile in the Audio File Workspace and view the file in your computer s file browser This window is a useful tool to use when constructing and editing your montage You can access this dialog in the Audio Montage Workspace by choosing Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Files For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Specific tool windows Insert Audio Files 11 3 13 Zoom This specific tool window displays a magnified view of the selected track and allows you to accurately adjust the cross fade point for two adjacent Clips You can adjust the zoom level of the selected track manually shift the Clip s position or allow WaveLab to find the best location to begin a cross fade between two Clips You can adjust the amount that WaveLab will search for the best cross fade position to avoid
69. at that particular point in the file You can access this dialog in the Audio File Workspace via Analysis gt Global Analysis For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Error detection and correction 3D Frequency Analysis 4 2 2 Audio file comparer This analysis tool allows you to compare two Audio Files for differences between them It can create a delta file that contains these differences It can also drop markers at positions where differences are found This can be useful for e Judging the effect of using an equalizer by comparing the file before and after The delta file will show what was added or removed e Check the noise added by a processor e Compare two digitally recorded files to check for dropouts Note Make sure that the two documents you want to compare are open You can access this dialog via Analysis gt File comparator For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics 4 2 3 3D Frequency Analysis This function in WaveLab allows you to view a wave file in both the frequency and time domains Although a wave display time domain tells you a lot about where one sound starts or ends in a file for example it doesn t tell you anything about the timbral co
70. at the bottom pane are e Smart Bypass this opens the Smart bypass dialog which allows you to choose whether to bypass all the active effects in the Effects slots including faders The pur pose of this feature is to allow you to compensate for any level difference introduced by the Master Section Note that this is for playback only not for file rendering 232 Master Section e Reset all removes all the active effects from the Effects slots and sets the master output to OdB e Settings menu provides access to various options e Rendering functions brings up the Render Wave window This allows you to process the Audio File or Audio Montage with the effects you have selected and create a temporary or final Audio File By rendering the effects they become a permanent part of the file rather than using them in real time to test a set of effects on the file The rendering options differ slightly so they are appropriate for Audio Files and Audio Montages e Master section On Off removes the Master section from the signal path Note that this is for playback only not for file rendering Tip When working in the Master Section window the mouse wheel can be used to adjust the master volume You have to point the cursor in the Master Section for this to work Docking Undocking Master Section The Master Section is a shared tool window and can be docked and un docked like other Shared tool windows There are howe
71. audio information in an instrumental take using Mute audio outside regions The Auto Split tool is made up of several pages of dialogs which take you through the process of splitting your audio Note that the sequence of pages is not always the same and depends on the choices you make You can access this dialog in the Audio File Workspace via Tools gt Auto Split For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help WaveLab 7 138 Audio File editing Related topics Split Clip at silences 5 7 3 Signal generator This dialog allows you to generate complex synthesized sounds in mono or stereo You can layer different waveform generators together and if outputting a stereo file adjust different settings for both the left and right channels There are a multitude of settings to adjust the character Source tab frequency Frequency tab and amplitude Level tab of the generated signals To generate a sound follow these basic steps choose whether the file is to be mono or stereo and define the number of samples and bit depth using the Audio properties dialog choose how many layers of signal generators you wish to use up to 64 for each layer use the source tab to choose the type of signal generator you wish to use switch to the frequency tab to define a frequency and its envelope and use the level tab to defin
72. bar e Monitor Playback the meters display the audio output of the Master Section after the dithering section unlike the Master Section s own meter e Monitor Audio Input the meters display the audio input you have chosen in the Audio Streaming Settings This is useful for monitoring audio while recording WaveLab 7 222 Control Window e gt a Monitor File Rendering the meters display what is being written to disk during file rendering taking into account Master Section settings with average minimum and maximum peak values computed After rendering the meter s freeze and remain frozen until you refresh or change the monitor mode Monitor Edit cursor position the meters display static information about the audio beneath the edit cursor Note that the Master Section settings are not taken into account in this mode E Analyze audio selection this allows you to make a selection and have the meters display the average values over the selected range as a static display The Master Section settings are not taken into account in this mode When you change the selection you need to update the meter displays by selecting Refresh selection analysis from the Meters menu or by clicking the Refresh button on the Meters control bar If you have one of the continuous display modes chosen you can also select to freeze the meters at any time using the lll Freeze meters command Using meter windows There can only
73. basic differences between the platforms e Mac On the Mac a tool window is always on top of all other windows and a floating window remains visible even if its dependent Workspace is not active or is minimized If WaveLab is no longer the active application all its floating windows are hidden e Windows A floating window is hidden when its dependent Workspace is minimized or covered by another window If WaveLab is no longer the active application all its independent floating windows are hidden Saving a windows location Once you have your tools windows command bars and tab groups set up the way you wish to work you can save their location in the current Workspace by choosing Workspace gt Layout gt Save as and saving a preset or you can save the current layout as the default layout by choosing Workspace gt Layout gt Save current layout as default If you wish to save the location of all Workspaces then use the global option by choosing Global gt General Window Layout gt Save as and saving a preset or you can save the current layout as the default layout by choosing Global gt General Window Layout gt Save current layout as default Related topics Workspaces Shared tool windows Specific tool windows 3 2 Adjusting Envelopes At various places in WaveLab envelopes are used to constrain the way effects are expressed Some offline processes such as Level Envelope use envelopes to adjust an effect over ti
74. before writing a file to disk To optimize performance all batch process calculations are performed and stored in RAM rather than using temporary files WaveLab 7 7 1 Specific tool windows 185 Understanding the signal path To understand how the signal flow of your plug in chain is processed you can look closely at the audio signal path display which consists of a number of colored arrows in columns and rows Each arrow represents how each plug in processes any audio passed into it Each vertical column represents a processing pass Use the What s this arrow on that column for more information Re using a batch Once you have created and run a batch file you can re use it by e Choosing Edit gt Reset the status of all files and then running your batch again This will process all of the files in the batch e Alternatively you can selectively re run a batch process on certain files by right clicking on the Files to process pane choosing Reset status or Remove and then running your batch again Related topics Specific tool windows Shared tool windows Batch Processing Plug ins Batch Conversion Batch Renaming 7 1 Specific tool windows Specific tool windows are windows that are specific to the current Workspace They perform useful tasks in the active Workspace They can be docked and un docked and saved in your custom layouts Batch Processing Workspace specific tool windows The following specific to
75. by choosing Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Error Correction e gt 4 Error start and end markers these markers are used to highlight errors such as clicks They can also be saved in an Audio File Workspace file by choosing the corresponding preference in Audio file editing prefences e gt 4 Correction start and end markers these markers are used to highlight corrections done on regions previously marked as errors They can also be saved in an Audio File Workspace file by choosing the corresponding preference in Audio file editing preferences Related topics Markers Marker Window Error detection and correction 4 5 Metering WaveLab contains a variety of audio meters to help in monitoring and analyzing audio Meters can be used to monitor audio during playback rendering recording and also to analyze a specific selection of audio There are seven different audio meters in WaveLab each with its own separate window The meters are accessed via the Meters menu the Shared Tool windows menu or from the Meters control bar Monitor Modes You can choose the audio source and the mode for displaying information in the meters You can access the following monitoring functions from the Meters menu or via the Meters command bar e Monitor Playback the meters display the audio output of the Master Section after the dithering section unlike the Master Section s own meter amp Monitor Audio Input the meters display t
76. by selecting Settings from the Functions menu or clicking the 4 tool icon Note that you can apply your settings without closing the dialog by clicking the Apply button WaveLab 7 5 3 Metering 115 If you want to store your settings for later use or assign them to a Preset button select Save as from the pop up menu in the lower part of the dialog and specify a name for the preset in the file dialog that appears Now you can choose to make the settings instantly available for selection in the FFT Meter window by using the Assign to preset button submenu on the pop up menu e When you are finished click OK to close the dialog Selecting Spectrometer presets If you have assigned your settings to the Preset buttons in the Settings dialog you can quickly switch between different level scales and display modes by clicking one of the Preset icons 1 5 or selecting the desired preset from the Options pop up menu Exporting FFT data as ASCII text When using the Spectrometer in off line mode Monitor Edit cursor Position or Analyze audio election mode you can export the displayed FFT data as a text file by selecting Export FFT data as ASCII from the Options pop up menu The resulting text file can then be imported into applications that allow graph plotting from text files Microsoft Excel for example The Spectrometer can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can
77. can access this dialog from the Audio Montage Workspace s CD window by choosing Functions gt CD Wizard or by clicking on the icon For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics WaveLab 7 11 1 Dialogs 247 CD Authoring CDs and DVDs Write Audio CD ISRC 11 1 19 Copy audio information This dialog allows you to copy information about the name and location of the selected Audio File including any selection information and cursor position The information is copied to the clipboard and can be pasted into an external text application This can be a useful feature to use when making notes on a particular session or when you need accurate file path selection information when writing a script You can access this dialog in both the Audio File and Audio Montage Workspaces via Edit gt Copy Audio information For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help 11 1 20 Customize Commands This dialog allows you to customize your own shortcuts for WaveLab It shows a list of already assigned shortcuts for WaveLab commands and menu options Each shortcut is restricted to a specific context so you can re use the same shortcut combination in different places The exception is the Master Section where all shortc
78. choose from e Add Mix The Clip is inserted without affecting any Clips that already exist on the destination track The exception is if an inserted audio Clip partially overlaps another audio Clip in which case a cross fade is created in the overlapping zone this is only the case if the Auto crossfade mode is activated e Add Mix amp bind right Clips track When the Clip is inserted all Clips to the right of it on the same track are moved to the right to make room for the inserted Clip Add Mix amp bind right Clips global When the Clip is inserted all Clips to the right of it on all tracks are moved to the right to make room for the inserted Clip Split Insert This option is only available if the insertion point is within an existing Clip audio tracks only When the Clip is inserted the existing Clip is split and the right section is moved to the right to make room for the inserted Clip Other Clips are not affected Split Insert amp bind right Clips track As Split Insert but other Clips to the right on the same track are also moved accordingly audio tracks only Split Insert amp bind right Clips global As Split Insert but other Clips to the right on all tracks are also moved accordingly audio tracks only Replace selected range Only available if there is a selection range on the destina tion track The Clip with the selection range will be split at the selection range edges the inserted Cli
79. clicking the tool icon Note that you can apply your settings without closing the dialog by clicking the Apply button If you want to store your settings for later use or assign them to a Preset button select Save as from the pop up menu in the lower part of the dialog and specify a name for the preset in the file dialog that appears Now you can choose to make the settings instantly available for selection in the FFT Meter window by using the Assign to preset button submenu on the pop up menu e When you are finished click OK to close the dialog Selecting Spectrometer presets If you have assigned your settings to the Preset buttons in the Settings dialog you can quickly switch between different level scales and display modes by clicking one of the Preset icons 1 5 or selecting the desired preset from the Options pop up menu WaveLab 7 156 Audio Montages Exporting FFT data as ASCII text When using the Spectrometer in off line mode Monitor Edit cursor Position or Analyze audio election mode you can export the displayed FFT data as a text file by selecting Export FFT data as ASCII from the Options pop up menu The resulting text file can then be imported into applications that allow graph plotting from text files Microsoft Excel for example The Spectrometer can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in
80. dialog Pitch bend Pitch correction Pitch quantize Playback speed Podcast options Text format Repeat Clip Recently used files Recording Dialog Record create marker Rename File dialog Render ASIO input to file Render Montage window Render Wave window Loudness envelope options Sample attributes Modified files dialog Save Audio File dialog Select where and how Audio Files will be saved Save Batch Processor Save File As Save Preset As Save picture of active window Scripting window Audio Montage Workspace Scripting window Audio File Workspace Definition of shortcut s Signal generator WaveLab 7 238 Interface Elements Silence Generator Smart bypass Special File Format Spectrogram options Surround Panner Create Document Template Template List Dialog Time Format dialog Time stretching Track dispatching Value Format File attributes Audio File editing preferences Write Audio CD WMA encoding Workspace layout Write Data CD DVD Loop Tweaker Zoom factor 11 1 1 Insert link This dialog allows you to insert a hyperlink to a web page in your podcast episode description In Title enter the text that will form the active link In URL enter the Uniform Resource Locator i e web address you wish it to open when clicked Remember to include the full URL for example http www personalwebsite com index html You can access this dialog from the Podcast Workspace via Episode in the
81. each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Marker types 11 1 29 Configure external tools This dialog allows you to configure WaveLab to work with external applications You can pass command line arguments to the external applications so that they can process the current file folder you are working on or even the WaveLab s settings folder This function can be useful if you wish to edit an Audio File in another application or wish to compress all your settings files into a backup zip file for example Note that an external tool only works within the Workspace in which it is defined This is by design so that each type of Workspace can have its own external toolkit To define an external tool you need to e Give the command a title e Specify the path to the application s executable file e Choose which arguments you wish to pass to the external application e Additionally you can specify an initial folder to direct the external application to e Select how you wish WaveLab to behave before the external tool is launched Once you have defined an external tool in this way you can run it by selecting its title from the Tools menu from within its Workspace You can access this dialog by choosing Tools gt Configure external tools For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question
82. effect e Color Generates additional differences between the channels to increase the stereo effect e Mono button Switches the output to mono to check for possible unwanted coloring of the sound which sometimes can occur when creating an artificial stereo image Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets WaveLab 7 12 22 Steinberg Multiband Compressor 353 12 22 Steinberg Multiband Compressor e L Steinberg MultibandCompressor 4s 00 E Th Ratio 15 6 4 1 17 4 AT O Attack Release Attack Release 11 0 500 1 0 IO OT auto auto The MultibandCompressor allows a signal to be split into a maximum of four frequency bands each with its own freely adjustable compressor characteristic The signal is processed on the basis of the settings that you have made in the Frequency Band and Compressor sections You can specify the level bandwidth and compressor characteristics for each band by using the various controls The Frequency Band editor The Frequency Band editor in the upper half of the panel is where you set the width of the frequency bands as well as their level after compression Two value scales and a number of handles are available The vertical value scale to the left shows the input gain level of each frequency band The horizontal scale shows the available frequency range The handles provided in the Frequency Band editor can be dragged with the mouse You
83. either be e Processed separately by the Master Section plug ins The non selected spectrum can either be bypassed or sent to the Master Section e Bypassed This removes the selected spectrum region from the Audio File The non selected spectrum can either be routed to the Master Section input or the Master Sec tion output e Sent to Master Section output The non selected spectrum can either be bypassed or sent to the Master Section input If the latter is selected it will be mixed with the selected spectrum region at the Master Section output You can access this window by choosing Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Spec trum Editor WaveLab 7 126 Audio File editing For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics The Spectrum display Spectrum Processing Modes Spectrogram options Spectrometer 5 5 8 1 Spectrum Processing Modes When applying processing to a spectrum region in the Spectrum Editor you can use a variety of different modes Damp This is used to attenuate the level of a region The Gain parameter specifies the level of the attenuation it is also possible to set positive gain values i e to boost the frequencies in the region Three filter types are available to perform the damping e Bandpass filter All frequencies in the region are equally attenuated e Low pass filter
84. feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Metadata window Audio File Format Dialog OGG encoding WaveLab 7 256 Interface Elements Ogg Vorbis files 11 1 35 Global analysis This dialog allows you to perform advanced analysis on your audio to identify areas with spec ified properties It can be used to find problem areas such as glitches or clipped samples or just to check general information such as the pitch of a sound How it works When you analyze a section of an Audio File WaveLab scans it and extracts information which it displays in the dialog It also pin points sections of the file that meet specific characteristics for example sections being very loud or almost silent You can then browse between these points set markers or zoom in on them Types of analysis On most of the tabs you will find settings determining exactly how the analysis will be performed Each tab focuses on a particular analysis area e Peaks this tab is for finding individual samples with very high decibel values e Loudness this tab is for finding sections that are perceived by the human ear as louder or weaker in volume WaveLab uses an accurate method RMS Root Mean Square to measure a consecutive section of samples and then average their value Pitch this tab is used for finding the exact average pitch of a section of audio The method works best on mon
85. files in your disk e drag files folders to a different location in the file list pane To move multiple files folders hold down Shift while selecting the files folders you wish to move e drag file folders over a folder icon to move them into that directory e to add a new folder click on the 4 folder icon e to edit the name of a file folder double click on its title Burning your disk Once you are happy with your disk layout you can write it to a disk or disk image e select a media type from the list of media devices This will determine the maximum size and type of medium you will be writing to whether it be CD DVD Blu ray Disk or an ISO image of any of these You can change the media type at any stage WaveLab 7 382 Utilities e enter the name that you want your disk to display when it is mounted as a data volume e to write your disk click write CD DVD icon This opens the write CD DVD dialog which enables you to burn your data disk to an ISO image or to an optical disk using a connected CD DVD Blu ray Disk writer For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Write Audio CD Blu ray Disk ISO image 13 4 Batch Conversion This dialog allows you to convert the file format of a group of Audio Files This could be useful for example if you have a large number of Audio Files that you wis
86. freely drag the window around by clicking and dragging on the window s title header bar To dock the window again drag it to any location where you are visually prompted to release the window Around the edges and the top of the Workspace is where this normally occurs Most windows can be docked horizontally or vertically but some can only be docked in one direction because of the nature of their contents To dock the window again you can also double click in the title bar Tip To move a window and prevent it from docking hold down Ctrl Command before you begin to undock the window This will avoid the window docking again and allow you to place it anywhere Once you begin to drag you can release Ctrl Command About Shared tool windows Shared tool windows such as the meters and the Master Section are slightly different to other tool windows as there is only ever one of them available and it can only appear in one Workspace at a time As such when you open a shared tool window from the menus in another Workspace it undocks and moves from its original Workspace An empty tab container with a vertical title bar will remain in its previous Workspace To retrieve a window again from another Workspace use the button at the top left of these empty containers For example if you have the VU Meter displayed in the Audio Montage WaveLab 7 3 6 Double clicking 11 Workspace and you wish to display it in the Audio File Workspac
87. from an Audio CD its track concept makes is similair to an Audio CD this is why creating a DVD A is almost like creating a CD with WaveLab s Audio Montage It is worth noting that throughout WaveLab where CD is mentioned for example in messages one can usually substitute DVD A To create a DVD Audio disk follow these basic steps e Create an audio montage you need at least one audio montage in order to create a DVD A You can import any currently open ones or add them as mon files Note that the Audio Montage must have DVD tracks defined with red track markers Add Montage s choose File gt Add Audio Montage s from the DVD Audio win dow to add one or more montages to your DVD Audio Each montage will then be displayed along with its details in the DVD Audio window You can drag the montages vertically to determine the track order Montages can also be added by dragging mon tage files directly into the DVD_Audio track listing window Choose Options from the DVD Audio window choose Options gt Options to open DVD Audio options dialog You can then define settings for your DVD A including its name and volume information details whether it will be played back on PAL or NTSC and the duration and effects transitions that included images will use Images to be included can be laid out in a picture track in your audio montage or a single default image can be chosen If a default image is used it will displayed at the begin
88. from the floating window s menu Window gt Place in Control window You can also simply drag a tab from one tab group to another to move it there Once docked in the Control Window you can move a window around by dragging it to any other free space in the control window To undock a window from the Control Window either e right click on the tab title bar or the window itself and choose Set as independent floating window from the context menu or e click on the button at the top right of the Control Window For more information on docking undocking windows see Docking windows Related topics Specific tool windows Shared tool windows Metering Master Section Master Project Scripting Tab Groups 9 1 Specific tool windows Specific tool windows are windows that are specific to the current Workspace They perform useful tasks in the active Workspace They can be docked and un docked and saved in your custom layouts Control Window specific tool window The following specific tool window is available within the Control Window Master Project WaveLab 7 9 2 Shared tool windows 213 Related topics About Tool Windows Docking windows 9 2 Shared tool windows Shared tool windows are windows that can only exist in one place at a time and are shared between Workspaces They perform useful tasks in relationship to the active Workspace They can be docked and un docked and saved in your custom layouts S
89. function is useful if you want to speed up or slow down a recording to match other material such as matching the tempo of two drum beats or fitting an audio track to a section of video for example Time stretching is also available as a batch processing plug in in the Batch Processor Workspace In addition Time stretching for a Clip is available from the Focused Clip window Note that for batch processing and Clip processing the modulation envelope option is not available You can access this dialog from the Audio File Workspace by choosing Process gt Time stretching For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics WaveLab 7 5 1 Offline processing 97 Adjusting Envelopes 5 1 8 Loop Tweaker This dialog allows you to refine a region of audio to loop seamlessly The Loop Tweaker can just be used to tweak an existing loop selection so that it loops perfectly or you can also use it to create a loop from material which does not naturally repeat To use the Loop Tweaker you must first have a loop defined using a pair of loop markers gt 4 The Loop Tweaker consists of the following tabs Loop points adjustment This is a visualization of the beginning and end of the waveform between the loop markers You use this dialog to manually refine a loop selection by dragging on the waveform left right or using
90. header to sort the list in ascending or descending order based on the values in that column Clicking on any row of the list will move the main window s view to show the selected Clip To change a value double click in a cell to begin editing to align the Clip to an exact time for instance Clips may be dragged into new positions in the list From this list of Clips you can use the input fields and controls to e Start playback It is possible to start playback at the selected Clip position with or without pre roll by clicking on the leftmost icons Click on bbz in the audition column to play the montage from that Clip s position with a pre roll Click on the right hand button to playback the montage exactly from the start of the Clip Edit a Clips s name start end length comments edit the name of the Clip its start end time position and any comments Lock a Clips s position select the checkbox to lock the Clip This prevents it from being accidentally edited or dragged to a new position Change Gain use this control to increase decrease the gain of the Clip Double click in the cell to edit the value Mute select this to mute the Clip Its color changes in the track view and it is no longer audible during playback WaveLab 7 11 3 Specific tool windows 315 A wide range of Clip selection features Clip functions and Clip display options are available from the Clips menu Use What s This help for information
91. hold the button down This means that with just one click you can access the history of a document from any Workspace From the same menu you can also create a new document or open the file selector box If you click on the icon of the active workspace you don t need to hold the button down Alternatively you can right click to show a menu instantly Related topics Workspaces Docking windows 3 14 Tab Groups A tab group is a region within a Workspace that contains windows that can be activated by a tab each with its own content and title bar Only one tab can be active at a time WaveLab 7 20 Using the interface In an editing Workspace a tab group contains one or more documents e g Audio Files In the Control Window a tab group contains one or more shared tool windows In WaveLab it is possible to create more than one tab group To activate a tab simply click on the title bar of the tab you wish to work on Tip Because it can be useful to quickly display multiple files side by side the Audio File Workspace has a Tile mode that can be activated from the Tabs menu To make this possible a single tab group must exist Using Tabs for editing audio Tabs have a variety of useful behaviors depending on the type of window contained by the tab group Tabs that display meters and other tool windows can be dragged and moved around in the Control window Tabs that contain Audio Files in the Audio File Workspace symbolize a wh
92. icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Adjusting Envelopes 4 6 8 Loop Tweaker This dialog allows you to refine a region of audio to loop seamlessly The Loop Tweaker can just be used to tweak an existing loop selection so that it loops perfectly or you can also use it to create a loop from material which does not naturally repeat To use the Loop Tweaker you must first have a loop defined using a pair of loop markers 4 The Loop Tweaker consists of the following tabs Loop points adjustment This is a visualization of the beginning and end of the waveform between the loop markers You use this dialog to manually refine a loop selection by dragging on the waveform left right or using the automatic search buttons to find the nearest good loop point The aim is to align the waveforms so they meet in the middle at a zero crossing point with the waveforms matching as closely as possible being in phase When you adjust your loop start and end points within the dialog the start and end loop markers in the main waveform window will adjust accordingly Note that this movement may or may not be visible depending on the amount you move the markers and the zoom factor you have selected It is helpful to have the transport looped during playback so you can hear the difference when you adjust the loop markers within the dialog Use the Display options to adjust how the Loop Tweaker waveform is visualized You can also use t
93. ins window gt Monopass Plug ins gt Trimmer For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Batch Processing Plug ins 7 3 0 3 Resizer This dialog is exclusive to the Batch Processor Workspace and allows you to adjust the duration of an Audio File You can set a desired length of file and choose whether to insert silence after the end of the chosen duration You can access this dialog from the Batch Processor Workspace via Plug ins window gt Monopass Plug ins gt Resizer For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Batch Processing Plug ins 7 3 0 4 Fade In Out This dialog is exclusive to the Batch Processor Workspace and allows you to fade the be ginning Fade In or the end Fade Out of a batch audio file You can choose the length and shape of the fade its duration and the gain you wish it to start end at You can access the fade out dialog from Batch Processing Workspace gt Plug ins win dow gt Multipass Plug ins gt Fade Out You can access the fade in dialog from the Batch Processor Workspace via Plug ins win dow gt Monopass Plug ins gt Fade In For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For
94. ins window gt Multipass Plug ins gt Loudness Nor malizer For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Loudness DC Offset Loudness distribution 7 1 2 12 DC Remover This dialog is exclusive to the Batch Processor Workspace and allows you to eliminate any DC Offset from an Audio File WaveLab 7 7 1 Specific tool windows 193 It can be useful to apply this plug in first in a batch before other plug ins to avoid further processing a file containing any DC Offset For example an Audio File that has a DC offset will not be at its loudest possible volume when normalized because the offset consumes headroom You can access this dialog from the Batch Processor Workspace via Plug ins window gt Multipass Plug ins gt DC Remover For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Batch Processing Plug ins DC Offset 7 1 2 13 Loudness Restorer This dialog is exclusive to the Batch Processor Workspace and allows you to restore the loudness of an Audio File The Loudness Restorer plug in must be used as a pair the first instance is used to read the audio signal the second instance uses this information to adjust the loudness or peak level of the file To use the plug in 1 P
95. keys to change the value by one unit at a time Use the page up and page down keys to change the value by several units Use the home and end keys to jump to the maximum and minimum values Use the left and right arrow keys to move from one part to another Click on the small button arrows the spin controls to change the value Move the mouse cursor over the desired section Now use the mouse wheel to change the value without clicking The hovered section will be highlighted when the wheel spins Move the mouse cursor over the part you wish to change Click and drag up and down to change the value Tip Right clicking on the edit control may display a context menu where additional functions are available Related topics Sliders WaveLab 7 3 17 Workspaces 23 3 17 Workspaces A Workspace is a window that provides an editing and playback environment for a particular audio document type Each type of Workspace presents the functions related to the specific file types it is made for this reduces clutter in the user interface In WaveLab there is a Workspace for each main type of file to edit e Audio File Workspace for viewing and editing Audio Files See Audio File editing e Audio Montage Workspace for assembling and editing audio montages See Audio Montages 8 Batch Processing allows you to process a list of Audio Files with offline effects VST plug ins and Master Section presets Each file is proc
96. left top blue clip audio chan nel or the right bottom red clip audio channel the color of the speaker lines shows which channel is selected for viewing and editing If you are viewing the left top channel you will see a blue square indicating the position of the audio The other gray square which is mirrored horizontally represents the other channel Click this to view and edit this channel instead it will be shown in red and red speaker lines indicate the speaker levels WaveLab 7 282 Interface Elements Each track can have its own Surround Pan window and you can have several of these open at the same time if you need to To pan the sound click the blue square and drag it to the desired position This pans the audio of the left top channel the other channel is automatically mirrored horizontally If you right click in the graphical display a pop up menu appears allowing you to choose from a number of positioning presets This can be a quick way to pan a signal fully left front for example This dialog is closely related to surround panning envelopes Indeed you can automate surround panning for individual Clips using envelopes These envelopes can be selected from the Focused Clip editor panel You can choose to view either the Left Right Front Rear or the LFE curve This is slightly different from using regular volume and pan envelopes The important point to understand internally there is a single surrou
97. levels of the two channels However if you activate the option Show Sum and Subtraction on the Functions menu or click the icon the upper half of the Oscilloscope shows the sum of the two channels and the lower half shows the subtraction Making settings By opening the Settings dialog you can adjust the display colors and choose to activate Auto zoom or not With Auto zoom activated the display is optimized so that the highest level reaches the top of the display at all times The Settings dialog can be accessed through the Functions gt Settings menu or by using the icon The Oscilloscope can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces lt can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace It can also be docked in the Control Window Related topics Metering 5 6 4 Bit Meter The Bit Meter shows the resolution or the number of bits used in the digital audio being monitored Normally the maximum number of bits in an Audio File is the same as the resolution WaveLab 7 5 6 Shared tool windows 131 of the Audio File e g a 16 bit Audio File shows that up to 16 bits are used but sometimes this is not the case As soon as you perform any kind of real time processing on an Audio File the audio data is treated at a much higher resolution 32 bit floating point to allow for pristine audio quality Examples of such processing include level adjustments effects the
98. list of Items then click on Y above the Description field The description of the feed content is a mandatory field For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Podcasts WaveLab 7 11 1 Dialogs 239 11 1 2 Align Clips This dialog allows you to align Clips along the focused track at specific intervals with or without a space between them You must select at least two Clips to use this function You can access this dialog in the Audio Montage Workspace s Clip window via Functions gt Align selected clips of focused track or via its icon For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Clips 11 1 3 Recording channels This dialog allows you to select which input channels you want to record from If you have an audio card with multiple inputs you can record up to eight channels simultaneously You can access this dialog via Record gt Set input For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Recording Dialog 11 1 4 Audio CD Report This dialog allows you to generate a detailed report about the active audio CD This report includes a full track list
99. mark icon For more information see Getting Help WaveLab 7 254 Interface Elements 11 1 30 Folder Preferences dialog This dialog allows you to set the folders where you prefer to save and open files as well as options about how to automatically update them or not while using WaveLab Select a folder category from the list and then either type in the path to the directory or browse to select the folder via a standard file dialog Each Workspace has its own set of preferred folders which are set from the Folder Prefer ences dialog from that Workspace If you open this dialog from the Control Window you can set the preferred folders for all Workspaces To use this dialog first select a folder category from the left and then define its path and options on the right A note on temporary files this folder category specifies where WaveLab should store its temporary files These are used for operations such as Undo If you have multiple drives you should allocate each temporary folder to a unique physical drive WaveLab then selects the source and destination folders on different physical drives which speeds up file operations considerably You can access this dialog by choosing Options gt Folders For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help 11 1 31 Frequency range This dialog allows you to adjust the range o
100. meter window shows the peak level and average loudness in the following way e The Peak Level meters display the peak levels of each channel graphically and numeri cally By default the meter segments and numerical peak values are displayed in green for low levels yellow for levels between 6dB and 2dB and red for levels above 2dB You can change both the colors and the range boundaries if you wish via the Level Pan Meter Settings dialog This can be accessed through the Functions gt Settings menu or by using the 4 icon The VU Volume Unit meters measure the average loudness RMS of each channel These meters have a built in inertia evening out loudness variations over a user defined time span If you are monitoring playback or audio input you will also note two vertical lines following each VU meter bar seemingly trying to reach the current RMS value These lines indicate the average of the most recent minimum RMS values left line and the average of the most recent maximum RMS values right line To the left the difference between the minimum and maximum average values is displayed the level value in brackets this gives you an overview of the dynamic range of the audio material If you are monitoring real time audio playback or input the maximum peak and loud ness values are displayed numerically to the right of the meter bars Numbers in brack ets to the right of the Maximum Peak values indicate the number of succe
101. mixing of two or more files etc In fact the only time when a 16 bit file is played back at 16 bit resolution is if you play it without any fades or effects and with the Master Faders set to 0 00 no level adjustment You can try this out for yourself by playing back a 16 bit Audio File and viewing the Bit Meter as soon as you adjust the Master Faders note that 24 bits are used and the inter indicator is lit more on this below How to read the Bit Meter e The innermost meters closest to the bit scale show the number of bits in use You can adjust this display in the Settings dialog e The outer meters are history meters showing how many bits were recently in use You can adjust the hold time in the Settings dialog e The over segment indicates clipping similar to a clip indicator If the below segment is lit there are more than 24 bits The bit meter will show the 24 higher bits and the below segment indicates the existence of extra lower bits Note that audio is always processed with more than 24 bits internally If the inter segment is lit this indicates that the audio data cannot really be expressed on a regular 24 bit scale there are floating point values in between bits thus the label inter This is typically the case if you apply effects thus the inter segment allows you to differentiate processed from non processed 24 bit PCM files When to use the Bit Meter e To check whether dithering is nece
102. more data storage than a DVD although a recent development has pushed the storage capacity to 500GB on a single disc by using 20 layers In addition to optical improvements Blu ray Disks feature improvements in data encoding that further increase their capacity Data CD DVD Glossary contents 15 14 CD Frame In a Red Book CD DA the time format is commonly measured in minutes seconds and frames mm ss ff where one frame corresponds to one sector or 1 75th of a second of stereo sound In editing and audio extraction the frame is the smallest addressable time interval for an audio CD so that track start and end positions can only be defined in steps of 1 75 second duration Red Book CD DA Glossary contents 15 15 CD Pre emphasis CD pre emphasis refers to process designed to increase within a band of frequencies the magnitude of some usually higher frequencies compared to the magnitude of other usually lower frequencies in order to improve the overall signal to noise ratio Pre emphasis aims to minimize the adverse effects of attenuation distortion or the saturation of recording media in subsequent parts of the system When carried out properly pre emphasis enables a received signal to more closely resemble the original or desired signal and produces fewer bit errors Pre emphasis is commonly used in telecommunications digital audio recording record cut ting and in FM broadcasting transmissions The presence of pre emphasi
103. o e 274 11 1 73 Sample attributes oa ere e a 274 11 1 74 Modified files dialog lt lt o a 274 11 1 75 Save Audio File dialog ons ouaaa a 275 11 1 76 Select where and how Audio Files will be saved 275 11 1 77 Save Batch Processor co eek rr Rew a 276 114 1 78 Save FUR AS e cacera Rk Ge a Raa REE O A 276 11179 Saw Fresa AS oo hae oe PSG wy he eR a a 276 11 1 80 Save picture of active window 2 o eee eee 277 11 1 81 Scripting window Audio Montage Workspace 277 11 1 82 Scripting window Audio File Workspace 277 11 1 83 Definition of shoricutls 2 02 00 00542 000400 ada waa 278 11 1 84 Signal generator anaua oe ek See es ee ee ES 279 11 1 85 Silence Generator ce a ee 280 11 186 Smat AAA 280 11 187 Special File Format o o ce cecak Ok 2 ia awaa A fl 280 11 1 88 Spectrogram options cr AA 281 11 1 89 Surround Panner lt a eee Re a 281 11 1 90 Create Document Template 00 5 05564 ae we ee 104000 282 11 191 Template List Dialog AAA 283 111 92 Tinie Fame Ogee os IDA ee ee es 283 11 193 Time stretching oa a ai ra a a A 284 11 194 Tackdispatchinig cras ai aua a a a A a a 284 11 195 Value Formal ea ma soe thi Pee e aiia 285 11 196 Mle AFIBUTSS ea ea A i d aia aaa A 285 11 1 97 Audio File editing preferences o ooo 286 111308 Write Audio CD 4 as aa A A a aa eaa 286 11 1 99 WMA encoding e 1 a AS AA wae 287 11 1 100
104. of attenuation can degrade the signal unnecessarily Auto Button This button enables Auto mode for the buzz detection circuit In this mode the buzz detection is continually calculated and a slow drift in the buzz fundamental frequency will be automatically followed This mode is useful for material with a time varying buzz component In this mode the removal filters follow the Detected frequency Freeze Button This button enables Freeze mode for the buzz detection circuit In this mode the buzz fundamental is fixed to the frequency shown in the touch pad window This mode is useful for material with fluctuating buzz level but with a constant buzz frequency In this instance Auto mode would suffer when the buzz level drops and would typically re hunt for a different buzz fundamental In this mode the removal filters follow the Nominal frequency Detect Display This display indicates the degree of detection that the buzz detection circuit has achieved WaveLab 7 334 Audio Plug ins e Output Level Meter dB The output meter is designed to give exactly 1dB per LED for the top 18dB of dynamic range and 2dB per LED thereafter There is a peak hold feature that holds the highest peak helping to give a better impression of the working dynamic range e Output Gain Trim Touch Pad dB This allows you to reduce the output level by up to 12dB Dithering is applied after output gain control so it may be necessary to reduce this
105. of bits in use You can adjust this display in the Settings dialog e The outer meters are history meters showing how many bits were recently in use You can adjust the hold time in the Settings dialog e The over segment indicates clipping similar to a clip indicator If the below segment is lit there are more than 24 bits The bit meter will show the 24 higher bits and the below segment indicates the existence of extra lower bits Note that audio is always processed with more than 24 bits internally If the inter segment is lit this indicates that the audio data cannot really be expressed on a regular 24 bit scale there are floating point values in between bits thus the label inter This is typically the case if you apply effects thus the inter segment allows you to differentiate processed from non processed 24 bit PCM files When to use the Bit Meter e To check whether dithering is necessary or not As a rule if you re playing back or mixing down to 16 bits and the Bit Meter shows that more than 16 bits are used you should apply dithering e To see the actual resolution of an Audio File For example even though a file is in 24 bit format only 16 bits may be used Or a 32 bit file may only use 24 bits in this case the below segment would not be lit For this purpose the Bit Meter is best used in Analyze selection mode e To see whether a zeroed plug in still affects your signal or whether a pl
106. on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Batch Processing Plug ins 7 1 2 5 Instructor This dialog is exclusive to the Batch Processor Workspace and is a special utility plug in that allows you to instruct the next plug in in the batch with information about the audio it needs to process This is useful for situations where you want to use plug ins that require an analysis stage In effect the Instructor plug in turns a monopass plug in into a dual pass one Some Monopass plugins such as Denoisers or DeBuzzer need to learn about the audio they are to process before they can begin processing correctly The Instructor plugin can help in this situation since it can teach the next plug in in the audio chain about the audio it is about to process The Instructor plugin must be used as a pair 1 The first instance replicates the start of the audio stream This means the next plug in in the chain will receive the start of the audio stream twice WaveLab 7 190 Batch Processing 2 The second instance of the plug in comes after the plugin being instructed It simply cuts out the extra audio injected by the first instance of the Instructor plug in This means for example that the Denoiser plug in has time to sufficiently analyze the audio stream before the second stream start is injected The badly processed first part of the stream is skipped by the second inst
107. on or off individually and the windows can float or be docked See Specific tool windows e A set of Shared tool windows The shared tools offered vary according to the Workspace their display can be turned on or off individually and the windows can float or be docked See Shared tool windows Tip To switch easily between different Workspaces use the floating Switcher window Related topics Audio File editing Audio Montages Podcasts Control Window Batch Processing Customize Commands Specific tool windows Shared tool windows Command bars Tab Groups Docking windows Switcher window 3 18 Zooming and scrolling In WaveLab you can use several mouse and keyboard shortcuts for scrolling and zooming in the Audio File and Audio Montage Workspaces Scrolling with the Mousewheel e With the cursor in the wave window you can scroll the view horizontally using the mouse wheel Zooming with the Mousewheel WaveLab 7 3 18 Zooming and scrolling 25 e With the cursor in the wave window hold down Ctrl Command while rotating the mouse wheel The view will zoom horizontally if you hold down Shift the view will zoom vertically Activating the zoom tool e Activate the zoom tool by holding down Ctrl Command and click on the waveform Ctri Command must be pressed first Zooming with the Mouse e Holding your cursor over the Time Ruler and moving the mouse up and down also zooms the view horizontally
108. one after the other and the action is performed when the last key has been pressed Key stroke sequences give you a very large choice of combinations which is useful in an application with a large feature set There are however possible pitfalls if for example Shortcut 1 is defined with the sequence Control D Control E Shortcut 2 is defined with the sequence Control D The application watches for key strokes and when Control D is pressed Shortcut 2 won t be triggered because Control D is also used in a longer sequence the application can t know if it should wait for Control E or not Note A few very basic shortcuts cannot be redefined If this is the case the relevant edit field is disabled On the Mac only the first key of native menus can be displayed MIDI event sequences This is the same as with keyboard sequences but using MIDI events sent from an external MIDI device instead Keywords Unless you use them frequently key sequences are not always easy to remember but key words normally are In WaveLab you can define any unique keyword to trigger a command Type the keyword in the dedicated Keyword field in the Definition of shortcut s dialog and click OK To trigger the command enter the keyword in the Keyword command bar found in all Workspace and press Return This command bar keeps a list of recent commands to im prove performance Keywords are useful in conjunction with presets because a specific p
109. or by using the icon The Oscilloscope can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces lt can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace It can also be docked in the Control Window Related topics Metering 6 1 4 Bit Meter The Bit Meter shows the resolution or the number of bits used in the digital audio being monitored Normally the maximum number of bits in an Audio File is the same as the resolution of the Audio File e g a 16 bit Audio File shows that up to 16 bits are used but sometimes this is not the case As soon as you perform any kind of real time processing on an Audio File the audio data is treated at a much higher resolution 32 bit floating point to allow for pristine audio quality Examples of such processing include level adjustments effects the mixing of two or more files etc In fact the only time when a 16 bit file is played back at 16 bit resolution is if you play it without any fades or effects and with the Master Faders set to 0 00 no level adjustment You can try this out for yourself by playing back a 16 bit Audio File and viewing the Bit Meter as soon as you adjust the Master Faders note that 24 bits are used and the inter indicator is lit more on this below How to read the Bit Meter e The innermost meters closest to the bit scale show the number of bits in use You can adjust this display in the Settings dialog WaveLab 7 6 1 M
110. or optionally change the folder where it is stored The file suffix may be selected from the drop down list All open documents that have a reference to the file are updated Associated peak and marker files are also updated This function is particularly useful when renaming Audio Files If you rename an Audio File outside WaveLab using your computer s file browser the next time you open an Audio Montage with a reference to that file WaveLab will not find it To avoid this use this dialog to rename files and all references to the file from the open Audio Montage are automatically updated to use the newly named file You can access this dialog by choosing File gt Rename For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics 11 1 69 Render ASIO input to file This dialog allows you to record an Audio File directly to disk from an ASIO input The audio is collected from the audio input not from the Audio File or Montage The ASIO input audio is rendered through the Master Section and any of its plug ins and saved as a file as when rendering normally This is in fact another way to record When you record normally no plug ins are used but more options are possible On a Mac this function should work without ASIO Note It is impossible for WaveLab to know when the input should stop so it is possible to record for
111. pan meters show the peak level difference between the channels graphically and numerically Note that the pan meters are two sided the level bars can go to the left or right indicating which channel is the loudest The two sides are shown in different colors which can be changed via the Settings dialog as explained previously The lower pan meters show the average difference in loudness between the channels in a similar way This gives you a visual indication of whether a stereo recording is properly centered for example If you are monitoring real time audio playback or input the maximum balance differ ence value peak and loudness for each channel is displayed numerically to the left and right of the meter bars The VU meter can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Window Related topics Metering 11 2 3 Oscilloscope The Oscilloscope offers a highly magnified view of the waveform around the playback cursor position If you are analyzing a stereo file the Oscilloscope normally shows the separate levels of the two channels However if you activate the option Show Sum and Subtraction on the Functions menu or click the icon the upper half of the Oscilloscope shows the sum of the two channels and the lower half shows the subtraction WaveLab 7 11 2 Shared tool windows 293 Making sett
112. parameters are available e Width Controls the width of the stereo enhancement i e the apparent stereo separation Turn clockwise to increase the enhancement e Delay Controls the delay differences between left and right channels to further increase the stereo effect e Color Generates additional differences between the channels to increase the stereo enhance ment e Mono button Switches the output to mono to check for possible unwanted coloring of the sound which sometimes can occur when enhancing the stereo image Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets WaveLab 7 12 30 Steinberg Studio Chorus 365 12 30 Steinberg Studio Chorus e 1 Steinberg StudioChorus Width Spatial 5 The StudioChorus plug in is a two stage chorus effect which adds short delays to the signal and pitch modulates the delayed signals to produce a doubling effect The two separate stages of chorus modulation are completely independent and are processed serially cas caded For each stage the following parameters are available e Rate This is where you specify the base note value which may be set freely with the Rate knob e Width Determines the extent of the chorus effect Higher settings produce a more pronounced effect e Spatial Sets the stereo width of the effect Turn clockwise for a wider stereo effect e Mix Sets the level balance between the dry signal and the effe
113. phase cancellation issues and also view the envelope points of the Clips Mouse operations are identical to those in the main Clip view You can access this window in the Audio Montage Workspace via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Zoom For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio Montages 11 3 14 CD This specific tool window brings together all the functions for creating an audio CD or DVD A within WaveLab It displays a list of CD tracks along with information about each track You can edit each track and the CD s playback properties as well as access functions to check its conformity to Red Book standards add and edit CD text add UPC EAN codes generate a CD report and burn the CD There are also controls to preview skipping between each track and a number of other options including the ability to choose the Audio in Pause mode to determine whether gaps between track markers are replaced with silence the normal default or if they contain sound WaveLab 7 11 3 Specific tool windows 313 Adding tracks To create an audio CD in WaveLab you must at least have a CD start and end marker pair You can generate these automatically from audio Clips in the montage using the CD Wizard or by adding track markers manually For more information on creating a CD or DVD A see Authoring CDs and DVD
114. ported by the WaveLab scripting system These are available in any scripting context but are not WaveLab specific When scripting for the Audio File Workspace for example using the Scripting window Audio File Workspace there are specific additional functions that allow you to perform editing commands For a list of these WaveLab specific scripting commands and functions see WaveLab Scripting Language Tip Some basic scripting examples are included below so you can see the scripting syntax in context These scripts will work if you copy paste and execute them in a script window Supported ECMAScript subset The Global Object Values e NaN e Infinity e undefined e Math Functions e eval x e parselnt string radix parseFloat string isNaN number isFinite number decodeURI encodedURI decodeURIComponent encodedURIComponent encodeURI uri encodeURIComponent uriComponent WaveLab 7 72 WaveLab Concepts Objects e Object Function Array String e Boolean e Number e Date RegExp Error Examples Test if a value is not a number var isNumber isNaN this is a string Print the result in the log window logWindow printInfo isNumber Traces true because it is a String Convert a string to a number var numStr 2 345 var num parseFloat numStr Print the result in the log window logWindow printInfo num Encode a string into an internet valid ASCII S
115. reverb decays quicker in the high and low frequency range than in the mid range Lowering the level percentage causes high frequencies to decay quicker Values above 100 cause high frequencies to decay more slowly than the mid range frequencies Envelope Amount Determines how much the envelope attack and release controls affect the reverb itself Lower values have a more subtle effect while higher values lead to a more drastic sound WaveLab 7 12 26 Steinberg Roomworks 361 Attack The envelope settings in RoomWorks control how the reverb will follow the dynamics of the input signal in a fashion similar to a noise gate or downward expander Attack determines how long it takes for the reverb to reach full volume after a signal peak in milliseconds This is similar to a pre delay but the reverb is ramping up instead of starting all at once Release Determines how long after a signal peak the reverb can be heard before being cut off similar to a gate s release time Output Mix Determines the balance of dry unprocessed and wet processed signal When RoomWorks is used as an insert for an FX channel you will most likely want to set this to 100 or use the Send button Wet only button This button defeats the mix parameter setting the effect to 100 wet or affected signal This button should normally be pressed when RoomWorks is being used as a send effect for an FX or group channel Efficiency Determines ho
116. s name Scroll the waveform drag the cursor to the left or right sides of the waveform area to display the region before or after Mix to Mono by holding down Control Alt Command Alt while dragging the file to a new tab you can quickly mix a stereo file to mono Convert from Mono to Stereo by holding down Control Alt Command Alt while dragging the file to a new tab you can quickly convert a mono file to stereo Tip When aligning some objects in the waveform area labeled prompts will help you to snap to other locations in the waveform for example the end points of Audio Files markers or cursors Audio Montage Workspace Drag objects within the Audio Montage Workspace to perform the following functions e Paste an Audio File drag a document s title bar tab or document button onto the Montage area of another file to copy and paste its audio content You can also drag a compatible file directly from the File Browser the operating system s file browser or from another application WaveLab 7 14 Using the interface e Delete Move a marker drag the marker along the time ruler to change its position Drag while pressing the Shift key to create a copy of this marker Drag above the time ruler to delete the marker e Create a marker from selected text drop text that you have selected in an external application onto the time ruler to create a generic marker there The text becomes the marker
117. s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio File editing 11 1 98 Write Audio CD This dialog allows you to write an audio CD to either a DDP image or a physical CD ROM disk using your computer s CD R or DVD R drive or burn an audio CD from an existing DDP Image The dialog has controls for refreshing the list of attached devices opening the CD DVD drive and erasing a CD RW DVD RW disk or the contents of the DDP Image directory You can also choose to bypass audio from passing through the Master Section before it is written If you choose to burn a DDP image the dialog allows you to select the directory to output the DDP files as well as the option to write a table of contents and cus tomer information Choosing a CD R or DVD R drive displays choices for setting the speed number of copies and other options Important note for Mac OSX users When using the CD R DVD R drive on Apple OSX computers for importing or burning it is important to note the following If you insert a optical CD or DVD disk in the drive while the drive is not selected in WaveLab for import or burning WaveLab will not be able to see the drive The disk drive is taken over by other applications under Mac OSX and is not seen by WaveLab when this happens To avoid this occurring make sure there is no disk in the drive when opening any CD window within WaveLab WaveLab 7 11 1 Dialogs 287 For an explanation of e
118. same but one is inverted e Generally for a good mix the meter should show a value between O and 1 Unlike the main Phasescope the Phase Correlation meter is also available in Analyze audio selection mode showing an average value for the selected range Changing settings You can define display colors peak hold time and the resolution or number of samples to display from the Functions gt Settings menu The Phasescope meter can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Mon tage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Window Related topics Metering 11 2 2 VU Meter The vu meter is used to display the peak and average loudness decibel level of your Audio File It also displays the pan or the balance between the left and right channels in a stereo file The upper part of the level pan meter window shows the peak level and average loudness in the following way e The Peak Level meters display the peak levels of each channel graphically and numeri cally By default the meter segments and numerical peak values are displayed in green for low levels yellow for levels between 6dB and 2dB and red for levels above 2dB You can change both the colors and the range boundaries if you wish via the Level Pan Meter Settings dialog This can be accessed through the Functions gt Settings menu or by using the icon WaveLab 7 292 Inter
119. specify a region for these marker types to become available Some types of markers can be added during recording via the recording dialog You can also create a marker by dragging a selection of text from a text application to a Time Ruler Moving markers Once placed markers can be dragged into a new position in the Waveform windows If you hover the mouse cursor over a marker the exact time position is displayed Dragging the marker with the left mouse button held down causes the time display to be updated as you drag You can also move a marker by editing its time entry in the Marker window Removing markers In the Waveform window click on the head of the marker you want to delete Drag the marker vertically out of the wave window a delete symbol is shown as confirmation You can also use the Delete selected markers function from the Marker Window Functions menu WaveLab 7 36 WaveLab Concepts Using markers for editing and playback Once you have defined one or more markers in an audio montage or Audio File you can use them to e Control playback you can access various commands to start at stop at loop be tween and skip markers during playback via the Transport menu These can also be accessed from the Transport toolbar e Define a selection you can use markers to help you make selections in a waveform These can be accessed by various selection commands in the Edit gt Select menu You can also access it from
120. text display at the bottom display how full your new disk is You can enter a name for your disk and change the disk file structure before writing your data to an ISO image or writeable optical disk Note Although you can prepare a disk in any format the types of physical disk you can burn will be limited by the optical drive connected to your computer If you do not have a WaveLab 7 13 3 Data CD DVD 381 Blu ray Disk writer connected for example you will not be able to write a Blu ray Disk you may have prepared However you can still save it as an ISO Disk image and transfer it for remote burning To prepare a data disk follow these steps Adding files Add files and folders to the disk by e dragging them directly from your computer s file browser e dragging a file from any Workspace by either dragging it by its title bar tab or using the document button e choosing File gt Special gt Add to Data CD DVD from any of the editing Workspaces to add the currently focused file Removing files To remove files from the file structure e select the files folders you wish to remove and click on the red cross icon To remove a group of files hold down Shift while selecting the files folders to remove Please note that this does not delete the files from the computer only a reference to them e to remove all files folders from the layout choose Reset Editing the file structure To edit the arrangement of the
121. the Audio Range dialog About importing and saving loop markers There is an important point to consider when importing files with loops into WaveLab Both Wave and AIFF file formats can store limited information about markers e g loop points in the Audio File but WaveLab can store much more information such as extended marker types and comments in external mrk files that are independent of file formats Because loop markers may be stored in two ways there is a potential risk for conflict e When you import a file that has never been used in WaveLab before and which contains loops the loops are imported and displayed as loop markers e When you then save the file in AIFF or Wave format the loop points are stored both as part of the actual file so that other applications can read them and in the mrk file for WaveLab e When you open a file that has been used in WaveLab before loop tags that were orig inally in the file before you used it in WaveLab are ignored Only the loop information in the mrk file is used Using markers in the Audio Montage Workspace There are some additional marker functions that are specific to the Audio Montage Workspace which allow you to bind selected markers to individual Clips These functions are useful as they allow you to freely move Clips about and perform editing functions without fear of loosing the exact position of a marker These additional marker functions are located in the
122. the Batch Processor Workspace via Plug ins window gt Metapass Plug ins gt Meta Normalizer For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Batch Processing Plug ins 7 1 2 15 Meta Leveler This dialog is exclusive to the Batch Processor Workspace and allows you to match the level of a batch of files The core purpose of this plug in is to to apply the same gain to all files while being certain that a specific peak level will never be exceeded in any file The unique gain that you wish to apply is possibly reduced by the plug in once all files in the batch have been analyzed and prior to actually applying the gain across the batch You can access this dialog from the Batch Processor Workspace via Plug ins window gt Metapass Plug ins gt Meta Leveler For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Batch Processing Plug ins 7 2 Shared tool windows Shared tool windows are windows that can only exist in one place at a time and are shared between Workspaces They perform useful tasks in the active Workspace They can be docked and un docked and saved in your custom layouts Shared tool windows Background task monitor Log window Related topics About Tool Windows WaveLab 7 7
123. the De Noiser more reactive to the noise component move the fader up The noise contour will displace upwards showing more noise component in the detection circuit The default setting is for the noise contour to lie just below the peaks of the signal Making the detection circuit more sensitive to noise will decrease the signal component possibly pushing the contour up towards the peaks of the signal In this case it is likely that processing artifacts will be heard as the noise removal circuit will be acting on the signal component as well as the noise component Adapt Button This button enables Adapt mode for the noise detection circuit In this mode the noise fingerprint is continually calculated and updated This mode is useful for material with a time varying noise component WaveLab 7 330 Audio Plug ins e Freeze Button This button enables Freeze mode for the noise detection circuit In this mode the noise fingerprint is calculated once when the Freeze button is pressed This mode is useful for material with a constant noise component and would typically be sampled when the signal is absent and only the noise component is present In Button This button enables the noise removal processing It allows glitch less comparisons with and without the noise reduction It is important to note that with this button off i e the noise removal processing is disabled the noise detection circuit is still enabled and the grap
124. the Workspace or the Control Window Related topics Metering Spectroscope 6 1 7 Wavescope The Wavescope meter displays a real time waveform drawing of the audio signal being mon itored It can be useful when recording or rendering a file if Monitor File rendering mode is active Making settings You can adjust settings for the display via the Wavescope Settings dialog This can be accessed via Functions gt Settings menu or by using the icon Here you can set various color options for the background grid and waveform display as well as setting the waveform rendering speed and vertical zoom If Clear waveform when reaching right of pane is checked the waveform display is cleared each time the cursor reaches the right end of the display If unchecked the previous waveform is overwritten Tip Wavescope is a useful meter for visualizing audio during recording The Wavescope meter can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Win dow Related topics Metering 6 2 Tools In the Audio Montage Workspace WaveLab provides you with some tools for assisting you in editing your montages This page contains links to these tools which can be accessed from the Tools menu WaveLab 7 6 2 Tools 157 Related topics Meta normalizer Configure external tools 6 2 1 Meta normalizer This dia
125. the audio and then render any level changes required You must have a stereo selection in a stereo file to apply this process You can access this dialog from the Audio File Workspace via Process gt Pan Normalizer This function is also available as a batch processing plug in You can access it from the Batch Processor Workspace via Plug ins window gt Multipass Plug ins gt Pan Normalizer For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics 5 1 13 Pitch bend This dialog allows you to change the pitch of a sound over time Note that changing the pitch using Pitch bend will affect its duration unless length preservation is activated Using an envelope you can draw the curve you wish the pitch to follow The pitch offset is displayed along the vertical ruler of the envelope and the range the envelope effects can be adjusted using the spin control Positive pitch values produce sounds with a higher pitch and of shorter length negative values produce sounds with a lower pitch and of longer length If length preservation is activated you can choose the algorithm that is used to perform the pitch bend operation Depending on the type of audio material you are processing choose the appropriate mode For more information on the different modes use the What s This tool You can also adjust the quality used when processi
126. the automatic search buttons to find the nearest good loop point The aim is to align the waveforms so they meet in the middle at a zero crossing point with the waveforms matching as closely as possible being in phase When you adjust your loop start and end points within the dialog the start and end loop markers in the main waveform window will adjust accordingly Note that this movement may or may not be visible depending on the amount you move the markers and the zoom factor you have selected It is helpful to have the transport looped during playback so you can hear the difference when you adjust the loop markers within the dialog Use the Display options to adjust how the Loop Tweaker waveform is visualized You can also use the temporary memory buttons to capture a number of different loop candidates and audition them one by one Note that if you are not using a cross fade or post cross fade you do not need to click Apply when just tweaking loop points You can also leave this dialog window open and manually adjust the position of the markers in the main waveform windows if you need to make large adjustments Cross fade This tab allows you to apply a cross fade at the end of a loop by mixing a copy of the beginning of the loop with it This can be useful to smooth the transition between the end of a loop and its beginning especially when using material that doesn t naturally loop Use the envelope drag points or value sliders to adjust t
127. the current Workspace You can also open it by dragging it onto an empty tabbed group or onto the tab bar of a tabbed group You can also drag the file over a wave view to insert it at a given point When you drag a file over a wave view a beam is displayed so as to clearly display the insertion point When browsing Audio Files the file browser also has a region panel When you select an Audio File its related regions are listed in this panel You can then drag the region from the list to insert only that part of the audio Double clicking on a region has the effect of opening the file in the Workspace and selecting that region You can access this dialog via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt File Browser For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Specific tool windows 11 3 2 Spectrum editor This specific tool window allows you to select and perform operations on an Audio File via its audio spectrum It uses high quality linear phase filters to process a spectrum selection both in the time do main and in the frequency domain This can be useful for advanced audio restoration tasks like removing noise from a specific source in a recording for example Making and editing selections Spectrum editing can only be performed when a waveform is first displayed in Spectrum display mode and when a spectrum
128. the list in ascending or descending order based on the values in that column You can also use the Filter menu to toggle which types of markers are displayed in the list From this list of markers you can use the fields controls and menus to e Create a new marker at the playback head position click on a marker icon at the top of the window or choose a marker type from the Insert menu to drop a marker at the current playhead location Create a pair of markers from a selection make a selection in the waveform and then click on a pair of marker icons at the top of the window or choose a Create region command from the Insert menu to drop a pair of markers at either side of the current selection Start playback It is possible to start playback at the selected marker position with or without pre roll by clicking on the leftmost icons Click on bbz in the audition column to play the wave from that marker position with a pre roll Click on the right hand button to play the wave exactly from the marker position WaveLab 7 122 Audio File editing e Change marker types You can change a marker type by left clicking on its icon and choosing another marker type from the pop up list that appears e Edit a marker s name time comments double click in a cell to edit a value to align the marker to an exact time for instance You can edit the name of the marker its time position and any comments e Lock a marker s posit
129. to filter the types of messages displayed Note When using the logWindow method you need to have the Show informal notes button selected for the messages to be visible If no log messages are displayed make sure all the toggle buttons are selected A 0 WaveLab 7 384 Utilities You can access this window via Workspace gt Shared tool windows gt Log It is available in the Control Window Audio File Workspace and Audio Montage Workspace You can also access this window in the Control Window via Utilities gt Log For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Control Window Specific tool windows Scripting 13 7 Background task monitor This specific tool window allows you to view all background rendering processes that are in progress You can adjust the priority with which they are processed pause or cancel them It is useful if you have a number of lengthy processes underway and want to free up some processing power to focus on editing You can either lower the priority of a task so it does not use as much of the computer processor s capacity or pause the task temporarily You can access this window by choosing Workspace gt Shared tool windows gt Back ground task monitor It is available in the Control Window Audio File Workspace and Audio Montage Workspace You can also access this w
130. used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace lt can also be docked in the Control Window Related topics Metering WaveLab 7 9 3 Metering 225 9 3 4 Bit Meter The Bit Meter shows the resolution or the number of bits used in the digital audio being monitored Normally the maximum number of bits in an Audio File is the same as the resolution of the Audio File e g a 16 bit Audio File shows that up to 16 bits are used but sometimes this is not the case As soon as you perform any kind of real time processing on an Audio File the audio data is treated at a much higher resolution 32 bit floating point to allow for pristine audio quality Examples of such processing include level adjustments effects the mixing of two or more files etc In fact the only time when a 16 bit file is played back at 16 bit resolution is if you play it without any fades or effects and with the Master Faders set to 0 00 no level adjustment You can try this out for yourself by playing back a 16 bit Audio File and viewing the Bit Meter as soon as you adjust the Master Faders note that 24 bits are used and the inter indicator is lit more on this below How to read the Bit Meter e The innermost meters closest to the bit scale show the number of bits in use You can adjust this display in the Settings dialog e The outer meters are history meters showing how many bits were recently in use You can adjust the hold time in
131. value by a small amount to avoid clipping Quick Start Guide for the De Buzzer 1 Find the nominal frequency Start with Sensitivity and Attenuation controls at the default positions 90 and 48dB respectively 2 If you know the rough frequency of the nominal select that frequency using either the knob or by typing into the touch pad 3 In Auto mode allow the detector time to drift towards the actual fundamental The detect display will indicate confidence of hum detection Auto mode should be used if the fundamental drifts over time 4 Freeze mode should be used to select a specific frequency that might be variable in strength Fine Adjust which forces freeze mode can be used to increase the resolution of selecting the fundamental 5 If you are still having difficulty finding the fundamental try using the Tone control 6 The Hum mode removes harmonics up to 800 Hz If you can hear harmonics that are higher in frequency try selecting Buzz mode which will remove harmonics up to 4000Hz If there are no harmonics above 800Hz be sure to use Hum mode to preserve as much original audio as possible 7 Also in order to cause as little damage to the audio as possible back off the attenuation until you can just hear the buzz then increase it a little until the buzz is inaudible 8 Now reduce the sensitivity until the buzz is just inaudible Tip You can use the high resolution FFT in WaveLab to help identify the exact fundame
132. visualizing audio during recording The Wavescope meter can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Win dow Related topics Metering WaveLab 7 220 Control Window 9 2 8 Timecode This shared tool window displays the current time of the playback head or the cursor position if not playing back in the timecode format currently selected in the Time Format dialog The current time can be in a range of standard SMPTE formats CD or DVD specific formats or a custom one see Time Format dialog The most common use for this window is for working with video or film You can use it to display the playback head position of the current Audio File ina SMPTE format to frame level resolution i e hours minutes seconds frames You can also use it to display CD frames minutes seconds frames when you are authoring CD or DVDs You can access this window by choosing Workspace gt Shared tool windows gt Time code It is available in the Control Window Audio File Workspace and Audio Montage Workspace For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Time Format dialog CD Frame SMPTE timecode Authoring CDs and DVDs 9 2 9 Background task monitor This specific tool window allows you to vi
133. waveform Audio File Montage Workspace dou ble click on the horizontal zoom wheel to reset the zoom to display the whole Audio File e Set zoom to default value Audio File Montage Workspace double click on the vertical zoom wheel to reset the zoom to its default value e Center the waveform Audio File Workspace double click on the vertical scroll bar to center the waveform around the horizontal axis WaveLab 7 12 Using the interface e Start playback Audio File Montage Workspace double click in the time line to start playback from that point In addition to these specific examples in various places throughout WaveLab double clicking can be used to begin editing certain values Depending on the context the type of editing triggered will vary In most list views for example double clicking in a cell will allow you to edit its value Related topics Tab Groups Select clicking 3 7 Dragging operations WaveLab makes much use of drag and drop techniques to perform various operations some of which can t be performed otherwise These are referred to as drag operations in this documentation To drag an object press and hold down the left mouse button while over the object and drag it to the desired destination Drop the object by releasing the button Many types of objects can be dragged between different source and destination locations including files text Clips the playback head and markers Tip T
134. well as various types of noise Furthermore you can set the frequency and amplitude of the generated signal As soon as you add the TestGenerator as an effect on an audio track and activate it a signal is generated You can then activate recording as usual to record an Audio File according to the signal specifications Waveforms and noise section Allows you to set the basis for the signal generated by the waveform generator You can select between four basic waveforms sine triangle square and sawtooth and three types of noise white pink and brownian Frequency section Allows you to set the frequency of the generated signal You can select one of the preset values 100 440 1000 or 10000Hz or use the slider to set a value between 1Hz and 20000Hz Gain section Allows you to set the amplitude of the signal The higher the value up to OdB the stronger the signal You can select one of the preset values e g 20dB or use the slider to set a value between 81 and OdB Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets 12 33 UV22HR Dithering e Post Steinberg UV22HR Ys 00 The UV22HR is a high quality dithering plug in based on an advanced algorithm developed by Apogee It allows extended information from 32 bit floating point or 24 bit integer audio to be encoded into a standard medium such as CD MP3 or AAC without loss of sonic integrity No pre auditions or settings are necessar
135. wish to Normalize add a fade out to and dither down to 16 bit 44 1kHz You could save this as a batch process file and then each time you update the original higher sample rate files you can re run the batch Creating and running a batch process To set up and run a batch follow these steps e Create a new batch processor file use the Special gt Add to Batch Processor menu entry in another Workspace or simply use the File gt New command You can save the newly created batch at any time for later reuse Add files to the batch from within the Batch processor Workspace either use the File Browser the Edit gt Add files from folder command drag a file directly from another Workspace or your computer s file browser or right click in the Files to pro cess pane and choose Insert all open Audio Files e Add plug ins and effects drag any plug in processors effects you wish from the Batch Processing Plug ins to the Audio Plug in chain pane Right click on any effect and select Edit to adjust its settings and drag the plug ins to change the order in which they are processed Define an output folder from the Output tab define a location for the resulting files In addition you can select Renaming to change the name of output files according toa number of conditions The resulting names are previewed in the File to process pane Choose a file format use the Format tab to define the file format that files are saved
136. you wish to create a new file or render the file in place When the file is rendering you will see a progress bar in the status bar In WaveLab you can also view this Progress bar in the Background tasks window a shared tool window that can be set to float independently This allows you to monitor the progress of rendering pause and if necessary cancel the rendering process Rendering tips When you are new to the rendering process in WaveLab there are a few things to note e when rendering a file with the default option Bypass Master Section on resulting Audio File selected in the Render dialog the Master Section will be bypassed completely when the new file has finished rendering If this option is not selected you will hear the Master Section effects being played back on top of the newly rendered effects You can check if the Master Section has been bypassed by checking the status of the Y Play through Master Section button which is located at the bottom right hand corner of the status bar the Master Section s Bypass switch affects playback only So even if you can t hear effects when you are playing back your audio any applied effects are still rendered the Effect on off switch for each individual plug in affects both playback and Rendering if you are working with an Audio File montage that contains lots of effects and or tracks and you experience playback problems it can be useful to mix down a copy of your WaveL
137. 11 The Focused Clip window can be docked or floated You can reveal or hide the focused Clip window in the Audio Montage Workspace via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Focused clip For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Clip Audio Streaming Settings Customize Commands Audio Montage Colors 11 3 11 Snapshots This dialog enables you to save a number of views of your montage You can then recall a particular view or snapshot at any time When you save a snapshot you capture the current zoom factor the current cursor position the current scroll position and the current time range displayed You can name each snapshot and update an existing snapshot too To recall a snapshot just click on its title in the list This restores all of its view settings You can also choose to recall all or just one of its view properties by clicking the appropriate icon You can access this dialog in the Audio Montage Workspace via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Snapshots For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio Montages 11 3 12 File This specific tool window helps you to manage files that are used in the current Audio Mon tage It displays all current files that
138. 16 bits may be used Or a 32 bit file may only use 24 bits in this case the below segment would not be lit For this purpose the Bit Meter is best used in Analyze selection mode To see whether a zeroed plug in still affects your signal or whether a plug in uses 16 bit internal processing or more generally to detect any signal modifier stage in the audio chain between reading and playing To adjust the Bit Meter settings select Settings from the Options pop up menu or by using the 4 icon The Bit meter can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Window Related topics Metering Dithering 11 25 Spectroscope The Spectroscope shows a continuous graphical representation of the frequency spectrum analyzed into 60 separate frequency bands represented as vertical bars Peak levels are shown as a short horizontal lines above the corresponding band indicating recent peak maximum values The Spectroscope offers a quick spectrum overview For a more detailed analysis of the audio spectrum use the Spectrometer The Spectroscope can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used ei ther as a floating window or docked in the Workspace lt can also be docked in the Control Window Related topics Metering Spectrometer 11 2 6 Spectrometer The Spectrom
139. 2 Adjusting Envelopes o ooo e a 3 3 COMINO bars ca A A de e 3 4 OI MAIS 220 ar o eee o a 3 5 Docking ss A eee Sh ae a eS ee A Ae a 3 6 Ce SERD ib SE a ee Ra eS wee 3 7 Dragging operations gt ea oe REESE EES DEKE AA 3 8 Playback SCM s i a a eae ek a ace BA Po AA ad 3 9 SUECIA lt lt 45 4024 keke ee eee eee AAA ae SNC os ee es a a ees k ea ee Os a S11 Ot Ss Foc oS oh ee ek Eh a Re he eee A A Die SOM a tee Ge nee od eh wee OS ew ae 38 13 SOME window e eo OO eS OEE DOO EA EGG MOE Oe Tab Groups is ca aco wa Le eS Co ee eR Rie SAD Transport controls o o ccsa dora a Pa eee eo A o O A och se aa bie ee Ral eek Ae Reba he as DIT WOODS oo er ee e RA ae ae 3 18 Zooming and scrolling as s saccra cea a E a WaveLab Concepts 4 1 Features Overview ote A aa Se gee hg a 4 2 PUGS 2 28 os cash des eho Sse SSE RSA ee Oe oad 4 2 1 A ap eG te a aant wa De 4g eae ee wed 4 2 2 Audio file comparer 0 oo e 4 2 3 3D PESQUISE Analysis e co s so AI ee aa 4 2 4 Loudness distribution aaoo oaa 4 3 Authoring CDs and DVDs sa ocos oco cre woes 4 baa we SS a8 4 4 WAITS oa a i ean oe ae Sa a ale ae ee a a a 4 4 1 Kiket OE tbe Shee sd AR be ee Sees g 4 5 WSO soti a a eS ee EE Se 1 OE Re SR WEE A OES 4 5 1 ANON occa rate Oh fel NS 4 5 2 a AI 4 5 3 o IA 4 5 4 BEMETEN ete e A a eae ADE a es 4 5 5 Phases io i ha sie ara eR Roe ek Qe ee as 4 5 6 Spectrometer gt scac ao ed debe ae ee wh o
140. 402 Headroom ea he a Ee ae oe ee ea a a E a 402 A ele rd age dca g re Brahe eeu oe Bak hota ee eee aed 402 ORO o Sie te ke a esse ee hd Sit A ae ai Aca ws Secon ee Stas Ge Se 402 A o kk aa Seca le nS HP A a al a ey A ae eS BROS ae 403 LOUCNESS cone eG ee ig ce wu Ve Sider eae ba 403 WS a Slt eat a Sok aan fe ad cw ae e A Ee a an ep ia 403 Media Catalog Number coco rr Bea ale Ss 404 a are 2 tind aE ales fe ele A a ot ON A a a TN ah ce hE ate 404 MIDI NS eh eo de ah a a de Ee ae Ae GE S 404 MIKINO oa ase de ek eR RO e ede a Be ae ca a ee A 404 Mobile phone Audio Files lt lt o eo ee 404 MPZ A a a ee a ee ee ee ee a a 405 WUE NSE i peti ye a rt Hn ae eed be ak A E 405 Non destructive editing 0 ooo e e 405 A E ea atte a Ae ee an A a 405 MESC a i hens ods ehh eee 5 edhe 6a Bea ek Gol aa 406 Ogg Vorbe MeS lt arda ee a i EO Sh ce A e 406 OSOE o a aa aa e le ae ek See ee A ee a E 406 PALSECAM a ei aaua a EEN 406 PaRa aa eee ge ere ee E ee ages a eae ace O tage 407 Peak laval a ie ee ea a alae ee a ee a ea a a 407 a 2 eo a ee SP eee ee es oe ee 407 Pre roll and Post roll a aaa ooo ee 408 FIESTA foe eA ee PS A ee OL 408 ae COIs oo a coc dea Ae fhe e a eas eee ee ee A ee 408 IIS e 20050 de he aie ll Ri en al Hea il e Shed TS Hsin a 408 Raw POM TIES c hr be ah A ek SA eae a E o a 409 Red Book GD DA a ce A RRA a eR Re AA we ER Ss 409 Regular Expressigne 22 cacad cea a ee ee ee ee 409 PPOs
141. 5 5 Specific tool windows gt kG A Mews eas Se A ee eee 117 5 5 1 Basic Audo GD e aa ae OE ar BM Se A AS Ga 117 5 5 2 Error detection and correction ooo o 119 5 5 3 a A wai la a k na ea bw ed Gee ig 120 5 5 4 Marker Window sa a oo eee 121 5 5 5 Metadata window lt lt a e ee ee raa 122 5 5 6 Sample attributes be eae ok a eles 123 5 5 7 Scripting window Audio File Workspace 123 5 5 8 IU editor s rie e dd De ae GA ae 124 5 5 8 1 Spectrum Processing Modes o o 126 5 6 Shared tool windows coso crecer rr A Oo 127 5 6 1 PREBESCODE gt a Dae A A A a 128 5 6 2 SUNETE A RA OE Wade nce Ae al Ss Ss 129 5 6 3 OSUNA we Be a we a Rae 130 5 6 4 EIEMBTES oc ca ob ene de tae ee Sd che fe hoes Goren be Bee dee ankle aed 130 5 6 5 ja kk 6 ka oa rra reker naker oe A 132 5 6 6 o 6 f 456 oe OSs See ees d a 132 5 6 7 WHAVSSCONG cena phe a ool eee es A p a 133 5 6 8 TDW e828 de aes eee ar Blade Se aed acts aye hee a 134 5 6 9 Background task monitor ci aca ed eR eS 134 5610 WMG os ro coda a eee da Ss 135 5 7 TOD Loi ee EA Sa ee ae ee A A 136 5 7 1 Error detection and correction o ooo eee 136 5 7 2 Ato OM Saran Shee dS RES ede eS Eee ee 137 5 7 3 Signal generator coc a AAA la a a A 138 5 7 4 DTMF Generator eo ae es he ee ae ee 138 5 8 Peak PIGS y a kore a Re Sa ea Ae a pal a aS 139 6 Audio Montages 141 6 1 o o 6 ee Oe dt ae oe a a we ee ee Ge 149 6 1 1 VU
142. 64 file format If this is activated the standard Wave file format switches automatically to the RF64 file format as soon as the file size ex ceeds 2GB without any performance loss or interruption This is especially useful when recording very long sessions as there is no need to worry about file size limit apart from disk space availability An RF64 file uses the wav extension but it can only be opened with an application that supports the RF64 standard WAV files Glossary contents 15 65 RMS RMS Root Mean Square can be used as a measurement of intensity of sound or AC voltage etc over a period of time The RMS measurement calculates a practical average value of all the points on a waveform as a single number over a variable period that could be 1 ms 20 ms or 1 hour RMS is often a good basis for determining an equal level when equalizing Clip volumes producing more natural results than using Peak levels since RMS offers a more realistic measure of the perceived loudness of a sound Glossary contents 15 66 Sample rate The Sample Rate or sampling frequency is the number of samples per second used to store a sound High sample rates are better able to approximate the original continuous waveform but require more storage space Glossary contents 15 67 SMPTE timecode The Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers devised a code to synchro nize time between devices the SMPTE time code The time cod
143. Browser This dialog allows you to browse files directly from within WaveLab rather than using your operating system s file browser It provides you with all the standard browsing functions such as List and Icon views as well as additional controls to audition Audio Files and any marker defined regions You can use it to open or insert an entire file or a specific region of a file by dragging and releasing the file in the location you wish to insert the file In the Audio Montage Workspace you can also choose to only view certain types of WaveLab specific files The File Browser can be very useful in speeding up the process of auditioning a long list of sound files lt can also be used to drag to windows such as Data CD DVD including dragging folders The playback functions Play file gt Once you have selected a file in the File Browser list you can audition it by clicking Play in the File Browser s toolbar Click again to stop Auto play You can also have files play back automatically as soon as they are selected To do this activate Auto Play mode Tip To audition a long list of Audio Files enable Auto play and use the UP and DOWN cursor keys to step through each Audio File in quick succession Opening and inserting a file or region Once you have chosen a file you wish to open double click it to open the file in the current Workspace You can also open it by dragging it onto an empty tabbed group or onto the tab bar of a tabbed
144. File WaveLab 7 284 Interface Elements You can access this dialog in the Audio File Workspace via View gt Main view display gt Time Ruler gt Time format Alternatively you can access it by right clicking anywhere on the time ruler in either waveform window to produce the Time Ruler context menu and choosing Time format For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Timecode Audio File editing 11 1 93 Time stretching This dialog allows you to change the duration of an audio selection usually without changing its pitch You can view exact time information on the original audio selection you wish to stretch and choose the amount you wish to stretch it in seconds beats per minute or as a percentage You can also choose which method WaveLab uses to stretch the audio and the quality speed of the processing If you select Use modulation envelope you can vary the time stretch over time using an envelope editor that becomes available When choosing a method it is useful to experiment with the different algorithms available to find which one suits your source material the best Use What s this to find out more information on each method and determine which one will produce the best time stretch without introducing unwanted artifacts This function is useful if you want to speed up or slow down
145. For more information see Getting Help Related topics Workspaces 11 1 101 Write Data CD DVD This dialog allows you to write a data CD DVD to either a physical DVD CD ROM disk using your computer s CD R or DVD R drive or burn an ISO disk image The dialog has controls for refreshing the list of attached devices opening the CD DVD drive and erasing a CD RW DVD RW disk WaveLab 7 288 Interface Elements If you choose to burn an ISO disk image the dialog allows you to select a filename for the resultant ISO file Choosing a CD R or DVD R drive displays choices for setting the speed or to try a test burn Important note for Mac OSX users When using CD R DVD R drive on Apple OSX computers for importing or burning it is important to note the following If you insert a optical CD or DVD disk in the drive while the drive is not selected in WaveLab for import or burning WaveLab will not be able to see the drive The disk drive is taken over by other applications under Mac OSX and is not seen by WaveLab when this happens To avoid this occurring make sure there is no disk in the drive when opening any CD window within WaveLab For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Authoring CDs and DVDs 11 1 102 Loop Tweaker This dialog allows you to refine a region of audio to loop seamlessly The Loop Tweake
146. M files 409 15 61 Raw PCM files Raw PCM files is an Audio File format that includes no information about bit resolution or sample rate If you open a file in this format WaveLab prompts you to specify the bit resolution and sample rate If this is not done correctly the file will not play back as intended Note that the file type is WaveLab s own temporary file format If you experience a computer crash you can try opening any stray files on your hard disk s to restore them Tyical file extensions are raw bin pcm Glossary contents 15 62 Red Book CD DA Red Book is the standard for audio CDs Compact Disc Digital Audio or CD DA Other Rainbow Books in the series known by the color of their covers define the formats of CD ROMs VCD SACD and other compact disc formats DVD and Blu ray formats are not defined in a Rainbow Book The first edition of the Red Book was released in 1980 by Philips and Sony and ratified as IEC 60908 The standard is not freely circulated from 2009 the IEC 60908 document has been available as a PDF download for US 260 The Red Book specifies a compliant CD DA in great detail including the physical properties of the CD the digital audio encoding 2 channel signed 16 bit Linear Pulse Code Modulation sampled at 44 1kHz the modu lation system the CIRC error correction scheme and subcode channels Data are stored in sectors of 2352 bytes frames read at 75 frames s The bi
147. Open the Script window in either the Audio File or Audio Montage Workspaces 2 Type your script directly in the Script window or copy and paste it from an external text editor 3 Run the script by clicking Execute Script or selecting it from the Functions menu The script will run if there are no syntax errors Any errors will appear in a dialog box to help you debug them Tip There are several free utility text editors that are context sensitive This means that they can color and highlight parts of your code to make it more readable If you use one of these for writing and editing your scripts choose Javascript as the editing language and or save the file with a s Javascript extension Using the Log window It is a good idea to begin by writing some simple scripts that output some text to the Log window The Log window is part of the Control Window and can be accessed via Utilities gt Log To output a simple text message 1 Open the Log window 2 Open an Audio File in the Audio File Workspace 3 Copy and paste the following script into the Script window and try executing it output the number of samples in the active wave as text in the log window logWindow printInfo This file has activeWave size samples Note Any lines of a script that begin with two forward slashes are comments and are ignored when the script is executed For commenting multiple lines you can use the following syntax This
148. P3 encoding This dialog allows you to specify the encoding options when you save an MP3 Audio File You can select which encoder to use and adjust the bit rate and quality of the file You can also choose the format and method the encoder uses to output the file as well as select other advanced options WaveLab 7 11 1 Dialogs 265 You can access this dialog by choosing Save as gt Output Format select type MPEG 1 Layer 3 gt Encoding gt Edit and from most places where you can select an output file format such as the Render dialog For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics MP3 files 11 1 53 Normalize Level This dialog allows you to change the peak level of your Audio File Enter the desired peak level in dB that you wish the audio selection to have You can also use Find current peak level to obtain a report on the peak level of the current audio selection or the peak level in the whole file if Process whole file if there is no selection is selected in the preferences You can choose to apply the same gain to both stereo channels Stereo Link or mix down to a mono file Mix to Mono with the assurance that no clipping will occur when both channels are mixed together To normalize the selected audio enter the desired peak level and click Apply You can access this dialog by ch
149. Processors Workspace Select a category of plug ins from the Plug ins accordion Double click to add the plug in at the end or drag the plug in into position in the batch processor chain To remove a plug in Right click on the plug in to use the pop up menu Remove option or drag it back onto the plugin window Master Section presets These are Master Section presets not to be confused with individual plugin presets so it s always a chain even if it s a chain with one member As these presets can contain multiple effects they can be put to powerful use in batch processing Master Section Plug ins These are all the plug ins available from the Master Section sorted in the same manner Monopass Plug ins Monopass plug ins only require one pass when processing A Monopass plug in effect processes the signal then outputs it to any subsequent plug in This is like real time plug ins The following Monopass plug ins are available in the Batch Processor Workspace Audio Injector Trimmer Resizer Fade In Instructor Time Stretch Pitch Correction WaveLab 7 7 3 Batch Processing Plug ins 197 Multipass Plug ins Multipass plug ins require two or more passes an analysis pass followed by a process pass before processing the audio Some are unique to the Batch Processor while others are also found as Offline Processors in the Audio File Workspace The following Multipass plug ins are available in the Batch Processor
150. ST to allow effect plug ins to be integrated with audio editors such as WaveLab VST uses Digital Signal Processing DSP to closely simulate in software the effects of familiar recording studio hardware A vast number of plug ins are available from freeware to high end commercial products and can greatly extend the functionality of programs such as WaveLab The order of processing is significant You can change the order in which effects are pro cessed by moving the effects icons by dragging them between slots See Dragging operations for more information WaveLab provides slots for up to ten plug ins The more complex plug ins provide a custom GUI often displaying controls similar to the physical switches and knobs on audio hardware other plug ins rely on the host application for their UI The following plug ins are supplied with WaveLab ASIO plug ins Audio Input Using External effects Legacy plug ins Under Windows a set of plug ins is provided for compatibility with audio projects that ref erenced these effects when using earlier versions of WaveLab An Audio Montage which referenced these plug ins would otherwise require cumbersome user intervention to open for instance Their use with new audio projects is not recommended and they are not docu mented Sonnox Ltd VST 3 plug ins Sonnox DeClicker Sonnox DeNoiser 322 Audio Plug ins Sonnox DeBuzzer Steinberg VST 3 plug ins Steinberg Autopan Ste
151. Sample attributes This dialog allows you to define settings for an audio sample before loading it into a hardware or software sampler The settings do not process the sample in any way they just give the file properties that the receiving sampler can use This includes information about the pitch of the sample which can be detected automatically by WaveLab the key range that the sample should span and the velocity range to occupy For WAV and AIFF files this information is stored in the file s header By default there are no sample attributes in an Audio File Therefore you must explicitly create this information by clicking on the Create button first This dialog is useful if your sampler can take advantage of these additional tags If supported by your sampler it can save you time by allowing you to both edit and define a samples properties from within WaveLab You can access this dialog via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Sample At tributes For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics 11 3 8 Error detection and correction This specific tool window allows you to search for unwanted clicks and digital artifacts in an Audio File Several detection and restoration methods are available You can detect mark and name jump to play back and remove individual audio errors The settings for error de
152. TP This is the same as above but it always uploads replaces all of the media files belonging to the item This is useful if you have changed the audio data for example Update selected item on FTP This uploads updates the XML Podcast file on the FTP It also uploads the media file of the currently selected item in the list but only if it is not already present on the FTP Upload Replace selected item on FTP This is the same as above but it always uploads replaces the media file of the currently selected item in the list This is useful if you have changed the audio data for example View published Podcast This opens your Podcast from the URL specified in your FTP site settings using your default browser FTP site This is where you specify your Podcast FTP settings See FTP site Tip Please note that all items in fact means all items that have their Enabled box in the item list checked If not enabled these episodes are simply omitted from the Podcast Related topics FTP site 8 4 Specific tool windows Specific tool windows are windows that are specific to the current Workspace They perform useful tasks in the active Workspace They can be docked and un docked and saved in your custom layouts WaveLab 7 8 4 Specific tool windows 209 Podcast Workspace specific tool windows The following specific tool windows are available within the Podcast Workspace Master Project File Browser 8 4 1 File
153. The Audio File could be any file type that is supported by the web browser s media reader but an mp3 file is best for compatibility Clicking the button lists the Audio Files already open in WaveLab Select one for your episode Alternatively you can drag the icon of an Audio File into the Audio File pane Clicking opens the specified file in your system s default media player or viewer as a preview or check Publication date and time This sets the publication date and time of the Feed or Episode Clicking the button will transfer your system s current date and time Mm Now For the Feed if As most recent episode is checked this automatically matches the date and time of the most recent Episode Related topics FTP site Episodes menu Publish menu Specific tool windows WaveLab 7 8 1 FTP site 207 8 1 FTP site This dialog allows you to enter information for uploading your Podcast and all related files to an online FTP server You must specify all log in details for your FTP site the relative path to your podcast XML file and the web site address where the link to your Podcast is found including the path to the feed If in doubt about your FTP settings they can normally be supplied by your ISP You can access this dialog via Publish gt FTP Site in the Podcast Workspace For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more informati
154. This dialog allows you to choose how imported Audio Files will be arranged in the active audio montage It displays a list of the Audio Files you have selected to import and allows you to add or remove files rearrange their order choose whether to create new tracks for each Clip or lay them out on a single track and where to insert the Clips To adjust the spacing between Clips that you import see Audio Montage Preferences This dialog appears when adding two or more Audio Files to a montage You can access it from the Montage Workspace via Insert context menu gt Insert Audio Files or when you drag Audio Files directly from your computer s file system You can also access it from the Montage Workspace via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Files gt File gt Add Audio Files s at cursor For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Podcasts File Audio Montage Preferences WaveLab 7 258 Interface Elements 11 1 38 Level envelope This dialog allows you to create a volume envelope which can be applied to a selected range or a whole Audio File This could be useful if you need to even out loud and quiet parts for example You can edit the envelope by e Double clicking on the line to add a point double click on a point to remove it e Selecting multiple points using Shift click allo
155. Using both firstClip and nextClip allow to access all Montage Clips clipName clipld Returns the name of the Clip identified by clipld clipPosition clipld Returns the time line position of the Clip identified by clipld clipSize clipld Returns the size of the Clip identified by clipld setClipName clipld name Rename the Clip identified by clipld setTrackName index name Rename the Track identified by index moveClip clipld newPos Move on the time line the Clip identified by clipld resizeClip clipld qlonglong newSize Resize the Clip identified by clipld The size will be limited by the Audio File referenced by the Clip setClipDefaultFadeln clipld Sets the default fade in shape and time for the Clip iden tified by clipld setClipDefaultFadeOut clipld Sets the default fade out shape and time for the Clip identified by clipld undo Undoes the last command WaveLab 7 4 9 Scripting 71 Related topics ECMAScript Reference 4 9 2 ECMAScript Reference WaveLab s scripting language is based on the ECMAScript scripting language as defined in standard ECMA 262 Microsoft s JScript Netscape s JavaScript and Adobe s Actionscript are also based on the ECMAScript standard If you are not familiar with the ECMAScript language there is a large amount of teaching and reference material available online This reference page contains a list of all ECMAScript objects functions and properties sup
156. Wavescope Timecode Background task monitor Log window Master Section WaveLab 7 128 Audio File editing Related topics About Tool Windows Metering Docking windows 5 6 1 Phasescope The Phasescope indicates the phase and amplitude relationship between two stereo chan nels It is only really relevant when monitoring stereo audio material Reading the Phasescope It can be interpreted as follows e A vertical line indicates a perfect mono signal the left and right channels are the same e A horizontal line indicates that the left channel is the same as the right but with an inverse phase A random but roughly elliptical shape indicates a well balanced stereo signal If the shape leans to the left there is more energy in the left channel and vice versa the extreme case of this is if one side is muted in which case the Phasescope will show a straight line angled 45 degrees to the other side A perfect circle indicates a sine wave on one channel and the same sine wave shifted by 90 degrees on the other Generally the more you can see a thread shape the more bass there is in the signal the more spray like the display the more high frequencies are in the signal Phase Correlation meter At the bottom of the display you will find a Phase Correlation meter which shows the same information but in a different way e The green line shows the current phase correlation while the two red lines show the r
157. When applying processing to a spectrum region in the Spectrum Editor you can use a variety of different modes Damp This is used to attenuate the level of a region The Gain parameter specifies the level of the attenuation it is also possible to set positive gain values i e to boost the frequencies in the region Three filter types are available to perform the damping e Bandpass filter All frequencies in the region are equally attenuated e Low pass filter Higher frequencies in the region will be more attenuated e High pass filter Lower frequencies in the region will be more attenuated For the Low and High pass filters a low Filter steepness setting is normally used around 6 to 18dB Blur peaks This filter operation analyzes the region to find the frequencies with the highest level The level of these frequencies will be attenuated or boosted according to the set Gain value If the gain is negative these frequencies will be blurred and disappear in the mix as a whole The purpose of the filter is to mask the loudest frequencies e g it could be used to eliminate a sudden burst of pitched but unwanted sound in the audio material like acoustic feedback WaveLab 7 4 12 About Regular Expressions 83 This mode works best with the Infinite steepness setting which is automatically selected when Blur peaks is used You can however freely set any Filter steepness setting The filter type options are not available w
158. Workspace AAA 287 11 1 101 Write Data CD DVD ora a ARA dd a 287 11 1 102 Loop Tweaker oo o ee 288 111109 Zoom AAC ON A de a Saw a 289 11 2 Shared tool windows lt 2 6 o5 eked era a 289 1121 PRBRESOO PE lt a A d A BA A es 290 122 VUMEIE ic ee a es ae ee ee ae is 291 11 23 a 1 AAA O 292 1124 Bit MESES sea a ena ed A a e e ja Gee Ss 293 11 25 Spectroscop gt tcs a a a Gah BO 294 E AS og er aioe ae ew ee oe Reo eee 294 11 2 7 Wavescope o ooo 296 L29 TUR os es See Pa a oa Pe a ee Sw Bas 296 11 2 9 Background task monitor siii rca 297 TL210 LOMO gt o e he es A a 297 11 3 Specific tool windows saaa eee ee eee eee owe ed 298 TRS Ple BOWE roa a aa a aa ae RS aa a 299 11 3 2 Spectrum ECHO 6s oi oes aa 300 11 3 2 1 Spectrum Processing Modes o 302 WaveLab 7 viii CONTENTS 11 3 3 Basi Audio CD nw ce ih owe oe oe ek EM A 304 11 3 4 Scripting window Audio File Workspace 306 11 3 5 Metadata window o o e ee 306 113 6 Marker Window sa Goru midosa da doe p Da era ee 306 11 3 7 Sample attributes A 308 11 3 8 Error detection and correction aaa 308 11 3 9 Master Project oso 06 maara kia ee a 309 11 3 10 Focused Clip Window gt e so ere roo temara no SES Bas 310 14 311 Spapshols iodo ee eR RE HHS 311 TATA Ts nd ot as Pads eae E a a ee ee as 311 114313 Zoom meet a re Te ar re 312 MIA A Se kee DS an ac eS eee Os 312 TLATE CIPS eree
159. Workspace via Edit gt Effect morphing For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help 11 1 27 Edit playback times This dialog allows you to set parameters that are used to evaluate the CD when using the command Play all CD Track starts You can set the track pre roll time toggle one second of silence before playback and set the time each track is played before jumping to the next track You can access this dialog from the Audio Montage Workspace via CD gt Options gt Edit playback times For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help 11 1 28 Error detection and correction This specific tool window allows you to search for unwanted clicks and digital artifacts in an Audio File Several detection and restoration methods are available You can detect mark and name jump to play back and remove individual audio errors The settings for error detection and correction are organized within the following groups of controls e Detection tab choose the method used to detect any errors Each different method has its own settings to determine when it will detect an error Click Detection 1 and 2 will search for clicks in certain frequency ranges while Digital Click Detection looks for clicks that are caused by clicks typical t
160. You can adjust the hold time in the Settings dialog e The over segment indicates clipping similar to a clip indicator If the below segment is lit there are more than 24 bits The bit meter will show the 24 higher bits and the below segment indicates the existence of extra lower bits Note that audio is always processed with more than 24 bits internally If the inter segment is lit this indicates that the audio data cannot really be expressed on a regular 24 bit scale there are floating point values in between bits thus the label inter This is typically the case if you apply effects thus the inter segment allows you to differentiate processed from non processed 24 bit PCM files WaveLab 7 176 Audio Montages When to use the Bit Meter e To check whether dithering is necessary or not As a rule if you re playing back or mixing down to 16 bits and the Bit Meter shows that more than 16 bits are used you should apply dithering To see the actual resolution of an Audio File For example even though a file is in 24 bit format only 16 bits may be used Or a 32 bit file may only use 24 bits in this case the below segment would not be lit For this purpose the Bit Meter is best used in Analyze selection mode To see whether a zeroed plug in still affects your signal or whether a plug in uses 16 bit internal processing or more generally to detect any signal modifier stage in the audio chain betwee
161. You can change the sequence by dragging the plug in to the position you wish within the Audio Plug in chain list and releasing the mouse button For example a typical batch processing effects chain might resemble the following DC Remover gt Normalizer gt Denoiser gt Compressor gt Limiter gt MPEG Encoder The batch processor operates using a number of processing passes The number of passes depends on the type of plug ins you use Some plug ins require multiple passes of the Audio File in order to determine how to process the audio others can process in a single pass Besides the plug ins shared with the Master section there are three other types of plug in types available in the Batch Processor Workspace e Monopass these plug ins only require one pass when processing e Multipass these plug ins require two or more passes an analysis and a process pass The Normalizer is an example of a Multipass effect e Metapass these plug ins are unique to the Batch Processor and require several passes before processing the audio After analysing ALL Audio Files a metapass plug in takes into account the analysis performed by itself on ALL these files before processing them individually in a second round The Meta Normalizer is an example of a Metapass effect Once all passes have been completed the resulting file is written to your hard disk It is useful to note that WaveLab keeps the audio in the 32 bit domain for all calculations
162. You can also choose to recall all or just one of its view properties by clicking the appropriate icon You can access this dialog in the Audio Montage Workspace via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Snapshots For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio Montages 6 5 Shared tool windows Shared tool windows are windows that can only exist in one place at a time and are shared between Workspaces They perform useful tasks in the active Workspace They can be docked and un docked and saved in your custom layouts WaveLab 7 172 Audio Montages Shared tool windows Phasescope VU Meter Oscilloscope Bit Meter Spectroscope Spectrometer Wavescope Timecode Background task monitor Log window Master Section Related topics About Tool Windows Metering Docking windows 6 5 1 Phasescope The Phasescope indicates the phase and amplitude relationship between two stereo chan nels It is only really relevant when monitoring stereo audio material Reading the Phasescope It can be interpreted as follows e A vertical line indicates a perfect mono signal the left and right channels are the same e A horizontal line indicates that the left channel is the same as the right but with an inverse phase A random but roughly elliptical shape indicates a well balanced ster
163. a clear and intuitive impression of the working headroom Input Gain Trim Touch Pad dB This allows you to adjust the input signal level by up to 12dB Frequency Knob and Touch Pad Hz The De Buzzer has an active frequency range for the buzz fundamental of between 20Hz and 440Hz In Auto mode this knob sets the frequency from which the buzz detection circuit will start to hunt for buzz components In Freeze mode this knob sets the exact frequency of the buzz fundamental The knob is graduated around the circumference and clicking on any labeled graduation will set the frequency to that graduation The frequency can be scrolled from the touch pad Fine Adjust Button This button enables fine tuning of the buzz frequency control The graduations around the circumference of the frequency knob will re draw to a finer scale and scrolling the touch pad will enable very quick fine tuning of a hunt frequency Scrolling past an end stop will continue to scroll the frequency and the marked graduations will re draw appropriately Fine Adjust Mode forces Freeze so that the selected frequency can be specified exactly without the Auto circuitry hunting for a stronger fundamental If entering Fine Mode from Auto the Freeze button will flash and the plug in will revert to Auto when Fine mode is exited WaveLab 7 12 5 Sonnox DeBuzzer 333 e Tone On Button This button enables an audible tone generator which can be used to aid location of
164. ab 7 4 7 Presets 59 montage audio file to free up some processing power You can then continue editing the resultant file with the effects rendered Remember to save a copy of your session before doing this so you can go back and edit any levels or effects if you need to For more information about choosing settings when rendering see the Render Wave window and Render Montage window For more information on applying effects see the Master Section Related topics Render Wave window Render Montage window Master Section Audio Plug ins 4 7 Presets WaveLab s powerful preset system allows you to create your own presets to store commonly used settings They are available every time you open WaveLab Presets can be saved for many parameters such as plug in settings Audio File Formats or File Attributes for example You can access the Presets pop up menu wherever you see one of these icons B or B Presets are saved as local files on your hard drive allowing you to conveniently back up or copy them for use on another computer They are also useful when used in conjunction with batch conversions and Scripting Working with Presets When working with Presets you save edit and load them from their own pop up menu De pending on the context the available functions sometimes vary but generally you can e Save Save As creates a new Preset file by saving the currently selected settings to your hard disk e Explore presets ope
165. ac OSX users When using the CD R DVD R drive on Apple OSX computers for importing or burning it is important to note the following If you insert a optical CD or DVD disk in the drive while the drive is not selected in WaveLab for import or burning WaveLab will not be able to see the drive The disk drive is taken over by other applications under Mac OSX and is not seen by WaveLab when this happens To avoid this occurring make sure there is no disk in the drive when opening any CD window within WaveLab Audio CD authoring basics You can author an audio CD from within both the Audio Files and the Audio Montage Workspaces From the Audio Montage Workspace you can additionally create DVD Audio disks and you have a more comprehensive set of tools for creating audio CDs and DVDs Many of the tools provided in WaveLab also work together in conjunction to enable you to create your own workflow for audio CD authoring WaveLab 7 4 3 Authoring CDs and DVDs 33 Track markers and CD authoring In WaveLab one of the main concepts to understand about audio CDs is the use of markers to define tracks and the breaks between tracks Each track must at least have a track start and track end marker Some of the various authoring tools provided by WaveLab will generate these track markers for you automatically but you can also manually define modify and edit them using the marker window or directly in the main editing window You can also use other
166. ace via Plug ins window gt Multipass Plug ins gt Pan Normalizer For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics 7 1 2 11 Loudness normalizer This dialog allows you to adjust the loudness of a file Because it relates to loudness as opposed to maximum peak level this tool works quite differently from the Level Normalizer A typical application is to specify a loudness for example 12dB and the Loudness Normalizer processes the audio to match this level of loudness Like Gain Change increasing the loudness to a certain value can introduce clipping To avoid this occurring a peak limiter the Peak Master plug in can be used as part of the process The Loudness Normalizer raises the loudness and limits peaks in the signal at the same time if needed to achieve the target loudness In the case of stereo files both channels are processed independently This process happens over several stages analysis precedes the final rendering The Loudness Normalizer dialog gives access to useful statistics about the file and the Loudness distribution tool and you can choose to remove any DC offset in the file You can access this dialog from the Audio File Workspace via Process gt Loudness nor malizer This function is also available as a batch processing plug in You can access it from Batch Processing Workspace gt Plug
167. ach parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics DDP files Authoring CDs and DVDs 11 1 99 WMA encoding This dialog allows you to specify the encoding options when you save a WMA Audio File You can select which encoder to use and adjust the output sample rate and bit resolution Depending on the encoder chosen you can also define various quality options and whether the resulting file is stereo or mono You can access this dialog by choosing Save as gt Output Format select type Win dows Media Audio gt Encoding gt Edit and from most places where you can select an output file format like the Render dialog For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics WMA files 11 1 100 Workspace layout This dialog allows you to define options when saving the layout of a Workspace You can choose to save the placement of the Workspace and all its windows and or the layout of tabbed windows It allows you to choose whether to retain or discard these elements of your current layout arrangement when saving a new layout You can access this dialog from all Workspaces via Workspace gt Layout gt Save as For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon
168. adjust the Bit Meter settings select Settings from the Options pop up menu or by using the 4 icon The Bit meter can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Window Related topics Metering Dithering 9 3 5 Phasescope The Phasescope indicates the phase and amplitude relationship between two stereo chan nels It is only really relevant when monitoring stereo audio material Reading the Phasescope It can be interpreted as follows e A vertical line indicates a perfect mono signal the left and right channels are the same e A horizontal line indicates that the left channel is the same as the right but with an inverse phase A random but roughly elliptical shape indicates a well balanced stereo signal If the shape leans to the left there is more energy in the left channel and vice versa the extreme case of this is if one side is muted in which case the Phasescope will show a straight line angled 45 degrees to the other side A perfect circle indicates a sine wave on one channel and the same sine wave shifted by 90 degrees on the other Generally the more you can see a thread shape the more bass there is in the signal the more spray like the display the more high frequencies are in the signal Phase Correlation meter At the bottom of the display you will find a Phase Correlation meter w
169. ailable in the recording window External gear tab this allows you to select inputs and outputs to external audio processing equipment For example you can use this to buss audio out to an outboard effects unit and back into app Options tab use this tab to specify the number of buffers and control driver function ality e g release the driver when the application is in the background so that it can be used by other applications You can also specify pre roll and post roll times WaveLab 7 11 1 Dialogs 243 Windows MME Built In Audio If you do not have a third party audio card you can select the Windows MME or Built in Audio Mac options You can also use MME with most third party audio cards with the advantage that you can record and play at different sample rates However Windows MME drivers don t allow Audio Monitoring in the record dialog and other drivers generally offer better sound quality and performance You can access this dialog from Workspaces that support the playback of Audio Files by choosing Options gt Audio Streaming Settings For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Recording Dialog 11 1 12 Auto Split This dialog allows you to automatically split an Audio File into separate Audio Files according to certain specified rules You can split files e at marker poi
170. ain setting the more compression is applied Output 48 to 24dB Sets the output gain Attack 0 1 to 100ms Determines how fast the compressor responds If the attack time is long more of the early part of the signal attack passes through unprocessed Punch button On Off When this is activated the early attack phase of the signal is preserved retaining the original punch in the audio material even with short Attack settings Release 10 to 1000ms or Auto mode Sets the amount of time it takes for the gain to return to its original level If the Auto button is activated Vintage Compressor will automatically find an optimal release setting that varies depending on the audio material Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets 12 35 Steinberg VST Dynamics e 1 Steinberg VSTDynamics Threshold Center Q Factor Threshold Ratio Make Up 20 0 12 7 2 68 0 5 a a A a a a gt y gt gt side chain monitor soft clip Hold Release Attack Release Release 320 0 100 2 9 401 VSTDynamics is an advanced dynamics processor It combines three separate processors Gate Compressor and Limiter covering a variety of dynamic processing functions The window is divided into three sections containing controls and meters for each processor Activating the individual processors You activate the individual processors using the buttons at the bottom of the plug in panel
171. al lows you to arrange edit play back audio Clips Features include both track and Clip based effects volume and pan automation and wide ranging fade and cross fade functions The Audio Montage is a great tool for creating music CDs mastering multimedia work radio spot production etc You can create intricate multi track compositions and author professional audio CDs Support for Multichannel and DVD Audio disks allows you to create surround sound mixes too Basic terminology The Audio Montage window is where you assemble audio Clips into a montage Once imported you can arrange edit and play back Clips on an unlimited number of both stereo or mono tracks These provide a way for the user to structure the work graphically but they should not be viewed as virtual tape tracks On an audio track you can place any number of Clips These are containers for the audio and include a number of settings and functions such as volume and pan curves fades etc A Clip contains a reference to a source Audio File on your hard disk as well as start and end positions in the file allowing Clips to play back smaller sections of their source Audio Files Any number of Clips can reference the same source file Creating a Montage To create a blank new montage file choose File gt New to open the Audio Montage properties dialog From this dialog you can define the mode number of channels and sample rate to use for your new montage The defa
172. alog allows you to create a template from an active Audio Montage Podcast or Batch processor file Starting a new document from a template can be a great time saver Each template you create retains all the settings of the current document plus any tracks you have created although any data in the file such as Clip references are not saved The next time you create a new document you can choose a template file from a list which is then used as a basis for the new document You can use this dialog to create a set of templates that you commonly use For example if you are frequently mastering CDs in the Audio Montage Workspace you could create a montage template specifically for that purpose WaveLab 7 11 1 Dialogs 283 You can access this dialog from the Audio Montage Podcast or Batch processor Workspace via File gt Save special gt Save as template For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Template List Dialog 11 1 91 Template List Dialog This dialog allows you to choose a previously saved template from an active Audio Montage Podcast or Batch processor file Starting a new document from a template can be a great time saver Templates are saved using the Create Document Template dialog You can choose to use an existing template as the basis for your new file or choose None to define a new b
173. alog by using the W Help button from within the dialog Using the What s this tool will help you to access detailed information on a dialog s parameters See Getting Help for more information on The following is a list of all the dialogs within WaveLab that have help entries available Insert link Align Clips Recording channels Audio CD Report Audio file comparer Audio File Format Dialog Audio Montage properties Split Clip at silences Audio properties dialog Audio Range Audio Streaming Settings Auto Split 236 Interface Elements Batch Conversion Basic Audio CD Settings Batch Renaming CD Text Editor CD Text Browser CD Wizard Copy audio information Customize Commands Data CD DVD DVD Audio options DVD Audio Creation Document list dialog Ducking options Effect morphing Edit playback times Error detection and correction Configure external tools Folder Preferences dialog Frequency range FTP site Change Level File attributes OGG WMA Global analysis Import Audio CD Insert Audio Files Level envelope Loop Tone Uniformizer Loudness distribution Loudness normalizer Global Preferences Convert marker type Load Master Section Preset Save Master Section Preset Audio Montage Clone Write Audio CD Meta normalizer WaveLab 7 11 1 Dialogs 237 Audio Montage Preferences MP2 encoding MP3 attributes MP3 encoding Normalize Level OGG encoding Open files list Pan Normalizer Mix
174. ance between the unprocessed sound and the effect send level can be adjusted or controlled by effect envelope curves clip effects only Note that not all effects are capable of Send and if this feature is not available it is disabled The window only shows the effects of the focused Clip or the focused track according to the active mode Each plugin and track can be understood as being associated with a small Master Section A plug in can be inserted and sorted and you double click on an effect to Edit it When you close an effect window its parameters are saved into the montage and it can be be undone if necessary Use What s This help on the column headers for more details You can access this dialog in the Audio Montage Workspace via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Effects For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio Montages 6 4 15 Snapshots This dialog enables you to save a number of views of your montage You can then recall a particular view or snapshot at any time When you save a snapshot you capture the current zoom factor the current cursor position the current scroll position and the current time range displayed You can name each snapshot and update an existing snapshot too To recall a snapshot just click on its title in the list This restores all of its view settings
175. ance of the Instructor plug in You can set the Instructor plug in to replicate up to 20 seconds of audio Be careful not to set a value that is longer than the shortest file in the batch otherwise a short file will be over truncated by the second instance of the plug in You can access this dialog from the Batch Processor Workspace via Plug ins window gt Monopass Plug ins gt Instructor For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Batch Processing Plug ins 7 1 2 6 Time Stretch This dialog is exclusive to the Batch Processor Workspace and allows you to change the duration of an audio selection usually without changing its pitch For more information on the Time Stretch dialog parameters see Time stretching You can access this dialog from Batch Processing Workspace gt Plug ins window gt Monopass Plug ins gt Time Stretch For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Time stretching Batch Processing Plug ins 7 1 2 7 Pitch Correction This dialog is exclusive to the Batch Processor Workspace and allows you to detect and change the pitch of a sound without affecting its length For more information on the Pitch Correction dialog parameters see Pitch correction You can access
176. and letters The characters you can use are 0123456789ABCD The MF system is limited to only fifteen characters 0123456789ABC The DTMF Generator allows you to generate these DTMF MF tones to create an Audio File You can enter the string of numbers and letters specify the durations of the tones and set the amplitude and output type You can access this dialog from the Audio File Workspace via Tools gt DTMF Generator For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Signal generator 5 8 Peak Files A peak file is a small file with the extension gpk that is automatically created by WaveLab each time a file is modified or opened in WaveLab for the first time The peak file contains information about the waveform and determines how it is drawn in the wave window The purpose of the peak file created by WaveLab is to speed up the time it takes to draw a file s waveform By default the peak file is stored in the same location as the Audio File whose waveform it represents You can choose to store a peak file in another location and or delete it when you close an Audio File These settings are found in the Audio File editing preferences WaveLab 7 140 Audio File editing WaveLab 7 Chapter 6 Audio Montages The WaveLab Audio Montage Workspace is a non destructive editing environment that
177. and line arguments to the external applications so that they can process the current file folder you are working on or even the WaveLab s settings folder This function can be useful if you wish to edit an Audio File in another application or wish to compress all your settings files into a backup zip file for example Note that an external tool only works within the Workspace in which it is defined This is by design so that each type of Workspace can have its own external toolkit To define an external tool you need to e Give the command a title e Specify the path to the application s executable file e Choose which arguments you wish to pass to the external application e Additionally you can specify an initial folder to direct the external application to WaveLab 7 158 Audio Montages e Select how you wish WaveLab to behave before the external tool is launched Once you have defined an external tool in this way you can run it by selecting its title from the Tools menu from within its Workspace You can access this dialog by choosing Tools gt Configure external tools For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help 6 3 Transport controls The transport controls allow you to control playback within an Audio File or montage and to open the record window It can be accessed via the Transport menu or the Transport too
178. ar Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets WaveLab 7 12 11 Steinberg Distortion 341 12 11 Steinberg Distortion e 1 Steinberg Distortion Ys 00 E Boost Feedback Tone Spatial Output 2 0 0 5 6 0 2 0 0 0 4 A A A A gt d y y Distortion will add crunch to your tracks The following parameters are available e Boost Increases the distortion amount e Feedback Feeds part of the output signal back to the effect input increasing the distortion effect e Tone Lets you select a frequency range to which to apply the distortion effect e Spatial Changes the distortion characteristics of the left and right channel thus creating a stereo effect e Output Raises or lowers the signal going out of the effect Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets WaveLab 7 342 Audio Plug ins 12 12 Steinberg Dual Filter e 1 Steinberg DualFilter E Hed The DualFilter effect filters out certain frequencies while allowing others to pass through The following parameters are available e Position Sets the filter cutoff frequency If you set this to a negative value DualFilter will act as a low pass filter Positive values cause DualFilter to act as a high pass filter e Resonance Sets the sound characteristic of the filter With higher values a ringing sound is heard Related topics Audio Plug ins Maste
179. aracter as 0 9a z Any non alphabetic W Special code to symbolize any non alphabetic character as 0 9a z Any number Zu Special code to symbolize a number without a sign Number with possible fi before Special code to symbolize a number which can be preceded by a or sign Quoted string 7q Special code to symbolize quoted text Simple word z Special code to symbolize a simple word a sequence of letters surrounded by non letters e g spaces All special characters used for regular expressions are available from the Special characters submenu There is also a Presets sub menu with pre defined operations which include the following Menu item Description 1st 2nd 3rd word This searches for the first second or third word respectively separated by a space Last word This searches for the last word separated by a space 1st 2nd 3rd expression in parentheses This searches for the first second or third string enclosed in parentheses respectively Last expression in parentheses This searches for the last string enclosed in parentheses 1st 2nd 3rd expression in brackets This searches for the first second or third string enclosed in brackets respectively Last expression in brackets This searches for the last string enclosed in brackets Related topics Batch Renaming Convert marker typ
180. arameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Specific tool windows Render Montage window 6 4 11 DVD Audio This specific tool window allows you to author a DVD Audio disk from a collection of audio montages You can add your finished audio montages into this window check the DVD Audio layout for conformity and output a DVD Audio disk all from this window Note All included montages need to be in DVD A mode this can be set via Audio Montage properties Although DVD A has a different specification from an Audio CD its track concept makes is similair to an Audio CD this is why creating a DVD A is almost like creating a CD with WaveLab 7 6 4 Specific tool windows 169 WaveLab s Audio Montage It is worth noting that throughout WaveLab where CD is mentioned for example in messages one can usually substitute DVD A To create a DVD Audio disk follow these basic steps e Create an audio montage you need at least one audio montage in order to create a DVD A You can import any currently open ones or add them as mon files Note that the Audio Montage must have DVD tracks defined with red track markers Add Montage s choose File gt Add Audio Montage s from the DVD Audio win dow to add one or more montages to your DVD Audio Each montage will then be displayed along with its details in the DVD Audio window You ca
181. arate frequency bands represented as vertical bars Peak levels are shown as a short horizontal lines above the corresponding band indicating recent peak maximum values The Spectroscope offers a quick spectrum overview For a more detailed analysis of the audio spectrum use the Spectrometer The Spectroscope can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces lt can be used ei ther as a floating window or docked in the Workspace lt can also be docked in the Control Window Related topics Metering Spectrometer 9 3 3 Oscilloscope The Oscilloscope offers a highly magnified view of the waveform around the playback cursor position If you are analyzing a stereo file the Oscilloscope normally shows the separate levels of the two channels However if you activate the option Show Sum and Subtraction on the Functions menu or click the icon the upper half of the Oscilloscope shows the sum of the two channels and the lower half shows the subtraction Making settings By opening the Settings dialog you can adjust the display colors and choose to activate Auto zoom or not With Auto zoom activated the display is optimized so that the highest level reaches the top of the display at all times The Settings dialog can be accessed through the Functions gt Settings menu or by using the icon The Oscilloscope can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces lt can be
182. at s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Markers Adjusting Envelopes Zero crossing 4 6 9 Effect morphing This dialog within the Audio File Workspace allows you to gradually mix two audio ranges that have different effects processing applied to them Effect morphing allows you to smoothly morph or blend from one effect to another or from an unprocessed audio segment to a processed audio segment Effect Morphing always involves two audio ranges Normally these are two versions of the same audio range of which one is unprocessed and the other processed Effect morphing works by using WaveLab s Undo buffer to mix a copy of the processed audio with the unprocessed version You can also use any other bit of audio from the application s clipboard that has the same length as the one you wish to morph with To set up a basic effect morph proceed as follows 1 Start by making a selection range over the time you wish the effect morphing to take place 2 Now process this range using any Master Section effect s or use some other off line processing You cannot use processing effects that alter the length of the selection e g time stretching 3 Open the Effect Morphing dialog by choosing Edit gt Effect Morphing WaveLab 7 4 6 Offline processing 53 4 Adjust your envelope points over time between 0 and 100 This will determine the level and direction of the morph For exam
183. ated topics Markers Adjusting Envelopes 4 6 6 Pitch correction This dialog allows you to detect and change the pitch of a sound without affecting its length e Amount of Shift use these controls to find out the current pitch of the audio and if desired calculate the required shift to match a specific pitch e Method use these controls to adjust the method and quality you wish to use when processing the pitch change You can also choose how the length of the sound is affected by the operation By default this process will not change the length of the sound This tool could be useful for fixing an off key vocal note in a live recording or tuning the pitch of a kick drum sample to fit a particular song for example You can access this dialog from the Audio File Workspace via Process gt Pitch Correc tion Pitch correction is also available as a batch processing plug in in the Batch Processor Workspace In addition Pitch correction for a Clip is available from the Focused Clip window via Edit gt Pitch shift Note that for Batch processing and Clip processes the envelope option is not available For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Adjusting Envelopes 4 6 7 Time stretching This dialog allows you to change the duration of an audio selection usually without changing its pitch
184. ating CDs but there are some differences Montages are always rendered prior to the DVD burning process A DVD Audio project can contain up to 9 Montages with up to 99 tracks in each Montage Thus for DVD Audio you will probably make preparations for several separate Montages that are to be included on the DVD first then proceed to the DVD Audio window to configure the DVD Audio project where you add the separate Montages as groups Lastly you render the files before the actual burning process takes place Each Montage can have a different channel configuration bit resolution and sample rate in the DVD Audio project For more information on authoring DVD Audio disks see DVD Audio DVD A picture tracks DVD A picture tracks can be added to Montages that are to be burned to DVD These tracks have no functionality in WaveLab itself other than offering the ability to place pictures along the time line which will be shown together with the audio when the final DVD A is played back in a compatible player connected to a video display To add a picture first add a new picture track via the track menu Place your cursor where you would like to insert your image and right click on the track to display the Insert context menu where you can browse for an image file to include You can also adjust picture settings or add default images via the DVD Audio options dialog Exporting and importing AES 31 files You can import and export AES 31 files into and out
185. ault the meter segments and numerical peak values are displayed in green for low levels yellow for levels between 6dB and 2dB and red for levels above 2dB You can change both the colors and the range boundaries if you wish via the Level Pan Meter Settings dialog This can be accessed through the Functions gt Settings menu or by using the 4 icon The VU Volume Unit meters measure the average loudness RMS of each channel These meters have a built in inertia evening out loudness variations over a user defined time span If you are monitoring playback or audio input you will also note two vertical lines following each VU meter bar seemingly trying to reach the current RMS value These lines indicate the average of the most recent minimum RMS values left line and the average of the most recent maximum RMS values right line To the left the difference between the minimum and maximum average values is displayed the level value in brackets this gives you an overview of the dynamic range of the audio material If you are monitoring real time audio playback or input the maximum peak and loud ness values are displayed numerically to the right of the meter bars Numbers in brack ets to the right of the Maximum Peak values indicate the number of successive clips OdB signal peaks Recording levels should be set so that they only rarely clip If the master level is set too high the sound quality and frequency response will be comp
186. ave window Render Montage window Master Section Audio Plug ins 4 9 Scripting WaveLab contains a powerful scripting language to help advanced users create their own scripts to automate tasks Using basic scripts can be useful for automating repetitive editing WaveLab 7 4 9 Scripting 63 tasks such as trimming and cropping a file at specific times for example You can write scripts that perform other basic editing commands apply offline processing place markers and display information about the active file You can script commands to edit the active Audio File or the active Audio Montage If you have some experience of programming with modern scripting languages you should have no problem writing utility scripts for WaveLab The WaveLab Scripting language is based on ECMAScript with the addition of WaveLab specific commands If you have had any experience with Javascript Jscript or Actionscript the code syntax will be familiar to you as they are all based on ECMAScript too If not there is a large amount of teaching and reference material available online A Javascript reference such as www w3schools com for example or a book like JavaScript The Definitive Guide are good places to start To begin exploring the WaveLab specific functions available see WaveLab Scripting Lan guage For a broader look at the complete subset of commands available see ECMAScript Reference Getting started To write and execute a script 1
187. aveLab 7 280 Interface Elements 11 1 85 Silence Generator This dialog allows you to generate silence either by replacing an audio selection or by specifying a duration You can also specify a cross fade at each end of the silent region for a smoother transition Radio buttons determine where the silent period is placed in the audio In WaveLab you can also specify a file to be inserted instead of true silence This can be useful for example if you wish to keep the ambience or background noise of a particular environment in a recording You can access this dialog in the Audio File Workspace via Edit gt Silence advanced For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Silence 11 1 86 Smart bypass This dialog allows you to correct for any level change introduced by plug in effects in the Master Section Some effects when applied to the signal chain can cause an increase or decrease in level between their input and output signals and this impairs objective comparisons between pro cessed and unprocessed sounds By compensating this level shift an objective A B com parison is possible This is the core purpose of this feature which is a must have tool for Mastering Although some plug ins have an output level or make up gain control such as most com pressors for example it can be quite diff
188. b 7 12 9 Steinberg DeEsser 339 by the s sound hence the name de esser Close proximity microphone placement and equalizing can lead to situations where the overall sound is just right but there is a problem with sibilant hissing sounds The following parameters are available e Reduction Controls the intensity of the de essing effect e Threshold When the Auto Threshold option is deactivated you can use this control to set a thresh old for the incoming signal level above which the plug in starts to reduce the sibilants e Auto The Auto Threshold function automatically and continually chooses an optimum thresh old setting independent of the input signal The Auto Threshold function does not work for low level signals lt 30db peak level To reduce the sibilants in such a file set the threshold manually Release Sets the amount of time it takes for the de essing effect to return to zero when the signal drops below the threshold value Level meters Indicate the dB values of the input IN and output OUT signals as well as the value by which the level of the sibilant or s frequency is reduced GR The gain reduction meter shows values between OdB no reduction and 20dB the s frequency level is lowered by 20dB Positioning the DeEsser in the signal chain When recording a voice the de esser s position in the signal chain is usually located after the microphone preamp and before a compressor limiter
189. b 7 Pro is the all in one solution for professional mastering high resolution multi channel audio editing audio restoration sample design radio broadcast and podcasting work right through to complete CD DVD A production For some time WaveLab has been the standard application for digital audio editing and processing due to its outstanding flex ibility and pristine audio quality Version 7 of the application adds a dazzling collection of 28 WaveLab Concepts features to satisfy the needs of top professionals and audio enthusiasts Sample accurate time and spectrum audio editing Now available for both the Mac and PC platforms ideally suited to high performance multi screen setups Excellent performance and outstanding audio quality with support for all common bit rates 8 16 20 24 and 32 bit floating point resolution at up to 384 kHz Powerful Audio Montage for simultaneous non destructive editing across several tracks Red Book compatible CD mastering and Audio CD DVD A authoring and burning Comprehensive suite of real time metering and analysis tools including global analy sis 3D spectrum analysis VU meter spectroscope oscilloscope phasescope and a powerful Spectrum editor A large library of plug ins are provided including the entire Steinberg collection Sonnox audio restoration and batch specific plug ins An unlimited number of audio lanes with unlimited file size over 2GB Extensive batch file processing
190. b there are a few things to note when rendering a file with the default option Bypass Master Section on resulting Audio File selected in the Render dialog the Master Section will be bypassed completely when the new file has finished rendering If this option is not selected you will hear the Master Section effects being played back on top of the newly rendered effects You can check if the Master Section has been bypassed by checking the status of the Y Play through Master Section button which is located at the bottom right hand corner of the status bar the Master Section s Bypass switch affects playback only So even if you can t hear effects when you are playing back your audio any applied effects are still rendered the Effect on off switch for each individual plug in affects both playback and Rendering if you are working with an Audio File montage that contains lots of effects and or tracks and you experience playback problems it can be useful to mix down a copy of your montage audio file to free up some processing power You can then continue editing the resultant file with the effects rendered Remember to save a copy of your session before doing this so you can go back and edit any levels or effects if you need to For more information about choosing settings when rendering see the Render Wave window and Render Montage window For more information on applying effects see the Master Section Related topics Render W
191. band pass and a Cut lowpass high pass filter When Cut mode is selected the Gain parameter is fixed Shelf adds resonance in the opposite gain direction slightly above the set frequency Shelf Il adds resonance in the gain direction at the set frequency Shelf III is a combination of Shelf and Il Band 2 Gain 20 to 24dB Sets the amount of cut boost for the mid 1 band Band 2 Inv button Inverts the gain value of the filter see the description of the Invert button for Band 1 Band 2 Freq 20 to 20000Hz Sets the center frequency of the mid 1 band Band 2 Q Factor 0 5 to 10 Sets the width of the mid 1 band the higher this value the narrower the bandwidth Band 3 Gain 20 to 24dB Sets the amount of cut boost for the mid 2 band Band 3 Inv button Inverts the gain value of the filter see the description of the Invert button for Band 1 Band 3 Freq 20 to 20000Hz Sets the center frequency of the mid 2 band Band 3 Q Factor 0 5 to 10 Sets the width of the mid 2 band the higher this value the narrower the bandwidth Band 4 Inv button Inverts the gain value of the filter see the description of the Invert button for Band 1 WaveLab 7 368 Audio Plug ins Band 4 Gain 20 to 24dB Sets the amount of cut boost for the high band Band 4 Freq 200 to 20000Hz Sets the frequency of the high band Band 4 Q Factor 0 5 to 10 Controls the width or resonance of the high band Band 4 Filter mode
192. be more attenuated For the Low and High pass filters a low Filter steepness setting is normally used around 6 to 18dB Blur peaks This filter operation analyzes the region to find the frequencies with the highest level The level of these frequencies will be attenuated or boosted according to the set Gain value If the gain is negative these frequencies will be blurred and disappear in the mix as a whole The purpose of the filter is to mask the loudest frequencies e g it could be used to eliminate a sudden burst of pitched but unwanted sound in the audio material like acoustic feedback This mode works best with the Infinite steepness setting which is automatically selected when Blur peaks is used You can however freely set any Filter steepness setting The filter type options are not available when this mode is selected Dispersion This is a special filter that smears the dynamics and pitch of the region without changing the actual frequency content This works best on lower frequencies to mask the identity of a signal without changing the frequency spectrum This mode works best with the Infinite steepness setting which is automatically selected when Dispersion is used You can however freely set any Filter steepness setting The filter type options are not available when this mode is selected Dispersion can also be used to create special effects as it warps the sound in an unique way Fade Out This can be use
193. be one instance of each Audio Meter For example if you dock one meter ina Workspace it will be automatically removed from the place where it was previously located Audio Meters can appear in the Audio File Audio Montage Workspaces as well as the Con trol Window They can be used as a docked window in a Workspace as a tabbed window in the control window as an independent floating window In this mode it can be useful to make the window frameless from Window gt Hide frame to save screen space In this case the whole menu is accessed by right clicking The axis of most Audio Meters may be rotated to view the graphics horizontally or vertically Some meters can also have their visual style and display parameters customized via their corresponding settings dialog This can be accessed through the Functions gt Settings menu in each meter window or by using the 4 icon Related topics VU Meter Spectroscope Oscilloscope Bit Meter Phasescope Spectrometer Wavescope WaveLab 7 9 3 Metering 223 9 3 1 VU Meter The vu meter is used to display the peak and average loudness decibel level of your Audio File It also displays the pan or the balance between the left and right channels in a stereo file The upper part of the level pan meter window shows the peak level and average loudness in the following way e The Peak Level meters display the peak levels of each channel graphically and numeri cally By def
194. be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Window Related topics Metering Spectroscope 5 3 7 Wavescope The Wavescope meter displays a real time waveform drawing of the audio signal being mon itored It can be useful when recording or rendering a file if Monitor File rendering mode is active Making settings You can adjust settings for the display via the Wavescope Settings dialog This can be accessed via Functions gt Settings menu or by using the 4 icon Here you can set various color options for the background grid and waveform display as well as setting the waveform rendering speed and vertical zoom If Clear waveform when reaching right of pane is checked the waveform display is cleared each time the cursor reaches the right end of the display If unchecked the previous waveform is overwritten Tip Wavescope is a useful meter for visualizing audio during recording The Wavescope meter can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces WaveLab 7 116 Audio File editing It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Win dow Related topics Metering 5 4 Transport controls The transport controls allow you to control playback within an Audio File or montage and to open the record window It can be accessed via the Transport menu or the Transport toolbar See Command bars for more information
195. berg Mono to Stereo vaca ee eee ae eR OR ees 352 12 22 Steinberg Multiband Compressor lt lt ee ee eee 353 12 29 Steinberg Octavef a Pe ki eae ee Pe O eee Ee a 355 12 24 Steinberg Pingpong Delay 5 06 5 56 bee ada re eee ew eas 355 12 25 Steinberg POSE lt o ch ha SS ee Kee ee RE CRE So 357 12 26 Steinberg Roomworks i516 a Gos ta ee SRS AS oa GS ea 359 12 27 Steinberg Roomworks SE ooo tbe betta we eee eee eee 362 12 28 Se Delay a HR ee FOR AA Bm 363 12 29 Steinberg Stereo Enhance 1 4 5 sek ba ee ee ea 364 12 30 Steinberg Studio Chorus 2 255 56 4 es ce ee a 365 12 31 Steinberg Studio EQ iio road be toe ee ews me dew wo Os 366 12 32 Steinberg Test Generator o oo oe es 368 WaveLab 7 CONTENTS ix 1283 UV22AR Dieting oe oh A A A te Ew a ee aa 369 12 34 Steinberg Vintage Compressor o oo e es 370 12 35 Steinberg VST Dynamics ke cw ae a aa 371 12 36 COSA PRESI o he GD ed ro 374 pe a ig a a p oan i We ean AR ha ths ae A a 375 12 38 Leveler Muli cc se A A Ve e De a 375 12 89 Peak WMS oka AG Cee Ra wae ES le ee a ee Ra 376 1240 SENEE e e ene os Beda Bae SS Wed Bw Bete Gre SH Rw dS tei Bors We Fs 377 12 41 Stereo Expander ot ot AS O AR A ee a a a wR 377 12 42 Internal Dithenng lt s ee ee e a a a ee 378 13 Utilities 379 13 1 IIA CD ia A A A RA 379 13 2 Burn Audio CD from DDP Image 2 54 6604 508 ir be ees bee 380 133 OAR o et ho ees SS a ES da A ee A 380 134 Bat
196. can also be archived to CD DVD via a dedicated command You can access this feature from the Master Project window via File gt Add to Data CD DVD which is available if the Master Project has been saved to file once i e it is not untitled Only one Master Project can be opened at a time but it can appear as a tool window in each Workspace In other words there is a single content that can be visualized independently in various windows These windows may be docked or floated WaveLab 7 310 Interface Elements You can access this Specific tool window from any Workspace via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Master Project For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Dragging operations Recently used files 11 3 10 Focused Clip window The Focused Clip window is an accordion control that contains some sophisticated editing commands Each collapsible panel can be expanded by clicking on its title and allows you to access a range of tools for working with the selected or focused Clip Using the Focused Clip window To use the Focused Clip window you first need to select a Clip Once you have selected a Clip with your cursor its name will highlight in red You can now choose one of the Focused Clip accordion s tabs The accordion will open to reveal options for that particular pane s selection
197. cessed by a shortcut key this dialog is a quick way to jump from one file to another if you have many of them open and spread across various Workspaces This dialog is designed for productivity Keeping this dialog open means that it will automatically be updated if any document is closed opened saved or edited You can navigate the list using the arrow keys or by using a z on your keyboard You can access this dialog via Global gt List of all open files For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics 11 1 56 Pan Normalizer This dialog allows you to ensure that both channels of a stereo file have the same level or loudness Since loudnesss is more important than peak volume in the perception of sound this is a powerful tool to get the best possible stereo balance This process uses two passes to first analyze the audio and then render any level changes required You must have a stereo selection in a stereo file to apply this process You can access this dialog from the Audio File Workspace via Process gt Pan Normalizet This function is also available as a batch processing plug in You can access it from the Batch Processor Workspace via Plug ins window gt Multipass Plug ins gt Pan Normalizer For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon
198. ch Conversion eae Re bee RE ee ee 382 139 Baich Renaming e e c ces baca we ae Re es A a ee a 382 1309 eg Wy a a ie ira ta eee ee acc AEE EPO 383 13 7 Background Task MONET se eo A a Sees 384 138 0 Timecode ae ce ae a a RS ee A ee ee em 384 14 How dol 387 14 1 import songs from an audio CD into WaveLab 387 14 2 ause VST PUGS lt A eee ee eke eae ee So 387 148 edit an existing Audio PIE kG ee heb ee ad 388 14 4 compile and edit several Audio Files on multiple tracks 388 145 apply processing to an Audio File 000 002 ee eee 388 14 6 convert an Audio File into another audio format 389 14 7 __ play back with real time effects o ooooooo o 389 148 record new Audio File 2664 asa reek ee daa na As 389 14 9 convert the sample rate of an Audio File 389 14 10 create a Podras oo koi he hed whe EA eS RE RETARD 390 14 11 open an aac m4a or m4p Audio File from Apple iTunes 390 15 Glossary 391 ISl ADPOGM oase A A wR Rd ww Sik ead 394 A III 394 13 o A Sh eh oh hE hw ee a a i A 394 15 4 Apple Lossless files 2 0 00 cee es 395 155 ALARM se SR a Oe Ae oe eG SOR BES ee ge RRS 395 LN A eo a ee Gh Poe ew eh Bees eae we de 395 Vey Par iiaa nt aha a ee y de At 395 159 AA we os Bi dee ee ela a a a G 395 gt is 2 eee E 396 15 10 Audio MOSS oe see he ee A eS ew ee ee a a a 396 TEU DEMI 2s 2k a deal a a aa RA a e
199. ch Processing for more information 14 10 create a Podcast To create a Podcast you use the Podcast Workspace First you need to create a new Podcast there are several ways to do this e From within the Podcast Workspace choose File gt New or e From the Audio File Workspace add Audio Files to a podcast by choosing File gt Spe cial gt Add to Podcast or e Select Edit gt Create Podcast from Audio File The Podcast Workspace is where you assemble define and publish your Podcast to the Internet See Podcasts for more information 14 11 open an aac m4a or m4p Audio File from Apple iTunes Apple OS X and iTunes uses a number of proprietary audio codecs These can be found natively on Apple OS X but on Windows platforms you need to install QuickTime this is normally installed with iTunes on a PC QuickTime provides WaveLab with the necessary codecs to open these file formats Other file formats that are available using QuickTime include caf m4v qt dv and others WaveLab 7 Chapter 15 Glossary A B 6 D E F G H I J K L M N 0 P Q R S ij U V W X y Z ADPCM AESS31 AIFF files Apple Lossless files ALAW files Aliasing Amplitude ASIO Attack Audio montage Bandwidth Bit depth Blu ray Disk C CD Frame CD Pre emphasis CD Text Chorus Clip Clipping Compression Cross fade D DAW DC Offset DDP files Decibel dB Dithering DVD A E ECMAScript Enson
200. choose to process it separately from the non selected frequency spectrum The signal is split so that one part region spectrum or non selected spec trum is sent to the plug ins while the other part can be mixed with this processed signal after the Master Section output Using the Spectrum editor You can use the Spectrum editor in two main operational modes Region copying and filtering Operations tab This is mainly intended for audio restoration applied over brief time ranges Selections can be copied pasted and filtered This type of processing is mainly used to reduce remove or replace unwanted sound artifacts in the audio material and can be carried out with great precision This could be useful for example to replace part of a live recording that contains an unwanted noise such as a mobile phone ring tone with a copy of a similar region of the spectrum that only contains a clean signal In general the spectral Copy Paste combination gives the best results given that the source and destination regions are properly choosen Master Section processing Master Section tab This allows you to process a specific frequency range via the Master Section The selected or non selected regions of the spectrum can be processed differently You can also employ a number of filters Bandpass Low pass High pass to further refine the particular range of frequencies to be affected by any Master Section effects A selected spectrum region can
201. ck spectrum overview For a more detailed analysis of the audio spectrum use the Spectrometer The Spectroscope can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used ei ther as a floating window or docked in the Workspace lt can also be docked in the Control Window Related topics Metering Spectrometer 4 5 3 Oscilloscope The Oscilloscope offers a highly magnified view of the waveform around the playback cursor position If you are analyzing a stereo file the Oscilloscope normally shows the separate levels of the two channels However if you activate the option Show Sum and Subtraction on the Functions menu or click the icon the upper half of the Oscilloscope shows the sum of the two channels and the lower half shows the subtraction Making settings By opening the Settings dialog you can adjust the display colors and choose to activate Auto zoom or not With Auto zoom activated the display is optimized so that the highest level reaches the top of the display at all times The Settings dialog can be accessed through the Functions gt Settings menu or by using the 4 icon The Oscilloscope can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces lt can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace lt can also be docked in the Control Window Related topics Metering 4 5 4 Bit Meter The Bit Meter shows the resolution or the nu
202. con views as well as additional controls to audition Audio Files and any marker defined regions You can use it to open or insert an entire file or a specific region of a file by dragging and releasing the file in the location you wish to insert the file In the Audio Montage Workspace you can also choose to only view certain types of WaveLab specific files The File Browser can be very useful in speeding up the process of auditioning a long list of sound files lt can also be used to drag to windows such as Data CD DVD including dragging folders The playback functions Play file gt Once you have selected a file in the File Browser list you can audition it by clicking Play in the File Browser s toolbar Click again to stop Auto play You can also have files play back automatically as soon as they are selected To do this activate Auto Play mode Tip To audition a long list of Audio Files enable Auto play and use the UP and DOWN cursor keys to step through each Audio File in quick succession Opening and inserting a file or region Once you have chosen a file you wish to open double click it to open the file in the current Workspace You can also open it by dragging it onto an empty tabbed group or onto the tab bar of a tabbed group You can also drag the file over a wave view to insert it at a given point When you drag a file over a wave view a beam is displayed so as to clearly display the insertion point When browsing Audio F
203. cs Rendering Audio Plug ins Audio File Format Dialog Master Section 10 3 Plug ins settings This dialog allows you to access a number of options for managing your VST plug ins WaveLab 7 234 Master Section You can specify where WaveLab should search for your VST plug ins and which ones it should ignore It also allows you to choose how your VST plug in knobs respond to mouse interactions and how frequently they are updated visually If you use your own file structure to organize and store VST Plug ins this dialog allows you to have full control over which ones are loaded or not This can be particularly useful if you want to disable a particular plug in that you suspect of not functioning properly or to only load a certain set of plug ins for a specific project for example You can access this dialog from the Master Section via Options gt VST Plug in settings For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio Plug ins WaveLab 7 Chapter 11 Interface Elements This section contains links to all of the various types of windows and dialogs within WaveLab Related topics Dialogs Shared tool windows Specific tool windows 11 1 Dialogs There are many dialog windows within WaveLab that allow you to access all its features and processing power You can get help on a particular di
204. ct If StudioChorus is used as a send effect set this to the maximum value as you can control the dry effect balance with the send e Waveform Shape button Allows you to select the modulation waveform altering the character of the chorus sweep A sine and a triangle waveform are available e Delay Affects the frequency range of the modulation sweep by adjusting the initial delay time e Filter Lo Hi Allow you to roll off low and high frequencies of the effect signal Note that the modulation can also be controlled from another signal source via the side chain input When the sidechain signal exceeds the threshold the modulation is controlled by the side chain signal s envelope WaveLab 7 366 Audio Plug ins Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets 12 31 Steinberg Studio EQ e 1 Steinberg StudioEQ This is a high quality 4 band parametric stereo equalizer with two fully parametric mid range bands The low and high bands can act as either shelving filters three types or Parameter Description as a Peak band pass or Cut low pass high pass filter Making settings 1 Click the corresponding On button on the left of the plug in panel to activate any or all of the 4 equalizer bands Low Mid 1 Mid 2 and High When a band is activated the corresponding EQ point appears in the EQ curve display 2 Set the parameters for an activated EQ band This can be done in several
205. ct a region of the Audio File first select a From and To point using one of the methods available Additional options allow you to control your selection further You can access this dialog in the Audio File and Audio Montage Workspaces by choosing Edit gt Select gt Edit For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics 11 1 11 Audio Streaming Settings This dialog allows you to specify how WaveLab s internal input and output channels are connected to your sound card and which device you intend to use for audio playback and recording You can define the buffer settings for your device as well as setting up connections to external gear such as external effects units You should select at least two channels for stereo playback and recording e Control Panel clicking this will launch your sound card settings application usually installed with the audio card In most cases this will provide settings for buffer size digital formats additional I O connections etc depending on your sound card and driver Playback tab this allows you to select and name audio ports used for playback If you are monitoring on a surround system specify your surround speaker outputs here Recording tab this allows you to select and name your audio ports used for recording and input monitoring The inputs you define here will then be av
206. cursor position if not playing back in the timecode format currently selected in the Time Format dialog The current time can be in a range of standard SMPTE formats CD or DVD specific formats or a custom one see Time Format dialog The most common use for this window is for working with video or film You can use it to display the playback head position of the current Audio File ina SMPTE format to frame level resolution i e hours minutes seconds frames You can also use it to display CD frames minutes seconds frames when you are authoring CD or DVDs WaveLab 7 11 2 Shared tool windows 297 You can access this window by choosing Workspace gt Shared tool windows gt Time code It is available in the Control Window Audio File Workspace and Audio Montage Workspace For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Time Format dialog CD Frame SMPTE timecode Authoring CDs and DVDs 11 2 9 Background task monitor This specific tool window allows you to view all background rendering processes that are in progress You can adjust the priority with which they are processed pause or cancel them It is useful if you have a number of lengthy processes underway and want to free up some processing power to focus on editing You can either lower the priority of a task so it does not use as much of the comp
207. cuted on multiple Clips or Selected Clips e Focused Clip there can only ever be one or no Focused Clip at a time The Focused Clip s name is displayed in red It s necessary to identify the Clip as focused because there are certain functions that can only be executed on a single Clip You use the Focused Clip window to perform these functions e Selected Clip there can be many selected Clips This allows you to edit multiple Clips at the same time using functions such as copy delete move etc Selected Clips have a different background color Glossary contents 15 19 Clipping Clipping is a form of audio distortion that occurs when a signal is truncated because it exceeds the capabilities of the amplifier circuit On an oscilloscope the audio peaks appear sliced off To avoid clipping reduce the system gain in or before the gain stage in which the clipping occurs Steinberg Limiter Glossary contents 15 20 Compression Compression This dynamic process is used to smooth out any large transient peaks in an audio signal that would otherwise cause distortion through clipping or otherwise overloading the system Levels are progressively attenuated as they approach maximum levels WaveLab 7 15 21 Cross fade 399 Steinberg Compressor Steinberg Multiband Compressor Steinberg Vintage Compressor Glossary contents 15 21 Cross fade Cross fade is mixing two audio signals by fading one out at the same time as fading th
208. d choose Capture as the mode 2 Place a second instance of the plug in after the first one and choose either Restore peak level or Restore loudness RMS You can access this dialog from the Batch Processor Workspace via Plug ins window gt Multipass Plug ins gt Loudness Restorer For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Batch Processing Plug ins WaveLab 7 7 3 Batch Processing Plug ins 203 7 3 0 14 Meta Normalizer This dialog is exclusive to the Batch Processor Workspace and allows you to normalize a batch of files all to the same level The core purpose of this plug in is to achieve the same loudness in all files the highest loudness found if possible while being certain that no file will clip For each file a specific gain is computed by the plug in once all files have been analyzed and prior to actually applying any gain to achieve the common loudness If it is not possible to match the highest found loudness the level of the file with the highest loudness is reduced so that other files can get the same loudness You can choose between peak level or loudness RMS as a method of determing the equal level between all files in the batch This equal level is then used to apply a gain to each file in the batch You can access this dialog from the Batch Processor Workspace via Plug
209. d interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Clip Audio Streaming Settings Customize Commands Audio Montage Colors 6 4 8 Notes This specific tool window allows you to keep notes about the current Audio Montage session You can type into the window and use the standard HTML text editor controls to format your text add images hyperlinks and lists These notes are saved along with the Audio Montage file You can access this dialog in the Audio Montage Workspace via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Notes For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Specific tool windows 6 4 9 Scripting window Audio Montage Workspace This window allows you to write and execute scripts in the Audio Montage Workspace The inbuilt text editor helps you when writing scripts by highlighting the different parts of the script with colors making it more readable A script can also be written in another text WaveLab 7 6 4 Specific tool windows 167 editor and loaded via the File menu To run a script from within the script window choose Functions gt Execute script For a general description of scripting see Scripting For an overview of the scripting lan guage see ECMAScript Reference You can access this dialog from
210. d interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio Montages Groups 11 3 22 Groups This specific tool window displays a list of Groups within the current Audio Montage Groups are a selection of Clips that you can quickly re select via the Groups window You can group WaveLab 7 11 3 Specific tool windows 319 a number of Clips and nest Groups inside each other It is also possible to disable individual Groups and color Groups so you can identify them easily Grouping Clips To create a Group from a number of Clips 1 Select the Clips you want to group 2 Make sure you have the Groups window displayed 3 Select Group selected clips from the drop down menu or click the Group icon 4 Enter a name for the Group in the dialog that appears and click OK The new Group appears in the Group list All Clips included in the Group will also have the name of the Group prepended to the Clip names in each track Clicking on a Group in the Groups window will select all the Clips in your Montage so you can edit them together Adding Clips to an existing Group If you already have a Group and want to add one or several more Clips to it 1 Select the Clips you want to add 2 In the Groups view select Group selected clips or click the corresponding icon 3 In the dialog that appears select the Group to which you want to add the Clips 4 Click OK
211. d tool windows 135 You can adjust the priority with which they are processed pause or cancel them It is useful if you have a number of lengthy processes underway and want to free up some processing power to focus on editing You can either lower the priority of a task so it does not use as much of the computer processor s capacity or pause the task temporarily You can access this window by choosing Workspace gt Shared tool windows gt Back ground task monitor It is available in the Control Window Audio File Workspace and Audio Montage Workspace You can also access this window in the Control Window by choosing Utilities gt Background task monitor You can choose to automatically open the Background task monitor when a rendering pro cess begins To enable this option select the checkbox via Options gt Global Preferences gt Options gt Make the Background Task Monitor visible when a task starts Since this window is a Shared_tool_window the location where it opens may vary For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Specific tool windows Control Window Rendering 5 6 10 Log window This shared tool window allows you to view log messages that have been issued by WaveLab When using WaveLab s scripting language for example the logWindow function outputs messages to this window There are a numbe
212. d we ae ows 4 5 7 A ya ES a Ras Pavan ae 5 ahs ii CONTENTS 4 6 COMING Processing gt o a KR Ra ra OG A le A Ee oe 46 4 6 1 Change Level oo eee ek hid ae a BR Wid eee ae le de 47 4 6 2 Level BIOS a ne ae adea a Ra ae ee a 48 4 6 3 Normalize Level coo coo ee ee Da eee eee eae d 48 4 6 4 Silence Generator cis sra rr rara eR RE ee eS 49 4 6 5 Loop Tone Uniformizer aaau aaa 49 4 6 6 Pitch OI CHION ee ek nee a ma ea a E A 50 4 6 7 TUS SURI lt a sis WA Be SS AA SSS y ate 50 4 6 8 Loop Tweaker 1 2c 51 4 6 9 PRS MONG sb ee ee A a ae be ee Ses g 52 4 6 10 Loudness distribution 0 o ee 53 4 6 11 Loudness normaliZer 0 ooo e 53 46 12 Pan INormalizer osos 6 a ae e 54 A613 IFA pend es alacri ii Ws bs PA E A AS oaia 54 4 6 14 Pitehguantize 400 ia ae eo ee 55 AMS PESE lt A E a a a 55 4 6 16 Rendering se ed ad mesai a a e A Ge 58 4 7 A A 59 4 8 O ies a eh do pe Ae ig ie a ee Whe ee aA al a 61 4 9 o ao ie a Kota ak aah hn aa we a a Aa ia A Ra ch aed ae fal he A 62 4 9 1 WaveLab Scripting Language 0 oooooo oo 65 4 9 2 ECMAScript Reference o o ooo eo ss 71 4 10 The Spectumdisplay cia a A A a 79 4 10 1 Spectrogram options o rara se bees a BN ewes 2 79 1 Ge CHUAGONO scs ar a Do r ORS ae ow ES od 80 4 11 0 1 Spectrum Processing Modes ooooo o 82 412 About Regular Expressions a AA A eS 83 5 Audio File editing 89 5 1 so oa o
213. d with any of the three filter types Bandpass Low pass High pass It grad ually filters the frequencies in the region along the time axis from nothing at the left edge of the region to maximum allowed by the gain parameter at the right edge useful for gradually removing frequencies from a region Fade In This works like Fade out but inversed It can also be used in conjunction with any of the three filter types Bandpass Low pass High pass Fade out then in This is a mix of the two previous options the filtering effect gradually fades out until the middle of the region then fades back in It can also be used in conjunction with any of the three filter types Bandpass Low pass High pass Fade in then out The inverse of the above It can also be used in conjunction with any of the three filter types Bandpass Low pass High pass Related topics WaveLab 7 304 Interface Elements The Spectrum display Spectrogram options Spectrum editor 11 3 3 Basic Audio CD This specific tool window allows you to burn basic Red Book compatible audio CDs You create your audio CD by adding Audio Files to create a list of tracks Each track contains a reference to the external Audio File This means that you can save your Basic Audio CD layout as its own session and continue editing individual tracks for example Once you are happy with your CD layout you can choose to check the cd for conformity to the Red Book standard burn t
214. dialog that appears Now you can choose to make the settings instantly available for selection in the FFT Meter window by using the Assign to preset button submenu on the pop up menu e When you are finished click OK to close the dialog WaveLab 7 4 5 Metering 45 Selecting Spectrometer presets If you have assigned your settings to the Preset buttons in the Settings dialog you can quickly switch between different level scales and display modes by clicking one of the Preset icons 1 5 or selecting the desired preset from the Options pop up menu Exporting FFT data as ASCII text When using the Spectrometer in off line mode Monitor Edit cursor Position or Analyze audio election mode you can export the displayed FFT data as a text file by selecting Export FFT data as ASCII from the Options pop up menu The resulting text file can then be imported into applications that allow graph plotting from text files Microsoft Excel for example The Spectrometer can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Window Related topics Metering Spectroscope 4 5 7 Wavescope The Wavescope meter displays a real time waveform drawing of the audio signal being mon itored It can be useful when recording or rendering a file if Monitor File rendering mode is active Making settings You can adjust
215. dicated to that Workspace type They perform useful tasks in the active Workspace The File Browser and Marker windows are examples of specific tool windows Specific tool windows can be docked and un docked anywhere within their Workspace and saved in your custom layouts They can also float as standalone windows in a specific Workspace Shared tool windows Shared tool windows are shared between certain Workspaces and are independent of any one Workspace Like specific tool windows they can be docked and un docked and saved in your custom layouts The Master Section is an example of a shared window The main difference with Specific tool windows is that only one instance of a Shared tool window can exist at any one time in WaveLab When you open a shared tool window that is referenced in another Workspace it will move from the other Workspace to the active one A shared tool window can be moved and docked exactly like a specific tool window how ever in addition Shared tool windows can float as an independent window that is inde pendent of any Workspace Each shared tool window has a menu entry to allow this floating WaveLab 7 3 2 Adjusting Envelopes 7 mode They can also be placed in the Control Window in a tab group Each shared tool window has a menu entry to allow this Place in Control Window Differences between Mac and Windows Floating windows behave slightly differently on Apple Mac and Windows due to some
216. ding e Options use this tab to determine various options affecting how the recording dialog window behaves while recording e Values use this tab to define numerical values for the various recording options avail able You can access this dialog from the Transport controls Y button or by choosing Transport gt Record For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio Streaming Settings Audio File Format Dialog Record create marker 11 1 67 Record create marker This dialog allows you to name markers to drop while you are recording an Audio File You can enter a name for each marker and an optional time offset Creating named markers can be useful for junping to these points quickly when later review ing or editing the recording You can access this dialog while recording from the Recording dialog dropping a marker by clicking the button You must have the Confirm name of markers to drop option selected for this dialog to appear This option is located in the Options tab of the Record dialog For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help WaveLab 7 272 Interface Elements Related topics Recording Dialog 11 1 68 Rename File dialog This dialog allows you to rename a file and
217. dio Streaming Settings You can choose single or multiple channel outputs for each stereo and mono track in your audio montage For stereo tracks you can define channels individually for both the left and right channels of a stereo track You can also apply a low pass filter to the Low Frequency Effects sub woofer channel in order to eliminate unwanted higher frequencies from being sent to sub woofer speakers You can access this dialog in the Audio Montage Workspace by clicking on the Lf Rf icon at the left hand edge of each track For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio Montages 11 1 95 Value Format This dialog allows you to control the formatting of the different types of data values in your CD report These include the date time audio time track indexing and serial number formats For example you may wish to display dates in the format date month year instead of with a full time and date stamp the default You can choose from the many formatting options available for each data type in its corresponding drop down menu You can access this dialog in the Audio Montage Workspace s CD window via Functions gt Generate Audio CD report gt Value Format For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Gett
218. dy have a Group and want to add one or several more Clips to it 1 Select the Clips you want to add 2 In the Groups view select Group selected clips or click the corresponding icon WaveLab 7 168 Audio Montages 3 In the dialog that appears select the Group to which you want to add the Clips 4 Click OK Removing Groups 1 Select the Group by clicking on its name in the Groups view list 2 Pull down the Grouping menu and select Remove selected group The Group is removed the Clips are not affected Using Groups There are some important things to remember when using Groups e A Clip cannot be part of more than one Group If you add a Clip to a Group it is automatically removed from any other Group it is part of e It is possible to create nested Groups by adding a Group to another Group e You can temporarily turn off a Group by deactivating the checkbox to the left of a Group in the list When a Group is deactivated you can move individual Clips in the Group as if they were not grouped e You can select a specific color for a Group to make it easy to discern it in the track view e Double click to rename a Group e You can nest a Group inside another Group by dragging it e The Render option is available to render all Groups as individual files Render dialog You can access this window in the Audio Montage Workspace via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Groups For an explanation of each p
219. e WaveLab 7 4 12 About Regular Expressions 87 Regular Expressions WaveLab 7 88 WaveLab Concepts WaveLab 7 Chapter 5 Audio File editing The Audio File Workspace s Wave window is the heart of WaveLab s audio editing capabili ties This is where you view play back and edit individual Audio Files The Wave window gives you a graphical representation of an Audio File It consists of two parts The upper waveform Overview This is mainly used for navigating through long files Since you can have different zoom factors in the two areas the Overview can display the entire wave while the Main view only shows you a detailed portion for precise editing The lower waveform area Main view This is where the audio editing action takes place You can perform various operations on the wave such as copying cutting pasting moving and deleting Waveform views In the Audio File Workspace the main wave editing window and the overview can indepen dently be set to display one of three display modes Wave this is the default waveform display Loudness this displays the average loudness of an Audio File which can be useful in many circumstances For example this display mode gives you an overview of the amount of compression applied to a song The more dips in the curve the more dy namics in the audio material An even curve with few dips indicates that the material is compressed with a limited dyna
220. e e Mute select this to mute the Clip Its color changes in the track view and it is no longer audible during playback A wide range of Clip selection features Clip functions and Clip display options are available from the Clips menu Use What s This help for information on individual menu entries You can access this window in the Audio Montage Workspace via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Clips For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Specific tool windows Audio Montages Clip 6 4 7 Focused Clip window The Focused Clip window is an accordion control that contains some sophisticated editing commands Each collapsible panel can be expanded by clicking on its title and allows you to access a range of tools for working with the selected or focused Clip Using the Focused Clip window To use the Focused Clip window you first need to select a Clip Once you have selected a Clip with your cursor its name will highlight in red You can now choose one of the Focused Clip accordion s tabs The accordion will open to reveal options for that particular pane s selection of editing shortcuts and tools There are a number of panes including e Edit provides you with a range of common playback shortcuts and editing tools for working with Clips e Cue Point a cue point is a defined position marker
221. e ae Gaal a ees a 396 1512 ISI car ek Rik ee ete Pe ee ek Be Ae A Bde we Ar Ss eae 396 IS ITA ae oe ae eax a ale AT BR a fg D HE 396 1514 CD Fane AMA iya GD od dee rh oD Base the Goel Greed e 397 18 15 CD Pre emphasis sesa acri e Ra a le Bde OE aah kon 397 AR POT e e dr A A a A A ee 397 IT MOMIA E E O a ER de A ED a 398 e AAA Sow igi Gr eS Bw sie ders ang 398 119 III ok ia ae ol a A rh a al asa 0 398 WaveLab 7 CONTENTS 15 20 15 21 15 22 15 23 15 24 15 25 15 26 15 27 15 28 15 29 15 30 15 31 15 32 15 33 15 34 15 35 15 36 15 37 15 38 15 39 15 40 15 41 15 42 15 43 15 44 15 45 15 46 15 47 15 48 15 49 15 50 15 51 15 52 15 53 15 54 15 55 15 56 15 57 15 58 15 59 15 60 15 61 15 62 15 63 15 64 15 65 15 66 15 67 15 68 15 69 15 70 15 71 15 72 15 73 A o o aos ae A e a ls aa LK Rt A 398 COS A 399 ete Cae ar eR RA LAS a a E ORE ASR REE A a a 399 E e be os AR e eRe ea ewe Sa Oss 399 DOP ES i 4022 ce oh eee Se II 399 Decibel dB aa a ca Po a de ee 400 EXIST 24 cee ee eRe Soe ES a e AAA A 400 ee E ae Se Gee pans He eon eee ee eo See and 400 BO NN i be e e ehh tL Che e ed 401 ENSONI Fans HES os aae a a aa ae SR a es IA E a 401 EQUSIZAUION co Adee bein eh ae er AAA ee ee eS 401 a AA ee ea OU ae kee es Se a ee on fae a 401 Focussd CIP es toch ci ta goa tia ca had wae ba waw hoe e 401 ECM e boon ee be he had Pee de da ds de eee baa a 402 FIE ee eee cae ey a ee ee ee ee en er ae eee ere ee ee
222. e click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Marker types 5 5 3 File Browser This dialog allows you to browse files directly from within WaveLab rather than using your operating system s file browser It provides you with all the standard browsing functions such as List and Icon views as well as additional controls to audition Audio Files and any marker defined regions You can use it to open or insert an entire file or a specific region of a file by dragging and releasing the file in the location you wish to insert the file In the Audio Montage Workspace you can also choose to only view certain types of WaveLab specific files The File Browser can be very useful in speeding up the process of auditioning a long list of sound files It can also be used to drag to windows such as Data CD DVD including dragging folders The playback functions Play file gt Once you have selected a file in the File Browser list you can audition it by clicking Play in the File Browser s toolbar Click again to stop Auto play You can also have files play back automatically as soon as they are selected To do this activate Auto Play mode Tip To audition a long list of Audio Files enable Auto play and use the UP and DOWN cursor keys to step through each Audio File in quick succession WaveLab 7 5 5 Specific tool windows 121 Opening and inserting a file or region Once yo
223. e other in Glossary contents 15 22 DAW DAW A Digital Audio Workstation Is a software and hardware system dedicated to recording editing and playing back digital audio tracks on hard disk Because of the computational demands of audio editing and mastering DAWs are often based on very highly specified PC or Macintosh computers equipped with high quality sound cards large amounts of RAM fast multi processors and large capacity high performance hard disks In addition they may also feature a noise suppressing enclosure and a passive cooling system Glossary contents 15 23 DC Offset DC offset occurs when hardware such as a sound card adds DC current to an audio signal The recorded waveform is not centered around the baseline i e negative infinity WaveLab can correct a DC offset which would otherwise artificially reduce the headroom available during normalization processes DC Remover Glossary contents 15 24 DDP files DDP Disk Description Protocol is an industry format for submitting CD and DVDs to replication facilities DVDs are usually submitted in DDP 2 0 format this is also referred to as Plant Direct Sonic Solutions and DDPi Universal Music A DDP file set for CD consists of DDPID Mandatory DDPMS Mandatory PQ DESCR Optional and one or more Image dat file s Mandatory CD RWs formatted as Audio CDs are really only suitable for content distribution not disk replication or publishin
224. e you can simply click the blue button and the VU Meter window will move back into its tab container You can choose to deactivate the default moving behavior by deselecting Workspace gt Auto move shared tool windows Shared tool windows do not then move when you switch between Workspaces Docking Undocking in the Control Window Certain windows those with a Window and Global menu in their title header can also be arranged in the Control Window These are placed centrally slightly differently to how they behave in the other Workspaces For more information on docking undocking windows in the Control Window see Control Window Related topics Tab Groups About Tool Windows Command bars Control Window 3 6 Double clicking A double click is the act of pressing the mouse button twice quickly without moving the mouse Throughout WaveLab you can achieve the following by double clicking in certain places e Create a new empty document double click on the empty part of a tab bar See Tab Groups for more information e Edit a marker name double click at the right side of a marker s icon in the Audio File or Montage Workspace above the time ruler e Select a region Audio File Workspace double click to select the whole Audio File Where markers exist the region between the markers is selected If markers exist and you wish to select the entire file you can triple click to select the whole file e Set zoom to display entire
225. e 4 45S See 2 eb ee eRe He ERR Oe es 91 31 1 ro A 93 5 1 2 Level envelope 2 93 5 1 3 Normalize Level oaa corada a ee ee ee 94 5 1 4 Silence Generator eka ve eid die eel ge oe We ee 94 5 1 5 Loop Tone Uniformizer 2 0 2 ooo 94 5 1 6 PRON COMECON e c aa eee es bed em ee Me aad a 95 5 1 7 Time SO o ic a oh ee ah Sa OR Ww We deal A a 96 5 1 8 Loop TWeaker sii A fe Sid ee ear ae ig 97 5 1 9 ENSIMA asue agaaa A ARA a 98 5 1 10 Loudness distribution 2 066 ee ee ee 98 5 1 11 Loudness normalizer 0 ee ee 99 51 12 Fan Nomnalzet ee YG ce ce ae a 100 STA Piten pend oe ek RR eae ee a ee ee a 100 SLIS re se ec ake aM we a ee ed be A Re Gn 100 Shio Frasas da to ee ea ae a ee ES we A 101 O INSTA es fb weeks AR A ee eee es 103 5 2 PGW dae ae RAK CA SSO eK OSS eR EE 105 5 2 1 CDA A a RSE ERA SE LS 105 5 2 2 Audio file comparer o ooo eee 106 5 2 3 ALFARO PIM CIS So sci cic A A A al 106 5 2 4 Loudness distribution o ooo e 107 5 3 o A ae A aa OR wa RS a ee A 108 5 3 1 MU Meier ce os ond oe SR ed doe dies aed ede de sehen Ss 109 5 3 2 A AE eS Le Re eS 111 WaveLab 7 CONTENTS iii 5 3 3 Os e Sow ee Hh A BE a a ee a 111 5 3 4 BIE METER o conya A pte ta AY EO Uh ede eka ae ag 111 5 3 5 PASE SCORES coii aasa e we GO ES Be ae ep e 113 5 3 6 o eero bso Ob 66 bed ook ba eae nes Swede 114 5 3 7 WYAVOSEON aa ii Ae ea AOR ae a A Sa ee 115 5 4 POR aa a th ce ida 116
226. e Peak Level meters display the peak levels of each channel graphically and numeri cally By default the meter segments and numerical peak values are displayed in green for low levels yellow for levels between 6dB and 2dB and red for levels above 2dB You can change both the colors and the range boundaries if you wish via the Level Pan Meter Settings dialog This can be accessed through the Functions gt Settings menu or by using the 4 icon e The VU Volume Unit meters measure the average loudness RMS of each channel These meters have a built in inertia evening out loudness variations over a user defined WaveLab 7 6 1 Metering 151 time span If you are monitoring playback or audio input you will also note two vertical lines following each VU meter bar seemingly trying to reach the current RMS value These lines indicate the average of the most recent minimum RMS values left line and the average of the most recent maximum RMS values right line To the left the difference between the minimum and maximum average values is displayed the level value in brackets this gives you an overview of the dynamic range of the audio material If you are monitoring real time audio playback or input the maximum peak and loud ness values are displayed numerically to the right of the meter bars Numbers in brack ets to the right of the Maximum Peak values indicate the number of successive clips OdB signal peaks Recording l
227. e Sa Pas 173 6 5 3 o ns ee hbo SSE ES HESS Dare dd Haws weds 174 6 5 4 PICMG a bx tat wie tee Gi at BO ec ee eet ke 175 6 5 5 OBO OS s so AS oe eG dite oe od ey age Ga a eet 176 6 5 6 Spectrometer ci swe ra aa ee a Ee RS a ew ee 176 6 5 7 a e s dae eb be ae eee ee G ji a ele eB 178 6 5 8 o ceca ahd thd ae a OL ro GO A a Baa Eas WA 178 6 5 9 Background task monitor aaa aaa aaa 179 6510 Log wind sico ra A a A 179 6 6 Audio Montage Colors ses es ees we a See 180 6 7 Audio Montage contextual information naoso aaa 180 7 Batch Processing 183 7 1 SOMO lool MIOS gt 2009 sadne a a A ee a eee SG 185 7 1 1 File Browser ke a a a ee 185 7 1 2 Batch Processing PINGING ace Sa ee ae we eS 186 LLLI O 2 0 eaaa a eaa ee ee a ee a 188 L22 UME es oe ie a ae eid Bn ee eG 188 L23 Resize oi a ee ee ee a 189 Pelee FadelmMOut oo dead ok ah a OH as 189 Ao IU corra 46 bbe phe bee d aa a bind 6 189 7 126 Tite Seth 2 kee a Re eR A 190 712 7 Prien Conecon oc daa A ew eA ees 190 7 1 2 8 Normalize Level o o ooo eee eee 191 71 29 Stereoto Mono caooo oee ee ee eee es 191 PAZO Pan Normali ef A de 191 7 1 2 11 Loudness normalizer 0 oo e 192 7 12 12 DC Remover nacca nanea a aa em ee ee a a 192 7 1 2 13 Loudness Restorer 2 0 eee ee 193 7 1 2 14 Meta Normalizer oo oe e 193 7 1 2 15 Meta Leveler como A te aa 194 7 2 Shared tool windows o o e 194 2 21 Backg
228. e a level envelope If you have chosen a stereo file you can also choose to adjust left and right channels independently once all settings are made choose Generate and WaveLab calculates an Audio File according to your specifications The file is generated and opens up in a new window Generating signals can be useful for a variety of testing and measurement purposes For example you could use the Signal Generator to create a sine wave sweep from say 20Hz to 20 000kHz to test your monitoring environment for resonant frequencies You can access this dialog in the Audio File Workspace via Tools gt Signal Generator For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio properties dialog DTMF Generator 5 7 4 DTMF Generator This dialog allows you to generate DTMF Dual tone multi frequency or MF tones as used by some analog telephone systems These signals are created by combining two sine waves with variable frequencies together Push button telephones generate these two sine waves at different frequencies depending on the number you press These dial pulses are then decoded by the telephone exchange to identify which letters or numbers you pressed WaveLab 7 5 8 Peak Files 139 The DTMF system uses eight different frequency signals transmitted in pairs to repre sent sixteen different numbers symbols
229. e boundaries if you wish via the Level Pan Meter Settings dialog This can be accessed through the Functions gt Settings menu or by using the icon The VU Volume Unit meters measure the average loudness RMS of each channel These meters have a built in inertia evening out loudness variations over a user defined time span If you are monitoring playback or audio input you will also note two vertical lines following each VU meter bar seemingly trying to reach the current RMS value These lines indicate the average of the most recent minimum RMS values left line and the average of the most recent maximum RMS values right line To the left the difference between the minimum and maximum average values is displayed the level value in brackets this gives you an overview of the dynamic range of the audio material If you are monitoring real time audio playback or input the maximum peak and loud ness values are displayed numerically to the right of the meter bars Numbers in brack ets to the right of the Maximum Peak values indicate the number of successive clips OdB signal peaks Recording levels should be set so that they only rarely clip If the master level is set too high the sound quality and frequency response will be compro mised at high recording levels with unwanted clipping effects If the level is set too low noise levels may be high relative to the main sound being recorded Pan meters The lower part of the
230. e button to move it Left click outside the button to move the button directly to that position Right click before or after the button to move the button step by step Keep the mouse button pressed to automatically step to the next value Middle click anywhere to reset the slider to the default value if a default is available Left click and press Ctrl Command anywhere to reset the default value if a default value is available Double click on the button to reset the default value if a default value is available WaveLab 7 18 Using the interface Related topics Adjusting Envelopes 3 12 Status Bar The Status bar is normally displayed at the bottom of the screen and shows information about the active window using the units specified in the rulers The Wave and Mouse cursor time positions are shown using the same units of time as in the rulers and dialog boxes Level positions are always shown in dB This information is updated depending on the cursor position and whether you have a region of audio selected In the case of the Audio File Workspace it gives the following information about the Audio File From left to right e Time Level dB at the mouse cursor position e Wave cursor Time displays the time at the position of the Wave cursor This infor mation changes when you click to reposition the cursor Click on this status bar field to show the Cursor position dialog which you can use to accurately po
231. e comparator For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics 5 2 3 3D Frequency Analysis This function in WaveLab allows you to view a wave file in both the frequency and time domains Although a wave display time domain tells you a lot about where one sound WaveLab 7 5 2 Analysis 107 starts or ends in a file for example it doesn t tell you anything about the timbral contents of the file A frequency graph frequency domain allows you to investigate the individual frequency components of an Audio File With the addition of the time dimension you can follow these frequencies in your Audio File over time and pick out individual snare hits or vocal notes in a song for example The graph used in WaveLab is sometimes called a 3D Spectrogram Displaying and viewing the graph You can choose to analyze a selection of audio or an entire file If you select a stereo record ing a mix of the two channels will be analyzed Once you have your region selected or no region in the case you wish to analyze the whole file choose Analysis gt 3D Frequency Analysis The graph window will appear There is a scrub wheel that allows you to rotate the view around and a settings button that displays the range of frequencies currently displayed Click on this button to open the set tings dialog and edit the frequency ra
232. e ina SMPTE format to frame level resolution i e hours minutes seconds frames You can also use it to display CD frames minutes seconds frames when you are authoring CD or DVDs WaveLab 7 6 5 Shared tool windows 179 You can access this window by choosing Workspace gt Shared tool windows gt Time code It is available in the Control Window Audio File Workspace and Audio Montage Workspace For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Time Format dialog CD Frame SMPTE timecode Authoring CDs and DVDs 6 5 9 Background task monitor This specific tool window allows you to view all background rendering processes that are in progress You can adjust the priority with which they are processed pause or cancel them It is useful if you have a number of lengthy processes underway and want to free up some processing power to focus on editing You can either lower the priority of a task so it does not use as much of the computer processor s capacity or pause the task temporarily You can access this window by choosing Workspace gt Shared tool windows gt Back ground task monitor It is available in the Control Window Audio File Workspace and Audio Montage Workspace You can also access this window in the Control Window by choosing Utilities gt Background task monitor You can choose to automaticall
233. e is composed of hours minutes seconds frames Frames are fractions of a second based on the frame rate which can take the values 24 25 29 97 and 30 frames per second Timecode WaveLab 7 15 68 Sound Designer II files 411 Time Format dialog Glossary contents 15 68 Sound Designer Il files Sound Designer II is an audio file format used by Digidesign applications such as Pro Tools 8 16 or 24 bit resolutions are supported The filename extension is sd2 Glossary contents 15 69 Spectrogram A Spectrogram is an image that shows how the spectral density of a signal varies over time The Spectrum display Glossary contents 15 70 Sun Java files Sun Java is an Audio File format used on Sun and NeXT computers Files in this format can often be found on the Internet 8 16 or 24 bit resolutions are supported Typical file extensions are snd au Glossary contents 15 71 Tempo Tempo is the rhythmic rate of a musical piece usually given in BPM beats per minute Glossary contents 15 72 Text Excel files Text Excel is a text representation of a waveform By saving an Audio File as a text file and then opening it in a spreadsheet application such as Excel you can view it in textual decimal form and edit the sample values When a text file representing a waveform is opened in WaveLab it is decoded and opened as an Audio File Note that these files are not compressed in any way so they can get very
234. e level of magnification of the waveform in the main wave view with precision Choose the zoom factor unit and enter an amount using the spin control box or change the amount by dragging up or down with the mouse or use the mouse wheel without clicking see Value editing You can access this dialog by left clicking on the zoom factor box in the Status Bar A right click on the zoom factor box gives you various zoom options See Zooming and scrolling for other methods of zooming for example you can press arrow up or arrow down to zoom in or out For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Zooming and scrolling Value editing Status Bar 11 2 Shared tool windows Shared tool windows are windows that can only exist in one place at a time and are shared between Workspaces They perform useful tasks in the active Workspace WaveLab 7 290 Interface Elements They can be docked and un docked and saved in your custom layouts Shared tool windows Phasescope VU Meter Oscilloscope Bit Meter Spectroscope Spectrometer Wavescope Timecode Background task monitor Log window Master Section Related topics About Tool Windows Metering Docking windows 11 2 1 Phasescope The Phasescope indicates the phase and amplitude relationship between two stereo chan nels It is only really rel
235. e material with a lot of transient peaks Live button When this button is activated the look ahead feature of Gate is disengaged Look ahead produces more accurate processing but adds a certain amount of latency as a trade off When Live mode is activated there is no latency which might be better for live processing Note that the gate can also be controlled from another signal source via the side chain input When the side chain signal exceeds the threshold the gate opens Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets WaveLab 7 12 16 Steinberg GEQ 10 GEQ 30 347 12 16 Steinberg GEQ 10 GEQ 30 e 1 Steinberg GEQ 10 4 S o0jo E invert True Resp GEQ 10 pictured These two graphic equalizers are identical in every respect except for the number of available frequency bands 10 and 30 respectively Each band can be cut or boosted by up to 12dB allowing for fine control of the frequency response In addition there are several preset modes available which can add color to the sound of the GEQ 10 GEQ 30 You can draw response curves in the main display by click dragging with the mouse Note that you have to click on one of the sliders first before dragging across the display You can also point and click to change individual frequency bands or enter values numerically by clicking on a gain value at the top of the display At the bottom of the window the individual fre
236. e options to refine how the tracks are read and output to file You can access this dialog via Utilities gt Import Audio CD tracks For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio File Format Dialog 13 2 Burn Audio CD from DDP Image This dialog allows you to burn an Audio CD from a DDP image The dialog has controls for refreshing the list of attached devices opening the CD DVD drive and erasing a CD RW or DVD RW disk You can choose to do a test burn of your CD or write the CD from a range of write speeds You can access this dialog by choosing Utilities gt Burn Audio CD from DDP Image Alternatively you can import a DDP image in the Audio Montage Workspace via File gt Im port gt Audio DDP Image to convert it to a montage and then burn the montage For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics DDP files Authoring CDs and DVDs 13 3 Data CD DVD This dialog allows you to arrange files and folders into a structure that you can later write as a data disk You can prepare a disk for a variety of media CD DA DVD or Blu ray Disk The list of media devices displays the amount of data that will fit on each type of disk As you add files an indicator on the left and a
237. e roll Click on the right hand button to playback the track exactly from the start marker position You will notice a progress display appears at the bottom of the window to show you the playback position time and track number You can also start playback with or without a pre roll from the tracks start or end markers using the same controls If the markers are not visible click on the track expand arrow to reveal the track s markers WaveLab 7 11 3 Specific tool windows 305 e Edit a track s start pause time for all tracks except the first one you can adjust the pause duration before the track begins playing If the pause checkbox is not visible click on the track expand arrow to reveal the track s markers and pause time setting Double click in the cell to edit the value Add ISRC code add an ISRC code for a track by Select clicking on the field under the ISRC column Edit a track name by Select clicking on the name in the list This also renames the track s start marker labels Add a comment add a comment to each track by Select clicking to edit its value Editing track times you cannot edit track start and end times directly in the track listing Instead open the tracks accompanying Audio File via Edit gt Edit Audio and adjust the track start and track end marker locations in the main waveform display The start and end times will update accordingly Completing your Audio CD In addition to editing via the track wi
238. e set threshold If the attack time is long more of the early part of the signal attack will pass through unprocessed Release 10 to 1000ms or Auto mode Sets the amount of time it takes for the gain to return to its original level when the signal drops below the threshold level If the Auto button is activated the compressor will automatically find an optimal release setting that varies depending on the audio material The Output Control The Output knob controls the total output level that the MultibandCompressor passes on to Wavelab The range is from 24 to 24dB Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets WaveLab 7 12 23 Steinberg Octaver 355 12 23 Steinberg Octaver e 1 Steinberg Octaver Ys 0 B Direct Octave 1 Octave 2 55 60 This plug in can generate two additional voices that track the pitch of the input signal one octave and two octaves below the original pitch respectively Octaver is best used with monophonic signals The following parameters are available e Direct Adjusts the mix of the original signal and the generated voice s A value of O means only the generated and transposed signal is heard By raising this value more of the original signal is heard Octave 1 Adjusts the level of the generated signal one octave below the original pitch Set to O means the voice is muted Octave 2 Adjusts the level of the generated signal two octaves belo
239. e that recognises this flag Emphasis s This setting is used to indicate if the track was recorded with emphasis or not Please note that this does not apply remove emphasis from the audio it is just an indicator as to how the file was created Normally it is left off ISRC Code This allows you to enter an optional International Standard Recording Code Double click in a cell to add edit a code CD Text You can optionally enter CD Text information for each track and the entire CD DVD A Double clicking a cell will open the CD Text Editor Add Edit a tracks s comments You can add edit text comments for a track Double click in a cell to edit Note that this text comment is for reference only nothing is burnt on CD Note that CD tracks can be reorderd by dragging them into new positons this means Clips and markers are moved accordingly For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Specific tool windows Authoring CDs and DVDs Write Audio CD CD Wizard CD Text Editor Audio CD Report CD Pre emphasis WaveLab 7 162 Audio Montages Red Book CD DA CD Text ISRC UPC EAN 6 4 3 File Browser This dialog allows you to browse files directly from within WaveLab rather than using your operating system s file browser It provides you with all the standard browsing functions such as List and I
240. e to edit the name of a file folder double click on its title Burning your disk Once you are happy with your disk layout you can write it to a disk or disk image e select a media type from the list of media devices This will determine the maximum size and type of medium you will be writing to whether it be CD DVD Blu ray Disk or an ISO image of any of these You can change the media type at any stage e enter the name that you want your disk to display when it is mounted as a data volume e to write your disk click write CD DVD icon This opens the write CD DVD dialog which enables you to burn your data disk to an ISO image or to an optical disk using a connected CD DVD Blu ray Disk writer For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Write Audio CD Blu ray Disk ISO image WaveLab 7 250 Interface Elements 11 1 22 DVD Audio options This dialog allows you to choose settings for creating a DVD Audio disk You can enter disk identification and volume information choose the TV format PAL or NTSC provide still picture tracks and adjust various options You can access this dialog in the Audio Montage Workspace via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt DVD Audio gt Options For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon F
241. e toggle buttons are selected A O You can access this window via Workspace gt Shared tool windows gt Log It is available in the Control Window Audio File Workspace and Audio Montage Workspace You can also access this window in the Control Window via Utilities gt Log For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Control Window Specific tool windows Scripting 11 3 Specific tool windows Specific tool windows are windows that are specific to the current Workspace They perform useful tasks in the active Workspace They can be docked and un docked and saved in your custom layouts Audio File Workspace tool windows File Browser Spectrum editor Basic Audio CD Scripting window Audio File Workspace Metadata window Marker Window Sample attributes Error detection and correction Master Project Audio Montage Workspace tool windows Focused Clip window Marker Window Snapshots File File Browser WaveLab 7 11 3 Specific tool windows 299 Zoom CD Clips Notes Effects DVD Audio Scripting window Audio Montage Workspace History Navigator Groups Master Project Podcast Workspace tool windows Master Project File Browser Batch Processor Workspace tool windows Master Project File Browser Batch Processing Plug ins Control Window tool windows
242. e track markers for you for each Audio File if you haven t created any If you wish to have more control over your audio CD you can export your Basic Audio CD session to the Audio Montage Workspace You could do this for example if you wanted to create a DVD Audio disk or wanted to add and adjust cross fading between tracks See Basic Audio CD window for more details Marker window use this window to add and edit CD track names and times to an Audio File You can also drag markers in the main Audio Files editing window to adjust start end times and double click on a marker s name to edit its marker track name Your markers are saved along with Audio Files unless you deactivate this option in preferences and are used by WaveLab for example if you import the file later to create a Basic Audio CD WaveLab 7 34 WaveLab Concepts Authoring a data disk You can also burn data CDs and DVDs using the Data CD DVD window throughout Wave Lab if you wish to back up all your session files for example You can access this window via Utilities gt Data CD DVD You can add any file to a new data CD or dvd at anytime via the File gt Special gt Add to DATA CD DVD function in both the Audio File and Audio Montage Workspaces Note that all files referenced by the data disk must be saved before attempting to create a data CD DVD For more information see Data CD DVD Burning your CD DVD Once you have compiled an audio CD using any of the t
243. e via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt DVD Audio For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio Montages DVD Audio Creation DVD Audio options Write Data CD DVD 6 4 12 Navigator This specific tool window displays a representative view of the entire active montage and enables you to quickly navigate around it WaveLab 7 170 Audio Montages Each track is represented by a horizontal colored block By default stereo tracks are dark blue and monotracks are purple or pink any custom colors you set for a track or via the Groups window are also displayed The visible Workspace is shown by a surrounding black rectangle Dragging this rectangle scrolls the main montage window enabling you to easily navigate to a location in your mon tage You can also resize the rectangle vertically and horizontally to adjust the zoom setting of the active window This window can be useful when you have a large montage with many Clips and tracks e Left click on a Clip block to zoom on it e Right click anywhere to completely zoom out You can access this window in the Audio Montage Workspace by choosing Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Navigator For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Relat
244. eBuzzer Sonnox DeNoiser Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets 12 4 Sonnox DeNoiser e __1 Sonnox Ltd Sonnox DeNoiser ATTENUATION TRACKING T soeps HF LIMIT gt FREEZE 22 0 kHz a 11 4 0B 11 1 6B Sonnox DeNoiser is one of three plug ins that form the Sonnox Restoration Toolkit The tools are not just for restoring old material but also for removing the clicks pops buzzes and background noise that can sometimes accidentally occur in new recordings A note on Touch Pad controls Several controls in these plug ins are Touch Pads These controls give a clear display of the numerical value of a control and respond to the following actions e Left Click and drag up down Increase decrease the value e Right Click and drag up down Fine adjustment of value e Double Click Directly edit value e Shift Left Click and drag up down Fine adjustment of value e Control Left Click Windows Cmd Click Mac Set to default For circular controls WaveLab 7 12 4 Sonnox DeNoiser 329 the default action is Circular mode but if the Alt key is held the action is Linear mode Additionally for all controls including faders and knobs not just Touch Pads Control Left Click Windows Cmd Click Mac Set to default DeNoiser screen controls Sonnox Menu Options Button Clicking this button brings down a menu of options and preferences It allows choice of the in
245. ecent peak minimum and maximum values respectively these are the default colors which you can change e With a mono signal the meter would show 1 indicating that both channels are per fectly in phase e Similarly 1 indicates that the two channels are the same but one is inverted e Generally for a good mix the meter should show a value between O and 1 Unlike the main Phasescope the Phase Correlation meter is also available in Analyze audio selection mode showing an average value for the selected range WaveLab 7 5 6 Shared tool windows 129 Changing settings You can define display colors peak hold time and the resolution or number of samples to display from the Functions gt Settings menu The Phasescope meter can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Mon tage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Window Related topics Metering 5 6 2 VU Meter The vu meter is used to display the peak and average loudness decibel level of your Audio File It also displays the pan or the balance between the left and right channels in a stereo file The upper part of the level pan meter window shows the peak level and average loudness in the following way e The Peak Level meters display the peak levels of each channel graphically and numeri cally By default the meter segments and numerical peak values are displayed in green f
246. ected if you place your mouse cursor inside the region a pop up appears showing the currently set frequency range Hz and the time range seconds milliseconds for the selection e A selected region can be moved in any direction by clicking and dragging the region with the cursor e If you press Shift whilst dragging a region it only moves horizontally thus retaining your selected frequency range If you press Ctrll Command Shift the region only moves vertically thus retaining the selected time range WaveLab 7 4 11 Spectrum editor 81 e You can resize a region by placing the mouse cursor at the edges of the region so that a double arrow appears and then clicking and dragging e To remove a region that you have drawn click anywhere else on the waveform and it disappears e If you have defined a region as a Source or Target it can be selected at any time to create a new selection using the same dimensions Spectrum editor functions The Spectrum Editor has the following parts e Selection use this part to refine and define your selection s You can expand se lections shift selections around and define a source and target region for performing copy operations Operations use this part to perform copying filtering and processing operations For copying operations you require both a source and a target region to have been defined using the Selection tab You can choose which method to copy audio between the
247. ed through the Functions gt Settings menu or by using the icon The Oscilloscope can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces lt can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace It can also be docked in the Control Window Related topics Metering 5 3 4 Bit Meter The Bit Meter shows the resolution or the number of bits used in the digital audio being monitored Normally the maximum number of bits in an Audio File is the same as the resolution of the Audio File e g a 16 bit Audio File shows that up to 16 bits are used but sometimes this is not the case WaveLab 7 112 Audio File editing As soon as you perform any kind of real time processing on an Audio File the audio data is treated at a much higher resolution 32 bit floating point to allow for pristine audio quality Examples of such processing include level adjustments effects the mixing of two or more files etc In fact the only time when a 16 bit file is played back at 16 bit resolution is if you play it without any fades or effects and with the Master Faders set to 0 00 no level adjustment You can try this out for yourself by playing back a 16 bit Audio File and viewing the Bit Meter as soon as you adjust the Master Faders note that 24 bits are used and the inter indicator is lit more on this below How to read the Bit Meter e The innermost meters closest to the bit scale show the number
248. ed topics Audio Montages Groups 6 4 13 Zoom This specific tool window displays a magnified view of the selected track and allows you to accurately adjust the cross fade point for two adjacent Clips You can adjust the zoom level of the selected track manually shift the Clip s position or allow WaveLab to find the best location to begin a cross fade between two Clips You can adjust the amount that WaveLab will search for the best cross fade position to avoid phase cancellation issues and also view the envelope points of the Clips Mouse operations are identical to those in the main Clip view You can access this window in the Audio Montage Workspace via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Zoom For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio Montages 6 4 14 Effects This specific tool window allows you to add VST effect plug ins both to individual Clips and tracks The difference between Clip effects and track effects are that Clip effects affect individual Clips only whereas track effects affect all Clips on a track WaveLab 7 6 5 Shared tool windows 171 Each independent Clip and or audio track in the Montage can be independently processed by up to ten VST effect plug ins Effects are configured either as Inserts when all sound is processed by the effect or as Send effects where the bal
249. eed as follows 1 Set the Audio Device to ASIO You can access this dialog from Workspaces that support the recording of Audio Files by choosing Options gt Audio Streaming Settings Set the Audio Device to ASIO 2 Assign the Device Input channels From the Recording tab select the channels to be used for device input and name them for use in WaveLab Note that you only have to set the ASIO inputs the ASIO outputs are not relevant for Audio Input Press OK when you are done 3 Set options for the Audio Input plug in Click in the top Master Section effect slot and select Audio Input from the ASIO plug in sub menu The Audio Input control panel opens and you can set the following options e Num Inputs Using the slider set this to the number of inputs assigned in step 2 e Samp Rate Using the slider set this to the sampling rate required from 11025 to 19200Hz 4 Monitor the Audio input WaveLab 7 324 Audio Plug ins Press Play on the transport Normal wave playback does not happen the cursor does not move but the Play button is lit and you can now monitor the input source Pressing Stop ends input monitoring e If you change the settings in the control panel press Stop and restart playback to apply them Note that if you are using any non multichannel plug ins in the Master Section effect chain these are limited to two channels You also have to match the number of inputs in the ASIO Connections dia
250. el Level envelope Normalize Level Silence Generator Loop Tone Uniformizer Pitch correction Time stretching Loop Tweaker Effect morphing Loudness distribution Loudness normalizer Pan Normalizer Pitch bend Pitch quantize Related topics WaveLab 7 5 1 Offline processing 93 Presets Rendering 5 1 1 Change Level This dialog allows you to apply a gain to change the level of an Audio File You can also use Find current peak level to obtain a report on the peak level of the current audio selection or the peak level in the whole file if Process whole file if there is no selection is selected in the preferences This can be useful if you wish to calculate how much you can increase the overall gain of a file without introducing clipping exceeding OdB for example To change the level enter the desired gain and click Apply You can access this dialog by choosing Process gt Change level in the Audio File Workspace For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio File editing Value editing 5 1 2 Level envelope This dialog allows you to create a volume envelope which can be applied to a selected range or a whole Audio File This could be useful if you need to even out loud and quiet parts for example You can edit the envelope by e Double clicking on the line to add a po
251. elp Related topics Error detection and correction 3D Frequency Analysis WaveLab 7 11 1 Dialogs 257 11 1 36 Import Audio CD This dialog allows you to import one or more tracks from an audio CD Once you have identified the source CD you can select the track or tracks to import You must specify a folder location and file format before the file or files can be saved to disk Actions tab Specify the optical disk drive from the drop down list and the disk reading speed The title and track details are automatically completed If no track names appear click amp to refresh CD reading From this list you can select the tracks or define the start and end points of a single track The Rename tracks menu option automatically adds the track order number to the name in a range of different styles You can select a track name for text editing by double clicking In Output accept the default Folder location or choose another Clicking produces the Audio File Format dialog for changing details of the Audio File s format Options tab This accesses a list of tickable options to refine how the tracks are read and output to file You can access this dialog via Utilities gt Import Audio CD tracks For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio File Format Dialog 11 1 37 Insert Audio Files
252. ely these are the default colors which you can change e With a mono signal the meter would show 1 indicating that both channels are per fectly in phase e Similarly 1 indicates that the two channels are the same but one is inverted e Generally for a good mix the meter should show a value between O and 1 Unlike the main Phasescope the Phase Correlation meter is also available in Analyze audio selection mode showing an average value for the selected range Changing settings You can define display colors peak hold time and the resolution or number of samples to display from the Functions gt Settings menu The Phasescope meter can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Mon tage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Window WaveLab 7 44 WaveLab Concepts Related topics Metering 4 5 6 Spectrometer The Spectrometer uses FFT Fast Fourier Transform techniques to display a continuous frequency graph providing a very precise and detailed real time frequency analysis e The current frequency spectrum is shown as a linear graph e Spectrum peaks are shown as a short horizontal lines indicating recent peak maxi mum values Snapshots By using the Add snapshot and Erase last snapshot buttons you can take and erase snapshots of the current spectrum These will be superimposed over the current peak spec trum grap
253. en after the signal drops below the threshold level Release 10 to 1000ms or Auto mode Sets the amount of time it takes for the gate to close after the set hold time If the Auto button is activated Gate will find an optimal release setting depending on the audio material The Compressor section The compressor reduces the dynamic range of the audio making softer sounds louder or louder sounds softer or both It works like a standard compressor with separate controls for threshold ratio attack release and make up gain The compressor features a separate display that graphically illustrates the compressor curve shaped according to the Threshold Ratio and Make Up Gain parameter settings It also features Gain Reduction meters and a program dependent Auto feature for the Release parameter The available parameters work as follows WaveLab 7 12 35 Steinberg VST Dynamics 373 Threshold 60 to 0dB Determines the level where the compressor kicks in Signal levels above the set threshold are affected but signal levels below are not processed Ratio 1 1 to 8 1 Determines the amount of gain reduction applied to signals above the set threshold A ratio of 3 1 means that for every 3dB the input level increases the output level increases by only 1dB Make Up 0 to 24dB This parameter is used to compensate for output gain loss caused by compression When the Auto button is activated gain loss is being compensated aut
254. ent in the Podcast 206 Podcasts Adding information to the Podcast The upper pane of the Podcast window shows various fields and settings that are related to the basic Feed or Episode depending on what you have selected in the lower pane s item list the fields are slightly different for the Feed and Episodes Field labels in bold letters point at a field that is mandatory to fill For quick publishing of your Podcast it is sufficient to fill these fields only The following settings are available for the Feed and Episode items e Title This sets the title of the feed e g the topic of your podcast This is a mandatory field for Feed and Episode Description This gives space for a further description of the feed content This is a mandatory field for Feed and Episode Internet link URL Your feed s main link presented to the user Use this to direct people to a certain website that is related to your feed This is a mandatory field Clicking will open the specified URL in your system s default Internet browser so make sure that the link is correct This is a mandatory field for Feed Picture Feed only This picture cannot be larger than 144 x 400 pixels according to the RSS standard so the picture is automatically resized if required Clicking 44 will open the specified picture in your system s default image viewer Audio file Episode only This sets the path to the Audio File you want to add to the episode
255. ent it from later being imported by software that recognises this flag Emphasis s This setting is used to indicate if the track was recorded with emphasis or not Please note that this does not apply remove emphasis from the audio it is just an indicator as to how the file was created Normally it is left off ISRC Code This allows you to enter an optional International Standard Recording Code Double click in a cell to add edit a code CD Text You can optionally enter CD Text information for each track and the entire CD DVD A Double clicking a cell will open the CD Text Editor e Add Edit a tracks s comments You can add edit text comments for a track Double click in a cell to edit Note that this text comment is for reference only nothing is burnt on CD WaveLab 7 314 Interface Elements Note that CD tracks can be reorderd by dragging them into new positons this means Clips and markers are moved accordingly For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Specific tool windows Authoring CDs and DVDs Write Audio CD CD Wizard CD Text Editor Audio CD Report CD Pre emphasis Red Book CD DA CD Text ISRC UPC EAN 11 3 15 Clips This specific tool window contains a list of any Clips placed in the currently active montage file together with their corresponding details Click on a column
256. ent to see how many slices are needed Generally the more slices you use the more natural the sound will be up to a certain point Pre Cross fade The Loop Tone Uniformizer also includes the option to cross fade the end of the loop with the start of the newly processed section so that transition into the newly looped section is smoother during playback Use the envelope drag points or value sliders to adjust the cross fade A note about Post Cross fading If you have used the Loop Tone Uniformizer within a region of an Audio File the transition from the end of the loop into the original file in many cases won t be very natural This can be fixed as follows 1 Close the Loop Tone Uniformizer and open the Loop Tweaker 2 Click on the Cross fade tab and deactivate the Cross fade option the check box 3 Click on the Post Cross fade tab and make sure Cross fade is activated WaveLab 7 50 WaveLab Concepts 4 Set up the post cross fade parameters and click Apply It can also be a useful tip to lock the loop markers after you use this command on a selection within an Audio File Once the loop is processed in place moving the loop markers will upset playback of the loop You can access this dialog in the Audio File Workspace via Process gt Loop Tone Uni formizer For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Rel
257. ents This can be useful if you wish to keep some all of the current plug ins and level settings you have in the Master Section when you load another preset For example you may wish to maintain the current master level and dithering settings but replace the effects chain that you have set up with one you commonly use from another preset You can use the checkboxes provided to adjust which settings from the new Master Section preset are used or ignored You can access this dialog from the Master Section by opening any Master Section preset from the preset menu I when you have the Open option box when selecting preset option selected You can also access it from the Status Bar For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Master Section 11 1 45 Save Master Section Preset This dialog allows you to save the current settings of the Master Section as a preset You can choose whether plug ins dithering and master levels are saved or ignored This can be useful for example for saving chains of effects plug ins and their settings that you commonly use You can access this dialog from the Master Section by choosing Master Section preset menu gt Save as You can also access it from the Status Bar For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon F
258. eo signal If the shape leans to the left there is more energy in the left channel and vice versa the extreme case of this is if one side is muted in which case the Phasescope will show a straight line angled 45 degrees to the other side A perfect circle indicates a sine wave on one channel and the same sine wave shifted by 90 degrees on the other Generally the more you can see a thread shape the more bass there is in the signal the more spray like the display the more high frequencies are in the signal WaveLab 7 6 5 Shared tool windows 173 Phase Correlation meter At the bottom of the display you will find a Phase Correlation meter which shows the same information but in a different way e The green line shows the current phase correlation while the two red lines show the recent peak minimum and maximum values respectively these are the default colors which you can change e With a mono signal the meter would show 1 indicating that both channels are per fectly in phase e Similarly 1 indicates that the two channels are the same but one is inverted e Generally for a good mix the meter should show a value between O and 1 Unlike the main Phasescope the Phase Correlation meter is also available in Analyze audio selection mode showing an average value for the selected range Changing settings You can define display colors peak hold time and the resolution or number of samples t
259. er This function is also available as a batch processing plug in You can access it from Batch Processing Workspace gt Plug ins window gt Multipass Plug ins gt Loudness Nor malizer For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Loudness DC Offset Loudness distribution 4 6 12 Pan Normalizer This dialog allows you to ensure that both channels of a stereo file have the same level or loudness Since loudnesss is more important than peak volume in the perception of sound this is a powerful tool to get the best possible stereo balance This process uses two passes to first analyze the audio and then render any level changes required You must have a stereo selection in a stereo file to apply this process You can access this dialog from the Audio File Workspace via Process gt Pan Normalizer This function is also available as a batch processing plug in You can access it from the Batch Processor Workspace via Plug ins window gt Multipass Plug ins gt Pan Normalizer For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics 4 6 13 Pitch bend This dialog allows you to change the pitch of a sound over time Note that changing the pitch using Pitch bend will affect its duration unless length
260. erceptually The decibel does not have a unit since it expresses a ratio of two quantities with the same unit of measurement Glossary contents 15 26 Dithering Dithering is the technique of adding small quantities of noise to a signal to reduce the audibility of low level distortion in a digital recording A small amount of random noise is added to the analog signal before the sampling stage reducing the effect of quantization errors Note that dithering should always be applied after the output bus fader stage UV22HR Dithering Quantization Glossary contents 15 27 DVD A DVD Audio DVD A is a digital format for delivering high fidelity audio content on a DVD Audio on a DVD A disk can be stored in many different bit depth sampling rate and chan nel combinations from 16 20 or 24 bit depth at 44 1 to 96kHz sampling rates in mono stereo and various surround channel combinations including 5 1 channel surround The sam pling rate may be as high as 192kHz for stereo channels and different bit depth sampling WaveLab 7 15 28 ECMAScript 401 rate and channel combinations can be used on a single disk DVD Audio Glossary contents 15 28 ECMAScript WaveLab s scripting language is based on the ECMAScript scripting language as defined in Standard ECMA 262 ECMAScript Language Specification Microsoft s JScript Netscape s JavaScript and Adobe s Actionscript are also based on the freely available ECMAScript
261. erg PostFilter e L Steinberg PostFilter Gain Q Factor Slope Freq 69 9 8 50 0 12 dB 15705 nd activate invert The PostFilter is the filter plug in to use if you are working on a post production mix but of course you can use it in music production too as an alternative to complex EQ config urations It allows quick and easy filtering of unwanted frequencies creating room for the important sounds in your mix The PostFilter plug in combines a low cut filter a notch filter and a high cut filter You can either make settings by dragging the handles in the graphical display or by adjusting one of the controls below the display section Use the Preview buttons to compare the result of your filtering and the filtered frequencies The following parameters are available e Level meter The meter to the right of the EQ display shows the output level giving you an indication of how the filtering affects the overall level of the edited event e Low Cut Freq 20Hz to 1kHz or Off Use this low cut filter to eliminate low frequency noise The filter is off when the han dle knob is moved all the way to the left e Low Cut Slope pop up menu Allows you to choose a slope value for the low cut filter e Low Cut Preview button Use the Preview button found between the Low Cut Freq button and the graphical display to switch the filter to a complementary high cut filter This deactivates any other filters allowing you to listen on
262. eri cally By default the meter segments and numerical peak values are displayed in green for low levels yellow for levels between 6dB and 2dB and red for levels above 2dB You can change both the colors and the range boundaries if you wish via the Level Pan Meter Settings dialog This can be accessed through the Functions gt Settings menu or by using the 4 icon The VU Volume Unit meters measure the average loudness RMS of each channel These meters have a built in inertia evening out loudness variations over a user defined time span If you are monitoring playback or audio input you will also note two vertical lines following each VU meter bar seemingly trying to reach the current RMS value These lines indicate the average of the most recent minimum RMS values left line and the average of the most recent maximum RMS values right line To the left the difference between the minimum and maximum average values is displayed the level value in brackets this gives you an overview of the dynamic range of the audio material If you are monitoring real time audio playback or input the maximum peak and loud ness values are displayed numerically to the right of the meter bars Numbers in brack ets to the right of the Maximum Peak values indicate the number of successive clips OdB signal peaks Recording levels should be set so that they only rarely clip If the master level is set too high the sound quality and frequency re
263. ersion can also be used to create special effects as it warps the sound in an unique way Fade Out This can be used with any of the three filter types Bandpass Low pass High pass It grad ually filters the frequencies in the region along the time axis from nothing at the left edge of WaveLab 7 5 6 Shared tool windows 127 the region to maximum allowed by the gain parameter at the right edge useful for gradually removing frequencies from a region Fade In This works like Fade out but inversed It can also be used in conjunction with any of the three filter types Bandpass Low pass High pass Fade out then in This is a mix of the two previous options the filtering effect gradually fades out until the middle of the region then fades back in It can also be used in conjunction with any of the three filter types Bandpass Low pass High pass Fade in then out The inverse of the above It can also be used in conjunction with any of the three filter types Bandpass Low pass High pass Related topics The Spectrum display Spectrogram options Spectrum editor 5 6 Shared tool windows Shared tool windows are windows that can only exist in one place at a time and are shared between Workspaces They perform useful tasks in the active Workspace They can be docked and un docked and saved in your custom layouts Shared tool windows Phasescope VU Meter Oscilloscope Bit Meter Spectroscope Spectrometer
264. ery loud or almost silent You can then browse between these points set markers or zoom in on them Types of analysis On most of the tabs you will find settings determining exactly how the analysis will be performed Each tab focuses on a particular analysis area e Peaks this tab is for finding individual samples with very high decibel values e Loudness this tab is for finding sections that are perceived by the human ear as louder or weaker in volume WaveLab uses an accurate method RMS Root Mean Square to measure a consecutive section of samples and then average their value e Pitch this tab is used for finding the exact average pitch of a section of audio The method works best on monophonic material single notes without chords or harmonies and assumes the analyzed section has a relatively stable pitch As a general rule try to analyze the sustain portion of a sound rather than the attack WaveLab 7 106 Audio File editing e Extras this tab is for informing you about DC offsets and the significant bit resolution of the file This can be useful for example if you wanted to check whether a 16 bit file really uses 16 bits or if it was actually recorded with only 8 bit resolution and then upscaled to 16 bits Errors this tab is to help you find glitches and sections where the audio has clipped gone beyond O dB For more control over the analysis use Error detection and cor rection Checking and browsing the
265. es an accurate method RMS Root Mean Square to measure a consecutive section of samples and then average their value e Pitch this tab is used for finding the exact average pitch of a section of audio The method works best on monophonic material single notes without chords or harmonies and assumes the analyzed section has a relatively stable pitch As a general rule try to analyze the sustain portion of a sound rather than the attack e Extras this tab is for informing you about DC offsets and the significant bit resolution of the file This can be useful for example if you wanted to check whether a 16 bit file really uses 16 bits or if it was actually recorded with only 8 bit resolution and then upscaled to 16 bits WaveLab 7 30 WaveLab Concepts e Errors this tab is to help you find glitches and sections where the audio has clipped gone beyond O dB For more control over the analysis use Error detection and cor rection Checking and browsing the results Checking the results on the Pitch and Extra tabs is simple since only one value is returned for the whole section of analyzed audio For all the other tabs the analysis methods returns a series of exact points hot points in the file or section of audio Use the relevant buttons in each tab to select the hot points you wish to look at in more detail Using the slider you can then browse or skip between these points adding markers or focusing the waveform display
266. esired offline process from the Process menu 3 If a dialog appears make the appropriate settings If the dialog uses presets you can load one of them to fill out the settings automatically 4 When you have finished with the settings in the dialog click the Apply Paste Process button to permanently render the effect to file In some cases a status bar dialog is displayed showing the progress of the operation If you need to interrupt a long process click the Cancel button on the status bar dialog Undo Redo processing Even though offline processes appear to alter the file permanently you can always reinstate a previous version using WaveLab s undo feature The number of Undo Redo commands is limited only by your available hard drive space Access the Undo and Redo commands via Edit gt Undo or Edit gt Redo Tips for using Offline Processing Processing dialogs are non modal meaning that they stay open and on screen even after processing has been applied This means that you can still playback audio and access un do redo commands to audition the results of your effect and make any further adjustments to any settings You can also use key commands and access any other menu commands while leaving the offline process dialog open Remember that using and saving presets when you have settings you are happy with can also save you time WaveLab contains a powerful array of offline processing tools including the following Change Lev
267. essed and then outputted to a folder of your choice You can run batches repeatedly if required See Batch Processing gt Control Window for hosting and organizing tool windows e g meters especially in a multi monitor setup You can choose not to use it if you do not find it convenient since removing the Control Window does not remove any features of WaveLab See Control Window Podcast Workspace for preparing and uploading Podcasts See Podcasts A Workspace is highly customizable to match your workflow experience and screen setups which may vary from a studio based multi screen DAW to a single screen laptop on the road A Workspace can appear in a wide variety of styles from a simple window with a single menu in its most uncluttered form to a sophisticated arrangement of Command bars tool windows Tab groups and active meters To meet the varied needs of users custom layouts can be saved using Global gt General window layout gt Save as and restored from a menu or shortcut When a file is opened from a given Workspace it is added to the active tab group of this Workspace If a file is opened from the application Workspace a new Workspace is created for it You can have several instances of the same Workspace type open simultaneously for example you could have two Audio File Workspaces open with different layouts However for performance reasons it is generally better to have just one instance of a Workspace type ope
268. estion mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio Montage Preferences 6 4 6 Clips This specific tool window contains a list of any Clips placed in the currently active montage file together with their corresponding details Click on a column header to sort the list in ascending or descending order based on the values in that column Clicking on any row of the list will move the main window s view to show the selected Clip To change a value double click in a cell to begin editing to align the Clip to an exact time for instance Clips may be dragged into new positions in the list From this list of Clips you can use the input fields and controls to e Start playback lt is possible to start playback at the selected Clip position with or without pre roll by clicking on the leftmost icons Click on bbz in the audition column to play the montage from that Clip s position with a pre roll Click on the right hand button to playback the montage exactly from the start of the Clip e Edit a Clips s name start end length comments edit the name of the Clip its start end time position and any comments WaveLab 7 6 4 Specific tool windows 165 e Lock a Clips s position select the checkbox to lock the Clip This prevents it from being accidentally edited or dragged to a new position e Change Gain use this control to increase decrease the gain of the Clip Double click in the cell to edit the valu
269. et the Instructor plug in to replicate up to 20 seconds of audio Be careful not to set a value that is longer than the shortest file in the batch otherwise a short file will be over truncated by the second instance of the plug in You can access this dialog from the Batch Processor Workspace via Plug ins window gt Monopass Plug ins gt Instructor For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Batch Processing Plug ins 7 3 0 6 Time Stretch This dialog is exclusive to the Batch Processor Workspace and allows you to change the duration of an audio selection usually without changing its pitch For more information on the Time Stretch dialog parameters see Time stretching You can access this dialog from Batch Processing Workspace gt Plug ins window gt Monopass Plug ins gt Time Stretch For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Time stretching Batch Processing Plug ins WaveLab 7 200 Batch Processing 7 3 0 7 Pitch Correction This dialog is exclusive to the Batch Processor Workspace and allows you to detect and change the pitch of a sound without affecting its length For more information on the Pitch Correction dialog parameters see Pitch correction You can access t
270. eter as soon as you adjust the Master Faders note that 24 bits are used and the inter indicator is lit more on this below How to read the Bit Meter e The innermost meters closest to the bit scale show the number of bits in use You can adjust this display in the Settings dialog e The outer meters are history meters showing how many bits were recently in use You can adjust the hold time in the Settings dialog e The over segment indicates clipping similar to a clip indicator If the below segment is lit there are more than 24 bits The bit meter will show the 24 higher bits and the below segment indicates the existence of extra lower bits Note that audio is always processed with more than 24 bits internally If the inter segment is lit this indicates that the audio data cannot really be expressed on a regular 24 bit scale there are floating point values in between bits thus the label inter This is typically the case if you apply effects thus the inter segment allows you to differentiate processed from non processed 24 bit PCM files WaveLab 7 294 Interface Elements When to use the Bit Meter e To check whether dithering is necessary or not As a rule if you re playing back or mixing down to 16 bits and the Bit Meter shows that more than 16 bits are used you should apply dithering To see the actual resolution of an Audio File For example even though a file is in 24 bit format only
271. eter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help WaveLab 7 3 13 Switcher window 19 Related topics Time Format dialog Zoom factor Audio properties dialog 3 13 Switcher window This small floating window allows you to switch between each of the main Workspaces in WaveLab and also to open and create documents It is visible at all times and floats above all other windows You can choose which Workspace buttons are visible and adjust its transparency in Global Preferences You can resize rotate and move the Switcher window anywhere on your monitor s e lItis useful to use a file in a different Workspace For example you can drag an Audio File from the Audio File Workspace over the Audio Montage icon in the Switcher window and wait until the Audio Montage Workspace becomes active before inserting the file in a montage To switch between Workspaces click on a Workspace button and if the Workspace is not already open a menu opens and offers several options If two instances of the same Workspace are open you can toggle between them by repeatedly clicking on the appropriate icon To create a new document in any Workspace click Ctrl Command on a Workspace button To open a document in any Workspace click Shift on a Workspace button To display a menu listing the files used recently in a particular Workspace click on any Workspace icon and
272. eter uses FFT Fast Fourier Transform techniques to display a continuous frequency graph providing a very precise and detailed real time frequency analysis WaveLab 7 11 2 Shared tool windows 295 e The current frequency spectrum is shown as a linear graph e Spectrum peaks are shown as a short horizontal lines indicating recent peak maxi mum values Snapshots By using the Add snapshot and Erase last snapshot buttons you can take and erase snapshots of the current spectrum These will be superimposed over the current peak spec trum graph in a color you can customize until you click the icon again to take a new snapshot One use for this is to check the effects of adding EQ for example Up to five snapshots can be superimposed on the display the sixth snapshot replaces the earliest one in the display and so on Don t confuse the order of snapshots with the numbered buttons these are Spectrometer presets see below Zooming You can adjust the frequency scale and range in the Settings dialog as described below but it s also possible to temporarily zoom in on a frequency area of interest This is done by clicking and dragging a rectangle in the Spectroscope display When you release the mouse button the display is zoomed in so that the enclosed frequency range fills the window To return to full scale display select Zoom out fully from the Functions menu or double click anywhere on the display Making setting
273. eter values The following parameters are available e Threshold 60 to 0dB Determines the level where expansion kicks in Signal levels below the set threshold are affected but signal levels above are not processed Ratio 1 1 to 8 1 Determines the amount of gain boost applied to signals below the set threshold Soft Knee button If this button is off signals below the threshold are expanded instantly according to the set ratio hard knee When Soft Knee is activated the onset of expansion is more gradual producing a less drastic result Attack 0 1 to 100ms Determines how fast Expander responds to signals below the set threshold If the attack time is long more of the early part of the signal attack passes through unprocessed Hold 0 to 2000ms Sets the time the applied expansion will affect the signal below the Threshold Release 10 to 1000ms or Auto mode Sets the amount of time it takes for the gain to return to its original level when the signal exceeds the threshold level If the Auto button is activated Expander will automatically find an optimal release setting that varies depending on the audio material Analysis 0 to 100 Pure Peak to Pure RMS This parameter determines whether the input signal is analyzed according to peak or RMS values or a mixture of both A value of O is pure peak and 100 pure RMS RMS mode operates using the average power of the audio signal as a basis whereas Peak Wa
274. etering 153 e The outer meters are history meters showing how many bits were recently in use You can adjust the hold time in the Settings dialog e The over segment indicates clipping similar to a clip indicator e If the below segment is lit there are more than 24 bits The bit meter will show the 24 higher bits and the below segment indicates the existence of extra lower bits Note that audio is always processed with more than 24 bits internally e Ifthe inter segment is lit this indicates that the audio data cannot really be expressed on a regular 24 bit scale there are floating point values in between bits thus the label inter This is typically the case if you apply effects thus the inter segment allows you to differentiate processed from non processed 24 bit PCM files When to use the Bit Meter e To check whether dithering is necessary or not As a rule if you re playing back or mixing down to 16 bits and the Bit Meter shows that more than 16 bits are used you should apply dithering e To see the actual resolution of an Audio File For example even though a file is in 24 bit format only 16 bits may be used Or a 32 bit file may only use 24 bits in this case the below segment would not be lit For this purpose the Bit Meter is best used in Analyze selection mode e To see whether a zeroed plug in still affects your signal or whether a plug in uses 16 bit internal processing or more gene
275. etermine where the silent period is placed in the audio In WaveLab you can also specify a file to be inserted instead of true silence This can be useful for example if you wish to keep the ambience or background noise of a particular environment in a recording You can access this dialog in the Audio File Workspace via Edit gt Silence advanced For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Silence 4 6 5 Loop Tone Uniformizer This dialog allows you to create sounds that will loop from audio that is seemingly un loopable These are normally sounds that constantly decay in level or continuously change in timbre The Loop Tone Uniformizer applies processing to the sound that evens out changes in level and timbral characteristics in order for a sound to loop properly For example this could be useful for creating looped samples for a softsynth or hardware sampler To use the Loop Tone Uniformizer you need to have a loop defined using a pair of loop markers gt 4 The original length of the loop is not changed Uniformizers This tab allows you to specify the method s used to even out the sound you wish to loop Choose between Slice mixing and or Chorus smoothing For a full explanation of how each of these methods operate use the What s this help function For slice mixing you may need to experim
276. evant when monitoring stereo audio material Reading the Phasescope It can be interpreted as follows e A vertical line indicates a perfect mono signal the left and right channels are the same e A horizontal line indicates that the left channel is the same as the right but with an inverse phase e A random but roughly elliptical shape indicates a well balanced stereo signal If the shape leans to the left there is more energy in the left channel and vice versa the extreme case of this is if one side is muted in which case the Phasescope will show a straight line angled 45 degrees to the other side e A perfect circle indicates a sine wave on one channel and the same sine wave shifted by 90 degrees on the other WaveLab 7 11 2 Shared tool windows 291 e Generally the more you can see a thread shape the more bass there is in the signal the more spray like the display the more high frequencies are in the signal Phase Correlation meter At the bottom of the display you will find a Phase Correlation meter which shows the same information but in a different way e The green line shows the current phase correlation while the two red lines show the recent peak minimum and maximum values respectively these are the default colors which you can change e With a mono signal the meter would show 1 indicating that both channels are per fectly in phase e Similarly 1 indicates that the two channels are the
277. evels should be set so that they only rarely clip If the master level is set too high the sound quality and frequency response will be compro mised at high recording levels with unwanted clipping effects If the level is set too low noise levels may be high relative to the main sound being recorded Pan meters The lower part of the window shows the pan the difference in level between the left and right channel only applicable when monitoring stereo audio The upper pan meters show the peak level difference between the channels graphically and numerically Note that the pan meters are two sided the level bars can go to the left or right indicating which channel is the loudest The two sides are shown in different colors which can be changed via the Settings dialog as explained previously The lower pan meters show the average difference in loudness between the channels in a similar way This gives you a visual indication of whether a stereo recording is properly centered for example If you are monitoring real time audio playback or input the maximum balance differ ence value peak and loudness for each channel is displayed numerically to the left and right of the meter bars The VU meter can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Window Related topics Metering 6 1 2 Spectroscope The Spectrosco
278. ew all background rendering processes that are in progress You can adjust the priority with which they are processed pause or cancel them It is useful if you have a number of lengthy processes underway and want to free up some processing power to focus on editing You can either lower the priority of a task so it does not use as much of the computer processor s capacity or pause the task temporarily You can access this window by choosing Workspace gt Shared tool windows gt Back ground task monitor It is available in the Control Window Audio File Workspace and Audio Montage Workspace You can also access this window in the Control Window by choosing Utilities gt Background task monitor You can choose to automatically open the Background task monitor when a rendering pro cess begins To enable this option select the checkbox via Options gt Global Preferences gt Options gt Make the Background Task Monitor visible when a task starts Since this window is a Shared_tool_window the location where it opens may vary For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Specific tool windows WaveLab 7 9 3 Metering 221 Control Window Rendering 9 2 10 Log window This shared tool window allows you to view log messages that have been issued by WaveLab When using WaveLab s scripting language for exam
279. ex markers these are used to create index points in CD tracks They also serve for DVD A disks Editing Navigation markers e gt lt 4 Region start and end markers these markers can be created directly during recording they can be used to define start and end points for generic regions Editing Navigation markers must be used as a pair gt Playback start markers This marker is used to program a playback start point gt 4 Exclusion start and end markers these let you temporarily silence a certain section Sections between Exclusion regions are skipped if this option is activated on the Transport menu Skip options gt Skip Exclusion regions In addition Exclusion regions can be skipped during file rendering if this option is activated in the Render dialog Exclusion markers must be used as a pair Loop markers gt 4 Loop start and end markers These are used for defining loop points and are required to access loop editing functions in the Process menu of the Audio File Workspace they are directly connected to the playback Loop mode These markers are often useful during editing and for creating loops before transferring a sound to a sampler Loop markers must be used as a pair WaveLab 7 38 WaveLab Concepts Error correction markers These two marker pairs may be placed manually but their main use is with the Error Detec tion and Correction tool see Error detection and correction You can access this tool
280. ex of the first selected sample or 1 if there is no selection selectionSize Returns the number of selected samples select presetName Loads the audio range preset and applies its setting to the active Audio File select start size Selects a number of samples starting from a given position setCursorChannel channel Sets the cursor position to a new channel Use leftCh rightCh or allCh as arguments WaveLab 7 4 9 Scripting 67 addMarker type name comment Add a marker at the cursor position Possible values for type are generic temporary cdTrackStart cdTrackEnd cdTrackFrontier cdTrackIndex loopStart loopEnd muteStart muteEnd playbackStarter regionStart regionEnd errorStart errorEnd correctionStart e correctionEnd Example activeWave addMarker generic SomeName SomeComment findNextMarkerPosition posStartSearch type Searches for the next marker of type from a given position Returns the marker position if any is found or 1 normalize presetName Loads the normalizer preset and applies its setting to an audio range normalizeLoudness presetName Loads the loudness normalizer preset and applies its setting to an audio range normalizePan presetName Loads the pan normalizer preset and applies its setting to an audio range silence presetName Loads the silence preset and applies its setting to an audio range timeStretch presetName
281. example You can access this dialog from the Audio File Workspace via Process gt Pitch Correc tion Pitch correction is also available as a batch processing plug in in the Batch Processor Workspace In addition Pitch correction for a Clip is available from the Focused Clip window via Edit gt Pitch shift Note that for Batch processing and Clip processes the envelope option is not available For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Adjusting Envelopes 5 1 7 Time stretching This dialog allows you to change the duration of an audio selection usually without changing its pitch You can view exact time information on the original audio selection you wish to stretch and choose the amount you wish to stretch it in seconds beats per minute or as a percentage You can also choose which method WaveLab uses to stretch the audio and the quality speed of the processing If you select Use modulation envelope you can vary the time stretch over time using an envelope editor that becomes available When choosing a method it is useful to experiment with the different algorithms available to find which one suits your source material the best Use What s this to find out more information on each method and determine which one will produce the best time stretch without introducing unwanted artifacts This
282. f frequencies displayed in the 3D Frequency Analysis window Use the spin controls to adjust the highest and lowest frequencies you wish to view This can be useful for isolating a particular frequency range which you are trying to analyze You can also choose to display frequencies using logarithmic or linear scaling alter the color of the background and waveform plus change the scale of the ruler You can access this dialog via Analysis gt 3D Frequency Analysis gt Edit frequency range click on the frequency button For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics 3D Frequency Analysis Value editing 11 1 32 FTP site This dialog allows you to enter information for uploading your Podcast and all related files to an online FTP server You must specify all log in details for your FTP site the relative path to your podcast XML file and the web site address where the link to your Podcast is found including the path to the feed If in doubt about your FTP settings they can normally be supplied by your ISP WaveLab 7 11 1 Dialogs 255 You can access this dialog via Publish gt FTP Site in the Podcast Workspace For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Podcasts 11 1 33 Cha
283. f your Audio File was recorded or saved at 96 or 48kHz and you wish to burn it to CD at 44 1kHz this plug in will perform the conversion ready for burning The following parameters are available e Sample rate The rate can be set in 17 steps from 6kHz to 384kHz It includes the common sampling rates of 44 1 48 96 and 192kHz e Quality The quality requirements can be set in four steps Preview fast Standard High or Ultra slow Related topics Audio Plug ins WaveLab 7 12 37 Leveler 375 Master Section How do add effects Presets 12 37 Leveler e 2 Leveler A O E Volume Left 1111111111111 111 A gt e 8 76 dB LILA Volume Right LLE nn 3 51599 8 11110 ES Stereo Link s OFF E Leveler is useful for correcting an imbalance or adjusting levels between stereo channels or for mixing down to mono The parameters are as follows e Volume Left Right 48dB to 12dB This governs how much of the signal is included in the left and or right channel of the output bus e Stereo Link OFF or LINKED When set to LINKED Volume Right delivers the same gain as that set for Volume Left e Mix to Mono OFF or ON When set to ON a mono mix of the stereo channels is delivered to the output bus Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets 12 38 Leveler Multi e 3 Leveler Multi T S l 0 Volume IlIilittitittitiaytl C E 390 dB ppt
284. face Elements The VU Volume Unit meters measure the average loudness RMS of each channel These meters have a built in inertia evening out loudness variations over a user defined time span If you are monitoring playback or audio input you will also note two vertical lines following each VU meter bar seemingly trying to reach the current RMS value These lines indicate the average of the most recent minimum RMS values left line and the average of the most recent maximum RMS values right line To the left the difference between the minimum and maximum average values is displayed the level value in brackets this gives you an overview of the dynamic range of the audio material If you are monitoring real time audio playback or input the maximum peak and loud ness values are displayed numerically to the right of the meter bars Numbers in brack ets to the right of the Maximum Peak values indicate the number of successive clips OdB signal peaks Recording levels should be set so that they only rarely clip If the master level is set too high the sound quality and frequency response will be compro mised at high recording levels with unwanted clipping effects If the level is set too low noise levels may be high relative to the main sound being recorded Pan meters The lower part of the window shows the pan the difference in level between the left and right channel only applicable when monitoring stereo audio The upper
285. face feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Workspaces 11 1 43 Convert marker type This dialog allows you to convert marker types in the current file You can choose to convert all markers in the file or only those within a current waveform selection You can convert up to three different types of markers to other types There is also the ability to set conditions that a marker s name must match in order for it to be converted These conditions can be expressed as text matches or regular expressions A regular expression is a precise way of matching strings of text When you choose to use regular expressions for your conditionals an additional pop up menu allows you to access a list of common regular expressions You can also save presets of common conversions you make using the standard presets control You can access this dialog from the Marker window via Functions gt Convert marker types For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Marker Window Markers About Regular Expressions 11 1 44 Load Master Section Preset This dialog allows you to choose whether plug ins dithering and master level settings are overwritten or used the default action when loading an existing Master Section preset WaveLab 7 262 Interface Elem
286. ffects Presets WaveLab 7 12 20 Steinberg Mix 8 to 2 351 12 20 Steinberg Mix 8 to 2 1 Steinb Y S Mix8To2 lets you quickly mix down your surround mix format to stereo You can control the levels of up to eight surround channels and decide for each channel up to which level it will be included in the resulting mix Mix8To2 does not simulate a surround mix or add any psycho acoustical artifacts to the resulting output it is simply a mixer The plug in should be placed in one of the post fader insert effect slots for the output bus For the Output bus the following parameters are available e A Normalize button If activated the mixed output is normalized i e the output level is automatically adjusted so that the loudest signal is as loud as possible without clipping e A Link button that links the two Output faders Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets WaveLab 7 352 Audio Plug ins 12 21 Steinberg Mono to Stereo 1 Steinberg MonoToStereo Ys 00 E This effect will turn a mono signal into a pseudo stereo signal The plug in must be inserted on a stereo track playing a mono file The following parameters are available e Width Controls the width or depth of the stereo enhancement Turn clockwise to increase the enhancement e Delay Increases the amount of differences between the left and right channels to further in crease the stereo
287. fference in loudness between the channels in a similar way This gives you a visual indication of whether a stereo recording is properly centered for example If you are monitoring real time audio playback or input the maximum balance differ ence value peak and loudness for each channel is displayed numerically to the left and right of the meter bars The VU meter can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Window Related topics Metering 6 5 3 Oscilloscope The Oscilloscope offers a highly magnified view of the waveform around the playback cursor position If you are analyzing a stereo file the Oscilloscope normally shows the separate levels of the two channels However if you activate the option Show Sum and Subtraction on the Functions menu or click the icon the upper half of the Oscilloscope shows the sum of the two channels and the lower half shows the subtraction WaveLab 7 6 5 Shared tool windows 175 Making settings By opening the Settings dialog you can adjust the display colors and choose to activate Auto zoom or not With Auto zoom activated the display is optimized so that the highest level reaches the top of the display at all times The Settings dialog can be accessed through the Functions gt Settings menu or by using the icon The Oscilloscope can be found in the
288. file using the Audio File Format dialog In addition there is an option to remember the file format you use so it appears the next time you save a file You can access this dialog from the Audio File Workspace and Montage Workspace via File gt Save as For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Folder Preferences dialog Audio File Format Dialog 11 1 76 Select where and how Audio Files will be saved This dialog allows you to choose where Audio Files are saved when saving each CD track as an Audio File from the Basic Audio CD window You can choose the destination folder location and the format of the Audio Files which will be saved You can access this dialog in the Audio File Workspace via Basic Audio CD window gt File gt Save each CD track as For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Basic Audio CD Audio File Format Dialog WaveLab 7 276 Interface Elements 11 1 77 Save Batch Processor This dialog allows you to save a copy of the batch processor file that you currently have open You can specify a new file name and location Optionally you can choose to save the list of files in the batch process along with status of each file The default location depends
289. file you wish to open double click it to open the file in the current Workspace You can also open it by dragging it onto an empty tabbed group or onto the tab bar of a tabbed group You can also drag the file over a wave view to insert it at a given point When you drag a file over a wave view a beam is displayed so as to clearly display the insertion point When browsing Audio Files the file browser also has a region panel When you select an Audio File its related regions are listed in this panel You can then drag the region from the list to insert only that part of the audio Double clicking on a region has the effect of opening the file in the Workspace and selecting that region You can access this dialog via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt File Browser For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Specific tool windows 7 1 2 Batch Processing Plug ins The Batch Processor Workspace allows you to add a sequence of plug ins that can be used to process a batch of Audio Files Some of these plug ins are standard plug ins available from the Master Section others are offline processes available in the Audio File Workspace and there are others that are only available within batch processing To add a plug in First create a new Audio Plug in chain window click on the Create an empty document icon in the
290. format Although a WAV file can hold compressed audio the most common WAV format contains uncompressed audio in the linear pulse code modulation LPCM format Developed by Microsoft and IBM WAV is closely related to AIFF and is compatible with Windows Macintosh and Linux operating systems Uncompressed WAV files are quite bulky but they have a simple file structure which can be processed efficiently in audio editing and produce archive files of high quality 8 16 20 24 bit and 32 bit float resolutions are supported The file extension is wav WAV64 files Audio File Format Dialog Glossary contents WaveLab 7 15 76 WAV64 files 413 15 76 WAV64 files Wave 64 is an audio file format developed by Sony that is very similar to the standard Wave format but with an important difference Standard Wave files are limited in size to 2GB stereo but Wave 64 allows virtually any length actually the limit is 512GB The file extension is w64 WAV files Glossary contents 15 77 Waveform A Waveform is the visual representation of wave like phenomena such as sound or light The amplitude or sound pressure over time usually results in a smooth waveform In WaveLab a waveform is generally represented with time on the horizontal x axis with the start of the waveform being the leftmost point The vertical y axis is the amplitude of the wave Glossary contents 15 78 Wet Dry Wet Dry is a term that describes the ba
291. format is compatible with Cubase Load Save Default Bank this loads the default bank of presets or saves the current set of presets as the default bank Load Save Effect this loads or saves one preset at a time The file format is again compatible with Cubase Edit name of current program allows you to define or edit the name for the currently selected preset Preset list select a Preset from the list of those currently available VST 3 plugins have a simplified list of options About Preset files Each preset is stored as an individual file inside WaveLab s main presets folder This makes it easy to back them up or copy them to another computer You can change the location of this main Presets folder via Global Preferences gt Setting location You have the choice of the following locations e a standardized location that can be accessed by all users of the computer That is all users will share the same settings e a standardized location accessed by the current user the default That is each user has his her own private settings e any specific location of your choice This allows you to customize it for your own re quirements e a location relative to the application This allows you to use the application from an USB dongle Default locations By default the main Presets folder is found at e Windows 7 C Users User Name AppData Roaming Steinberg WaveLab 7 Presets WaveLab 7 4 8 Rendering 61
292. formation see Getting Help Related topics Audio File editing Value editing 7 1 2 9 Stereo to Mono This dialog is exclusive to the Batch Processor Workspace and allows you to mix a stereo signal down to a mono one while being certain not to clip while mixing channels You can choose to use the same peak level that the stereo file contains or set the gain to be applied and or the maximum level to be reached in the resulting mono file You can access this dialog from the Batch Processor Workspace via Plug ins window gt Multipass Plug ins gt Stereo to Mono For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Batch Processing Plug ins 7 1 2 10 Pan Normalizer This dialog allows you to ensure that both channels of a stereo file have the same level or loudness Since loudnesss is more important than peak volume in the perception of sound WaveLab 7 192 Batch Processing this is a powerful tool to get the best possible stereo balance This process uses two passes to first analyze the audio and then render any level changes required You must have a stereo selection in a stereo file to apply this process You can access this dialog from the Audio File Workspace via Process gt Pan Normalizet This function is also available as a batch processing plug in You can access it from the Batch Processor Worksp
293. fuss and to reproduce the project including Edit Decision Lists and other assets as accurately as possible AES31 does not have a 2GB file size limit and can be read by PC and Mac platforms The standard uses a form of universal resource locator for accessing files on any platform or net work together with a sample accurate Audio Decision List in out points of the component audio fies are defined in terms of hours minutes seconds frames and sample count The file extension is adl Glossary contents 15 3 AIFF files AIFF Audio Interchange File Format is the default uncompressed audio file format used on the Macintosh AIFF was developed by Apple Inc from IFF Interchange File Format which was in turn developed by Electronic Arts The audio data in AIFF is uncompressed PCM Pulse Code Modulation A compressed variant AIFF C or AIFC supports a number of compression codecs 8 16 20 or 24 bit resolutions are supported WaveLab 7 15 4 Apple Lossless files 395 Typical filename extensions are aiff aif aifc snd Glossary contents 15 4 Apple Lossless files ALAC Apple Lossless Audio Codec is an audio codec developed by Apple Inc for loss less data compression of digital audio Also known as Apple Lossless and Apple Lossless Encoder ALE ALAC audio data is stored within the MP4 container and uses the mathe matical technique of linear prediction to achieve a file size reduction between 60 to 40 dependi
294. g The DDP format offers the much more robust CIRC error correction WaveLab 7 400 Glossary and so protects both the audio data and its associated metadata The DDP image is a data file and when burned to optical media is a data disc As such it has the full measure of CIRC error correction to allow error free copying of files on your computer and across networks including the internet It s also why you often need a DVD R to contain a DDP image of a CD because the data redundancy is more robust in data form than in streaming audio form Sending DDP files is best practice for disk replicators who will upload the image file to their network and burn a glass master directly from the image using specialist hardware soft ware CIRC error correction will assure that the data matches the original or it will stop the process WaveLab can read DDP files by choosing File gt Import gt Audio DDP Image Glossary contents 15 25 Decibel dB Decibel dB is a logarithmic unit of measurement that expresses the size of a physical quantity usually sound pressure level power or intensity relative to a reference level Decibels are often used in matters of sound because the ear perceives loudness on a log arithmic scale The equation dB 20 x log V1 V2 is often used by sound engineers com paring two values Applying a gain of 3dB doubles the amplitude of a sound and a gain of 3dB halves the amplitude and this is confirmed p
295. g ins window gt Monopass Plug ins gt Trimmer For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Batch Processing Plug ins WaveLab 7 7 1 Specific tool windows 189 7 1 2 3 Resizer This dialog is exclusive to the Batch Processor Workspace and allows you to adjust the duration of an Audio File You can set a desired length of file and choose whether to insert silence after the end of the chosen duration You can access this dialog from the Batch Processor Workspace via Plug ins window gt Monopass Plug ins gt Resizer For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Batch Processing Plug ins 7 1 2 4 Fade In Out This dialog is exclusive to the Batch Processor Workspace and allows you to fade the be ginning Fade In or the end Fade Out of a batch audio file You can choose the length and shape of the fade its duration and the gain you wish it to start end at You can access the fade out dialog from Batch Processing Workspace gt Plug ins win dow gt Multipass Plug ins gt Fade Out You can access the fade in dialog from the Batch Processor Workspace via Plug ins win dow gt Monopass Plug ins gt Fade In For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click
296. g the Spectrometer in off line mode Monitor Edit cursor Position or Analyze audio election mode you can export the displayed FFT data as a text file by selecting Export FFT data as ASCII from the Options pop up menu The resulting text file can then be imported into applications that allow graph plotting from text files Microsoft Excel for example The Spectrometer can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Window Related topics Metering Spectroscope 5 6 7 Wavescope The Wavescope meter displays a real time waveform drawing of the audio signal being mon itored It can be useful when recording or rendering a file if Monitor File rendering mode is active WaveLab 7 134 Audio File editing Making settings You can adjust settings for the display via the Wavescope Settings dialog This can be accessed via Functions gt Settings menu or by using the icon Here you can set various color options for the background grid and waveform display as well as setting the waveform rendering speed and vertical zoom If Clear waveform when reaching right of pane is checked the waveform display is cleared each time the cursor reaches the right end of the display If unchecked the previous waveform is overwritten Tip Wavescope is a useful meter for visualizing audio during recording The Wavesc
297. ge many file names used by the Audio Montage export then import It could also be used to generate Audio Montages from scratch or from a template or to convert another DAW file format to WaveLab s Audio Montage Another application could be to compare two Audio Montages using a text file comparison tool There are many freeware XML editors available but a simple text editor can also be used It is beyond the scope of this manual to provide details about how to edit XML files however here s some basic information e All strings are included in a CDATA section in the UTF 8 format e All integer values are in simple textual form 127 127 e All float and double values are stored in Base64 format e Any binary data is stored in Base64 format Related topics Metering WaveLab 7 6 1 Metering 149 Tools Transport controls Specific tool windows Shared tool windows Utilities Audio Montage Colors Clip Audio Montage contextual information 6 1 Metering WaveLab contains a variety of audio meters to help in monitoring and analyzing audio Meters can be used to monitor audio during playback rendering recording and also to analyze a specific selection of audio There are seven different audio meters in WaveLab each with its own separate window The meters are accessed via the Meters menu the Shared Tool windows menu or from the Meters control bar Monitor Modes You can choose the audio source and the mode for dis
298. ges of a window or in some cases anywhere on the window itself or its title Right clicking on a File tab for example shows a context menu with some relevant file op tions Right clicking on the waveform window header brings up the Time Ruler context menu allowing you to access a number options for changing the Time Ruler display format Tip Most context menu commands can be found on the normal menu bar but Some unique commands are only found in context menus As they are not always obvious when searching for a function it may be worth checking for a Context menu in the window in which you are working by right clicking on it or around its edges WaveLab 7 10 Using the interface Related topics Shortcut system 3 5 Docking windows All of WaveLab s tool windows can be used as docked windows or as stand alone floating windows They can be freely dragged around and docked at various locations Command bars can also be freely moved around and docked along the edges of most windows See Command bars for more information Undocking a window Double click on the title bar This works with all tool windows Specific and Shared About Specific tool windows To undock a Specific tool window use one of the following methods e double click on the title bar e click on the small double window icon which is located at the top left hand corner of the window e click and drag the window by its title bar Once un docked you can
299. ginning or end of a filter or effect WaveLab 7 4 4 Markers 35 About marker types There are many types of markers all of which in addition to visually marking locations in a file can be used to assist editing and playback Some like the Loop and CD Track markers have a unique function For information on each type and how to use them see Marker types Adding markers The most common way to create markers is from the Marker window If this is not visible make sure that Markers is ticked in the menu Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Markers Add markers by Placing a single marker Play back the wave When the cursor is at the position where you want a marker e Press Insert on the PC or M on the Mac there is no Insert key on the Mac to insert a generic marker e Click a marker button on the Marker window toolbar Tooltips for each type of marker are shown when hovering the cursor over its button e Select a marker of a specific type from the Marker Window Insert menu Placing a pair of markers Some markers come in pairs To create a pair of markers make a selection around the audio region where you wish to define a start and end e Click a marker pair button on the Marker window toolbar The types of marker are shown when hovering the cursor over each button e Select Create region type from selection from the Marker Window Insert menu choos ing the type of marker pair you wish to use You need to
300. group You can also drag the file over a wave view to insert it at a given point When you drag a file over a wave view a beam is displayed so as to clearly display the insertion point When browsing Audio Files the file browser also has a region panel When you select an Audio File its related regions are listed in this panel You can then drag the region from the list to insert only that part of the audio Double clicking on a region has the effect of opening the file in the Workspace and selecting that region You can access this dialog via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt File Browser For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Specific tool windows WaveLab 7 210 Podcasts WaveLab 7 Chapter 9 Control Window This is a special Workspace that allows you to create your own control window layout This window does not edit any files but is used as a placeholder to organize certain tool windows for example a selection of meters This is especially useful if you have multiple monitors you can place the Control Window on your secondary display and use it to manage all the tool windows you commonly refer to This window has some special features e the ability to host sub windows that monitor events happening in other windows You can dock the following windows All Meters Master Sectio
301. h in a color you can customize until you click the icon again to take a new snapshot One use for this is to check the effects of adding EQ for example Up to five snapshots can be superimposed on the display the sixth snapshot replaces the earliest one in the display and so on Don t confuse the order of snapshots with the numbered buttons these are Spectrometer presets see below Zooming You can adjust the frequency scale and range in the Settings dialog as described below but it s also possible to temporarily zoom in on a frequency area of interest This is done by clicking and dragging a rectangle in the Spectroscope display When you release the mouse button the display is zoomed in so that the enclosed frequency range fills the window To return to full scale display select Zoom out fully from the Functions menu or double click anywhere on the display Making settings You can adjust the behavior and display of the meters as desired and assign up to five sets of Spectrometer settings to the Preset buttons for instant access Open the Settings dialog by selecting Settings from the Functions menu or clicking the tool icon Note that you can apply your settings without closing the dialog by clicking the Apply button If you want to store your settings for later use or assign them to a Preset button select Save as from the pop up menu in the lower part of the dialog and specify a name for the preset in the file
302. h to encode as MP3 files or a group of stereo files that you need to downsample and convert to mono You can also take maximum advantage of your computer s architecture if you have a multiple processor cores by spreading the processing load across them These settings are selected in the Multitasking tab To use the Batch Converter tool 1 Click onthe plus sign icon to add files or just drag the files directly into the pane 2 Define an output file location and file format 3 Choose any options or performance settings from the Options and Multi tasking tabs 4 Click Start to begin you can also choose an option to start the process automatically when dragging the file in You can access this dialog by choosing Utilities gt Batch conversion of Audio Files For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio File Format Dialog 13 5 Batch Renaming This dialog appears in various locations in WaveLab and allows you to rename a batch of files Clips or markers WaveLab 7 13 6 Log window 383 The Batch Renaming dialog offers a powerful set of facilities to convert remove format replace and insert text into existing names You can use simple options to match text or you can build your own regular expressions as required Batch renaming can be useful with large projects for example so you ca
303. hared tool windows Phasescope VU Meter Oscilloscope Bit Meter Spectroscope Spectrometer Wavescope Timecode Background task monitor Log window Master Section Related topics About Tool Windows Metering Docking windows 9 2 1 Phasescope The Phasescope indicates the phase and amplitude relationship between two stereo chan nels It is only really relevant when monitoring stereo audio material Reading the Phasescope It can be interpreted as follows e A vertical line indicates a perfect mono signal the left and right channels are the same WaveLab 7 214 Control Window e A horizontal line indicates that the left channel is the same as the right but with an inverse phase A random but roughly elliptical shape indicates a well balanced stereo signal If the shape leans to the left there is more energy in the left channel and vice versa the extreme case of this is if one side is muted in which case the Phasescope will show a straight line angled 45 degrees to the other side A perfect circle indicates a sine wave on one channel and the same sine wave shifted by 90 degrees on the other Generally the more you can see a thread shape the more bass there is in the signal the more spray like the display the more high frequencies are in the signal Phase Correlation meter At the bottom of the display you will find a Phase Correlation meter which shows the same information but in a different wa
304. hat have been issued by WaveLab When using WaveLab s scripting language for example the logWindow function outputs messages to this window There are a number of toggle buttons and these allow you to filter the types of messages displayed Note When using the logWindow method you need to have the Show informal notes button selected for the messages to be visible If no log messages are displayed make sure all the toggle buttons are selected A 0 You can access this window via Workspace gt Shared tool windows gt Log lt is available in the Control Window Audio File Workspace and Audio Montage Workspace You can also access this window in the Control Window via Utilities gt Log For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics WaveLab 7 196 Batch Processing Control Window Specific tool windows Scripting 7 3 Batch Processing Plug ins The Batch Processor Workspace allows you to add a sequence of plug ins that can be used to process a batch of Audio Files Some of these plug ins are standard plug ins available from the Master Section others are offline processes available in the Audio File Workspace and there are others that are only available within batch processing To add a plug in First create a new Audio Plug in chain window click on the Create an empty document icon in the Batch
305. hat is off by default When you are happy with your CD layout or you wish to further refine it further you can e 1 Check CD conformity before burning your CD you can first check its Red Book conformity by choosing Edit gt Check CD conformity e Write audio CD choose to burn the CD using the Write Audio CD dialog e Convert to Audio Montage convert the CD layout into an audio montage for further editing by choosing Edit gt Convert to Audio Montage For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Authoring CDs and DVDs Basic Audio CD Settings Write Audio CD Select clicking 5 5 2 Error detection and correction This specific tool window allows you to search for unwanted clicks and digital artifacts in an Audio File Several detection and restoration methods are available You can detect mark and name jump to play back and remove individual audio errors The settings for error detection and correction are organized within the following groups of controls e Detection tab choose the method used to detect any errors Each different method has its own settings to determine when it will detect an error Click Detection 1 and 2 will search for clicks in certain frequency ranges while Digital Click Detection looks for clicks that are caused by clicks typical to digital errors Correction tab specif
306. hat it s warning filter buttons A are selected For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Scripting ECMAScript Reference Log window 11 1 83 Definition of shortcut s This dialog allows you to define your own customized shortcut s for a particular function selected from Customize Commands These custom shortcuts can save you time and speed up your workflow in WaveLab You can define a shortcut using a e Key sequence any existing keyboard shortcut is displayed in the first keystroke field and can be overwritten There are some standard shortcuts that cannot be redefined in this case the related edit fields are disabled Each shortcut is restricted to a specific Workspace so you can use the same shortcut in different Workspaces Press the key combination you wish to use and it will be displayed If a keyboard shortcut is already used by another command a warning is given Use the Clear button to erase any shortcut entries already present There are additional spaces to allow you to define sequences containing up to four key strokes Please note these keys must be pressed released one after the other and the action is performed when the last key has been pressed e Keyword enter a keyword which you can later use to activate the command by typing it into the Keyword field command bar e MIDI e
307. hat the source and destination regions are properly choosen Master Section processing Master Section tab This allows you to process a specific frequency range via the Master Section The selected or non selected regions of the spectrum can be processed differently You can also employ a number of filters Bandpass Low pass High pass to further refine the particular range of frequencies to be affected by any Master Section effects A selected spectrum region can either be WaveLab 7 82 WaveLab Concepts e Processed separately by the Master Section plug ins The non selected spectrum can either be bypassed or sent to the Master Section e Bypassed This removes the selected spectrum region from the Audio File The non selected spectrum can either be routed to the Master Section input or the Master Sec tion output e Sent to Master Section output The non selected spectrum can either be bypassed or sent to the Master Section input If the latter is selected it will be mixed with the selected spectrum region at the Master Section output You can access this window by choosing Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Spec trum Editor For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics The Spectrum display Spectrum Processing Modes Spectrogram options Spectrometer 4 11 0 1 Spectrum Processing Modes
308. he CD or export it to the Audio Montage Workspace to edit further You can also choose to consolidate the Audio Files in the CD into a single Audio File with track markers Adding tracks to your audio CD To create tracks in your audio CD e Drag Audio Files directly drag Audio Files directly from your computer s file browser into the window You can also drag Audio Files from the Audio File Workspace by their tab or document icon This creates CD track markers at the file edges quantized on CD frame boundaries e Drag an audio selection dragging a selection rather than a whole file into the basic audio CD creates a CD track with markers at the edges but quantized on CD frame boundaries not necessarily exactly on the exact position of the selection edges e Browse for Audio Files select File gt Add track s from the Basic Audio CD menu You can then select Audio Files to insert in your CD Once you have added your tracks information about each track is displayed Each track also has its marker information nested within it To access this information click on the left most arrow icon to expand the track view Using the track list Once you have added a number of tracks to your audio CD you can use the track list to e Audition playback you can audition each track with or without pre roll by clicking on the leftmost icons Click on 3 gt in the audition column to play the track from that track s start marker with a pr
309. he audio input you have chosen in the Audio Streaming Settings This is useful for monitoring audio while recording a Monitor File Rendering the meters display what is being written to disk during file rendering taking into account Master Section settings with average minimum and maximum peak values computed After rendering the meter s freeze and remain frozen until you refresh or change the monitor mode gt Monitor Edit cursor position the meters display static information about the audio beneath the edit cursor Note that the Master Section settings are not taken into account in this mode WaveLab 7 4 5 Metering 39 e E Analyze audio selection this allows you to make a selection and have the meters display the average values over the selected range as a static display The Master Section settings are not taken into account in this mode When you change the selection you need to update the meter displays by selecting Refresh selection analysis from the Meters menu or by clicking the Refresh button on the Meters control bar If you have one of the continuous display modes chosen you can also select to freeze the meters at any time using the lll Freeze meters command Using meter windows There can only be one instance of each Audio Meter For example if you dock one meter in a Workspace it will be automatically removed from the place where it was previously located Audio Meters can appear in the Audio Fi
310. he continuous display modes chosen you can also select to freeze the meters at any time using the lll Freeze meters command Using meter windows There can only be one instance of each Audio Meter For example if you dock one meter ina Workspace it will be automatically removed from the place where it was previously located Audio Meters can appear in the Audio File Audio Montage Workspaces as well as the Con trol Window They can be used as a docked window in a Workspace as a tabbed window in the control window as an independent floating window In this mode it can be useful to make the window frameless from Window gt Hide frame to save screen space In this case the whole menu is accessed by right clicking The axis of most Audio Meters may be rotated to view the graphics horizontally or vertically Some meters can also have their visual style and display parameters customized via their corresponding settings dialog This can be accessed through the Functions gt Settings menu in each meter window or by using the 4 icon Related topics VU Meter Spectroscope Oscilloscope Bit Meter Phasescope Spectrometer Wavescope 5 3 1 VU Meter The vu meter is used to display the peak and average loudness decibel level of your Audio File It also displays the pan or the balance between the left and right channels in a stereo WaveLab 7 110 Audio File editing file The upper part of the level pan
311. he cross fade envelope Click Apply to process the cross fade Post cross fade This tab allows you to cross fade the loop back into the audio after the end of the loop This is done by mixing a copy of the loop back into the audio Use the envelope drag points or value sliders to adjust the cross fade envelope Click Apply to process the post cross fade Using the Copy button you can insert multiple copies of the loop into the active Audio File creating a smooth audio sequence since copies will loop without an audible transition You can access this dialog by choosing Process gt Loop Tweaker For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Markers WaveLab 7 98 Audio File editing Adjusting Envelopes Zero crossing 5 1 9 Effect morphing This dialog within the Audio File Workspace allows you to gradually mix two audio ranges that have different effects processing applied to them Effect morphing allows you to smoothly morph or blend from one effect to another or from an unprocessed audio segment to a processed audio segment Effect Morphing always involves two audio ranges Normally these are two versions of the same audio range of which one is unprocessed and the other processed Effect morphing works by using WaveLab s Undo buffer to mix a copy of the processed audio with the unprocessed
312. he cursor position Possible values for type are generic temporary cdTrackStart cdTrackEnd cdTrackFrontier cdTrackIndex loopStart loopEnd muteStart muteEnd playbackStarter e regionStart WaveLab 7 70 WaveLab Concepts e regionEnd e errorStart e errorEnd e correctionStart e correctionEnd Example activeWave addMarker generic SomeName SomeComment findNextMarkerPosition posStartSearch type Searches for the next marker of type from a given position Returns the marker position if any is found or 1 insertMonoTrack where Adds a Mono Audio Track at index where insertStereoTrack where Adds a Stereo Audio Track at index where insertClip iTrack timePosition fileName autoShift Creates a Clip from fileName inserts it in track iTrack on the time line at posision timePosition add possibly shift other Clips to make room according to parameter autoShift autoShift can be one of the following e autoShiftNo e autoShiftTrack e autoShiftGlobal This function returns the ID of first created Clip or O clipWithName name Returns the ID of first Clip with name name or O clipWithFile name Returns the ID of first Clip that refers to fileName or O firstClipQ Returns the first Montage Clip ID or O if the Montage is empty nextClip clipld Returns the ID of the Clip stored after clipld or O Clips are not sorted in any special order
313. he loudness of your music is distributed You can access this dialog in the Wave File Workspace via Analysis gt Loudness distri bution For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Loudness 4 6 11 Loudness normalizer This dialog allows you to adjust the loudness of a file Because it relates to loudness as opposed to maximum peak level this tool works quite differently from the Level Normalizer A typical application is to specify a loudness for example 12dB and the Loudness Normalizer processes the audio to match this level of loudness Like Gain Change increasing the loudness to a certain value can introduce clipping To avoid this occurring a peak limiter the Peak Master plug in can be used as part of the process WaveLab 7 54 WaveLab Concepts The Loudness Normalizer raises the loudness and limits peaks in the signal at the same time if needed to achieve the target loudness In the case of stereo files both channels are processed independently This process happens over several stages analysis precedes the final rendering The Loudness Normalizer dialog gives access to useful statistics about the file and the Loudness distribution tool and you can choose to remove any DC offset in the file You can access this dialog from the Audio File Workspace via Process gt Loudness nor maliz
314. he optical drive connected to your computer If you do not have a Blu ray Disk writer connected for example you will not be able to write a Blu ray Disk you may have prepared However you can still save it as an ISO Disk image and transfer it for remote burning To prepare a data disk follow these steps Adding files Add files and folders to the disk by e dragging them directly from your computer s file browser e dragging a file from any Workspace by either dragging it by its title bar tab or using the document button e choosing File gt Special gt Add to Data CD DVD from any of the editing Workspaces to add the currently focused file WaveLab 7 11 1 Dialogs 249 Removing files To remove files from the file structure e select the files folders you wish to remove and click on the red cross icon To remove a group of files hold down Shift while selecting the files folders to remove Please note that this does not delete the files from the computer only a reference to them e to remove all files folders from the layout choose Reset Editing the file structure To edit the arrangement of the files in your disk e drag files folders to a different location in the file list pane To move multiple files folders hold down Shift while selecting the files folders you wish to move e drag file folders over a folder icon to move them into that directory e to add a new folder click on the 4 folder icon
315. he region so that a double arrow appears and then clicking and dragging To remove a region that you have drawn click anywhere else on the waveform and it disappears If you have defined a region as a Source or Target it can be selected at any time to create a new selection using the same dimensions Spectrum editor functions The Spectrum Editor has the following parts Selection use this part to refine and define your selection s You can expand se lections shift selections around and define a source and target region for performing copy operations Operations use this part to perform copying filtering and processing operations For copying operations you require both a source and a target region to have been defined using the Selection tab You can choose which method to copy audio between the Source and Target regions You can also choose to apply processing to a single spectrum region using a variety of different modes See Spectrum Processing Modes for information on each mode type Master Section use this part to process and route selected spectral audio regions through the Master Section and its effects plug ins This allows for frequency selective processing A selected region s frequency spectrum can be routed to the Master Sec tion where you can choose to process it separately from the non selected frequency spectrum The signal is split so that one part region spectrum or non selected spec trum is sent to the p
316. he regular expression Searches are not case sensitive Note that there are various versions of regular expressions WaveLab uses a version that represents a good compromise between power and ease of use The term expression refers to a single character a character class or a sub expression enclosed with Q or The following items are available on the Regular Expression pop up menu WaveLab 7 4 12 About Regular Expressions 85 Menu item Operator Description Any character Symbolizes any character Character in range is A bracketed text is treated as a single character for example AEW13 means AorEorWor1or3 A hyphen within the brackets specifies a range of characters For example F I means F or G or H or and A Z0 9 matches all letters and all digits Character not in range M A circumflex located at the first position in a bracket is a complement operator In other words all characters match except those included in the bracket Example E means any character except E Slash A slash before a character means that this character is to be treated literally not as an operator 0 or 1 match 1 if possible Matches O or 1 time the preceding expression 1 repeat if possible is grabbed then the rest of the regular expression continues to be evaluated O or 1 match 0 if possible 2 Matches O or 1 time the preceding expression O repeat if poss
317. he temporary memory buttons to capture a number of different loop candidates and audition them one by one Note that if you are not using a cross fade or post cross fade you do not need to click Apply when just tweaking WaveLab 7 52 WaveLab Concepts loop points You can also leave this dialog window open and manually adjust the position of the markers in the main waveform windows if you need to make large adjustments Cross fade This tab allows you to apply a cross fade at the end of a loop by mixing a copy of the beginning of the loop with it This can be useful to smooth the transition between the end of a loop and its beginning especially when using material that doesn t naturally loop Use the envelope drag points or value sliders to adjust the cross fade envelope Click Apply to process the cross fade Post cross fade This tab allows you to cross fade the loop back into the audio after the end of the loop This is done by mixing a copy of the loop back into the audio Use the envelope drag points or value sliders to adjust the cross fade envelope Click Apply to process the post cross fade Using the Copy button you can insert multiple copies of the loop into the active Audio File creating a smooth audio sequence since copies will loop without an audible transition You can access this dialog by choosing Process gt Loop Tweaker f For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the Wh
318. heir own icon Related buttons are grouped into various Command bars You can dock Command bars to any window edge and rearrange them Each Workspace has an appropriate set of command bars that are available to be displayed All the commands accessed via the Command buttons can also be found in the menus Hiding and displaying Command bars To view a list of available command bars right click on an empty part of the top edge of the Workspace More precisely on Windows computers right click anywhere along the window s top menu on Apple Macintosh computers right click in the window s caption bar This dis plays the Peripheral Windows context menu which you can use to select which Command bars are displayed You can also choose which individual Command buttons are displayed from the Customize commands dialog To move a set of Command bar tools Drag on the left side of the command or at top for vertical command bars the pointer changes to when you have grip Drag the group of Commands to any side of the appli WaveLab 7 3 4 Context menus 9 cation window and release the mouse button The application window and other Command bars will automatically make space for the Command bar in its new position By default Command bars are docked and don t float You can make them float individually or not by right clicking and selecting the desired option from the menu Once the option has been selected move the command bar You can d
319. hen this mode is selected Dispersion This is a special filter that smears the dynamics and pitch of the region without changing the actual frequency content This works best on lower frequencies to mask the identity of a signal without changing the frequency spectrum This mode works best with the Infinite steepness setting which is automatically selected when Dispersion is used You can however freely set any Filter steepness setting The filter type options are not available when this mode is selected Dispersion can also be used to create special effects as it warps the sound in an unique way Fade Out This can be used with any of the three filter types Bandpass Low pass High pass It grad ually filters the frequencies in the region along the time axis from nothing at the left edge of the region to maximum allowed by the gain parameter at the right edge useful for gradually removing frequencies from a region Fade In This works like Fade out but inversed It can also be used in conjunction with any of the three filter types Bandpass Low pass High pass Fade out then in This is a mix of the two previous options the filtering effect gradually fades out until the middle of the region then fades back in It can also be used in conjunction with any of the three filter types Bandpass Low pass High pass Fade in then out The inverse of the above It can also be used in conjunction with any of the three filter types
320. hical display will still show the real time frequency display and the noise contour line HF Limit Knob and Touch Pad Hz This displays and controls the frequency beyond which the attenuation is applied non dynamically Scrolling the frequency down from the default of 22kHz will show a red region in the frequency display that has a fixed attenuation To the left of the HF Limit line the noise removal circuit behaves as normal To the right the signal is attenuated by a fixed amount set by the attenuation fader This mode is useful for band limited programme material A good example is a low bitrate encoded signal which might be band limited to 12kHz Due to the sharp discontinuity the noise removal circuit can introduce audible artifacts around the band limit and setting the HF Limit frequency slightly lower than the band limit will remove those artifacts Attenuation Fader and Touch Pad dB The attenuation fader and touch pad determine the level of attenuation that the noise removal circuit will apply in the range O to 18 dB Generally this should be set so that the noise reduction is pleasing Excessive use of attenuation can degrade the signal unnecessarily Output Level Meter dB The output meter is designed to give exactly 1dB per LED for the top 18dB of dynamic range and 2dB per LED thereafter There is a peak hold feature that holds the highest peak helping to give a better impression of the working dynamic range Output Gai
321. hich shows the same information but in a different way e The green line shows the current phase correlation while the two red lines show the recent peak minimum and maximum values respectively these are the default colors which you can change e With a mono signal the meter would show 1 indicating that both channels are per fectly in phase WaveLab 7 9 3 Metering 227 e Similarly 1 indicates that the two channels are the same but one is inverted e Generally for a good mix the meter should show a value between O and 1 Unlike the main Phasescope the Phase Correlation meter is also available in Analyze audio selection mode showing an average value for the selected range Changing settings You can define display colors peak hold time and the resolution or number of samples to display from the Functions gt Settings menu The Phasescope meter can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Mon tage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Window Related topics Metering 9 3 6 Spectrometer The Spectrometer uses FFT Fast Fourier Transform techniques to display a continuous frequency graph providing a very precise and detailed real time frequency analysis e The current frequency spectrum is shown as a linear graph e Spectrum peaks are shown as a short horizontal lines indicating recent peak maxi mum values Snaps
322. hich the signal handling capabilities of an audio system ex ceeds a designated level the Permitted Maximum Level PML Headroom can be thought of as a safety zone allowing transient audio peaks to exceed the PML without exceeding the signal capabilities of an audio system DC Remover Glossary contents 15 36 ISO image An ISO image is an archive file or disk image of an optical disk in a format defined by the International Organization for Standardization ISO ISO image derives from the ISO 9660 file system used with CD ROM media ISO image files are supported by WaveLab and typically have a file extension of iso Glossary contents 15 37 ISRC ISRC the International Standard Recording Code is a code for identifying sound record ings and music video recordings on CDs intended for commercial distribution WaveLab allows you to specify an ISRC code for each audio track The code contains the following elements WaveLab 7 15 38 Loops 403 e Country Code 2 ASCII characters e Registrant Code typically a record label 3 ASCII characters or digits e Recording Year 2 digits or ASCII characters e Serial Number unique number identifying the recording 5 digits or ASCII characters The groups of characters are often presented with hyphens to make them easier to read but hyphens are not part of the code Authoring CDs and DVDs Burn Audio CD from DDP Image UPC EAN Import Audio CD Glossary conte
323. hing allows you to smoothly morph or blend from one effect to another or from an unprocessed audio segment to a processed audio segment Effect Morphing always involves two audio ranges Normally these are two versions of the same audio range of which one is unprocessed and the other processed Effect morphing works by using WaveLab s Undo buffer to mix a copy of the processed audio with the unprocessed version You can also use any other bit of audio from the application s clipboard that has the same length as the one you wish to morph with To set up a basic effect morph proceed as follows 1 Start by making a selection range over the time you wish the effect morphing to take place 2 Now process this range using any Master Section effect s or use some other off line processing You cannot use processing effects that alter the length of the selection e g time stretching 3 Open the Effect Morphing dialog by choosing Edit gt Effect Morphing 4 Adjust your envelope points over time between 0 and 100 This will determine the level and direction of the morph For example starting at 100 and ending at 0 will fade out the effect you just applied WaveLab 7 252 Interface Elements 5 Choose Unprocessed selection for this example As mentioned previously you can also use any audio of the same duration from the clipboard 6 Click Apply to apply the Effect morphing You can access this dialog in the Audio File
324. his question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics WaveLab 7 11 1 Dialogs 251 Podcasts 11 1 25 Ducking options This dialog allows you to choose options when using WaveLab s ducking feature The duck ing function allows you to use a Clip s volume envelope to modulate the volume envelope of an adjacent channel s Clip The most obvious application of this feature is when mixing background music with a voice over When the voice over starts the level of the music is automatically lowered and when the voice over stops the level of the music is restored to the original level This is done by automatically creating volume envelope curves To use this feature you first need to select the Clip you wish to alter the volume envelope of and then from the dialog choose the track containing the Clip you wish to duck The focused Clip must be located within the time range of the Clip you wish to use as the modulator You can access this dialog in the Audio Montage Workspace via Focused Clip gt Envelope gt Duck according to other track For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Adjusting Envelopes 11 1 26 Effect morphing This dialog within the Audio File Workspace allows you to gradually mix two audio ranges that have different effects processing applied to them Effect morp
325. his dialog from Batch Processing Workspace gt Plug ins window gt MonoPass Plug ins gt Pitch Correction For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Pitch correction Batch Processing Plug ins 7 3 0 8 Normalize Level This dialog allows you to change the peak level of your Audio File Enter the desired peak level in dB that you wish the audio selection to have You can also use Find current peak level to obtain a report on the peak level of the current audio selection or the peak level in the whole file if Process whole file if there is no selection is selected in the preferences You can choose to apply the same gain to both stereo channels Stereo Link or mix down to a mono file Mix to Mono with the assurance that no clipping will occur when both channels are mixed together To normalize the selected audio enter the desired peak level and click Apply You can access this dialog by choosing Process gt Level Normalizer in the Audio File Workspace This function is also available as a batch processing plug in You can access it from Batch Processing Workspace gt Plug ins window gt Multipass Plug ins gt Normalizer For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio
326. his help entry describes some of the most important drag and drop operations There are many other possibilities especially within the various list views for example where you can possibly drag from the list to an external window drag a file into the list to import or reorder these vary of course according to the context Therefore we encourage you to try drag and drop wherever you feel it may make sense Within Workspaces Drag objects within and between Workspaces to perform the following functions Docking a tool window drag a window s title bar to any side of the Workspace beside or above an existing tool window to dock the window at a new place Moving a Command bar drag the bar grip at the left hand end of a command bar and reposition it See Command bars for more information Moving a Document Tab drag the tab to a new location within its own tabbed group to reorder You can also drag a tab to another group of tabs Open a file drag a compatible file from the WaveLab s File Browser from the oper ating system s file browser or from another application to the tab bar Insert a file in another Workspace drag an Audio File by its title bar tab between the Audio File and Audio Montage Workspaces You can also use the Switcher window to drag any object to another Workspace Drag the object over the corresponding Workspace icon in the Switcher window and wait until the new Workspace becomes active Then you can release the f
327. hots By using the Add snapshot and Erase last snapshot buttons you can take and erase snapshots of the current spectrum These will be superimposed over the current peak spec trum graph in a color you can customize until you click the icon again to take a new snapshot One use for this is to check the effects of adding EQ for example Up to five snapshots can be superimposed on the display the sixth snapshot replaces the earliest one in the display and so on Don t confuse the order of snapshots with the numbered buttons these are Spectrometer presets see below Zooming You can adjust the frequency scale and range in the Settings dialog as described below but it s also possible to temporarily zoom in on a frequency area of interest This is done by clicking and dragging a rectangle in the Spectroscope display When you release the mouse button the display is zoomed in so that the enclosed frequency range fills the window To return to full scale display select Zoom out fully from the Functions menu or double click anywhere on the display WaveLab 7 228 Control Window Making settings You can adjust the behavior and display of the meters as desired and assign up to five sets of Spectrometer settings to the Preset buttons for instant access Open the Settings dialog by selecting Settings from the Functions menu or clicking the 4 tool icon Note that you can apply your settings without closing the dialog by cl
328. hours unless you manually stop this process using the Transport controls You can access this dialog from the Master Section when you select the Asio Input plugin and then press the Master Section Render button For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Rendering Recording Dialog Master Section WaveLab 7 11 1 Dialogs 273 11 1 70 Render Montage window This dialog allows you to process the montage session you are working on mixing down multiple tracks into a mono or stereo file and applying any active plug in effects you have active This process is sometimes also referred to as mixing or bouncing down You can select options for which regions of the session are rendered whether to create a named file or a temporary untitled file and whether to mute the effects chain when finished There are various options to render all or parts of the Montage into one or more files use What s this You can access this dialog in the Audio Montage Workspace via the Render button from the Master Section window For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Rendering Audio Plug ins Audio File Format Dialog Master Section 11 1 71 Render Wave window This dialog allows you to p
329. ia the Master Section for example which only temporarily render an effect while audio is played through them Applying processing Processing can be applied to a selection or to a whole Audio File For certain processing operations processing the entire file is necessary This will be indicated by the effects re spective dialog If Process whole file if there is no selection is selected in the Audio File editing preferences editing tab the whole file will automatically be processed if no selection exists To apply processing to some audio proceed as follows 1 Make a selection If the file is in stereo you can apply processing to either channel or both by selecting one channel or both 2 Select the desired offline process from the Process menu 3 If a dialog appears make the appropriate settings If the dialog uses presets you can load one of them to fill out the settings automatically 4 When you have finished with the settings in the dialog click the Apply Paste Process button to permanently render the effect to file In some cases a status bar dialog is displayed showing the progress of the operation If you need to interrupt a long process click the Cancel button on the status bar dialog Undo Redo processing Even though offline processes appear to alter the file permanently you can always reinstate a previous version using WaveLab s undo feature The number of Undo Redo commands is limited only by your avai
330. ible the NEXT step in the regular expression is also evaluated and has priority O or more matches as many as possible Matches O or more times the preceding expression As many repeats as possible are grabbed then the rest of the regular expression continues to be evaluated O or more matches as few as possible ae Matches O or more times the preceding expression As few repeats as possible are grabbed the NEXT step in the regular expression is also evaluated and has priority 1 or more matches as many as possible Matches 1 or more times the preceding expression As many repeats as possible are grabbed then the rest of the regular WaveLab 7 expression continues to be evaluated 1 or more matches as few as possible Matches 1 or more times the preceding expression As few repeats as possible are grabbed the next step in the reaular expression ie 86 WaveLab Concepts The Shortcuts sub menu on the Regular Expression pop up menu contains the following options Menu item Operator Description Any digit d Special code to symbolize any digit as 0 9 Any non digit D Special code to symbolize any non digit as 0 9 Any letter MM Special code to symbolize any letter as a z Any non letter L Special code to symbolize any non letter as a z Any alphabetic w Special code to symbolize any alphabetic ch
331. icking the Apply button If you want to store your settings for later use or assign them to a Preset button select Save as from the pop up menu in the lower part of the dialog and specify a name for the preset in the file dialog that appears Now you can choose to make the settings instantly available for selection in the FFT Meter window by using the Assign to preset button submenu on the pop up menu e When you are finished click OK to close the dialog Selecting Spectrometer presets If you have assigned your settings to the Preset buttons in the Settings dialog you can quickly switch between different level scales and display modes by clicking one of the Preset icons 1 5 or selecting the desired preset from the Options pop up menu Exporting FFT data as ASCII text When using the Spectrometer in off line mode Monitor Edit cursor Position or Analyze audio election mode you can export the displayed FFT data as a text file by selecting Export FFT data as ASCII from the Options pop up menu The resulting text file can then be imported into applications that allow graph plotting from text files Microsoft Excel for example The Spectrometer can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Window Related topics Metering Spectroscope 9 3 7 Wavescope The Wavescope meter displays a real
332. icult to determine the increase decrease of level when multiple plug ins are used in an effects chain This dialog can determine this differ ence in level and adjust the output gain accordingly You can choose to hear the original audio the processed audio or the processed audio with the correction in level applied while playing back audio You can also select the method used to calculate the amount of level correction used You can access this dialog from the Master Section via Smart bypass For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Master Section 11 1 87 Special File Format This dialog allows you to choose options as to how WaveLab will interpret any unrecognized file formats or files containing raw data that you wish to open You can define the sample WaveLab 7 11 1 Dialogs 281 format byte order sample rate file extension and whether or not the file contains mono or stereo channels You can also choose to ignore the file s header start or end of file data Once you have specified a format for a particular type of file WaveLab remembers the new format for the next time This function can be useful for example if you are working with a rarely used Audio File format like those used by some game platforms or mobile phone ring tones You can access this dialog in the Audio File Workspace via File
333. ih it itr itis WaveLab 7 376 Audio Plug ins Leveler Multi takes multi channel input and applies a fader equally to all channels The parameter is as follows e Volume 48dB to 12dB This governs how much gain is applied to the signal before the output bus Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets 12 39 Peak Master e 1 Peak Master A B Input Gain 1111112111111 11101 e E 0 00 dB LET RS OutCeiling ler ____ _ _ __ __ _ __ 0 00 AMAIA ES Softness A st eT TT Lice ell a ____ 9 00 MAA A Peak master is a basic plug in that minimizes peaks in your Audio File allowing a louder mix without clipping It is particularly useful in helping to tame very dynamic instruments The parameters are as follows e Input Gain Values range from 12dB to 24dB e Out Ceiling Values range from 18dB to OdB e Softness Values range from 5 to 5 Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets WaveLab 7 12 40 Silence 377 12 40 Silence O 1 Silence 4s E Start Ll 1 EEE 0 00 ms HI End SAA AN laa 000 ms EDITED The Silence built in plug in provides a simple way of injecting a precise period of silence into the start or end of an Audio File The parameters are as follows e Start Use the slider to add from O to 60 000ms of silence to the start of the file e End Use the slider to add from O to 60 000
334. ile in the target Workspace WaveLab 7 3 7 Dragging operations 13 Within the Audio File Workspace Drag objects within the Audio File Workspace to perform the following functions e Paste an Audio File drag a document s title bar tab or document button onto the waveform area of another file to copy and paste its audio content You can also drag a compatible file directly from the File Browser the operating system s file browser or from another application Delete Move a marker drag the marker along the time ruler to change its position Drag while pressing the Shift key to create a copy of this marker Drag above the time ruler to delete the marker Copy an audio selection drag a selected region of audio onto the waveform area of the same file or of another file Left right or both channels can be copied Create a new file from an audio selection drag a selected region of audio onto the empty space of a tab bar to create a new copy of the audio If dragging happens right after double clicking the selection is quantized and extended up to the marker s region under the mouse Modify a selection drag left or right to change the extent of the selection Move the waveform drag anywhere above the time ruler to move it horizontally Create a marker from selected text drop text that you have selected in an external application onto the time ruler to create a generic marker there The text becomes the marker
335. iles the file browser also has a region panel When you select an Audio File its related regions are listed in this panel You can then drag the region from the list to insert only that part of the audio Double clicking on a region has the effect of opening the file in the Workspace and selecting that region You can access this dialog via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt File Browser For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Specific tool windows WaveLab 7 6 4 Specific tool windows 163 6 4 4 Marker Window The marker window is a specific tool window that allows you to create edit and use markers while working on an audio waveform From the Functions menu you can also access useful functions to convert marker types rename multiple markers and export the marker list as text The Marker list The marker window contains a list of any markers placed in the currently active file along with their corresponding details Click on a column header to sort the list in ascending or descending order based on the values in that column You can also use the Filter menu to toggle which types of markers are displayed in the list From this list of markers you can use the fields controls and menus to e Create a new marker at the playback head position click on a marker icon at the top of the window o
336. in 184 Batch Processing e Run an external task you can choose to run an external application after batch processing has completed using the External Tool tab The external tool must be set up first via the Configure external tools dialog You can access this from Tools gt Configure external tools Define any options choose any options using the Options tab and or annotate your batch using the Comments tab Choose any Multitasking options if you have a multi core processor in your com puter you can also choose how many tasks are completed simultaneously You can choose how many cores of your processor to dedicate to batch processing adjusting this setting even during processing Start processing when you are happy with all the settings choose Process gt Start or click the shortcut button to begin processing the batch You can monitor the progress of each task and pause cancel or reassign priorities on lengthier tasks using the Background tasks window From the built in Progress pane you can choose to pause or cancel the batch at any time Batch the batch processor As you may have noticed in the Plug ins window you can access Master Section plug ins and many of WaveLab s built in offline processes In addition there are some plug ins which are unique to the Batch Processor Workspace and each is explained in more detail in Batch Processing Plug ins Obviously the order in which you process plug ins is important
337. inberg Chorus Steinberg Compressor Steinberg DeEsser Steinberg Mono Delay Steinberg Distortion Steinberg Dual Filter Steinberg Envelope Shaper Steinberg Expander Steinberg Gate Steinberg GEQ 10 GEQ 30 Steinberg Limiter Steinberg Maximizer Steinberg Mix 6 to 2 Steinberg Mix 8 to 2 Steinberg Mono to Stereo Steinberg Multiband Compressor Steinberg Octaver Steinberg Pingpong Delay Steinberg PostFilter Steinberg Roomworks Steinberg Roomworks SE Stereo Delay Steinberg Stereo Enhancer Steinberg Studio Chorus Steinberg Studio EQ Steinberg Test Generator UV22HR Dithering Steinberg Vintage Compressor Steinberg VST Dynamics Built in plug ins Crystal Resampler WaveLab 7 12 1 Audio Input 323 Leveler Leveler Multi Peak Master Silence Stereo Expander Dithering plug ins Internal Dithering 12 1 Audio Input l Audio input Ys 00 B Samp Rate OA po UA id ld ht en 44100 Hz Lin CEE aaa The Audio Input is a special Master Section plug in that allows you to render a signal coming in to a sound card s input s together with any Master Section effects This signal can be anything your sound card accepts for example a feed from a mixer a recorder or a micro phone By default this plug in is located in the ASIO sub menu of the Master Section effects An ASIO driver must be used and only one instance of this plug in is allowed in the Master Section plug in chain To use the External gear plug in proc
338. indow in the Control Window by choosing Utilities gt Background task monitor You can choose to automatically open the Background task monitor when a rendering pro cess begins To enable this option select the checkbox via Options gt Global Preferences gt Options gt Make the Background Task Monitor visible when a task starts Since this window is a Shared_tool_window the location where it opens may vary For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Specific tool windows Control Window Rendering 13 8 Timecode This shared tool window displays the current time of the playback head or the cursor position if not playing back in the timecode format currently selected in the Time Format dialog The current time can be in a range of standard SMPTE formats CD or DVD specific formats or a custom one see Time Format dialog WaveLab 7 13 8 Timecode 385 The most common use for this window is for working with video or film You can use it to display the playback head position of the current Audio File ina SMPTE format to frame level resolution i e hours minutes seconds frames You can also use it to display CD frames minutes seconds frames when you are authoring CD or DVDs You can access this window by choosing Workspace gt Shared tool windows gt Time code It is available in the Control Wi
339. ing 3 10 Shortcut system Throughout WaveLab there are many predefined shortcuts and custom commands that can be used to speed up your workflow The offline process Fade in for example can be trig gered from its menu entry from its command bar icon using a custom key sequence and you can use MIDI events as well Each shortcut is restricted to its specific Workspace which means you can re use the same shortcut in different Workspaces When a command is available from more than one Workspace then the shortcut applies to all Workspaces and cannot be reused WaveLab 7 16 Using the interface Not all commands are restricted to a Workspace for example all Master Section commands are global to the application and Record commands Record dialog are active only when the Record dialog has focus In addition a few specific Global shortcuts can be defined from Preferences gt Global Preferences gt Global shortcuts tab Shortcuts are defined and can be edited in the Customize commands dialog There are various places where you can access this dialog and each dialog restricts editing of the shortcut to the related context You can generate a summary of custom commands in a Print preview or HTML format from the dialog s Summary button There are several types of shortcuts available in WaveLab Key sequences You can define a sequence of up to four keys to trigger a desired action Note that these keys must be pressed released
340. ing Help Related topics CD Audio CD Report 11 1 96 File attributes This dialog allows you to define the file attributes or meta data to be embedded in your exported Audio File You can choose between entering standard WAV file meta data tags or the extended file header information available in Broadcast Wave Format BWF Fill in the relevant information using the text fields provided although it is not mandatory to complete all fields In some cases there are buttons to assist you in entering data WaveLab 7 286 Interface Elements e Uses the current date and time to fill in the Origination Date Time field e gt Uses WaveLab as the name of the originator software You can access this dialog in the Audio File Workspace via Edit gt File Attributes For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics WAV files 11 1 97 Audio File editing preferences This dialog allows you to define settings for editing in the Audio File Workspace You can choose defaults for editing and playback adjust the visual appearance of the wave form displays and determine how WaveLab works with audio and peak files You can access this dialog in the Audio File Workspace via Options gt Audio File editing preferences For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What
341. ing the file elsewhere in the tab area e Mix to Mono Audio File Workspace by holding down Control Alt Command Alt to mix a stereo file to mono while dragging the file to a new tab WaveLab 7 3 15 Transport controls 21 e Convert from Mono to Stereo Audio File Workspace by holding down Control Alt Command Alt to convert a mono file from mono to stereo while dragging the file to a new tab e Quickly switch between tabs by moving the mouse wheel while over the tab bar This switches the focus between the different tabs Tip An option in global preferences allows you to hide the title bar if there is only one tab open Global preferences gt User Interface gt Show tab if there is a single window Related topics About Tool Windows Docking windows 3 15 Transport controls The transport controls allow you to control playback within an Audio File or montage and to open the record window It can be accessed via the Transport menu or the Transport toolbar See Command bars for more information The Transport menu gives access to and shows keyboard shortcuts to the same functions that are available in the transport toolbar The Transport toolbar gives quick access to most of these functions If the toolbar is hid den select Workspace gt Command bars gt Transport commands Transport functions operate on the current Audio File The basic transport functions are e Loop On Off Toggles lo
342. ing with ISRC codes if entered track times and CD Text The Audio CD report can be output in HTML or Adobe PDF format or printed directly from WaveLab You can choose the details of what is displayed and include your custom logo You might send the Audio CD report to your client an album artwork designer or to the CD replication house when presenting them with a master CD for example You can control the formatting of values in your report via the Value Format window To open this dialog click on the Value Format link You can access this dialog in the Audio Montage Workspace s via CD window gt Functions gt Generate Audio CD report For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Value Format Authoring CDs and DVDs WaveLab 7 240 Interface Elements 11 1 5 Audio file comparer This analysis tool allows you to compare two Audio Files for differences between them It can create a delta file that contains these differences It can also drop markers at positions where differences are found This can be useful for e Judging the effect of using an equalizer by comparing the file before and after The delta file will show what was added or removed e Check the noise added by a processor e Compare two digitally recorded files to check for dropouts Note Make sure that the two documents you wa
343. ings By opening the Settings dialog you can adjust the display colors and choose to activate Auto zoom or not With Auto zoom activated the display is optimized so that the highest level reaches the top of the display at all times The Settings dialog can be accessed through the Functions gt Settings menu or by using the icon The Oscilloscope can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces lt can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace It can also be docked in the Control Window Related topics Metering 11 2 4 Bit Meter The Bit Meter shows the resolution or the number of bits used in the digital audio being monitored Normally the maximum number of bits in an Audio File is the same as the resolution of the Audio File e g a 16 bit Audio File shows that up to 16 bits are used but sometimes this is not the case As soon as you perform any kind of real time processing on an Audio File the audio data is treated at a much higher resolution 32 bit floating point to allow for pristine audio quality Examples of such processing include level adjustments effects the mixing of two or more files etc In fact the only time when a 16 bit file is played back at 16 bit resolution is if you play it without any fades or effects and with the Master Faders set to 0 00 no level adjustment You can try this out for yourself by playing back a 16 bit Audio File and viewing the Bit M
344. ins window gt Metapass Plug ins gt Meta Normalizer For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Batch Processing Plug ins 7 3 0 15 Meta Leveler This dialog is exclusive to the Batch Processor Workspace and allows you to match the level of a batch of files The core purpose of this plug in is to to apply the same gain to all files while being certain that a specific peak level will never be exceeded in any file The unique gain that you wish to apply is possibly reduced by the plug in once all files in the batch have been analyzed and prior to actually applying the gain across the batch You can access this dialog from the Batch Processor Workspace via Plug ins window gt Metapass Plug ins gt Meta Leveler For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Batch Processing Plug ins WaveLab 7 204 Batch Processing WaveLab 7 Chapter 8 Podcasts About Podcasts Once set up you can produce high quality audio podcast episodes directly from WaveLab Audio podcasts are ordered and commented sets of digital Audio Files generally in the form of episodes with a consistent theme or presenter Episodes may be downloaded from the Internet usually via an automated feed Comp
345. int double click on a point to remove it e Selecting multiple points using Shift click allows you to move the selection as a group You can also use the controls to delete or reset points in the envelope Use the envelope smoothing button to toggle the envelope points between a straight polygonal line or a curved path Click Apply to apply the envelope to the audio selection or file You can access this dialog in the Audio File Workspace via Process gt Level envelope For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio File editing Adjusting Envelopes WaveLab 7 94 Audio File editing 5 1 3 Normalize Level This dialog allows you to change the peak level of your Audio File Enter the desired peak level in dB that you wish the audio selection to have You can also use Find current peak level to obtain a report on the peak level of the current audio selection or the peak level in the whole file if Process whole file if there is no selection is selected in the preferences You can choose to apply the same gain to both stereo channels Stereo Link or mix down to a mono file Mix to Mono with the assurance that no clipping will occur when both channels are mixed together To normalize the selected audio enter the desired peak level and click Apply You can access this dialog by choosing P
346. io File in the Audio File Workspace and selecting Create Audio Montage from Audio File from the Edit menu by importing an AES 31 project file You can for example export a complete Nuendo project as an AES 31 file and import this into WaveLab where a Montage containing all the tracks and files of the original Nuendo project is created by importing an XML text file previously exported by WaveLab Multi channel surround setup In addition to the default stereo mode WaveLab supports up to 8 channel operation and up to 6 channel surround operation To enable multichannel operation mode a proper audio driver must first have been selected in the Audio Streaming Settings Once you have setup your sound card to receive multiple channels you can choose the number of output channels you wish in your Montage via the Audio Montage properties dialog You can then route different tracks to different channels using the Track dispatching dialog and adjust the pan between different surround channels using the Surround Panner dialog or the mini surround pan window in the track s control window Tracks and Clips The main montage window is divided into a number of horizontal tracks which you can add and remove Tracks can be mono stereo audio or picture tracks You layout your Clips on audio tracks to create your montage Adding new tracks You can add new tracks of any type e by using the Track gt Add track type menu or e by clicking on a t
347. io Montage is a compilation of audio Clips composited together In WaveLab the Audio Montage Workspace allows you to compile and edit multiple Clips references to Audio Files on disk on one or more tracks The resulting Audio Montage can include both track and Clip based effects volume and pan automation wide ranging fade and cross fade functions Multichannel support makes it possible to create surround mixes that can be burned to DVD Audio compatible disks Glossary contents 15 11 Bandwidth Bandwidth is the group of frequencies expressed in Hertz or in musical octaves that pass through a device with a loss of less than 3dB Glossary contents 15 12 Bit depth Bit depth is the number of bits used to represent a single sample 8 16 and 24 bits are common bit depths Larger bit depths represent the sample more accurately and are less noisy but take up more space on the disk Bit Meter Glossary contents 15 13 Blu ray Disk Blu ray Disk BD or Blu ray is an optical disk storage medium designed to replace the standard DVD format The disk has the same physical dimensions as standard CDs and DVDs but the standard data storage capacity is 25GB single layered and 50GB dual layered disk WaveLab 7 15 14 CD Frame 397 The name Blu ray derives from the 405 nanometer blue violet laser used to read the disk standard DVDs use a 650nm red laser CDs use 780nm The shorter wavelength allows for five or 10 times
348. ion select the checkbox to lock the marker This prevents it from being accidentally dragged to a new position in the Waveform window For more information on using markers see Markers For details on the different marker types and their uses see Marker types Note that there are more marker features available in the Montage version compared to the Audio File version See Using markers in the Audio Montage Workspace in Markers for more details You can access this specific tool window within the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Markers For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Specific tool windows Markers Marker types Convert marker type Text format 5 5 5 Metadata window This specific tool window displays any Meta data tags belonging to the currently active file This usually consists of a set of tags that describe the audio contents For example it might include the title of the track the author and the date it was created This data will vary depending on the file type and not all file types store this information so it may be blank To edit the file s meta data tags click anywhere in the window This will open the corresponding file attributes dialog You can access this dialog in the Audio File Workspace via Workspace gt Specific tool window
349. iq Paris files Equalization 392 Glossary F FFT Focused Clip Formant FTP Site G No entries available H Headroom ISO image ISRC No entries available K No entries available L Loops Loudness Markers Media Catalog Number MIDI MIDI Channels Mixing Mobile phone Audio Files MP2 files MP3 files Non destructive editing Normalize NTSC WaveLab 7 393 O Ogg Vorbis files OSA files P PAL SECAM Pan Peak level Plug ins Pre roll and Post roll Preset system Processor cores Q Quantization R Raw PCM files Red Book CD DA Regular Expressions RF64 files RMS S Sample rate SMPTE timecode Sound Designer II files Spectrogram Sun Java files T Tempo Text Excel files U ULAW files UPC EAN V No entries available W WAV files WAV64 files Waveform Wet Dry WMA files WaveLab 7 394 Glossary X No entries available Y No entries available Z Zero crossing 15 1 ADPCM ADPCM Microsoft Dialogic is an audio file format commonly used for games and tele phony applications that offers a lower bit rate than linear PCM and thus requires less storage space bandwidth The file extension is vox or adpcm Glossary contents 15 2 AES31 The AES31 Standard is a non proprietary audio file format developed by the Audio Engi neering Society Standards Committee AESSC Its aim is to allow a project to be moved to another audio editing system with a minimum of
350. ired preset from the Options pop up menu Exporting FFT data as ASCII text When using the Spectrometer in off line mode Monitor Edit cursor Position or Analyze audio election mode you can export the displayed FFT data as a text file by selecting Export FFT data as ASCII from the Options pop up menu The resulting text file can then be imported into applications that allow graph plotting from text files Microsoft Excel for example The Spectrometer can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Window Related topics Metering Spectroscope 9 2 7 Wavescope The Wavescope meter displays a real time waveform drawing of the audio signal being mon itored It can be useful when recording or rendering a file if Monitor File rendering mode is active Making settings You can adjust settings for the display via the Wavescope Settings dialog This can be accessed via Functions gt Settings menu or by using the 4 icon Here you can set various color options for the background grid and waveform display as well as setting the waveform rendering speed and vertical zoom If Clear waveform when reaching right of pane is checked the waveform display is cleared each time the cursor reaches the right end of the display If unchecked the previous waveform is overwritten Tip Wavescope is a useful meter for
351. is means there is a unique instance of it it can only show up at one place at a time You can access it from Workspace menu gt Shared tool windows If the Master section is not visible click on to dock it in the relevant Workspace The Master Section includes e Effects slots For adding real time effect plug in processors such as Crystal Resam pler Steinberg Studio EQ etc WaveLab provides a number of effects slots Click on to access plug ins If you need more effects than you have slots available you can render the tracks and add further effects in a subsequent pass before storing the final Audio File Plug ins can be individually by passed for playback by toggling Y to but this does not affect the rendering process To give priority to a single effect that is to switch the other effects off temporarily press S Solo bypass The icon allows you to store access and manage plug in presets For Steinberg VST3 effects an interesting set of Factory presets are provided from the drop down submenu Other buttons in this row allow you to hide or display the effect s control panel and switch an effect on or off for both playback and rendering e Master level faders The right and left faders are normally linked but you can press Unlink to control the output levels independently Select Mono to sum the audio channels into a single mono output Reset peaks clears the last peak level indicator The tools
352. is menu The meters can be found in the Meters menu or via the Workspace gt Shared tool windows More specialized tools also exist as part of some offline processing dialogs such as the Find current peak level command in the Change level dialog or the Eliminate DC Offset dialog for example Related topics Global analysis Audio file comparer 3D Frequency Analysis Loudness distribution Metering The Spectrum display Audio File editing Offline processing 4 2 1 Global analysis This dialog allows you to perform advanced analysis on your audio to identify areas with spec ified properties It can be used to find problem areas such as glitches or clipped samples or Just to check general information such as the pitch of a sound How it works When you analyze a section of an Audio File WaveLab scans it and extracts information which it displays in the dialog It also pin points sections of the file that meet specific characteristics for example sections being very loud or almost silent You can then browse between these points set markers or zoom in on them Types of analysis On most of the tabs you will find settings determining exactly how the analysis will be performed Each tab focuses on a particular analysis area e Peaks this tab is for finding individual samples with very high decibel values e Loudness this tab is for finding sections that are perceived by the human ear as louder or weaker in volume WaveLab us
353. ish to work with and set the sample rate of the montage WaveLab 7 11 1 Dialogs 241 Changing the values in this dialog will not process the audio in your montage in any way However if you change the sample rate the file will play back at the wrong pitch You can access this dialog from the Audio Montage Workspace by choosing Edit gt Audio Montage properties It is also displayed when you create a new audio montage by clicking on the Create an empty document icon or via File gt New For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Workspaces 11 1 8 Split Clip at silences This dialog allows you to split a single Clip into new ones according to any silence detected in its audio Effects and envelopes are ignored only the source material is analyzed You can define several factors which control the threshold at which silence is detected including the duration of a silence the signal level and the gap between silent regions in the Clip You can choose to use a single or two stage analysis process and also to separate the resulting new Clips You can access this dialog in the Audio Montage Workspace via Focused Clip gt Edit gt Split at silences For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting He
354. its and the below segment indicates the existence of extra lower bits Note that audio is always processed with more than 24 bits internally e Ifthe inter segment is lit this indicates that the audio data cannot really be expressed on a regular 24 bit scale there are floating point values in between bits thus the label inter This is typically the case if you apply effects thus the inter segment allows you to differentiate processed from non processed 24 bit PCM files When to use the Bit Meter e To check whether dithering is necessary or not As a rule if you re playing back or mixing down to 16 bits and the Bit Meter shows that more than 16 bits are used you should apply dithering e To see the actual resolution of an Audio File For example even though a file is in 24 bit format only 16 bits may be used Or a 32 bit file may only use 24 bits in this case the below segment would not be lit For this purpose the Bit Meter is best used in Analyze selection mode e To see whether a zeroed plug in still affects your signal or whether a plug in uses 16 bit internal processing or more generally to detect any signal modifier stage in the audio chain between reading and playing To adjust the Bit Meter settings select Settings from the Options pop up menu or by using the 4 icon The Bit meter can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used either as a floa
355. k on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Adjusting Envelopes Formant 11 1 61 Playback speed This dialog allows you to change the playback speed for open audio documents with or without affecting the pitch of the audio Playback speed can be set for both the Audio File Workspace and the Audio Montage Workspace all Clips in a montage are affected Each open wave or montage file can be assigned its own independent playback speed For example you can have several wave windows open and change the playback speed for one of them without affecting the playback speed of the other windows when you switch to them This requires that you deactivate the option Transport settings are global to all windows in the Global preferences gt Options tab This function can be useful in a number of ways WaveLab 7 11 1 Dialogs 269 e Acommon application is to speed up the listening time of an interview or conference speech e You can increase playback speed to quickly locate specific positions in the audio e You can decrease the playback speed in order to practice a tricky recording take By optionally defining presets you can easily switch between your favorite playback speeds Once defined you can quickly jump between them using the Speed context menu in the transport s command bar If you are experiencing problems using different playback speeds there are a number of op
356. ker type 0 5 ke ee eee ee ee 261 Load Master Section Preset 0000 eee eee eee 261 Save Master Section Preset 2 o oooncos 262 Audio Montage Clone 6 566 eee eee eee ee eee eee 262 ie i A RR dea 263 Meta normaliZer o ooo eee 263 Audio Montage Preferences o e 263 a AA ee eee Eee ee kee a 264 MPS Elis 1 tS oe a ln ES d Ay on a SE Ete 264 MIPS GHGGHING 4c 4 ATE we Ne Pe ate a as 264 Normale Level ao s arsa ara ek EE Ra ee A as 265 OGGencodiN 20 cresc ede a ee ttreda t iaaa 265 Ope fileslist os oi 46 hh De we HS A a aa Ga a a a 266 Fan Nommalzer Gon se da a Be ee ee 266 WAI dialog ke oe ek ee ae ee ed ee 266 PUGH a cee ie a i Ba a le ee ew Ps 267 Piteh COMECHON o oo earen a oea ee eee a G 267 PIEP GUANO a q paanan aada i aink hoo hc hee we 268 Playback Speed i currii oead dau a e ee eee ea aS 268 Podcast options lt aia ees ay ae a A ee Sea 269 Mee TRAE oo 0 dhe he Pe de ee Oe ee ee Ss 269 Repeat Cp 20 so eR SE Da Se Ae de ote 270 WaveLab 7 CONTENTS vii 11 165 Recently used files a ee a Pa II 270 11 1 66 Recording Dialog s Sales ee PES SSE a 270 11 1 67 Record create marker a 271 11 1 68 Rename File dialogi os poeot ew a saote a eS ew a 272 11 1 69 Render ASIO input to file a a aaa aaa 272 11 1 70 Render Montage window 6420054044440 sa Oe ewe a 273 11 1 71 Render Wave window o e eee ee ee 273 11 1 72 Loudness envelope options o
357. lable hard drive space Access the Undo and Redo commands via Edit gt Undo or Edit gt Redo Tips for using Offline Processing Processing dialogs are non modal meaning that they stay open and on screen even after processing has been applied This means that you can still playback audio and access un do redo commands to audition the results of your effect and make any further adjustments to any settings You can also use key commands and access any other menu commands while leaving the offline process dialog open Remember that using and saving presets when you have settings you are happy with can also save you time WaveLab 7 4 6 Offline processing 47 WaveLab contains a powerful array of offline processing tools including the following Change Level Level envelope Normalize Level Silence Generator Loop Tone Uniformizer Pitch correction Time stretching Loop Tweaker Effect morphing Loudness distribution Loudness normalizer Pan Normalizer Pitch bend Pitch quantize Related topics Presets Rendering 4 6 1 Change Level This dialog allows you to apply a gain to change the level of an Audio File You can also use Find current peak level to obtain a report on the peak level of the current audio selection or the peak level in the whole file if Process whole file if there is no selection is selected in the preferences This can be useful if you wish to calculate how much you can increase the overall gain of
358. lace an instance of the plug in in the batch chain and choose Capture as the mode 2 Place a second instance of the plug in after the first one and choose either Restore peak level or Restore loudness RMS You can access this dialog from the Batch Processor Workspace via Plug ins window gt Multipass Plug ins gt Loudness Restorer For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Batch Processing Plug ins 7 1 2 14 Meta Normalizer This dialog is exclusive to the Batch Processor Workspace and allows you to normalize a batch of files all to the same level The core purpose of this plug in is to achieve the same loudness in all files the highest loudness found if possible while being certain that no file will clip For each file a specific gain is computed by the plug in once all files have been analyzed and prior to actually applying any gain to achieve the common loudness If it is not possible to match the highest found loudness the level of the file with the highest loudness is reduced so that other files can get the same loudness WaveLab 7 194 Batch Processing You can choose between peak level or loudness RMS as a method of determing the equal level between all files in the batch This equal level is then used to apply a gain to each file in the batch You can access this dialog from
359. lance between the effect sound wet and the orig inal unprocessed audio signal dry in a dry mix the original signal is more pronounced with a wet mix the effect sound is more dominant Glossary contents 15 79 WMA files WMA Windows Media Audio is a proprietary audio data compression technology devel oped by Microsoft WMA can refer to an Audio File format or a range of audio codecs Like AAC Advanced Audio Coding and Ogg Vorbis WMA is intended to address perceived deficiencies in the MP3 standard It is also possible to import export audio in WMA surround format provided that you have Windows Media Player 9 or later installed on your system Typical file extensions are wma asf Audio File Format Dialog Glossary contents 15 80 Zero crossing A Zero crossing is a point where the wave crosses the zero level axis the point where the wave is considered to have zero level WaveLab 7 414 Glossary If you cut out a portion of a wave and paste it in somewhere else chances are there will be a discontinuity where the two waves are joined This discontinuity will result in a transient in the wave when it is played back which is perceived as a click or bump in the sound To avoid this you need to make any editing splices at a zero crossing point Glossary contents WaveLab 7
360. lank one You can only access this dialog if you have created at least one template previously by choos ing File gt New from the Audio Montage Workspace For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Create Document Template 11 1 92 Time Format dialog This dialog allows you to specify the way in which time is displayed on the waveform time rulers and in several time based fields related to the file You can set options using the following tabs e Timecode this provides a list of frames per second for various SMPTE timecodes and for CD resolution Selecting Other allows you to enter a custom value You can also choose which frames units are displayed For example if you are working with PAL video you might choose 25 frames per second or 25 SMPTE EBU Clock this allows you to display time units or to present the clock units in a compact format Meter this offers time signature tempo bpm and ticks per quarter note to allow the time units to be compatible with your MIDI sequencer Offset this provides a number of ways to specify a time offset for the time ruler This can be useful if you wish to move the time zero point of the file For example you might want to have the time display zero on the first note of a recorded performance whilst still maintaining the pre roll part of the Audio
361. large Therefore avoid creating and opening extremely large txt files Also note that when using 32 bit float files the txt format is not entirely lossless because it is not possible to express a binary floating point value in textual decimal form without some loss of precision The file extension is txt WaveLab 7 412 Glossary Audio File Format Dialog Glossary contents 15 73 ULAW files ULAW is an audio encoding and compression technique supported by Windows and Web phones using 8 bit resolution The U S telephone system uses U law encoding for digitiza tion Typical file extensions are ulaw vox Glossary contents 15 74 UPC EAN UPC EAN code the Universal Product Code European Article Number a catalog num ber for an item such as a CD intended for commercial distribution On a CD the code is also called the Media Catalog Number there is one such code per disk UPC is a 12 digit barcode widely used in the United States and Canada EAN 13 is a 13 digit barcoding standard 12 a checksum digit defined by the GS1 standards orga nization EAN is now renamed as International Article Number but the abbreviation has been retained You can read the Media Catalog Number EAN from a CD by choosing Utilities gt Import Audio CD tracks gt Functions gt CD Info Authoring CDs and DVDs Import Audio CD Glossary contents 15 75 WAV files WAV Waveform Audio File Format is an audio file
362. lbar See Command bars for more information The Transport menu gives access to and shows keyboard shortcuts to the same functions that are available in the transport toolbar The Transport toolbar gives quick access to most of these functions If the toolbar is hid den select Workspace gt Command bars gt Transport commands Transport functions operate on the current Audio File The basic transport functions are e Loop On Off Toggles looping on off for the currently selected Audio File or montage e Start of file 4 End of File gt Move the cursor to the beginning or end of the currently selected Audio File e Skip forward gt Skip backward Skip the cursor forwards or backwards within the currently selected Audio File e Play gt Begin playback of the current Audio File e Stop Stop playback of the current Audio File A second click moves the cursor to the beginning of the last start position A further click returns the cursor to the start of the file e Record Y Opens the recording window from which you can start recording Additional transport functions such as start skip and stopping playback options are also available from the transport command bar In WaveLab additional playback speed and jog shuttle shortcuts are also provided For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help
363. le Audio Montage Workspaces as well as the Con trol Window They can be used as a docked window in a Workspace as a tabbed window in the control window as an independent floating window In this mode it can be useful to make the window frameless from Window gt Hide frame to save screen space In this case the whole menu is accessed by right clicking The axis of most Audio Meters may be rotated to view the graphics horizontally or vertically Some meters can also have their visual style and display parameters customized via their corresponding settings dialog This can be accessed through the Functions gt Settings menu in each meter window or by using the 4 icon Related topics VU Meter Spectroscope Oscilloscope Bit Meter Phasescope Spectrometer Wavescope 4 5 1 VU Meter The vu meter is used to display the peak and average loudness decibel level of your Audio File It also displays the pan or the balance between the left and right channels in a stereo file The upper part of the level pan meter window shows the peak level and average loudness in the following way WaveLab 7 40 WaveLab Concepts e The Peak Level meters display the peak levels of each channel graphically and numeri cally By default the meter segments and numerical peak values are displayed in green for low levels yellow for levels between 6dB and 2dB and red for levels above 2dB You can change both the colors and the rang
364. level Peak level is a measure of maximum sound level Peak Level Meters should go as high as possible without ever reaching OdB The Peak Level meters display the peak levels of each channel graphically and numerically By default the meter segments and numerical peak values are displayed in green for low levels yellow for levels between 6dB and 2dB and red for levels above 2dB If the level is set too low noise levels will be high relative to the recorded sound if peak level exceeds OdB by a significant amount clipping effects can occur Peak Master Glossary contents 15 56 Plug ins A vast number of specialist audio software Plug ins are available ranging from freeware to expensive high end commercial products and these can greatly extend the functionality of WaveLab Steinberg created Virtual Studio Technology VST to allow effect plug ins to be integrated with audio editors such as WaveLab VST uses Digital Signal Processing DSP to emulate in software the effects of familiar recording studio hardware WaveLab 7 408 Glossary Audio Plug ins Glossary contents 15 57 Pre roll and Post roll Pre roll is the time elapsed before an event occurs Post roll is the time after an event Pre roll can give a brief context if you are auditioning a Clip Glossary contents 15 58 Preset system WaveLab provides a sophisticated Preset system which allows you to store a range of individual or bulk settings
365. level is set too low noise levels may be high relative to the main sound being recorded Pan meters The lower part of the window shows the pan the difference in level between the left and right channel only applicable when monitoring stereo audio WaveLab 7 130 Audio File editing e The upper pan meters show the peak level difference between the channels graphically and numerically Note that the pan meters are two sided the level bars can go to the left or right indicating which channel is the loudest The two sides are shown in different colors which can be changed via the Settings dialog as explained previously The lower pan meters show the average difference in loudness between the channels in a similar way This gives you a visual indication of whether a stereo recording is properly centered for example If you are monitoring real time audio playback or input the maximum balance differ ence value peak and loudness for each channel is displayed numerically to the left and right of the meter bars The VU meter can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Window Related topics Metering 5 6 3 Oscilloscope The Oscilloscope offers a highly magnified view of the waveform around the playback cursor position If you are analyzing a stereo file the Oscilloscope normally shows the separate
366. lications is sometimes referred to as bouncing down or mixing down Rendering a file prints all audible settings and effects that the audio is being routed through in the Master section to the resultant Audio File This includes any plug ins the level of the faders and any dithering you have set in the Master Section In WaveLab you normally use the Render function to e Mix down a file in a Wave window to a new Audio File complete with Master Section effects dithering and other settings WaveLab 7 104 Audio File editing e Mix down a complete Audio Montage to an Audio File e Apply all settings in the Master Section to a file in a Wave window When you render a file you can choose the format of the new Audio File and whether you wish to create a new file or render the file in place When the file is rendering you will see a progress bar in the status bar In WaveLab you can also view this Progress bar in the Background tasks window a shared tool window that can be set to float independently This allows you to monitor the progress of rendering pause and if necessary cancel the rendering process Rendering tips When you are new to the rendering process in WaveLab there are a few things to note when rendering a file with the default option Bypass Master Section on resulting Audio File selected in the Render dialog the Master Section will be bypassed completely when the new file has finished rendering If this optio
367. lick on bbz in the audition column to play the wave from that marker position with a pre roll Click on the right hand button to play the wave exactly from the marker position Change marker types You can change a marker type by left clicking on its icon and choosing another marker type from the pop up list that appears Edit a marker s name time comments double click in a cell to edit a value to align the marker to an exact time for instance You can edit the name of the marker its time position and any comments e Lock a marker s position select the checkbox to lock the marker This prevents it from being accidentally dragged to a new position in the Waveform window For more information on using markers see Markers For details on the different marker types and their uses see Marker types Note that there are more marker features available in the Montage version compared to the Audio File version See Using markers in the Audio Montage Workspace in Markers for more details You can access this specific tool window within the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Markers For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Specific tool windows Markers WaveLab 7 308 Interface Elements Marker types Convert marker type Text format 11 3 7
368. log allows you to adjust the loudness of a file Because it relates to loudness as opposed to maximum peak level this tool works quite differently from the Level Normalizer A typical application is to specify a loudness for example 12dB and the Loudness Normalizer processes the audio to match this level of loudness Like Gain Change increasing the loudness to a certain value can introduce clipping To avoid this occurring a peak limiter the Peak Master plug in can be used as part of the process The Loudness Normalizer raises the loudness and limits peaks in the signal at the same time if needed to achieve the target loudness In the case of stereo files both channels are processed independently This process happens over several stages analysis precedes the final rendering The Loudness Normalizer dialog gives access to useful statistics about the file and the Loudness distribution tool and you can choose to remove any DC offset in the file You can access this dialog from the Audio File Workspace via Process gt Loudness nor malizer This function is also available as a batch processing plug in You can access it from Batch Processing Workspace gt Plug ins window gt Multipass Plug ins gt Loudness Nor malizer For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Loudness DC Offset Loudness distributi
369. log allows you to adjust the loudness of each Clip so that they get the same loudness You can use it to equalize the volume of all the Clips within a montage either by peak level or loudness This can be an easy way to ensure that all Clips playback at a similar volume You can choose to only equalize the volume of selected Clips and effects can be excluded if you wish This tool is to achieve the same level of loudness in all Clips the highest loudness found if possible while ensuring that no Clip will cause sample clipping For each Clip a specific gain is computed by the algorithm after all Clips have been analyzed and prior to changing the Clip gain to achieve the common loudness If it is not possible to match the highest found loudness the level of the Clip with the highest loudness is reduced so that other Clips can achieve the same loudness To avoid clipping the Master Section you can also normalize the mixdown output of the mon tage before it goes into the Master Section and or the Master Section output You can access this dialog from the Audio Montage Workspace by choosing Tools gt Meta normalizer For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Master Section 6 2 2 Configure external tools This dialog allows you to configure WaveLab to work with external applications You can pass comm
370. log to the number of inputs selected here a warning message appears if they do not match e Click the Render button A dialog appears allowing you to select a name an audio format and a location for the file to be rendered When you click OK recording or rendering starts recording the external input from the output of the Master Section including all real time processing You can monitor the recording as it happens e Click Stop on the transport to stop the recording rendering Related topics Master Section Audio Streaming Settings How do add effects Presets 12 2 Using External effects oO 1 External Gear Ys 0 E Num Outputs Latency SLE peyote el PTF i le ete 507 ms CEO DA ed Dd pm Li boo Stes Pt fet 4 Pl 0 Send level ERRE EEC 0 00 dB ECON The External Gear Master Section plug in allows you to process Audio Files using external hardware processors One or more ASIO outputs are used to send the audio signal to your processor and corresponding ASIO inputs are used to return the signal from the external processor By default this plug in is located in the ASIO sub menu of the Master Section effects An ASIO driver must be used and only one instance of this plug in is allowed in the Master Section plug in chain To use the External Gear plug in proceed as follows 1 Set the Audio Device to ASIO You can access this dialog from Workspaces that support the playback of Audio Files by choosing Opti
371. lp Related topics Audio Montages 11 1 9 Audio properties dialog This dialog reports the audio properties of the active Audio File It allows you to change the number of audio samples per second the sample rate and the accuracy of samples in the audio stream the bit rate Changing the values in this dialog does not process the file in any way in contrast to using Save as However the following rules apply e If you change the sample rate the file will play back at the wrong pitch e If you change the bit resolution the file will be converted to the new resolution the next time you save it Note that there is no Undo for this operation If you save with a lower bit resolution the file is permanently converted You can access this dialog in the Audio File Workspace by choosing Edit gt Audio prop erties It is also displayed when you create a new Audio File using Edit gt New WaveLab 7 242 Interface Elements For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics 11 1 10 Audio Range This dialog allows you to define accurately a specific audio range This audio range is then used to create a selection There are many options you can choose to easily select a specific part of your Audio File You can also audition your selection using the various playback buttons provided In order to sele
372. lug ins gt Pan Normalizer For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics 7 3 0 11 Loudness normalizer This dialog allows you to adjust the loudness of a file Because it relates to loudness as opposed to maximum peak level this tool works quite differently from the Level Normalizer A typical application is to specify a loudness for example 12dB and the Loudness Normalizer processes the audio to match this level of loudness Like Gain Change increasing the loudness to a certain value can introduce clipping To avoid this occurring a peak limiter the Peak Master plug in can be used as part of the process The Loudness Normalizer raises the loudness and limits peaks in the signal at the same time if needed to achieve the target loudness In the case of stereo files both channels are processed independently This process happens over several stages analysis precedes the final rendering The Loudness Normalizer dialog gives access to useful statistics about the file and the Loudness distribution tool and you can choose to remove any DC offset in the file You can access this dialog from the Audio File Workspace via Process gt Loudness nor malizer This function is also available as a batch processing plug in You can access it from Batch Processing Workspace gt Plug ins window gt Multipass Plug ins gt
373. lug ins while the other part can be mixed with this processed signal after the Master Section output WaveLab 7 302 Interface Elements Using the Spectrum editor You can use the Spectrum editor in two main operational modes Region copying and filtering Operations tab This is mainly intended for audio restoration applied over brief time ranges Selections can be copied pasted and filtered This type of processing is mainly used to reduce remove or replace unwanted sound artifacts in the audio material and can be carried out with great precision This could be useful for example to replace part of a live recording that contains an unwanted noise such as a mobile phone ring tone with a copy of a similar region of the spectrum that only contains a clean signal In general the spectral Copy Paste combination gives the best results given that the source and destination regions are properly choosen Master Section processing Master Section tab This allows you to process a specific frequency range via the Master Section The selected or non selected regions of the spectrum can be processed differently You can also employ a number of filters Bandpass Low pass High pass to further refine the particular range of frequencies to be affected by any Master Section effects A selected spectrum region can either be e Processed separately by the Master Section plug ins The non selected spectrum can either be bypassed or sent t
374. ly to the frequencies you want to filter out WaveLab 7 358 Audio Plug ins Notch Freq Sets the frequency of the notch filter Notch Gain Allows you to adjust the gain of the selected frequency Use positive values to identify the frequencies that you want to filter out Notch Gain Invert button Inverts the gain value of the notch filter Use this button to filter out unwanted noise While looking for the frequency to omit it sometimes helps to boost it in the first place set notch filter to positive gain After you have found it you can use the Invert button to cancel it out Notch Q Factor Sets the width of the notch filter Notch Preview button Use the Preview button found between the notch filter buttons and the graphical dis play to create a bandpass filter with the peak filter s frequency and Q This deactivates any other filters allowing you to listen only to the frequencies you want to filter out Notches buttons 1 2 4 8 These buttons add additional notch filters to filter out harmonics High Cut Freq 3Hz to 20kHz or Off Use this high cut filter to eliminate high frequency noise Filter is Off when the handle knob is moved all the way to the right High Cut Slope pop up menu Allows you to choose a slope value for the high cut filter High Cut Preview button Use the Preview button found between the High Cut Freq button and the graphical display to switch the filter to a comple
375. m is shown as a linear graph e Spectrum peaks are shown as a short horizontal lines indicating recent peak maxi mum values Snapshots By using the Add snapshot and Erase last snapshot buttons you can take and erase snapshots of the current spectrum These will be superimposed over the current peak spec trum graph in a color you can customize until you click the icon again to take a new snapshot One use for this is to check the effects of adding EQ for example Up to five snapshots can be superimposed on the display the sixth snapshot replaces the earliest one in the display and so on Don t confuse the order of snapshots with the numbered buttons these are Spectrometer presets see below Zooming You can adjust the frequency scale and range in the Settings dialog as described below but it s also possible to temporarily zoom in on a frequency area of interest This is done by clicking and dragging a rectangle in the Spectroscope display When you release the mouse button the display is zoomed in so that the enclosed frequency range fills the window To return to full scale display select Zoom out fully from the Functions menu or double click anywhere on the display Making settings You can adjust the behavior and display of the meters as desired and assign up to five sets of Spectrometer settings to the Preset buttons for instant access Open the Settings dialog by selecting Settings from the Functions menu or
376. marker types to determine where track indexes are and to cross fade two tracks together seamlessly to create a gapless CD See CD DVD A authoring markers in Marker types for more information on the specific function of different markers Authoring in the Audio Montage Workspace In the Audio Montage Workspace you can use the following tools to author your audio disks e CD window this window contains a variety of tools for authoring and burning CDs with a great deal of precision and control It even has a CD Wizard to create CD tracks quickly from your montage Clips This window provides full control over your audio CD See CD window for more details DVD Audio window use this window for authoring and burning DVD Audio disks It uses Audio Montage files to create tracks for your DVD A disk See DVD Audio window for more details Marker window use this window in conjunction with the CD window to edit CD track names and times You can also drag markers in the main Audio Montage editing window to adjust start end times and double click on a marker s name to edit its marker track name Authoring in the Audio File Workspace In the Audio File Workspace there are also some tools to allow you to create and author audio CDs these include e Basic Audio CD use this window to quickly create an audio CD from individual Audio Files Any track markers you have previously created will be used to define tracks or WaveLab will automatically defin
377. mber of bits used in the digital audio being monitored Normally the maximum number of bits in an Audio File is the same as the resolution of the Audio File e g a 16 bit Audio File shows that up to 16 bits are used but sometimes this is not the case As soon as you perform any kind of real time processing on an Audio File the audio data is treated at a much higher resolution 32 bit floating point to allow for pristine audio quality Examples of such processing include level adjustments effects the mixing of two or more files etc In fact the only time when a 16 bit file is played back at 16 bit resolution is if you play it without any fades or effects and with the Master Faders set to 0 00 no level WaveLab 7 42 WaveLab Concepts adjustment You can try this out for yourself by playing back a 16 bit Audio File and viewing the Bit Meter as soon as you adjust the Master Faders note that 24 bits are used and the inter indicator is lit more on this below How to read the Bit Meter e The innermost meters closest to the bit scale show the number of bits in use You can adjust this display in the Settings dialog e The outer meters are history meters showing how many bits were recently in use You can adjust the hold time in the Settings dialog e The over segment indicates clipping similar to a clip indicator e If the below segment is lit there are more than 24 bits The bit meter will show the 24 higher b
378. me You can edit the profile of these envelopes quickly and easily Adjusting an envelope Edit the envelope using the envelope editor window in the following ways e Create and erase points by double clicking e Select points by clicking on them WaveLab 7 8 Using the interface e To select more than one point press Ctrl Command when clicking you can then move them together Selected points don t have to be contiguous You can also click anywhere in the window and drag the cursor over the envelope points to select them e You can drag any segment to move the whole envelope profile up and down e You can drag a single segment vertically by pressing Ctrl Command and move the segment up and down e You can drag a single segment horizontally by pressing Ctrl Command Shift and move the segment left and right You can also use the controls at the top of the editor window to delete or reset points in the envelope Use the envelope smoothing button to toggle the envelope points between a linear polygonal or a curved path The envelope is not applied until you click Apply For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Level envelope Time stretching Pitch correction Pitch bend 3 3 Command bars Commonly used tools shortcuts and commands are represented by Command buttons each with t
379. me waveform drawing of the audio signal being mon itored It can be useful when recording or rendering a file if Monitor File rendering mode is active Making settings You can adjust settings for the display via the Wavescope Settings dialog This can be accessed via Functions gt Settings menu or by using the icon Here you can set various color options for the background grid and waveform display as well as setting the waveform rendering speed and vertical zoom If Clear waveform when reaching right of pane is checked the waveform display is cleared each time the cursor reaches the right end of the display If unchecked the previous waveform is overwritten Tip Wavescope is a useful meter for visualizing audio during recording The Wavescope meter can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Win dow Related topics Metering 6 5 8 Timecode This shared tool window displays the current time of the playback head or the cursor position if not playing back in the timecode format currently selected in the Time Format dialog The current time can be in a range of standard SMPTE formats CD or DVD specific formats or a custom one see Time Format dialog The most common use for this window is for working with video or film You can use it to display the playback head position of the current Audio Fil
380. mentary low cut filter This deactivates any other filters allowing you to listen only to the frequencies you want to filter out Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets WaveLab 7 12 26 Steinberg Roomworks 359 12 26 Steinberg Roomworks e 1 Steinberg RoomWorks Attack Release 323 114 A gt RoomWorks is a highly adjustable reverb plug in for creating realistic room ambiance and reverb effects in stereo and surround formats The CPU usage is adjustable to fit the needs of any system From short room reflections to cavern sized reverb this plug in delivers high quality reverberation The following parameters are available Input Filters e Lo Freq Determines the frequency at which the low shelving filter takes effect Both the high and low settings filter the input signal prior to reverb processing e Hi Freq Determines the frequency at which the high shelving filter takes effect Both the high and low settings filter the input signal prior to reverb processing e Lo Gain Controls the amount of boost or cut for the low shelving filter e Hi Gain Controls the amount of boost or cut for the high shelving filter Reverb Character e Pre Delay Controls how much time passes before the reverb is applied This allows you to simulate larger spaces by increasing the time it takes for first reflections to reach the listener e Reverb Time Allows you to set the reve
381. mic range which is common for modern pop dance music Up to four different curves can be shown simultaneously in the Loudness enve lope display These curves have different colors and represent the average loudness of the signal in different areas of the frequency spectrum This can be useful to visualize where in the frequency domain the loudness is spread at a given time or to display the loudness of a specific part of the spectrum The curves can be shown individually or in any combination See Loudness envelope options for more details Spectrum This displays the audio as a spectrogram which allows you to view the level intensity of each area in the frequency spectrum across the time line The Spec trum display mode in conjunction with the Spectrum editor provides you with a unique 90 Audio File editing editing restoration tool See The Spectrum display for more information on the unique Spectrum display mode Rulers There are both time and level rulers These can be hidden and displayed see the Ruler and Wave Display context menus You can also set which units of time and level they show To access the settings for both rulers right click anywhere on the relevant ruler Editing Tools Precise editing of your audio is achieved in the main lower waveform window There are three main tools that are used for directly editing an Audio File I Time Selection cursor This is the default cursor and allows you to select and re
382. milar types of sequential operations into a single operation Both of these options enable you to use less memory when storing the operation history You can access this window in the Audio Montage Workspace via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt History For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio Montage Preferences 11 3 21 Navigator This specific tool window displays a representative view of the entire active montage and enables you to quickly navigate around it Each track is represented by a horizontal colored block By default stereo tracks are dark blue and monotracks are purple or pink any custom colors you set for a track or via the Groups window are also displayed The visible Workspace is shown by a surrounding black rectangle Dragging this rectangle scrolls the main montage window enabling you to easily navigate to a location in your mon tage You can also resize the rectangle vertically and horizontally to adjust the zoom setting of the active window This window can be useful when you have a large montage with many Clips and tracks e Left click on a Clip block to zoom on it e Right click anywhere to completely zoom out You can access this window in the Audio Montage Workspace by choosing Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Navigator For an explanation of each parameter an
383. mitone Pitch quan tize works best on recordings that have a single fundamental frequency such as voice or single instruments It can be useful for re tuning the pitch of an imperfect recorded vocal performance for example The dialog allows you to choose the reference frequency normally 440 Hz and the time taken for the pitch correction to reach the nearest semitone An explanation of when and how to adjust the Slur time is given using the What s this tooltips You can also choose to preserve the formants of the original material Choosing this option can sometimes help to produce a more realistic result when correcting the pitch of vocals or acoustic instrument sounds You can access this dialog from the Audio File Workspace via Process gt Pitch quantiz ing For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Adjusting Envelopes Formant 4 6 15 Presets WaveLab s powerful preset system allows you to create your own presets to store commonly used settings They are available every time you open WaveLab Presets can be saved for many parameters such as plug in settings Audio File Formats or File Attributes for example You can access the Presets pop up menu wherever you see one of these icons B or B Presets are saved as local files on your hard drive allowing you to conveniently back up or WaveLab 7
384. more detailed analysis of the audio spectrum use the Spectrometer The Spectroscope can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used ei ther as a floating window or docked in the Workspace lt can also be docked in the Control Window WaveLab 7 218 Control Window Related topics Metering Spectrometer 9 2 6 Spectrometer The Spectrometer uses FFT Fast Fourier Transform techniques to display a continuous frequency graph providing a very precise and detailed real time frequency analysis e The current frequency spectrum is shown as a linear graph e Spectrum peaks are shown as a short horizontal lines indicating recent peak maxi mum values Snapshots By using the Add snapshot and Erase last snapshot buttons you can take and erase snapshots of the current spectrum These will be superimposed over the current peak spec trum graph in a color you can customize until you click the icon again to take a new snapshot One use for this is to check the effects of adding EQ for example Up to five snapshots can be superimposed on the display the sixth snapshot replaces the earliest one in the display and so on Don t confuse the order of snapshots with the numbered buttons these are Spectrometer presets see below Zooming You can adjust the frequency scale and range in the Settings dialog as described below but it s also possible to temporarily zoom in on a fre
385. more information see Getting Help Related topics Batch Processing Plug ins WaveLab 7 7 3 Batch Processing Plug ins 199 7 3 0 5 Instructor This dialog is exclusive to the Batch Processor Workspace and is a special utility plug in that allows you to instruct the next plug in in the batch with information about the audio it needs to process This is useful for situations where you want to use plug ins that require an analysis stage In effect the Instructor plug in turns a monopass plug in into a dual pass one Some Monopass plugins such as Denoisers or DeBuzzer need to learn about the audio they are to process before they can begin processing correctly The Instructor plugin can help in this situation since it can teach the next plug in in the audio chain about the audio it is about to process The Instructor plugin must be used as a pair 1 The first instance replicates the start of the audio stream This means the next plug in in the chain will receive the start of the audio stream twice 2 The second instance of the plug in comes after the plugin being instructed It simply cuts out the extra audio injected by the first instance of the Instructor plug in This means for example that the Denoiser plug in has time to sufficiently analyze the audio stream before the second stream start is injected The badly processed first part of the stream is skipped by the second instance of the Instructor plug in You can s
386. ms of silence to the end of the file Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets Silence Generator 12 41 Stereo Expander e 1 StereoExpander 3 0 Width Stall ETA J LEERME 25 00 This plug in is a stereo width enhancer that takes a stereo input signal and makes it sound wider Stereo Expander gives better results from real stereo material as opposed to mono chan nels panned to different positions in the stereo image Stereo Expander has the following parameter e Width 0 to 100 Higher values result in a greater stereo width Normally you should set Width to values between 0 and 20 higher values can be used for special effects WaveLab 7 378 Audio Plug ins Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets 12 42 Internal Dithering Internal Dithering is a built in plug in that provides a simple way of adding a small amount of noise to the rendered signal to improve the apparent signal to noise ratio of the output For an introduction to the concept of dithering see Dithering The following parameters are available e Noise Type Two types are available in addition to No Noise e Noise Shaping Three types are available in addition to No Shaping e Bit resolution of the quantized output 8 16 20 or 24 bits are available Note that dithering is applied post fader on the output bus Related topics
387. mum user defined level This ensures that you are using all of the dynamic range available to you WaveLab 7 406 Glossary Steinberg Limiter Steinberg Maximizer Glossary contents 15 50 NTSC NTSC from the US National Television System Committee is the analog television system used in North America parts of South America Japan and some Pacific territories NTSC has 29 97 interlaced frames of video per second a field refresh frequency of 59 94Hz actually 60Hz 1 001 Each frame consists of a total of 525 scanlines 486 of which are visible The digital terrestrial television DTT replacement for NTSC is ATSC Advanced Television Standards Committee PAL SECAM Glossary contents 15 51 Ogg Vorbis files Ogg Vorbis is a lossy compressed audio format and codec that produces files about the same size as MP3 files but with objectively higher fidelity and no patent restrictions Vorbis is intended for sample rates from 8kHz telephony to 192kHz digital masters and a range of channel representations that includes monaural stereo surround 5 1 ambisonic or up to 255 discrete channels Vorbis is open source free software maintained by the Xiph Org Foundation The file extension is ogg Audio File Format Dialog Glossary contents 15 52 OSQ files Original Sound Quality OSQ is WaveLab s proprietary lossless compressed audio for mat By saving files in this format you can save considerable disk space withou
388. n Master Project Log win dow Background task monitor Import Audio CD and Data CD DVD e if you work with multiple monitors the Control Window can occupy a dedicated screen e the ability to organize all your audio meters in one place as an assembly of tabbed sub windows Adding Tabbed Groups The Control Window uses the tab group system to allow for sophisticated panel arrange ments You can arrange tabs horizontally or vertically split and divide them For setups with a single monitor independent floating windows are recommended for small screens and docked windows for large screens To setup a number of tab groups in the Control Window e Choose a predefined arrangement of tabs from Workspace gt Tab Group Shortcuts gt e Add an individual Tab Group using the menu commands Workspace gt Add Tab Group at right or Workspace gt Add Tab Group at left e or to sub divide a window right click on any empty pane and choose either Split hor izontally or Split vertically 212 Control Window Docking Undocking windows The process for docking undocking windows in the Control Window is slightly different to that in other Workspaces To dock a window in the Control Window 1 Undock the window so it is floating as an independent window 2 Choose a pane in which you want to place the window This is done by clicking on an empty pane an arrow icon will appear to indicate it is selected 3 Choose the following command
389. n Trim Touch Pad dB This allows you to reduce the output level by up to 12dB Dithering is applied after output gain control so it may be necessary to reduce this value by a small amount to avoid clipping Quick Start Guide for the De Noiser 1 Start with Sensitivity and Attenuation controls at the default positions 0 0dB and 4 5cB respectively 2 Select Auto mode if the noise varies in time select freeze for a defined and static noise fingerprint 3 Adjust the Sensitivity to find the correct balance between being too low not enough noise is removed and too high too much signal is removed WaveLab 7 12 5 Sonnox DeBuzzer 331 4 Adjust the Attenuation to find the most pleasing audio too much attenuation can impair the audio either by reducing brightness or by introducing low level distortion Tip You might be working with bandwidth limited material possibly as a result of samplerate conversion or lossy compression for example limited at around 10kHz If you experience distortion around the limit try reducing the HF Limit control Adjust until it lies just to the lower frequency side of the limit around 9 5kHz in our example Related topics Sonnox DeBuzzer Sonnox DeClicker Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets 12 5 Sonnox DeBuzzer e 1 Sonnox Ltd Sonnox DeBuzzer la DEA ATTENUATION MODE REDUCTION ENABLE 24 8 OB Sonnox DeBuzzer is one of three plug i
390. n a montage either by peak level or loudness This can be an easy way to ensure that all Clips playback at a similar volume You can choose to only equalize the volume of selected Clips and effects can be excluded if you wish This tool is to achieve the same level of loudness in all Clips the highest loudness found if possible while ensuring that no Clip will cause sample clipping For each Clip a specific gain is computed by the algorithm after all Clips have been analyzed and prior to changing the Clip gain to achieve the common loudness If it is not possible to match the highest found loudness the level of the Clip with the highest loudness is reduced so that other Clips can achieve the same loudness To avoid clipping the Master Section you can also normalize the mixdown output of the mon tage before it goes into the Master Section and or the Master Section output You can access this dialog from the Audio Montage Workspace by choosing Tools gt Meta normalize For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Master Section 11 1 49 Audio Montage Preferences This dialog allows you to define settings for working in the Audio Montage Workspace WaveLab 7 264 Interface Elements Using the two tabs you can define settings for both the active audio montage and for all audio montages You can
391. n also drag Audio Files from the Audio File Workspace by their WaveLab 7 118 Audio File editing tab or document icon This creates CD track markers at the file edges quantized on CD frame boundaries Drag an audio selection dragging a selection rather than a whole file into the basic audio CD creates a CD track with markers at the edges but quantized on CD frame boundaries not necessarily exactly on the exact position of the selection edges Browse for Audio Files select File gt Add track s from the Basic Audio CD menu You can then select Audio Files to insert in your CD Once you have added your tracks information about each track is displayed Each track also has its marker information nested within it To access this information click on the left most arrow icon to expand the track view Using the track list Once you have added a number of tracks to your audio CD you can use the track list to Audition playback you can audition each track with or without pre roll by clicking on the leftmost icons Click on 2bb2 in the audition column to play the track from that track s start marker with a pre roll Click on the right hand button to playback the track exactly from the start marker position You will notice a progress display appears at the bottom of the window to show you the playback position time and track number You can also start playback with or without a pre roll from the tracks start or end marker
392. n and or third party VST plug ins See the Master Section for more details on using VST plug ins 388 How dol The VST plug ins are described individually in Audio Plug ins 14 3 edit an existing Audio File You can open Audio Files from within the Audio File Workspace by e opening the file directly using the File gt Open command e using WaveLab s File Browser to locate your file and open it you may need to change the file type filter so that the file type matches the Audio File e dragging a file directly from the operating system s file browser When you open the Audio File it appears in a Wave edit window for you to begin editing In the Audio Montage Workspace you can only drag Audio Files into an existing montage you can t open an Audio File directly 14 4 compile and edit several Audio Files on multiple tracks To accomplish this you need to create an Audio Montage First create a new Audio Montage file from File gt New in the Audio Montage Workspace or if you are working within the Audio File Workspace from Edit gt Create Audio Montage from Audio File To add more Audio Files you can use drag them directly from e the File Browser e the Operating System s file browser e the document button in the status bar from within the Audio File Workspace See Status Bar for more information e the document tab To add further tracks to your montage right click on the 1 button on the left side
393. n apply easily iden tifiable names to all referenced files markers and Clips belonging to the project Batch renaming can be used for the following operations e to rename files e to rename Clips in Audio Montages e to rename markers in Audio Files and Audio Montages These functions share most of the same features with some minor differences The Batch Renaming dialog has three pages The first page defines which files clips markers should be renamed the second dialog page defines how the renaming should be executed The third page shows you a preview of the names that will be produced before you commit to the changes You can access this dialog in various places throughout WaveLab e from any Workspace via Utilities gt Batch file renaming e from the Marker window via Functions gt Batch marker renaming e from the Clips window in the Audio Montage Workspace viaFunctions gt Batch clip renaming For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Batch Conversion Marker Window About Regular Expressions Regular Expressions 13 6 Log window This shared tool window allows you to view log messages that have been issued by WaveLab When using WaveLab s scripting language for example the logWindow function outputs messages to this window There are a number of toggle buttons and these allow you
394. n at a time You can drag files between Workspaces if they both share compatible formats For example you can drag an Audio File from the Audio File Workspace and drop it into the Audio Montage Workspace by using its tab bar or its document button this is located on the status bar at the bottom right of the Workspace For more information on using shortcuts to speed up your workflow in different Workspaces see Dragging operations and Tab Groups Elements of a Workspace Each Workspace is comprised of e A Menu bar Each Workspace has a different Menu bar but certain menus are shared among all Workspaces and each menu can be customized in various ways The Workspace menu has a sub menu to show hide the available Command bars and tool windows Alternatively you can right click in the menu Windows or caption bar Mac area to access the Peripheral Windows Context menu WaveLab 7 24 Using the interface e One or more Command bars for quick access to functions via buttons Command bars can be customized extensively See Customize Commands e Tab groups to host the document s to edit This is a central part of the Workspace you can reorder the tab bar move it to another Workspace create a new empty docu ment display the document filepath and access other functions by right clicking See Tab Groups e A set of Specific tool windows The specific tools offered vary according to the Workspace their display can be turned
395. n drag the montages vertically to determine the track order Montages can also be added by dragging mon tage files directly into the DVD_Audio track listing window Choose Options from the DVD Audio window choose Options gt Options to open DVD Audio options dialog You can then define settings for your DVD A including its name and volume information details whether it will be played back on PAL or NTSC and the duration and effects transitions that included images will use Images to be included can be laid out in a picture track in your audio montage or a single default image can be chosen If a default image is used it will displayed at the beginning of each montage Check and burn your DVD A once you are finished laying out your DVD A and choosing any options you can check that it conforms to DVD Audio specifications by choosing Edit gt Check DVD Audio conformity If everything is OK choose Edit gt Burn DVD Audio to open the DVD Audio Creation dialog where you can then render out the disk as a collection of files ready for burning Once these files are successfully outputted the Write Data CD DVD dialog will open automatically allowing you to burn your DVD Audio files to an optical DVD Note that WaveLab automatically creates some basic DVD menus to access the audio tracks from the DVD Player For more information on authoring DVD Audio disk see Authoring CDs and DVDs You can access this dialog in the Audio Montage Workspac
396. n is not selected you will hear the Master Section effects being played back on top of the newly rendered effects You can check if the Master Section has been bypassed by checking the status of the Y Play through Master Section button which is located at the bottom right hand corner of the status bar the Master Section s Bypass switch affects playback only So even if you can t hear effects when you are playing back your audio any applied effects are still rendered the Effect on off switch for each individual plug in affects both playback and Rendering if you are working with an Audio File montage that contains lots of effects and or tracks and you experience playback problems it can be useful to mix down a copy of your montage audio file to free up some processing power You can then continue editing the resultant file with the effects rendered Remember to save a copy of your session before doing this so you can go back and edit any levels or effects if you need to For more information about choosing settings when rendering see the Render Wave window and Render Montage window For more information on applying effects see the Master Section Related topics Render Wave window Render Montage window Master Section Audio Plug ins WaveLab 7 5 2 Analysis 105 5 2 Analysis WaveLab provides you with a comprehensive set of tools for analyzing your audio and di agnosing any errors You can view your Audio File i
397. n many different ways using the suite of audio meters via its frequency spectrum or even in three dimensions There are also several tools to interrogate any sample of your audio and find any errors or anomalies In WaveLab you can even compare two Audio Files with the Audio file compare tool and view audio in a Spectrum or Loudness view for greater precision when editing Below you can find links to some of these tools used in WaveLab Most of them can be found in the Analysis menu The meters can be found in the Meters menu or via the Workspace gt Shared tool windows More specialized tools also exist as part of some offline processing dialogs such as the Find current peak level command in the Change level dialog or the Eliminate DC Offset dialog for example Related topics Global analysis Audio file comparer 3D Frequency Analysis Loudness distribution Metering The Spectrum display Audio File editing Offline processing 5 2 1 Global analysis This dialog allows you to perform advanced analysis on your audio to identify areas with spec ified properties It can be used to find problem areas such as glitches or clipped samples or just to check general information such as the pitch of a sound How it works When you analyze a section of an Audio File WaveLab scans it and extracts information which it displays in the dialog It also pin points sections of the file that meet specific characteristics for example sections being v
398. n of each individual detected event Output Level Meter dB The output meter is designed to give exactly 1dB per LED for the top 18dB of dynamic range and 2dB per LED thereafter There is a peak hold feature that holds the highest peak helping to give a better impression of the working dynamic range Output Gain Trim Touch Pad dB This allows you to reduce the output level by up to 12dB Dithering is applied after output gain control so it may be necessary to reduce this value by a small amount to avoid clipping ick Start Guide for the De Clicker The De Clicker is very simple and intuitive to use It is generally wise to repair the larger and more energetic events first 1 If there are large displacement events in the programme material enable the DePop section and raise the sensitivity fader until the largest events are detected and repaired 2 For clicks enable that section and raise the sensitivity fader until they are detected and repaired 3 Finally if there is crackle left enable that section and raise its fader to remove the crackle Tip There is necessarily some degree of overlap in the detection circuits of clicks and crackle Decreasing the DeClick sensitivity might increase the apparent detection of crackle and increasing the DeClick sensitivity might indicate less crackle Best results are likely if the two controls are balanced WaveLab 7 328 Audio Plug ins Related topics Sonnox D
399. n reading and playing To adjust the Bit Meter settings select Settings from the Options pop up menu or by using the 4 icon The Bit meter can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Window Related topics Metering Dithering 6 5 5 Spectroscope The Spectroscope shows a continuous graphical representation of the frequency spectrum analyzed into 60 separate frequency bands represented as vertical bars Peak levels are shown as a short horizontal lines above the corresponding band indicating recent peak maximum values The Spectroscope offers a quick spectrum overview For a more detailed analysis of the audio spectrum use the Spectrometer The Spectroscope can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used ei ther as a floating window or docked in the Workspace lt can also be docked in the Control Window Related topics Metering Spectrometer 6 5 6 Spectrometer The Spectrometer uses FFT Fast Fourier Transform techniques to display a continuous frequency graph providing a very precise and detailed real time frequency analysis WaveLab 7 6 5 Shared tool windows 177 e The current frequency spectrum is shown as a linear graph e Spectrum peaks are shown as a short horizontal lines indicating recent peak maxi mum values Snapshots
400. n the Log window logWindow printInfo num toExponential Math Objects Values e E e LN10 e LN2 e LOG2E e LOG10E e Pl e SQRT1_2 e SQRT2 WaveLab 7 76 WaveLab Concepts Functions abs x acos x asin x atan x atan2 y x ceil x cos x exp x floor x log x max value1 value2 min value1 value2 pow x y random round x sin x sqrt x tan x Examples Get a random number from 0 to 1 var r Math random Print it out in the log window logWindow printInfo r Trace out Pi in the log window logWindow printInfo Math PI Date Objects Functions toStringQ toDateStringQ toTimeStringQ toLocaleStringQ WaveLab 7 4 9 Scripting 77 toLocaleDateString toLocaleTimeStringQ valueOf getTime getFullYear getUTCFullYear getMonthQ getUTCMonthQ getDate getUTCDate getDay getUTCDay getHours getUTCHours getMinutes getUTCMinutes getSeconds getUTCSeconds getMilliseconds getUTCMilliseconds getTimeZoneOffset setTime time setMilliseconds ms setUTCMilliseconds ms setSeconds sec ms setUTCSeconds sec ms setMinutes min sec ms setUTCMinutes min sec ms setHours hour min sec ms setUTCHours hour min sec ms setDate date setUTCDate date setMonth month date WaveLab 7 78 WaveLab Concepts setUTCMonth mon
401. nal the more spray like the display the more high frequencies are in the signal Phase Correlation meter At the bottom of the display you will find a Phase Correlation meter which shows the same information but in a different way e The green line shows the current phase correlation while the two red lines show the recent peak minimum and maximum values respectively these are the default colors which you can change e With a mono signal the meter would show 1 indicating that both channels are per fectly in phase e Similarly 1 indicates that the two channels are the same but one is inverted e Generally for a good mix the meter should show a value between O and 1 Unlike the main Phasescope the Phase Correlation meter is also available in Analyze audio selection mode showing an average value for the selected range WaveLab 7 114 Audio File editing Changing settings You can define display colors peak hold time and the resolution or number of samples to display from the Functions gt Settings menu The Phasescope meter can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Mon tage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Window Related topics Metering 5 3 6 Spectrometer The Spectrometer uses FFT Fast Fourier Transform techniques to display a continuous frequency graph providing a very precise and detailed real time f
402. nally intensive so it may occasionally be slow to redraw You can access this dialog from both wave windows in the Audio File Workspace via the Loudness tab gt Edit settings For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics 11 1 73 Sample attributes This dialog allows you to define settings for an audio sample before loading it into a hardware or software sampler The settings do not process the sample in any way they just give the file properties that the receiving sampler can use This includes information about the pitch of the sample which can be detected automatically by WaveLab the key range that the sample should span and the velocity range to occupy For WAV and AIFF files this information is stored in the file s header By default there are no sample attributes in an Audio File Therefore you must explicitly create this information by clicking on the Create button first This dialog is useful if your sampler can take advantage of these additional tags If supported by your sampler it can save you time by allowing you to both edit and define a samples properties from within WaveLab You can access this dialog via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Sample At tributes For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more i
403. nd pan envelope where each envelope point contains a complete surround state left right position front rear position and LFE amount If you add an envelope point to the Left Right surround pan envelope for example you will find that a point is automatically added to the Front Rear and LFE envelopes at the same position in the Clip This is because there is actually only a single surround pan envelope When you add an envelope point you are really adding it to this full surround pan envelope and it is shown in all three views In other words the Left Right Front Rear and LFE curves are three views of the same multidimensional envelope Note that if you move an envelope point all surround pan envelopes are affected You can use the Surround Pan window to program each envelope point this makes it easy to set up automated surround panning for a Clip While the Surround Pan window is open click on a surround pan envelope point Its position is reflected in the Surround Pan window You can then simply edit the point in the Surround Pan window rather than on the envelope You can access this dialog in the Audio Montage Workspace by right clicking on the small surround panner window in the track view column For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio Montages 11 1 90 Create Document Template This di
404. ndicate the average of the most recent minimum RMS values left line and the average of the most recent maximum RMS values right line To the left the difference between the minimum and maximum average values is displayed the level value in brackets this gives you an overview of the dynamic range of the audio material If you are monitoring real time audio playback or input the maximum peak and loud ness values are displayed numerically to the right of the meter bars Numbers in brack ets to the right of the Maximum Peak values indicate the number of successive clips OdB signal peaks Recording levels should be set so that they only rarely clip If the master level is set too high the sound quality and frequency response will be compro mised at high recording levels with unwanted clipping effects If the level is set too low noise levels may be high relative to the main sound being recorded Pan meters The lower part of the window shows the pan the difference in level between the left and right channel only applicable when monitoring stereo audio The upper pan meters show the peak level difference between the channels graphically and numerically Note that the pan meters are two sided the level bars can go to the left or right indicating which channel is the loudest The two sides are shown in different colors which can be changed via the Settings dialog as explained previously The lower pan meters show the average di
405. ndow Audio File Workspace and Audio Montage Workspace For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Time Format dialog CD Frame SMPTE timecode Authoring CDs and DVDs WaveLab 7 386 Utilities WaveLab 7 Chapter 14 How do l The following is a list of common tasks and brief instructions on how to achieve them using WaveLab Import songs from an audio CD into WaveLab use VST Plug ins edit an existing Audio File compile and edit several Audio Files on multiple tracks apply processing to an Audio File convert an Audio File into another audio format play back with real time effects record new Audio File convert the sample rate of an Audio File create a Podcast Open an aac m4a or m4p Audio File from Apple iTunes 14 1 import songs from an audio CD into WaveLab From the Audio File Workspace select Utilities gt Import Audio CD tracks This opens the Import Audio CD dialog window where you can specify the tracks to import or the specific time ranges to import for each track You can also specify where the output Audio Files are stored and the format in which to save them See Import Audio CD for more information 14 2 use VST Plug ins You use the Master Section to apply effects to a file or a selection using the built i
406. ndow you can also set overall CD settings via the Basic Audio CD Settings dialog You can use this dialog to add UPC EAN codes and adjust pauses and silences in your CD The Master Section is never used to process the signal to burn unlike in the montage This is why playback through the Master Section is an option that is off by default When you are happy with your CD layout or you wish to further refine it further you can e 1 Check CD conformity before burning your CD you can first check its Red Book conformity by choosing Edit gt Check CD conformity E Write audio CD choose to burn the CD using the Write Audio CD dialog e Convert to Audio Montage convert the CD layout into an audio montage for further editing by choosing Edit gt Convert to Audio Montage For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Authoring CDs and DVDs Basic Audio CD Settings Write Audio CD Select clicking WaveLab 7 306 Interface Elements 11 3 4 Scripting window Audio File Workspace This window allows you to write and execute scripts in the Audio File Workspace The inbuilt text editor helps you when writing scripts by highlighting the different parts of the script with colors making it more readable A script can also be written in another text editor and loaded via the File menu To run a script fr
407. nformation see Getting Help Related topics 11 1 74 Modified files dialog This dialog allows you to save any currently open files that have been modified You can choose which files in the active Workspace you wish to save and which to ignore If you have a large number of currently active files it can be useful to choose Select All and then deselect any items you do not wish to save Choosing Cancel safely returns you to the application without saving the modified files or quitting You can access this dialog throughout WaveLab via File gt Save all This dialog is also shown when closing a Workspace with more than one modified file or when closing the application WaveLab 7 11 1 Dialogs 275 In WaveLab you can also access this dialog from the Control Window via File gt Save all documents in all windows For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics 11 1 75 Save Audio File dialog This dialog allows you to choose the name file format and the location where you wish to save an Audio File The provided default location depends on what path you have specified for the Audio File Save folder in Folder preferences This can be overtyped or you can click to browse folders browse files or explore the Operating System browser dialog You can also change the type of file format used to encode the
408. ng for example Making and editing selections Spectrum editing can only be performed when a waveform is first displayed in Spectrum display mode and when a spectrum selection is defined To activate the Spectrum editor click on the Spectrum edit tool M in the command bar or via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Spectrum Editor This displays the Spectrogram if this is not already the case see The Spectrum display To select a region point and drag to define a rectangle The region selection defines a time and a specific frequency range This allows you to edit and process audio both in the time domain and in a specific frequency domain as opposed to standard wave editing which always operates in the full frequency domain Notes on spectrum selections e When defining a region in a stereo file a mirrored region is automatically created in the other channel To define a region in only one channel press Shift while drawing the region Once you have a region selected if you place your mouse cursor inside the region a pop up appears showing the currently set frequency range Hz and the time range seconds milliseconds for the selection A selected region can be moved in any direction by clicking and dragging the region with the cursor If you press Shift whilst dragging a region it only moves horizontally thus retaining your selected frequency range If you press Ctrll Command Shift the region only moves ver
409. ng include level adjustments effects the mixing of two or more files etc In fact the only time when a 16 bit file is played back at 16 bit resolution is if you play it without any fades or effects and with the Master Faders set to 0 00 no level adjustment You can try this out for yourself by playing back a 16 bit Audio File and viewing the Bit Meter as soon as you adjust the Master Faders note that 24 bits are used and the inter indicator is lit more on this below How to read the Bit Meter e The innermost meters closest to the bit scale show the number of bits in use You can adjust this display in the Settings dialog WaveLab 7 9 2 Shared tool windows 217 e The outer meters are history meters showing how many bits were recently in use You can adjust the hold time in the Settings dialog e The over segment indicates clipping similar to a clip indicator e If the below segment is lit there are more than 24 bits The bit meter will show the 24 higher bits and the below segment indicates the existence of extra lower bits Note that audio is always processed with more than 24 bits internally e Ifthe inter segment is lit this indicates that the audio data cannot really be expressed on a regular 24 bit scale there are floating point values in between bits thus the label inter This is typically the case if you apply effects thus the inter segment allows you to differentiate processed from non p
410. ng on the audio content The Apple Lossless Encoder is part of Quicktime Typical filename extensions are m4a and alac Glossary contents 15 5 ALAW files ALAW is an audio encoding and compression technique for telephony using 8 bit resolution The EU telephone system uses A law encoding for digitization Typical file extensions are alaw vox Glossary contents 15 6 Aliasing Aliasing is a type of distortion caused during the analog to digital conversion process If the sampling rate is not at least double the frequency of the analog signal spurious harmonics and other artifacts may be created Careful filtering before the sampling stage can reduce this aliasing to a minimum Glossary contents 15 7 Amplitude Amplitude is the height of a waveform above or below the zero line Glossary contents 15 8 ASIO Audio Stream Input Output ASIO is a computer device driver protocol for digital audio specified by Steinberg providing a low latency and high fidelity interface between a software application and a computer s soundcard WaveLab 7 396 Glossary Glossary contents 15 9 Attack Attack is the initial part of the sound An attack is said to be fast when the maximum am plitude is reached very quickly with percussive sounds from drums guitar or piano for ex ample Orchestral strings generally have slow attack where the volume increases more slowly Glossary contents 15 10 Audio montage An Aud
411. ng the pitch bend The quality setting and the selected mode will affect the processing time for this effect This function could be used for creating the classic tape stop effect or for blending the tempo pitch of one track into another for example You can access this dialog from the Audio File Workspace via Process gt Pitch bend For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Adjusting Envelopes 5 1 14 Pitch quantize This dialog allows you to correct the pitch of an Audio File The musical notes in the audio selection are quantized to the nearest semitone Pitch quan tize works best on recordings that have a single fundamental frequency such as voice or WaveLab 7 5 1 Offline processing 101 single instruments It can be useful for re tuning the pitch of an imperfect recorded vocal performance for example The dialog allows you to choose the reference frequency normally 440 Hz and the time taken for the pitch correction to reach the nearest semitone An explanation of when and how to adjust the Slur time is given using the What s this tooltips You can also choose to preserve the formants of the original material Choosing this option can sometimes help to produce a more realistic result when correcting the pitch of vocals or acoustic instrument sounds You can access this dialog f
412. nge Level This dialog allows you to apply a gain to change the level of an Audio File You can also use Find current peak level to obtain a report on the peak level of the current audio selection or the peak level in the whole file if Process whole file if there is no selection is selected in the preferences This can be useful if you wish to calculate how much you can increase the overall gain of a file without introducing clipping exceeding OdB for example To change the level enter the desired gain and click Apply You can access this dialog by choosing Process gt Change level in the Audio File Workspace For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio File editing Value editing 11 1 34 File attributes OGG WMA This dialog allows you to enter edit the meta tags for an OGG Vorbis OGG or Window Media Audio WMA encoded file Double click on the tags provided to edit an entry In the Audio File Workspace you can access this dialog by opening a WMA or Ogg Vorbis file and clicking in the Meta Data specific tool window You can also access it by choosing Save as gt Output format gt Attributes gt Edit when saving a WMA or Ogg Vorbis file and from most places where you are able to select an output file format like the Render dialog For an explanation of each parameter and interface
413. nge displayed as well as to access other options Tip The length of the selection affects the accuracy of the analysis For short selections the result will be very detailed For longer selections over a minute or so the results are generally less detailed as the harmonic content may vary between measuring points and as such are not included in the graph You might for example make a separate analysis of the attack beginning of a sound since the most drastic variations usually occur there Some example uses for 3D Frequency Analysis The 3d Frequency Analysis graph in WaveLab can be used for many purposes for example e to see how the frequency spectrum is distributed in a mix e as a basis for EQ ing so that you know which frequencies to reduce or boost e to see which parts of the audio spectrum a certain background noise occupies for removing by filtering e for educational purposes these graphs tell you a lot about how different sounds are built For detailed spectrum analysis the 2D Spectrometer remains the best choice as it provides more accurate viewing and more options Related topics Frequency range Metering 5 2 4 Loudness distribution This dialog allows you to measure the most frequent loudness values found in an Audio File this is not the same as average loudness The graphic peaks found by the analysis represent these values WaveLab 7 108 Audio File editing The tool gives an answer to
414. ning of each montage Check and burn your DVD A once you are finished laying out your DVD A and choosing any options you can check that it conforms to DVD Audio specifications by choosing Edit gt Check DVD Audio conformity If everything is OK choose Edit gt Burn DVD Audio to open the DVD Audio Creation dialog where you can then render out the disk as a collection of files ready for burning Once these files are successfully outputted the Write Data CD DVD dialog will open automatically allowing you to burn your DVD Audio files to an optical DVD WaveLab 7 11 3 Specific tool windows 317 Note that WaveLab automatically creates some basic DVD menus to access the audio tracks from the DVD Player For more information on authoring DVD Audio disk see Authoring CDs and DVDs You can access this dialog in the Audio Montage Workspace via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt DVD Audio For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio Montages DVD Audio Creation DVD Audio options Write Data CD DVD 11 3 19 Scripting window Audio Montage Workspace This window allows you to write and execute scripts in the Audio Montage Workspace The inbuilt text editor helps you when writing scripts by highlighting the different parts of the script with colors making it more readable A script can also be w
415. ns that form the Sonnox Restoration Toolkit The tools are not just for restoring old material but also for removing the clicks pops buzzes and background noise that can sometimes accidentally occur in new recordings A note on Touch Pad controls Several controls in these plug ins are Touch Pads These controls give a clear display of the numeric value of a control and respond to the following actions e Left Click and drag up down Increase decrease the value WaveLab 7 332 Audio Plug ins Right Click and drag up down Fine adjustment of value Double Click Directly edit value Shift Left Click and drag up down Fine adjustment of value Control Left Click Windows Cmd Click Mac Set to default For circular controls the default action is Circular mode but if the Alt key is held the action is Linear mode Additionally for all controls including faders and knobs not just Touch Pads Control Left Click Windows Cmd Click Mac Set to default DeBuzzer screen controls Sonnox Menu Options Button Clicking this button brings down a menu of options and preferences It allows choice of the input output meter clip light hold duration permanent 2s 5s a default to 50Hz on start up and the splash screen to view the version number and build date Input Level Meter The Input Meter is designed to give exactly 1dB per LED for the top 18dB of dynamic range and 2dB per LED thereafter This gives
416. ns the folder where any existing Presets are stored This allows you to delete duplicate and organize your settings into sub folders using the flexibility of the operating system s file browser e Restore factory settings restores the current settings to the factory default e Preset list select a Preset from the list of those currently available e Store restore temporary presets when available use the temporary slots provided to save your settings for the duration of the session This is useful if you want to quickly test and compare different settings Select the option Store temporarily and from the submenu select the number under which you want to save 1 5 To quickly load the saved settings again select the corresponding number from the Restore submenu WaveLab 7 60 WaveLab Concepts e Define shortcut for the current setting when available this allows you to assign a shortcut to the current preset using either a key shortcut keyword or via a MIDI trigger For example if you have a preset to normalize audio at 0 1 dB and you assign it a key shortcut then everytime you execute the shortcut the preset is applied to the audio selection without the need to open the dialog VST 2 Presets VST plug ins have their own preset handling When you click the preset button for this type of effect the following options are available Load Save Bank this allows you to load and save complete sets of presets The file
417. nt to compare are open You can access this dialog via Analysis gt File comparator For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics 11 1 6 Audio File Format Dialog This dialog allows you to set the type of Audio File to be saved Some file types will make some options unavailable Clicking in Attributes meta data produces the File Attributes dialog for adding non audio information associated with a file This option is only available for Wave MPEG 1 Layer 3 MP3 Windows WMA and Ogg Vorbis file types and for each of these the Edit command leads to a different dialog box You can also save and restore settings See Presets You can access this dialog via File gt Save as gt Output Format E The dialog is also available from other locations where Audio Files are saved for example via the Master Section s render dialog For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Presets 11 1 7 Audio Montage properties This dialog allows you to set change the audio properties and number of channels of the active montage file It appears when you first create an audio montage file and can also be edited later It allows you to select an output mode for your project choose how many channels you w
418. ntal frequency Related topics Sonnox DeClicker Sonnox DeNoiser Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets WaveLab 7 12 6 Steinberg Autopan 335 12 6 Steinberg Autopan 1 Steinberg AutoPan 4SOI0O B This is a simple autopan effect lt can use different waveforms to modulate the left right stereo position pan using manual modulation speed settings The parameters are as follows Rate Sets the auto pan speed from 0 1 to 10 by rotating the knob by dragging or using the mouse wheel Width This sets the depth of the Autopan effect that is how far out to the left right speaker the sound should move from 0 to 100 Shape Sets the modulation waveform Sine produces a smooth sweep Triangle creates a ramp a sweep from one speaker to the other and then a quick jump back Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets 12 7 Steinberg Chorus e 1 Steinberg Chorus Ys 00 E Width Spatial 15 WaveLab 7 336 Audio Plug ins This is a single stage chorus effect It works by doubling whatever is sent into it with a slightly detuned version The parameters are as follows Rate The sweep rate can be set freely with the Rate knob without sync to tempo Width Determines the extent of the chorus effect Higher settings produce a more pronounced effect Spatial This sets the stereo width of the effect Turn clockwise fo
419. ntents of the file A frequency graph frequency domain allows you to investigate the individual frequency components of an Audio File With the addition of the time dimension you can follow these frequencies in your Audio File over time and pick out individual snare hits or WaveLab 7 4 2 Analysis 31 vocal notes in a song for example The graph used in WaveLab is sometimes called a 3D Spectrogram Displaying and viewing the graph You can choose to analyze a selection of audio or an entire file If you select a stereo record ing a mix of the two channels will be analyzed Once you have your region selected or no region in the case you wish to analyze the whole file choose Analysis gt 3D Frequency Analysis The graph window will appear There is a scrub wheel that allows you to rotate the view around and a settings button that displays the range of frequencies currently displayed Click on this button to open the set tings dialog and edit the frequency range displayed as well as to access other options Tip The length of the selection affects the accuracy of the analysis For short selections the result will be very detailed For longer selections over a minute or so the results are generally less detailed as the harmonic content may vary between measuring points and as such are not included in the graph You might for example make a separate analysis of the attack beginning of a sound since the most drastic variati
420. nts 15 38 Loops Loops are short audio Clips that create a repeating beat or pattern Loop Tone Uniformizer Loop Tweaker Glossary contents 15 39 Loudness Loudness is a subjective measure the perceptual correlate of amplitude of sound There are objective measures of sound strength such as SPL sound pressure level in dB but Loudness is affected by other factors principally frequency the sensitivity of the human ear changes as a function of frequency and duration The perception of Loudness varies from one person to another so it cannot be measured with a single metric Loudness distribution Loudness normalizer Glossary contents 15 40 Markers Markers are symbols identifying a reference points in an Audio File like tab markers in word processing There are several marker types in WaveLab which may be used for quick navigation or more specialist uses Some markers must be used in pairs Markers Marker types WaveLab 7 404 Glossary Glossary contents 15 41 Media Catalog Number The MCN Media Catalog Number is a 13 digit code for an optical disk intended for commercial distribution there is one such code per disk See UPC EAN You can read the Media Catalog Number EAN from a CD by choosing Utilities gt Import Audio CD tracks gt Functions gt CD Info Import Audio CD Glossary contents 15 42 MIDI MIDI Musical Instrument Digital Interface is an industry standard that allows device
421. nts e at specific time intervals e at regions containing silences e at beat points using beat detection e according to a description of regions stored in a text file The Auto Split function can be used in many situations such as cutting up a single Audio File of a recording session into its individual takes using the silence threshold cutting up a drum loop into its individual drum hit samples using beat detection outputting individual tracks from an album master file using marker detection or Learn regions from text file converting marker types from one type to another by using the option Do not split only create markers at splitting points silencing the regions between audio information in an instrumental take using Mute audio outside regions The Auto Split tool is made up of several pages of dialogs which take you through the process of splitting your audio Note that the sequence of pages is not always the same and depends on the choices you make You can access this dialog in the Audio File Workspace via Tools gt Auto Split For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help WaveLab 7 244 Interface Elements Related topics Split Clip at silences 11 1 13 Batch Conversion This dialog allows you to convert the file format of a group of Audio Files This could be useful for e
422. nvelope points for volume and pan See the Focused Clip window for more information Shortcut You can also access the Edit pane commands from the Focused Clip editor by right clicking on a Clip to reveal a context menu Modes The Modes menu provides you with an array of options to help you when moving and cross fading Clips You can choose how you wish Clips to be handled when moving and adjust whether automatic fades are created or not and how they react when moving Clips Editing context menus There are many context menus in the Audio Montage Workspace to help you while editing your montages They exist for managing tracks Track Clips Clip and inserting Audio Files into your montage Insert You can also save selections of Clips as Groups so that you can easily re select a number of Clips via the Groups window See Groups for more information on using Groups Dragging can be used with several editing functions in the Montage Workspace See Dragging operations for more information Tip Editing multiple envelopes When editing a cross fade length with the mouse or the envelope level you can press Alt Option at the same time and this will adjust the fade of all selected Clips Getting around the Audio Montage window In addition to some of the standard zooming and playback controls present in the Audio File Workspace there are some that are unique to the Audio Montage Workspace There are two magnifying glass icons near the sc
423. o display from the Functions gt Settings menu The Phasescope meter can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Mon tage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Window Related topics Metering 6 5 2 VU Meter The vu meter is used to display the peak and average loudness decibel level of your Audio File It also displays the pan or the balance between the left and right channels in a stereo file The upper part of the level pan meter window shows the peak level and average loudness in the following way e The Peak Level meters display the peak levels of each channel graphically and numeri cally By default the meter segments and numerical peak values are displayed in green for low levels yellow for levels between 6dB and 2dB and red for levels above 2dB You can change both the colors and the range boundaries if you wish via the Level Pan Meter Settings dialog This can be accessed through the Functions gt Settings menu or by using the icon e The VU Volume Unit meters measure the average loudness RMS of each channel These meters have a built in inertia evening out loudness variations over a user defined WaveLab 7 174 Audio Montages time span If you are monitoring playback or audio input you will also note two vertical lines following each VU meter bar seemingly trying to reach the current RMS value These lines i
424. o 216 9 2 5 a AI 217 9 2 6 o A II Re ees 218 9 2 7 WIWGSCOPE jn eR eae A ee ee a 219 9 2 8 AP apne ks ar Sa Sener ete ak Gace ee es OP 220 929 Background task monitor Sik oe e a ae OR a a 220 ESTU MOR 2s awe a AIR a ia 221 9 3 A o e a aa 1 OEE E ORE a OE oD 221 9 3 1 SU MEOE isn oa ei A ees hae Hiab ee earn Gee Ba 223 9 3 2 a AA 224 9 3 3 A hh Bee oad 3 ee oes eS 224 9 3 4 o orca ed eed ie Sw HR ee eee BO Ow a 225 9 3 5 PrimeCB CCD o fe a ai ed ar ace eid aches aa A 226 9 3 6 A 64654550 24S Sk eb eRe Tee eRe Re RESO 227 9 3 7 ri ii a boa ee a ee a a ae he aS 228 10 Master Section 231 10 1 Render Wave window 0 o e e ae 232 10 2 Render Montage window o e e 233 10 89 Plug ins settings lt ses eA i bie macka na A a aa 233 11 Interface Elements 235 Th ISA oa APR e AA eee See E A 235 TEET ISA MR o a da A A 238 Viele AMOS iria A A AAA A 239 TAKES Recording cnanes ns ans io oe SOO a ee ows 239 11 1 4 Audio CD Report wick etal a a ee Mad 239 11 1 5 Audio filecomparer 2 0000 ce ee 240 11 1 6 Audio File Format Dialog lt lt eee eee 240 11 1 7 Audio Montage properties o eee eee 240 11 1 8 Split Clip at silences 1 lt a hw a AA ee 241 11 1 9 Audio properties dialog lt lt ooo ee 241 VLUTO PURAS cos a a a ae AS 242 WaveLab 7 CONTENTS i al k a a ee a oe a ee a a a a a a a a a a a a a ee a a a ee a a a a a ee a ee a a a a ae a M
425. o a certain value can introduce clipping To avoid this occurring a peak limiter the Peak Master plug in can be used as part of the process The Loudness Normalizer raises the loudness and limits peaks in the signal at the same time if needed to achieve the target loudness In the case of stereo files both channels are processed independently This process happens over several stages analysis precedes the final rendering The Loudness Normalizer dialog gives access to useful statistics about the file and the Loudness distribution tool and you can choose to remove any DC offset in the file You can access this dialog from the Audio File Workspace via Process gt Loudness nor malizer This function is also available as a batch processing plug in You can access it from Batch Processing Workspace gt Plug ins window gt Multipass Plug ins gt Loudness Nor malizer For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Loudness DC Offset Loudness distribution WaveLab 7 100 Audio File editing 5 1 12 Pan Normalizer This dialog allows you to ensure that both channels of a stereo file have the same level or loudness Since loudnesss is more important than peak volume in the perception of sound this is a powerful tool to get the best possible stereo balance This process uses two passes to first analyze
426. o digital errors Correction tab specify the method used to correct any errors Search Area tab specify the range of audio you wish to search for errors Options tab this provides a range of preferences for playing back viewing and marking any errors found Browse amp Correct panel step through your defined search region detecting each error in turn You can choose to correct any errors or mark them for later correction There are controls to skip between error markers and make fine adjustments to the selection You can also automatically detect and correct all marked errors in the search region WaveLab 7 11 1 Dialogs 253 Strategies to detect and correct errors There are several strategies that you can employ when detecting and correcting errors e Define an audio selection where you have identified an error then click Correct or Mark for subsequent correction e Use the function Detect next error to let WaveLab automatically find the next error and then click Correct or Mark for subsequent correction e Use the function Detect all errors to let WaveLab automatically find all errors in the predefined range Then browse the marked errors removing or adjusting each audio range in turn and click Correct to correct any specific errors or you can use the option Correct all You can access this dialog by choosing Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Error Correction For an explanation of
427. o feature for the Release parameter The following parameters are available Threshold 60 to 0dB Determines the level where Compressor kicks in Signal levels above the set threshold are affected but signal levels below are not processed Ratio 1 1 to 8 1 Sets the amount of gain reduction applied to signals over the set threshold A ratio of 3 1 means that for every 3dB the input level increases the output level will increase by only 1dB Soft Knee button If this button is off signals above the threshold are compressed instantly according to the set ratio hard knee When Soft Knee is activated the onset of compression is more gradual producing a less drastic result Make up 0 to 24dB or Auto mode This parameter is used to compensate for output gain loss caused by compression If the Auto button is activated the knob becomes dark and the output is automatically adjusted for gain loss Attack 0 1 to 100ms Determines how fast Compressor will respond to signals above the set threshold If the attack time is long more of the early part of the signal attack passes through unprocessed WaveLab 7 338 Audio Plug ins e Hold 0 to 5000ms Sets the time the applied compression will affect the signal after exceeding the thresh old Short hold times are useful for DJ style ducking while longer hold times are required for music ducking e g when working on a documentary film Release 10 to 1000ms or
428. o the Master Section e Bypassed This removes the selected spectrum region from the Audio File The non selected spectrum can either be routed to the Master Section input or the Master Sec tion output e Sent to Master Section output The non selected spectrum can either be bypassed or sent to the Master Section input If the latter is selected it will be mixed with the selected spectrum region at the Master Section output You can access this window by choosing Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Spec trum Editor For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics The Spectrum display Spectrum Processing Modes Spectrogram options Spectrometer 11 3 2 1 Spectrum Processing Modes When applying processing to a spectrum region in the Spectrum Editor you can use a variety of different modes Damp WaveLab 7 11 3 Specific tool windows 303 This is used to attenuate the level of a region The Gain parameter specifies the level of the attenuation it is also possible to set positive gain values i e to boost the frequencies in the region Three filter types are available to perform the damping e Bandpass filter All frequencies in the region are equally attenuated e Low pass filter Higher frequencies in the region will be more attenuated e High pass filter Lower frequencies in the region will
429. ode Tip If you re a user of Nuendo a Steinberg product don t forget that you can drag files directly from within WaveLab Related topics About Tool Windows Adjusting Envelopes Command bars Context menus Docking windows Double clicking Dragging operations Playback shortcuts Select clicking Shortcut system Sliders Status Bar 6 Using the interface Switcher window Tab Groups Transport controls Value editing Workspaces Zooming and scrolling 3 1 About Tool Windows Throughout WaveLab there are various tool windows available that enable you to view an alyze and edit the current active document Generally the content of a tool window is syn chronized with the active document with the exception of the audio meters which can display information related to other documents There are two types of Tool windows e Specific tool windows these are dedicated to a given Workspace type The File Browser and Marker windows are examples of specific tool windows e Shared tool windows Only one instance of these windows can exist at any one time in WaveLab and it can be shared between Workspaces The Master Section is an example of a shared window and as such there is only ever one instance of it All tool windows can be accessed via the Workspace menu See Docking windows for information on docking and undocking tool windows Specific Tool windows Specific tool windows are specific to the current Workspace and are de
430. of WaveLab You can for example im port a project created in Steinberg s Nuendo into WaveLab by importing an AES 31 file It is possible to add specific codes to the names of markers in Nuendo to facilitate their con version into WaveLab specific markers so that when the AES 31 file exported from Nuendo WaveLab 7 148 Audio Montages is imported into WaveLab the markers it contains will be interpreted as WaveLab markers upon import For the various CD track markers the codes to use are as follows Marker type Code Example marker name CD track start t start So it begins t start CD track end t end The end t end of the road CD track splice t splice Intermission t splice CD track index t index t index Hello e You must use Nuendo 2 0 or later if you want to create specially named markers that will be interpreted as WaveLab markers e In Nuendo a marker track has to be created for the specially named markers e When importing AES 31 projects containing specially named markers the marker codes e g t end will not be displayed in WaveLab For more information on AES 31 files see AES31 XML Export Import of Audio Montages This is available on the Save special Montage submenu and is solely intended for users familiar with XML XML stands for E Xtensible Markup Language and is a markup language much like HTML This feature can be useful for example if you wish to chan
431. of all tracks in the currently active montage along with their corresponding properties From this list of CD tracks you can use the fields controls and menus to e Audition playback It is possible to audition playback at the selected track s start time with or without pre roll by clicking on the leftmost icons Click on the left hand button bbz in the audition column to play the track from its start time with a pre roll Click on the right hand button to play the track exactly from its start time WaveLab 7 6 4 Specific tool windows 161 Edit a tracks s name You can add edit a name for each track Double click in a cell to edit Note that to change the track name is to indirectly edit the marker name Edit a track s start end time You can edit the start and end time for each track This is the same as moving the track markers physically but can be done with more precision Double click in a cell to edit Pre gap time This displays the gap between the CD track start marker and where the first track s audio actually begins It can only be edited by physically moving the CD track start marker Post gap time This displays the gap between the end of the audio of the CD s last track and the CD track end marker It can only be edited by physically moving the CD track end marker Copy protection Select the checkbox to include a copy protection flag with the track This may prevent it from later being imported by softwar
432. of editing shortcuts and tools There are a number of panes including e Edit provides you with a range of common playback shortcuts and editing tools for working with Clips Cue Point a cue point is a defined position marker that belongs to a Clip It helps to align Clips together by making Clips snap to other Clips at the cue point position Cue points are displayed as dotted vertical lines This pane provides you with a number of shortcuts for creating and working with Cue Points Envelope allows you to access a number of controls for editing and working with a Clip s different envelopes Fade in provides you with a range of tools for adjusting a Clip s Fade in curve Fade out provides you with a range of tools for adjusting a Clip s Fade out curve Colors up to 20 colors may be assigned to help distinguish particular Clips visually Select a Clip then click on a color Custom colors can be defined with great subtlety from Options gt Colors Select the Custom color to be defined then the parts to which it is applied then define the color value using the color wheel or type a set of RGB Red Green Blue values See Audio Montage Colors for more information When you choose a different Clip the properties in the Focused Clip window will update So for example if you select Envelope the corresponding controls will update to reflect the selected Clip s envelope information WaveLab 7 11 3 Specific tool windows 3
433. of the window and choose Add stereo track Add mono track See Audio Montages for more information 14 5 apply processing to an Audio File The Audio File Workspace Process menu contains a number of options for manipulating Audio Files including fade in fade out and normalize Use these functions to process a complete Audio File or a selected region that you have open in the main editing window WaveLab 7 14 6 convert an Audio File into another audio format 389 You can also use the Process in place rendering function in the Master Section This applies effects to a file or a selection using the built in and or third party VST plug ins You can use the unlimited Undo function to reverse any bad editing decisions See Render Wave window for more information Power users may wish to use the facilities available in the Batch Processor Workspace This allows complex processing to be applied to a list of Audio Files See Batch Processing for more information 14 6 convert an Audio File into another audio for mat There are two ways e From the Audio File Workspace you can either use the Save as or the Save Special commands in the File menu See Save Audio File dialog and Audio File Format Dialog for more information e You can also use the Render function within the Master Section See Render Wave window for more information Power users may wish to use the facilities available in the Batch Processor
434. oject Interface Elements Audio Plug ins Utilities How do Glossary WaveLab 7 Help WaveLab 7 Chapter 2 Getting Help WaveLab s detailed help system makes it easy to look up interface features and get informa tion from within the program There are three main types of help available What is this Access this by clicking on the amp icon or the question mark icon in a dialog window titlebar or by holding down Shift F1 Once activated the cursor changes to a question mark Click on an interface feature for information on what it does and details of any settings values functions involved This is a quick way to learn about the more detailed features of WaveLab When a Context menu is open holding down Shift F1 allows the What is This mode to activate while the menu is open and this is actually the only way to get help for Context menu features It is worth noting too that What is This help is sometimes available for sub parts of controls such as List headers Tooltips Hold your cursor over a button to show a brief description of its function wherever available Help window This window provides you with detailed information on WaveLab s features and functionality You can access this help window in several ways e via the Help menu See Help menu e from each dialog window provided with a Help button This opens the Help window at the relevant entry e by pressing F1 Command
435. ol windows are available within the Batch Processor Workspace Master Project File Browser Batch Processing Plug ins 7 1 1 File Browser This dialog allows you to browse files directly from within WaveLab rather than using your operating system s file browser WaveLab 7 186 Batch Processing It provides you with all the standard browsing functions such as List and Icon views as well as additional controls to audition Audio Files and any marker defined regions You can use it to open or insert an entire file or a specific region of a file by dragging and releasing the file in the location you wish to insert the file In the Audio Montage Workspace you can also choose to only view certain types of WaveLab specific files The File Browser can be very useful in speeding up the process of auditioning a long list of sound files It can also be used to drag to windows such as Data CD DVD including dragging folders The playback functions Play file gt Once you have selected a file in the File Browser list you can audition it by clicking Play in the File Browser s toolbar Click again to stop Auto play You can also have files play back automatically as soon as they are selected To do this activate Auto Play mode Tip To audition a long list of Audio Files enable Auto play and use the UP and DOWN cursor keys to step through each Audio File in quick succession Opening and inserting a file or region Once you have chosen a
436. ole Audio File and where applicable allow you to perform many other useful functions Reorder the tab bar by dragging and dropping the tab at a new position on the tab bar Move it to another Workspace by dragging and dropping the tab in the editing window of another Workspace Paste it into an Audio File by dragging and dropping the tab onto the waveform display at the cursor position you want to insert the copied audio Paste it into another application by dropping the tab into the relevant window of the other application The result depends on the target aplication Tip You can also achieve the same actions by dragging the Audio File from the document button on the status bar at the bottom right of each window Other useful functions can be accessed using tab groups e Create a new empty document by double clicking on an empty part of the tab bar on the right normally The new file is created by using the active file as template for example Sample rate e Display the document file path by keeping the mouse over a tab for a small mo ment This displays a popup that indicates the full file path of the associated document e Access additional tab functions by right clicking on a tab e Access the Recent file list by Right clicking in the empty tab area e Move a file between tab groups by dragging a tab from one tab group to another e Copy a file by holding down Ctrl Command to create a copy by dragg
437. om within the script window choose Functions gt Execute script For a general description of scripting see Scripting For an overview of the scripting lan guage see ECMAScript Reference You can access this dialog from the Audio File Workspace via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Script Note To view trace or log messages when executing scripts that contain the logWin dow function ensure that the Log window is visible and that it s warning filter buttons A 9 are selected For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Scripting ECMAScript Reference Log window 11 3 5 Metadata window This specific tool window displays any Meta data tags belonging to the currently active file This usually consists of a set of tags that describe the audio contents For example it might include the title of the track the author and the date it was created This data will vary depending on the file type and not all file types store this information so it may be blank To edit the file s meta data tags click anywhere in the window This will open the corresponding file attributes dialog You can access this dialog in the Audio File Workspace via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Meta Data For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon
438. omatically Attack 0 1 to 100ms Determines how fast the compressor responds to signals above the set threshold If the attack time is long more of the early part of the signal attack passes through unprocessed Release 10 to 1000ms or Auto mode Sets the amount of time it takes for the gain to return to its original level when the signal drops below the threshold level If the Auto button is activated the compressor will automatically find an optimal release setting that varies depending on the audio material Graphical display Use the graphical display to graphically set the Threshold and Ratio values To the left and right of the graphical display you will find two meters that show the amount of gain reduction in dB The Limiter section The limiter is designed to ensure that the output level never exceeds a set threshold to avoid clipping in following devices Conventional limiters usually require very accurate setting up of the attack and release parameters to prevent the output level from going beyond the set threshold level The limiter adjusts and optimizes these parameters automatically according to the audio material You can also adjust the Release parameter manually The following parameters are available Output 24 to 6dB Determines the maximum output level Signal levels above the set threshold are affected but signal levels below are left unaffected Soft Clip button If this button is activated the limi
439. on e Use the function Detect all errors to let WaveLab automatically find all errors in the y predefined range Then browse the marked errors removing or adjusting each audio range in turn and click Correct to correct any specific errors or you can use the option Correct all You can access this dialog by choosing Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Error Correction For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Marker types 5 7 2 Auto Split This dialog allows you to automatically split an Audio File into separate Audio Files according to certain specified rules You can split files at marker points at specific time intervals at regions containing silences at beat points using beat detection according to a description of regions stored in a text file The Auto Split function can be used in many situations such as cutting up a single Audio File of a recording session into its individual takes using the silence threshold cutting up a drum loop into its individual drum hit samples using beat detection outputting individual tracks from an album master file using marker detection or Learn regions from text file converting marker types from one type to another by using the option Do not split only create markers at splitting points silencing the regions between
440. on 11 1 42 Global Preferences This dialog allows you to view and change options that are common throughout the applica tion s Workspaces You can adjust the following settings e General this tab allows you to change the location of WaveLab s settings files and the user interface language You need to restart the application for changes to take effect e Display this tab allows you change many aspects of the user interface that apply across the whole application These options provide useful information and usability functions but can be deactivated to streamline the interface Use Window Switcher is an import panel that controls the appearance of the Window Switcher panel and whether you want particular Workspaces to appear WaveLab 7 11 1 Dialogs 261 e Formats this tab allows you to adjust settings for some of the audio formats and units that WaveLab uses e CD Burning this tab allows you to set a number of parameters for CD burning e Options this tab allows you to control application wide start up options and transport settings You can also reset default answers This can be useful for example if you deactivated any Don t show this message again warning messages that you now wish to restore e Global shortcuts this tab allows you edit key sequences for shortcuts available across all Workspaces You can access this dialog via WaveLab gt Preferences For an explanation of each parameter and inter
441. on individual menu entries You can access this window in the Audio Montage Workspace via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Clips For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Specific tool windows Audio Montages Clip 11 3 16 Notes This specific tool window allows you to keep notes about the current Audio Montage session You can type into the window and use the standard HTML text editor controls to format your text add images hyperlinks and lists These notes are saved along with the Audio Montage file You can access this dialog in the Audio Montage Workspace via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Notes For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Specific tool windows 11 3 17 Effects This specific tool window allows you to add VST effect plug ins both to individual Clips and tracks The difference between Clip effects and track effects are that Clip effects affect individual Clips only whereas track effects affect all Clips on a track Each independent Clip and or audio track in the Montage can be independently processed by up to ten VST effect plug ins Effects are configured either as Inserts when all sound is processed by the effect or as Send effects where
442. on see Getting Help Related topics Podcasts 8 2 Episodes menu This menu provides commands for managing individual Episodes within a Podcast e New This adds a new untitled episode without any information being present e Duplicate selected This adds a new episode copying all information from the existing episode to the new one e Delete selected To delete an episode select it in the item list and use this function Alternatively you can exclude an Episode from the Podcast by unchecking the Enabled box e Move up down Episodes can be re ordered using this function or by dragging them to a new position in the item list 8 3 Publish menu This is where you define where your Podcast is going to be uploaded to via FTP FTP site The WaveLab s FTP site manager stores all information required for the Podcast upload process Selecting FTP site from the Podcast window s Publish menu brings up the FTP site dialog See FTP site for more information WaveLab 7 208 Podcasts Uploading the Podcast Once you have specified the FTP site settings uploading the Podcast is rather simple by using the functions in the Podcast window s Publish menu e Update all items on FTP This uploads updates the XML Podcast file on the FTP it also uploads all items media files but only if they are not already present on the FTP This is the most common function to upload and update your Podcast Upload Replace all items on F
443. on to the signal The following parameters are available e Output 24 to 6dB Determines the maximum output level Should normally be set to O to avoid clipping e Optimize 0 to 100 Determines the loudness of the signal e Soft Clip button When this button is activated Maximizer starts limiting or clipping the signal softly at the same time generating harmonics which add a warm tube like characteristic to the audio material WaveLab 7 350 Audio Plug ins Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets 12 19 Steinberg Mix 6 to 2 1 Steinb 4 S 2 0 2 0 Normalize Mix6To2 lets you quickly mix down your surround mix format to stereo You can control the levels of up to six surround channels and decide for each channel up to which level it will be included in the resulting mix Mix6To2 does not simulate a surround mix or add any psycho acoustical artifacts to the resulting output it is simply a mixer The plug in should be placed in one of the post fader insert effect slots for the output bus For the Output bus the following parameters are available e A Normalize button If activated the mixed output is normalized i e the output level is automatically adjusted so that the loudest signal is as loud as possible without clipping e A Link button that links the two Output faders Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add e
444. on what path you have specified for the Batch Processor Save folder in Folder preferences This can be overtyped or you can click to browse folders browse files or explore the Operating System browser dialog You can access this dialog in the Batch Processor Workspace via File gt Save as For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Folder Preferences dialog 11 1 78 Save File As This dialog allows you to save a copy of a file that you currently have open You can specify a new file name and location The default location depends on the path you have specified for the active Workspace s Save folder in Folder preferences This can be overtyped or you can click 1 to browse folders browse files or explore the Operating System browse dialog You can access this dialog in various Workspaces in WaveLab via File gt Save as For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Folder Preferences dialog 11 1 79 Save Preset As This dialog allows you to save a copy of a preset you have altered with a different name You can also define and create a root folder to hold for all presets of its kind You can access this dialog in various places throughout WaveLab where you choose presets
445. one Uniformizer applies processing to the sound that evens out changes WaveLab 7 5 1 Offline processing 95 in level and timbral characteristics in order for a sound to loop properly For example this could be useful for creating looped samples for a softsynth or hardware sampler To use the Loop Tone Uniformizer you need to have a loop defined using a pair of loop markers gt 4 The original length of the loop is not changed Uniformizers This tab allows you to specify the method s used to even out the sound you wish to loop Choose between Slice mixing and or Chorus smoothing For a full explanation of how each of these methods operate use the What s this help function For slice mixing you may need to experiment to see how many slices are needed Generally the more slices you use the more natural the sound will be up to a certain point Pre Cross fade The Loop Tone Uniformizer also includes the option to cross fade the end of the loop with the start of the newly processed section so that transition into the newly looped section is smoother during playback Use the envelope drag points or value sliders to adjust the cross fade A note about Post Cross fading If you have used the Loop Tone Uniformizer within a region of an Audio File the transition from the end of the loop into the original file in many cases won t be very natural This can be fixed as follows 1 Close the Loop Tone Uniformizer and open the Lo
446. ons gt Audio Streaming Settings Set the Audio Device to ASIO 2 Assign the output and input channels WaveLab 7 12 2 Using External effects 325 From the External gear plug in tab select the channels to be used for device output to gear and for device input from gear These should normally be different I O channels than the ones you use for playback recording The number of available outputs in this plug in equals the number of inputs up to 8 Press OK when you are done 3 Set options for the External Gear plug in Click in a Master Section effect slot and select External Gear from the ASIO plug in sub menu The External Gear control panel opens and you can set the following options Num Outputs Normally the number of outputs is the same as the number of inputs the As Inputs option You can however use a mono in stereo out configuration in which case set this parameter to 2 with the slider Latency External gear may introduce latency WaveLab can automatically compensate for this if you select Auto only active during rendering or you can set this latency compensation yourself up to 2000 milliseconds The latency introduced by the ASIO driver is automatically taken into account by WaveLab Send level The Send level should normally be set to O dB but you can adjust the input level on the external effect if necessary 4 Process the signal Now you can process a signal through the external p
447. ons usually occur there Some example uses for 3D Frequency Analysis The 3d Frequency Analysis graph in WaveLab can be used for many purposes for example e to see how the frequency spectrum is distributed in a mix e as a basis for EQ ing so that you know which frequencies to reduce or boost e to see which parts of the audio spectrum a certain background noise occupies for removing by filtering e for educational purposes these graphs tell you a lot about how different sounds are built For detailed spectrum analysis the 2D Spectrometer remains the best choice as it provides more accurate viewing and more options Related topics Frequency range Metering 4 2 4 Loudness distribution This dialog allows you to measure the most frequent loudness values found in an Audio File this is not the same as average loudness The graphic peaks found by the analysis represent these values The tool gives an answer to the question How often does a given loudness vertical scale in dB appear in the whole file The percentage figure is relative to other peaks Some simple examples WaveLab 7 32 WaveLab Concepts e 1 If for instance you have a sine of O dB 2 second followed by a sine of 6 dB 2 seconds This means the global audio material has as much O dB material as 6dB material you will see 2 peaks 0 6 dB each at 100 e 2 If for instance uou have a sine of O dB 1 second followed by a sine of
448. ools mentioned you can burn it by choosing the button which opens the Write Audio CD dialog Here you can choose either the device you wish to burn with or to save the disk as a DDP image This dialog also allows you to choose standard options as to how the disk will be burnt For more information see Write Audio CD As well as saving DDP images you can also burn them from within WaveLab To burn a DDP image simply select Utilities gt Burn Audio CD form DDP Image For more information see Burn Audio CD from DDP Image CD burning preferences Some preferences for CD burning and DDP image creation are set in Global Preferences Select Preferences gt Global preferences gt CD Burning tab and use What s this to get more detailed information on the options available Related topics DDP files Audio CD Report Write Audio CD CD Wizard Data CD DVD CD Text Editor CD 4 4 Markers Markers are visible indicators that can be used to save and name specific time positions in an audio or audio montage file In WaveLab markers can be used for adding comments editing synchronizing defining loops and defining CD DVD A tracks Markers can be used in pairs as well as individually to mark regions or places for future reference Once you have defined some markers in your file you can quickly move the playhead to a marker during editing or select the audio between two markers Markers can also be used to identify an audio cue or the be
449. oosing Process gt Level Normalizer in the Audio File Workspace This function is also available as a batch processing plug in You can access it from Batch Processing Workspace gt Plug ins window gt Multipass Plug ins gt Normalizer For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio File editing Value editing 11 1 54 OGG encoding This dialog allows you to specify the encoding options when you save an Ogg Vorbis Audio File You can choose between using an average or variable bit rate to adjust the size and quality of the file You can access this dialog via Save as gt Output Format select type Ogg Vorbis gt Encoding gt Edit and from most places where you can select an output file format such as the Render dialog For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help WaveLab 7 266 Interface Elements Related topics Ogg Vorbis files 11 1 55 Open files list This dialog allows you to view a list of all currently open files and documents in WaveLab Documents from all the different Workspaces are displayed and can be open closed re named saved and in the case of Audio Files auditioned The list can also be filtered to only display the files you are interested in When ac
450. op Tweaker 2 Click on the Cross fade tab and deactivate the Cross fade option the check box 3 Click on the Post Cross fade tab and make sure Cross fade is activated 4 Set up the post cross fade parameters and click Apply It can also be a useful tip to lock the loop markers after you use this command on a selection within an Audio File Once the loop is processed in place moving the loop markers will upset playback of the loop You can access this dialog in the Audio File Workspace via Process gt Loop Tone Uni formizer For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Markers Adjusting Envelopes 5 1 6 Pitch correction This dialog allows you to detect and change the pitch of a sound without affecting its length e Amount of Shift use these controls to find out the current pitch of the audio and if desired calculate the required shift to match a specific pitch WaveLab 7 96 Audio File editing e Method use these controls to adjust the method and quality you wish to use when processing the pitch change You can also choose how the length of the sound is affected by the operation By default this process will not change the length of the sound This tool could be useful for fixing an off key vocal note in a live recording or tuning the pitch of a kick drum sample to fit a particular song for
451. ope meter can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Win dow Related topics Metering 5 6 8 Timecode This shared tool window displays the current time of the playback head or the cursor position if not playing back in the timecode format currently selected in the Time Format dialog The current time can be in a range of standard SMPTE formats CD or DVD specific formats or a custom one see Time Format dialog The most common use for this window is for working with video or film You can use it to display the playback head position of the current Audio File ina SMPTE format to frame level resolution i e hours minutes seconds frames You can also use it to display CD frames minutes seconds frames when you are authoring CD or DVDs You can access this window by choosing Workspace gt Shared tool windows gt Time code It is available in the Control Window Audio File Workspace and Audio Montage Workspace For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Time Format dialog CD Frame SMPTE timecode Authoring CDs and DVDs 5 6 9 Background task monitor This specific tool window allows you to view all background rendering processes that are in progress WaveLab 7 5 6 Share
452. ope display When you release the mouse button the display is zoomed in so that the enclosed frequency range fills the window To WaveLab 7 5 6 Shared tool windows 133 return to full scale display select Zoom out fully from the Functions menu or double click anywhere on the display Making settings You can adjust the behavior and display of the meters as desired and assign up to five sets of Spectrometer settings to the Preset buttons for instant access Open the Settings dialog by selecting Settings from the Functions menu or clicking the tool icon Note that you can apply your settings without closing the dialog by clicking the Apply button If you want to store your settings for later use or assign them to a Preset button select Save as from the pop up menu in the lower part of the dialog and specify a name for the preset in the file dialog that appears Now you can choose to make the settings instantly available for selection in the FFT Meter window by using the Assign to preset button submenu on the pop up menu e When you are finished click OK to close the dialog Selecting Spectrometer presets If you have assigned your settings to the Preset buttons in the Settings dialog you can quickly switch between different level scales and display modes by clicking one of the Preset icons 1 5 or selecting the desired preset from the Options pop up menu Exporting FFT data as ASCII text When usin
453. ophonic material single notes without chords or harmonies and assumes the analyzed section has a relatively stable pitch As a general rule try to analyze the sustain portion of a sound rather than the attack Extras this tab is for informing you about DC offsets and the significant bit resolution of the file This can be useful for example if you wanted to check whether a 16 bit file really uses 16 bits or if it was actually recorded with only 8 bit resolution and then upscaled to 16 bits Errors this tab is to help you find glitches and sections where the audio has clipped gone beyond O dB For more control over the analysis use Error detection and cor rection Checking and browsing the results Checking the results on the Pitch and Extra tabs is simple since only one value is returned for the whole section of analyzed audio For all the other tabs the analysis methods returns a series of exact points hot points in the file or section of audio Use the relevant buttons in each tab to select the hot points you wish to look at in more detail Using the slider you can then browse or skip between these points adding markers or focusing the waveform display at that particular point in the file You can access this dialog in the Audio File Workspace via Analysis gt Global Analysis For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting H
454. oping on off for the currently selected Audio File or montage e Start of file 4 End of File gt Move the cursor to the beginning or end of the currently selected Audio File e Skip forward gt Skip backward Skip the cursor forwards or backwards within the currently selected Audio File e Play gt Begin playback of the current Audio File e Stop Stop playback of the current Audio File A second click moves the cursor to the beginning of the last start position A further click returns the cursor to the start of the file e Record Y Opens the recording window from which you can start recording WaveLab 7 22 Using the interface Additional transport functions such as start skip and stopping playback options are also available from the transport command bar In WaveLab additional playback speed and jog shuttle shortcuts are also provided For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Playback speed Recording Dialog Command bars 3 16 Value editing At various places in WaveLab numerical values can be edited using a combination of text fields and spin controls These values are sometimes made of several parts for example 12 mn 30 sec 120 ms Each value can be edited using the following methods e With the value selected type a new value Use the up and down arrow
455. or low levels yellow for levels between 6dB and 2dB and red for levels above 2dB You can change both the colors and the range boundaries if you wish via the Level Pan Meter Settings dialog This can be accessed through the Functions gt Settings menu or by using the 4 icon The VU Volume Unit meters measure the average loudness RMS of each channel These meters have a built in inertia evening out loudness variations over a user defined time span If you are monitoring playback or audio input you will also note two vertical lines following each VU meter bar seemingly trying to reach the current RMS value These lines indicate the average of the most recent minimum RMS values left line and the average of the most recent maximum RMS values right line To the left the difference between the minimum and maximum average values is displayed the level value in brackets this gives you an overview of the dynamic range of the audio material If you are monitoring real time audio playback or input the maximum peak and loud ness values are displayed numerically to the right of the meter bars Numbers in brack ets to the right of the Maximum Peak values indicate the number of successive clips OdB signal peaks Recording levels should be set so that they only rarely clip If the master level is set too high the sound quality and frequency response will be compro mised at high recording levels with unwanted clipping effects If the
456. or more information see Getting Help Related topics DVD A 11 1 23 DVD Audio Creation This dialog allows you to choose settings when creating a DVD Audio disk You can choose to just test the DVD A how to render the audio for each Audio Montage and choose an output folder for the DVD Audio files that are created Once the files have been rendered to the hard disk by WaveLab the Write Data CD DVD dialog opens automatically allowing you to burn your DVD Audio files to an optical DVD You can access this dialog in the Audio Montage Workspace via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt DVD Audio gt Burn DVD Audio For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics DVD A 11 1 24 Document list dialog This dialog allows you to add a file to a document in a different Workspace You can add the file to a new or existing Workspace document Open documents are dis played in the list box or you can browse to find an existing document or create a new one For example to add your Audio File to a Podcast choose File gt Special gt Add to Pod cast The Podcast can be a new or existing Podcast Open Podcasts are displayed in the list box You can access this dialog by choosing File gt Special gt Add to Workspace For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s t
457. or more information see Getting Help Related topics Master Section Audio Plug ins 11 1 46 Audio Montage Clone This dialog allows you to clone your active Audio Montage and its associated Audio Files You can choose a number of options that determine how WaveLab will consolidate the mon tage and its related audio Clips when making the clone You can access this dialog from the Audio Montage Workspace via File gt Save special gt Clone completely For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help WaveLab 7 11 1 Dialogs 263 Related topics 11 1 47 Write Audio CD This dialog allows you to define some options when creating a new audio montage from an Audio File that is open in the Audio File Workspace You can choose whether to use a selection or the whole Audio File to create a new Montage file and how to interpret any markers that are present You can access this dialog in the Audio File Workspace via Edit gt Create Montage from Audio File For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio Montages 11 1 48 Meta normalizer This dialog allows you to adjust the loudness of each Clip so that they get the same loudness You can use it to equalize the volume of all the Clips withi
458. ore your settings for later use or assign them to a Preset button select Save as from the pop up menu in the lower part of the dialog and specify a name for the preset in the file dialog that appears Now you can choose to make the settings instantly available for selection in the FFT Meter window by using the Assign to preset button submenu on the pop up menu e When you are finished click OK to close the dialog Selecting Spectrometer presets If you have assigned your settings to the Preset buttons in the Settings dialog you can quickly switch between different level scales and display modes by clicking one of the Preset icons 1 5 or selecting the desired preset from the Options pop up menu Exporting FFT data as ASCII text When using the Spectrometer in off line mode Monitor Edit cursor Position or Analyze audio election mode you can export the displayed FFT data as a text file by selecting WaveLab 7 178 Audio Montages Export FFT data as ASCII from the Options pop up menu The resulting text file can then be imported into applications that allow graph plotting from text files Microsoft Excel for example The Spectrometer can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Window Related topics Metering Spectroscope 6 5 7 Wavescope The Wavescope meter displays a real ti
459. p there can only ever be one or no focused Clip at a time The focused Clip s name is displayed in red It s necessary to identify the Clip as focused because there are certain functions that can only be executed on a single Clip You use the Focused Clip window to perform these functions e Selected Clip there can be many selected Clips This allows you to edit multiple Clips at the same time You can perform functions such as copy delete move etc Selected Clips have a different background color Managing tracks Managing tracks is done mainly in the area to the left of each track in the main window In the middle of this area is a button with the number of the track Clicking this button brings up the track pop up menu which contains most of the track functions There are also controls for e Minimizing folding a track use the small drop down arrow to save screen space by toggling the track between a zoomed to closed folded view Soloing a track the small diamond shaped button allows you to solo a track so that all other tracks are muted but it is heard Muting a track the small round shaped button allows you to mute unmute a track Gray means the mute button is engaged and the track is not audible Green means that mute is off and the track is audible Choose a track s output channel the small Lf Rf button allows you to dispatch audio to different channels e Adjust tracks volume the two small channel faders allow
460. p will replace the range and the section to the right of the range is moved to the left or right depending on the length of the inserted Clip vs the length of the selection range so that there is no gap after the inserted Clip Replace selected range trim source accordingly This is only possible if there is a selection range on the destination track and if that selection range is shorter than the range of the Clip to be inserted The inserted Clip will overwrite the selected range only that is the range to be inserted will be trimmed according to the current selection WaveLab 7 145 e Replace selected range bind right Clips track As Replace selected range but other Clips to the right on the same track are also moved accordingly e Replace selected range amp bind right Clips global As Replace selected range but other Clips to the right on all tracks are also moved accordingly e Overwrite from cursor If the inserted Clip overlaps any other Clips the overlapped regions are removed from the existing Clips e Cancel No Clip is added you can also cancel the insertion by clicking outside the pop up menu Focused Clip versus Select Clips It is important to note that there is a difference between a focused Clip and a selected Clip Some editing functions can only be executed on an individual Clip or focused Clip while some others can be executed on multiple Clips or selected Clips e Focused Cli
461. pe shows a continuous graphical representation of the frequency spectrum analyzed into 60 separate frequency bands represented as vertical bars Peak levels are shown as a short horizontal lines above the corresponding band indicating recent peak maximum values The Spectroscope offers a quick spectrum overview For a more detailed analysis of the audio spectrum use the Spectrometer The Spectroscope can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used ei ther as a floating window or docked in the Workspace lt can also be docked in the Control Window WaveLab 7 152 Audio Montages Related topics Metering Spectrometer 6 1 3 Oscilloscope The Oscilloscope offers a highly magnified view of the waveform around the playback cursor position If you are analyzing a stereo file the Oscilloscope normally shows the separate levels of the two channels However if you activate the option Show Sum and Subtraction on the Functions menu or click the icon the upper half of the Oscilloscope shows the sum of the two channels and the lower half shows the subtraction Making settings By opening the Settings dialog you can adjust the display colors and choose to activate Auto zoom or not With Auto zoom activated the display is optimized so that the highest level reaches the top of the display at all times The Settings dialog can be accessed through the Functions gt Settings menu
462. playing information in the meters You can access the following monitoring functions from the Meters menu or via the Meters command bar e Monitor Playback the meters display the audio output of the Master Section after the dithering section unlike the Master Section s own meter e Monitor Audio Input the meters display the audio input you have chosen in the Audio Streaming Settings This is useful for monitoring audio while recording e gt a Monitor File Rendering the meters display what is being written to disk during file rendering taking into account Master Section settings with average minimum and maximum peak values computed After rendering the meter s freeze and remain frozen until you refresh or change the monitor mode Monitor Edit cursor position the meters display static information about the audio beneath the edit cursor Note that the Master Section settings are not taken into account in this mode E Analyze audio selection this allows you to make a selection and have the meters display the average values over the selected range as a static display The Master Section settings are not taken into account in this mode When you change the selection you need to update the meter displays by selecting Refresh selection analysis from the Meters menu or by clicking the Refresh button on the Meters control bar If you have one of the continuous display modes chosen you can also select to freeze the meter
463. ple starting at 100 and ending at 0 will fade out the effect you just applied 5 Choose Unprocessed selection for this example As mentioned previously you can also use any audio of the same duration from the clipboard 6 Click Apply to apply the Effect morphing You can access this dialog in the Audio File Workspace via Edit gt Effect morphing For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help 4 6 10 Loudness distribution This dialog allows you to measure the most frequent loudness values found in an Audio File this is not the same as average loudness The graphic peaks found by the analysis represent these values The tool gives an answer to the question How often does a given loudness vertical scale in dB appear in the whole file The percentage figure is relative to other peaks Some simple examples e 1 If for instance you have a sine of O dB 2 second followed by a sine of 6 dB 2 seconds This means the global audio material has as much O dB material as 6dB material you will see 2 peaks 0 6 dB each at 100 e 2 If for instance uou have a sine of O dB 1 second followed by a sine of 6 dB 3 seconds This means there are 3 times more 6 dB material than O dB material You will see a peak of about 33 at O dB and another peak of 100 at 6 dB This analysis is useful for learning about how t
464. ple the logWindow function outputs messages to this window There are a number of toggle buttons and these allow you to filter the types of messages displayed Note When using the logWindow method you need to have the Show informal notes button selected for the messages to be visible If no log messages are displayed make sure all the toggle buttons are selected A You can access this window via Workspace gt Shared tool windows gt Log It is available in the Control Window Audio File Workspace and Audio Montage Workspace You can also access this window in the Control Window via Utilities gt Log For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Control Window Specific tool windows Scripting 9 3 Metering WaveLab contains a variety of audio meters to help in monitoring and analyzing audio Meters can be used to monitor audio during playback rendering recording and also to analyze a specific selection of audio There are seven different audio meters in WaveLab each with its own separate window The meters are accessed via the Meters menu the Shared Tool windows menu or from the Meters control bar Monitor Modes You can choose the audio source and the mode for displaying information in the meters You can access the following monitoring functions from the Meters menu or via the Meters command
465. ply when just tweaking loop points You can also leave this dialog window open and manually adjust the position of the markers in the main waveform windows if you need to make large adjustments Cross fade This tab allows you to apply a cross fade at the end of a loop by mixing a copy of the beginning of the loop with it This can be useful to smooth the transition between the end of a loop and its beginning especially when using material that doesn t naturally loop Use the envelope WaveLab 7 11 2 Shared tool windows 289 drag points or value sliders to adjust the cross fade envelope Click Apply to process the cross fade Post cross fade This tab allows you to cross fade the loop back into the audio after the end of the loop This is done by mixing a copy of the loop back into the audio Use the envelope drag points or value sliders to adjust the cross fade envelope Click Apply to process the post cross fade Using the Copy button you can insert multiple copies of the loop into the active Audio File creating a smooth audio sequence since copies will loop without an audible transition You can access this dialog by choosing Process gt Loop Tweaker For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Markers Adjusting Envelopes Zero crossing 11 1 103 Zoom factor This dialog allows you to set th
466. preservation is activated Using an envelope you can draw the curve you wish the pitch to follow The pitch offset is displayed along the vertical ruler of the envelope and the range the envelope effects can be adjusted using the spin control Positive pitch values produce sounds with a higher pitch and of shorter length negative values produce sounds with a lower pitch and of longer length WaveLab 7 4 6 Offline processing 55 If length preservation is activated you can choose the algorithm that is used to perform the pitch bend operation Depending on the type of audio material you are processing choose the appropriate mode For more information on the different modes use the What s This tool You can also adjust the quality used when processing the pitch bend The quality setting and the selected mode will affect the processing time for this effect This function could be used for creating the classic tape stop effect or for blending the tempo pitch of one track into another for example You can access this dialog from the Audio File Workspace via Process gt Pitch bend For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Adjusting Envelopes 4 6 14 Pitch quantize This dialog allows you to correct the pitch of an Audio File The musical notes in the audio selection are quantized to the nearest se
467. put output meter clip light hold duration permanent 2s 5s and the splash screen to view the version number and build date Graphical Display The graphical display shows the real time frequency gain curve of the programme ma terial It is graduated from O to 20kHz and from O to 144dB The yellow line is the calculated noise spectrum level and in Auto mode will continually follow the noise in real time Everything below this contour is assumed to be noise and everything above the line is programme signal Input Level Meter The Input Meter is designed to give exactly 1dB per LED for the top 18dB of dynamic range and 2dB per LED thereafter This gives a clear and intuitive impression of the working headroom Input Gain Trim Touch Pad dB This allows you to adjust the input signal level by up to 12dB Sensitivity Fader and Trim Touch Pad dB The sensitivity fader defaults to 0 0dB which is the midpoint of its travel It will adjust the sensitivity of the noise detection circuit and the visible effect of this is to move the yellow noise contour line up and down The sensitivity level can be changed by up to 18dB To reduce the sensitivity and make the De Noiser less reactive to the noise component move the fader down The noise contour will displace downwards showing less noise component in the detection circuit If the sensitivity is set too low little noise reduction will occur Conversely to increase the sensitivity and make
468. quency area of interest This is done by clicking and dragging a rectangle in the Spectroscope display When you release the mouse button the display is zoomed in so that the enclosed frequency range fills the window To return to full scale display select Zoom out fully from the Functions menu or double click anywhere on the display Making settings You can adjust the behavior and display of the meters as desired and assign up to five sets of Spectrometer settings to the Preset buttons for instant access Open the Settings dialog by selecting Settings from the Functions menu or clicking the 4 tool icon Note that you can apply your settings without closing the dialog by clicking the Apply button If you want to store your settings for later use or assign them to a Preset button select Save as from the pop up menu in the lower part of the dialog and specify a name for the preset in the file dialog that appears Now you can choose to make the settings instantly available for selection in the FFT Meter window by using the Assign to preset button submenu on the pop up menu e When you are finished click OK to close the dialog WaveLab 7 9 2 Shared tool windows 219 Selecting Spectrometer presets If you have assigned your settings to the Preset buttons in the Settings dialog you can quickly switch between different level scales and display modes by clicking one of the Preset icons 1 5 or selecting the des
469. quency bands are shown in Hz At the top of the display the amount of cut boost is shown in dB Apart from the frequency bands the following parameters are available e Output Controls the overall gain of the equalizer Flatten button Resets all the frequency bands to OdB Range Allows you to relatively adjust how much a set curve cuts or boosts the signal If the Range parameter is turned fully clockwise the range is 12dB Invert button Inverts the current response curve Mode pop up menu The filter mode set here determines how the various frequency band controls interact to create the response curve see also below WaveLab 7 348 Audio Plug ins About the filter modes On the pop up menu in the lower right corner there are several different EQ modes available These modes can add color or character to the equalized output in various ways Here follow brief descriptions of the filter modes e True Response serial filters with accurate frequency response e Digi Standard resonance of last band depends on sample rate e Variable Q parallel filters where the resonance depends on the amount of gain Mu sical sounding e Constant Q u parallel filters where the resonance of the first and last bands depends on the sample rate u unsymmetrical e Constant Q s parallel filters where the resonance is raised when boosting the gain and vice versa s symmetric e Resonant serial filters whe
470. r Section How do add effects Presets WaveLab 7 12 13 Steinberg Envelope Shaper 343 12 13 Steinberg Envelope Shaper e 1 Steinberg EnvelopeShaper Ys 00 EnvelopeShaper can be used to cut or boost the gain of the Attack and Release phase of audio material You can either use the knobs or drag the breakpoints in the graphical display to change parameter values Be careful with levels when boosting the gain and if needed reduce the Output level to avoid clipping The following parameters are available e Attack 20 to 20dB Changes the gain of the Attack phase of the signal e Length 5 to 200ms Determines the length of the Attack phase e Release 20 to 20dB Changes the gain of the Release phase of the signal e Output 24 to 12dB Sets the output level Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets WaveLab 7 344 Audio Plug ins 12 14 Steinberg Expander 1 Steinberg Expander Ys 0 E Threshold Ratio 13 7 1 69 IP gt d s soft knee Attack Hold Release Analysis 500 0 220 260 1 75 A A d gt gt Ea peak ri Expander reduces the output level in relation to the input level for signals below the set threshold This is useful when you want to enhance the dynamic range or reduce the noise in quiet passages You can either use the knobs or drag the breakpoints in the graphical display to change the Threshold and the Ratio param
471. r a wider stereo effect Mix Sets the level balance between the dry signal and the effect If Chorus is used as a send effect this should be set to maximum as you can control the dry effect balance with the send Shape This switch changes the shape of the modulating waveform altering the character of the chorus sweep Sine and triangle waveforms are available Delay This parameter affects the frequency range of the modulation sweep by adjusting the initial delay time Filter Lo Hi These parameters allow you to roll off low and high frequencies of the effect signal respectively Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets WaveLab 7 12 8 Steinberg Compressor 337 12 8 Steinberg Compressor e 4 1 Steinberg Compressor s 0 G Threshold Ratio Make Up 15 2 2 00 3 0 a 4 gt 4 soli knee sauto Hold Release Analysis Compressor reduces the dynamic range of the audio making softer sounds louder or louder sounds softer or both Compressor features separate controls for threshold ratio attack hold release and make up gain parameters Compressor features a separate display that graphically illustrates the compressor curve shaped according to the Threshold and Ratio parameter settings Com pressor also features a Gain Reduction meter that shows the amount of gain reduction in dB Soft knee Hard knee compression modes and a program dependent Aut
472. r can just be used to tweak an existing loop selection so that it loops perfectly or you can also use it to create a loop from material which does not naturally repeat To use the Loop Tweaker you must first have a loop defined using a pair of loop markers b 4 The Loop Tweaker consists of the following tabs Loop points adjustment This is a visualization of the beginning and end of the waveform between the loop markers You use this dialog to manually refine a loop selection by dragging on the waveform left right or using the automatic search buttons to find the nearest good loop point The aim is to align the waveforms so they meet in the middle at a zero crossing point with the waveforms matching as closely as possible being in phase When you adjust your loop start and end points within the dialog the start and end loop markers in the main waveform window will adjust accordingly Note that this movement may or may not be visible depending on the amount you move the markers and the zoom factor you have selected It is helpful to have the transport looped during playback so you can hear the difference when you adjust the loop markers within the dialog Use the Display options to adjust how the Loop Tweaker waveform is visualized You can also use the temporary memory buttons to capture a number of different loop candidates and audition them one by one Note that if you are not using a cross fade or post cross fade you do not need to click Ap
473. r choose a marker type from the Insert menu to drop a marker at the current playhead location Create a pair of markers from a selection make a selection in the waveform and then click on a pair of marker icons at the top of the window or choose a Create region command from the Insert menu to drop a pair of markers at either side of the current selection Start playback It is possible to start playback at the selected marker position with or without pre roll by clicking on the leftmost icons Click on bbs in the audition column to play the wave from that marker position with a pre roll Click on the right hand button to play the wave exactly from the marker position Change marker types You can change a marker type by left clicking on its icon and choosing another marker type from the pop up list that appears Edit a marker s name time comments double click in a cell to edit a value to align the marker to an exact time for instance You can edit the name of the marker its time position and any comments e Lock a marker s position select the checkbox to lock the marker This prevents it from being accidentally dragged to a new position in the Waveform window For more information on using markers see Markers For details on the different marker types and their uses see Marker types Note that there are more marker features available in the Montage version compared to the Audio File version See Using markers in the Audio
474. r more information see Getting Help Related topics Control Window Specific tool windows Scripting 6 6 Audio Montage Colors You can create and assign different color schemes to different Clips and parts of a Clip to help you find your way through the Montage Default colors are provided but you can also define custom colors To define a new color scheme select the color name to be defined click once and overtype to rename select the parts to which it is applied then define the color value using the color wheel or type a set of RGB Red Green Blue values You can use the Copy color and Paste buttons to transfer colors between various parts of the montage In addition you can drag groups of color settings onto another location in the list you are asked to confirm You could for example copy Custom 1 to Custom 3 as a time saver before customizing details of Custom 3 Color settings made in this dialog apply to all montages For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio Montages 6 7 Audio Montage contextual information When working in the Audio Montage window there is a multitude of editing actions available In order to learn them all you can take advantage of the contextual information displayed in the status bar which is enabled by default This display at the bottom of the main
475. r of toggle buttons and these allow you to filter the types of messages displayed Note When using the logWindow method you need to have the U Show informal notes button selected for the messages to be visible If no log messages are displayed make sure all the toggle buttons are selected A O You can access this window via Workspace gt Shared tool windows gt Log It is available in the Control Window Audio File Workspace and Audio Montage Workspace You can also access this window in the Control Window via Utilities gt Log For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Control Window Specific tool windows Scripting WaveLab 7 136 Audio File editing 5 7 Tools In the Audio File Workspace WaveLab provides you with powerful tools for generating audio splitting files importing audio from CD and working with external applications This page contains links to these tools which can be accessed from the Tools menu Related topics Error detection and correction Auto Split Signal generator DTMF Generator 5 7 1 Error detection and correction This specific tool window allows you to search for unwanted clicks and digital artifacts in an Audio File Several detection and restoration methods are available You can detect mark and name jump to play back and remove individual audio errors
476. rack s number button to bring up the Track context menu and choosing Add track type track See Managing tracks below for more information on working with tracks Adding new Clips You then import audio to your audio tracks to begin assembling them as Clips in your mon tage You can create Clips by copying audio selections from the Audio File Workspace into the Audio Montage as well as importing external files directly Add an Audio File s to a track WaveLab 7 143 e by using drag and drop from the Audio File Workspace via a tab or the document icon e by dragging an Audio File directly from your operating system s file browser e by copying and pasting audio from an Audio File in the Audio File Workspace and pasting it into a track e by dragging from the File Browser window e by dragging a track from the Basic Audio CD window e by dragging regions from the files view Editing a Montage Editing arranging Clips Once you have imported your audio Clips you can begin laying them out and editing them ina multitude of ways Most of the functions for editing Clips are accessible via the Focused Clip window You can cut copy paste delete move repeat split pitch shift lock time stretch and change the referenced Audio File for all Clips in your montage By dragging the edges of two Clips on the same track up against other you can automatically add a cross fade The cross fade type can be adjusted and you can also add e
477. rag Command groups below an existing row to form a new row or next to an existing column to form a new column You can also reorder their position within a row or column to customize your layout If a Command bar does not have room to display all of its icons it will have a double right or down arrow gt gt Click on the double arrow to reveal any obscured Command buttons Finding out what a Command button does Hover over an individual Command button to display its tooltip If no tooltip appears make sure Show tips when mouse stays over buttons is activated in Preferences gt Global Preferences gt Display tab For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Global Preferences Customize Commands Context menus 3 4 Context menus Throughout WaveLab there are various Context menus available These menus group to gether a range of commands and or options specific to the window you are working in They appear when clicking with the right mouse button in certain places and may be useful for speeding up your workflow Some Context menus have colored title bars these were formerly known as Speed menus in WaveLab 6 and their title indicates the part of the interface they relate to Using Context Menus To bring up a context menu right click in the desired area This is normally somewhere along the ed
478. rally to detect any signal modifier stage in the audio chain between reading and playing To adjust the Bit Meter settings select Settings from the Options pop up menu or by using the 4 icon The Bit meter can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Window Related topics Metering Dithering 6 1 5 Phasescope The Phasescope indicates the phase and amplitude relationship between two stereo chan nels It is only really relevant when monitoring stereo audio material WaveLab 7 154 Audio Montages Reading the Phasescope It can be interpreted as follows e A vertical line indicates a perfect mono signal the left and right channels are the same e A horizontal line indicates that the left channel is the same as the right but with an inverse phase A random but roughly elliptical shape indicates a well balanced stereo signal If the shape leans to the left there is more energy in the left channel and vice versa the extreme case of this is if one side is muted in which case the Phasescope will show a straight line angled 45 degrees to the other side A perfect circle indicates a sine wave on one channel and the same sine wave shifted by 90 degrees on the other Generally the more you can see a thread shape the more bass there is in the signal the more spray like the display the mo
479. rates WaveLab 7 346 Audio Plug ins Center 50Hz to 20000Hz When the Side Chain button is activated this sets the center frequency of the filter Q Factor 0 01 to 10000 When the Side Chain button is activated this sets the resonance of the filter Monitor button Allows you to monitor the filtered signal Attack 0 1 to 1000ms Sets the time it takes for the gate to open after being triggered If the Live button see below is deactivated it ensures that the gate will already be open when a signal above the threshold level is played back Gate manages this by looking ahead in the audio material checking for signals loud enough to pass the gate Hold 0 to 2000ms Determines how long the gate stays open after the signal drops below the threshold level Release 10 to 1000ms or Auto mode Sets the amount of time it takes for the gate to close after the set hold time If the Auto button is activated Gate will find an optimal release setting depending on the audio material Analysis 0 to 100 Pure Peak to Pure RMS Determines whether the input signal is analyzed according to Peak or RMS values or a mixture of both A value of O is pure Peak and 100 pure RMS RMS mode operates using the average power of the audio signal as a basis whereas Peak mode operates more on peak levels As a general guideline RMS mode works better on material with few transients such as vocals and Peak mode better for percussiv
480. rb time in seconds WaveLab 7 360 Audio Plug ins Size Alters the delay times of early reflections to simulate larger or smaller spaces Diffusion Affects the character of the reverb tail Higher values lead to more diffusion and a smoother sound while lower values lead to a clearer sound Width Controls the width of the stereo image 100 gives you full stereo reverb At 0 the reverb is all in mono Variation button Pressing this button generates a new version of the same reverb program using altered reflection patterns This is helpful when certain sounds are causing odd ringing or undesirable results Creating a new variation will often solve these issues There are 1000 possible variations Hold button Pressing this button freezes the reverb buffer in an infinite loop yellow circle around button You can create some interesting pad sounds using this feature Damping Lo Freq Determines the frequency below which low frequency damping will occur High Freq Determines the frequency above which high frequency damping will occur Low Level Affects the decay time of low frequencies Normal room reverb decays quicker in the high and low frequency range than in the mid range Lowering the level percentage causes low frequencies to decay quicker Values above 100 cause low frequencies to decay more slowly than the mid range frequencies High Level Affects the decay time of high frequencies Normal room
481. re a gain increase of one band will lower the gain in adjacent bands Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets 12 17 Steinberg Limiter e 1 Steinberg Limiter Ys 00 E 0 5 A y Release 500 0 Limiter is designed to ensure that the output level never exceeds a set output level to avoid clipping in following devices Limiter can adjust and optimize the Release parameter auto matically according to the audio material or it can be set manually Limiter also features separate meters for the input output and the amount of limiting middle meters The following parameters are available WaveLab 7 12 18 Steinberg Maximizer 349 e Input 24 to 24dB Allows you to adjust the input gain e Auto 24 to 6dB Determines the maximum output level e Release 0 1 to 1000ms or Auto mode Sets the amount of time it takes for the gain to return to its original level If the Auto button is activated Limiter will automatically find an optimal release setting that varies depending on the audio material Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets 12 18 Steinberg Maximizer 1 Steinberg Maximizer Ys 00 Optimize 20 0 Maximizer is used to raise the loudness of audio material without the risk of clipping Option ally there is a soft clip function that removes short peaks in the input signal and introduces a warm tube like distorti
482. re high frequencies are in the signal Phase Correlation meter At the bottom of the display you will find a Phase Correlation meter which shows the same information but in a different way e The green line shows the current phase correlation while the two red lines show the recent peak minimum and maximum values respectively these are the default colors which you can change e With a mono signal the meter would show 1 indicating that both channels are per fectly in phase e Similarly 1 indicates that the two channels are the same but one is inverted e Generally for a good mix the meter should show a value between O and 1 Unlike the main Phasescope the Phase Correlation meter is also available in Analyze audio selection mode showing an average value for the selected range Changing settings You can define display colors peak hold time and the resolution or number of samples to display from the Functions gt Settings menu The Phasescope meter can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Mon tage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Window Related topics Metering WaveLab 7 6 1 Metering 155 6 1 6 Spectrometer The Spectrometer uses FFT Fast Fourier Transform techniques to display a continuous frequency graph providing a very precise and detailed real time frequency analysis e The current frequency spectru
483. re information see Getting Help Related topics The Spectrum display Spectrum editor 4 11 Spectrum editor This specific tool window allows you to select and perform operations on an Audio File via its audio spectrum It uses high quality linear phase filters to process a spectrum selection both in the time do main and in the frequency domain This can be useful for advanced audio restoration tasks like removing noise from a specific source in a recording for example Making and editing selections Spectrum editing can only be performed when a waveform is first displayed in Spectrum display mode and when a spectrum selection is defined To activate the Spectrum editor click on the Spectrum edit tool M in the command bar or via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Spectrum Editor This displays the Spectrogram if this is not already the case see The Spectrum display To select a region point and drag to define a rectangle The region selection defines a time and a specific frequency range This allows you to edit and process audio both in the time domain and in a specific frequency domain as opposed to standard wave editing which always operates in the full frequency domain Notes on spectrum selections e When defining a region in a stereo file a mirrored region is automatically created in the other channel To define a region in only one channel press Shift while drawing the region e Once you have a region sel
484. requency analysis e The current frequency spectrum is shown as a linear graph e Spectrum peaks are shown as a short horizontal lines indicating recent peak maxi mum values Snapshots By using the Add snapshot and Erase last snapshot buttons you can take and erase snapshots of the current spectrum These will be superimposed over the current peak spec trum graph in a color you can customize until you click the icon again to take a new snapshot One use for this is to check the effects of adding EQ for example Up to five snapshots can be superimposed on the display the sixth snapshot replaces the earliest one in the display and so on Don t confuse the order of snapshots with the numbered buttons these are Spectrometer presets see below Zooming You can adjust the frequency scale and range in the Settings dialog as described below but it s also possible to temporarily zoom in on a frequency area of interest This is done by clicking and dragging a rectangle in the Spectroscope display When you release the mouse button the display is zoomed in so that the enclosed frequency range fills the window To return to full scale display select Zoom out fully from the Functions menu or double click anywhere on the display Making settings You can adjust the behavior and display of the meters as desired and assign up to five sets of Spectrometer settings to the Preset buttons for instant access Open the Settings dialog
485. reset is easier to re member from a keyword for example norm 1 to trigger a Normalize to 1dB process if such a preset has been set WaveLab 7 3 11 Sliders 17 Adding menu items to a Command bar button Each Workspace has a number of default Command bars defined but you can add further menu items to customize Command bars Each menu command with an icon can be potentially added to a Command bar Commands are internally grouped by functionality so the button always appears in its related command bar File commands appear in the File command bar for example Add a menu command using the Customize commands dialog Each command has a check box in the Bar column Other shortcuts There are many other shortcuts in WaveLab that are accessed using the mouse These are described in Double clicking Dragging operations and Tab Groups Clicking the right button on the mouse in certain places will produce a Context menu which offers quick access to relevant commands Related topics Customize Commands Definition of shortcut s Double clicking Dragging operations Tab Groups Context menus 3 11 Sliders At various places in WaveLab slider controls are available to change parameters There are a number of ways to change a slider s value e Turn the mouse wheel over the slider no click is required Press Ctrl Command simultaneously to scroll faster This modifier also applies to the zoom wheels Left click on th
486. reset to normalize audio at 0 1 dB and you assign it a key shortcut then everytime you execute the shortcut the preset is applied to the audio selection without the need to open the dialog VST 2 Presets VST plug ins have their own preset handling When you click the preset button for this type of effect the following options are available e Load Save Bank this allows you to load and save complete sets of presets The file format is compatible with Cubase e Load Save Default Bank this loads the default bank of presets or saves the current set of presets as the default bank e Load Save Effect this loads or saves one preset at a time The file format is again compatible with Cubase e Edit name of current program allows you to define or edit the name for the currently selected preset e Preset list select a Preset from the list of those currently available VST 3 plugins have a simplified list of options WaveLab 7 4 6 Offline processing 57 About Preset files Each preset is stored as an individual file inside WaveLab s main presets folder This makes it easy to back them up or copy them to another computer You can change the location of this main Presets folder via Global Preferences gt Setting location You have the choice of the following locations e a standardized location that can be accessed by all users of the computer That is all users will share the same settings e a standardized location
487. ression is an important consideration in exporting an audio podcast file since the listener is likely to encounter bandwidth bottlenecks so the file formats mp4a mp3 and Ogg Vorbis are commonly used for podcasts The Podcast window The Podcast window is divided into two panes The upper pane shows the information for the Feed or an Episode depending on the item selected in the list below This is where you will be adding files Internet links or textual information to the Podcast feed and its episodes The lower pane shows an item list of the basic feed and all Episodes included in the Podcast Adding moving and deleting episodes There are two ways to add an episode to a Podcast e Select New from the Podcast window s Episodes menu This will add a new untitled episode without any information being present e Select an existing episode in the Podcast window s item list then select Duplicate from the Episodes menu This adds a new episode copying all information from the ex isting episode to the new one Episodes can be re ordered using the Move up down functions in the Episodes menu or by dragging them to a new location in the item list See Dragging operations for more information To delete an episode select it in the item list and use the Delete selected function in the Episodes menu Alternatively you can exclude an Episode from the Podcast by unchecking the Enabled box There must be at least one episode pres
488. results Checking the results on the Pitch and Extra tabs is simple since only one value is returned for the whole section of analyzed audio For all the other tabs the analysis methods returns a series of exact points hot points in the file or section of audio Use the relevant buttons in each tab to select the hot points you wish to look at in more detail Using the slider you can then browse or skip between these points adding markers or focusing the waveform display at that particular point in the file You can access this dialog in the Audio File Workspace via Analysis gt Global Analysis For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Error detection and correction 3D Frequency Analysis 5 2 2 Audio file comparer This analysis tool allows you to compare two Audio Files for differences between them It can create a delta file that contains these differences lt can also drop markers at positions where differences are found This can be useful for e Judging the effect of using an equalizer by comparing the file before and after The delta file will show what was added or removed e Check the noise added by a processor e Compare two digitally recorded files to check for dropouts Note Make sure that the two documents you want to compare are open You can access this dialog via Analysis gt Fil
489. right channels There are a multitude of settings to adjust the character Source tab frequency Frequency tab and amplitude Level tab of the generated signals To generate a sound follow these basic steps e choose whether the file is to be mono or stereo and define the number of samples and bit depth using the Audio properties dialog e choose how many layers of signal generators you wish to use up to 64 e for each layer use the source tab to choose the type of signal generator you wish to use switch to the frequency tab to define a frequency and its envelope and use the level tab to define a level envelope If you have chosen a stereo file you can also choose to adjust left and right channels independently e once all settings are made choose Generate and WaveLab calculates an Audio File according to your specifications The file is generated and opens up in a new window Generating signals can be useful for a variety of testing and measurement purposes For example you could use the Signal Generator to create a sine wave sweep from say 20Hz to 20 000kHz to test your monitoring environment for resonant frequencies You can access this dialog in the Audio File Workspace via Tools gt Signal Generator For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio properties dialog DTMF Generator W
490. ritten in another text editor and loaded via the File menu To run a script from within the script window choose Functions gt Execute script For a general description of scripting see Scripting For an overview of the scripting lan guage see ECMAScript Reference You can access this dialog from the Audio Montage Workspace via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Script Note To view trace or log messages when executing scripts that contain the logWin dow function ensure that the Log window is visible and that it s warning filter buttons A 9 are selected For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Scripting ECMAScript Reference Log window 11 3 20 History This specific tool window allows you to view a history of all your recent editing operations You can revert the current montage to a previous state by selecting the operation you want to return to and double clicking on it You can then use the redo command Edit gt Redo to WaveLab 7 318 Interface Elements return to any state Use the history menu options Edit gt History gt to undo all operations redo all operations or clear the history There are a couple of history options available in the Audio Montage preferences window You can choose to empty the history each time you save a montage file and also to group si
491. ro mised at high recording levels with unwanted clipping effects If the level is set too low noise levels may be high relative to the main sound being recorded Pan meters The lower part of the window shows the pan the difference in level between the left and right channel only applicable when monitoring stereo audio e The upper pan meters show the peak level difference between the channels graphically and numerically Note that the pan meters are two sided the level bars can go to the left or right indicating which channel is the loudest The two sides are shown in different colors which can be changed via the Settings dialog as explained previously e The lower pan meters show the average difference in loudness between the channels in a similar way This gives you a visual indication of whether a stereo recording is properly centered for example e If you are monitoring real time audio playback or input the maximum balance differ ence value peak and loudness for each channel is displayed numerically to the left and right of the meter bars The VU meter can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Window WaveLab 7 224 Control Window Related topics Metering 9 3 2 Spectroscope The Spectroscope shows a continuous graphical representation of the frequency spectrum analyzed into 60 sep
492. rocess gt Level Normalizer in the Audio File Workspace This function is also available as a batch processing plug in You can access it from Batch Processing Workspace gt Plug ins window gt Multipass Plug ins gt Normalizer For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio File editing Value editing 5 1 4 Silence Generator This dialog allows you to generate silence either by replacing an audio selection or by specifying a duration You can also specify a cross fade at each end of the silent region for a smoother transition Radio buttons determine where the silent period is placed in the audio In WaveLab you can also specify a file to be inserted instead of true silence This can be useful for example if you wish to keep the ambience or background noise of a particular environment in a recording You can access this dialog in the Audio File Workspace via Edit gt Silence advanced For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Silence 5 1 5 Loop Tone Uniformizer This dialog allows you to create sounds that will loop from audio that is seemingly un loopable These are normally sounds that constantly decay in level or continuously change in timbre The Loop T
493. rocess the Audio File or selection you are working on applying any effects you have active It applies all active plug ins to the selected audio region or the whole file and you can op tionally change the format of the rendered file This process is sometimes also referred to as mixing or bouncing down You can select options for which regions of the session are rendered whether to create a new file or process in place and whether to mute the effects chain when finished You can also choose to copy marker locations to the new file You can access this dialog in the Audio File Workspace via the Render button from the Master Section window For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Rendering Audio Plug ins Audio File Format Dialog Master Section WaveLab 7 274 Interface Elements 11 1 72 Loudness envelope options This dialog allows you to adjust how the Loudness envelope waveform is displayed You can adjust the granularity of the analysis or if the loudness analysis is based on small or longer segment You can also see the loudness of specified frequency regions by using the low band high pass filters to define which frequencies are displayed This can be useful for isolating a particular problem range of frequencies which you want to focus on for example This analysis is computatio
494. rocessed 24 bit PCM files When to use the Bit Meter e To check whether dithering is necessary or not As a rule if you re playing back or mixing down to 16 bits and the Bit Meter shows that more than 16 bits are used you should apply dithering e To see the actual resolution of an Audio File For example even though a file is in 24 bit format only 16 bits may be used Or a 32 bit file may only use 24 bits in this case the below segment would not be lit For this purpose the Bit Meter is best used in Analyze selection mode e To see whether a zeroed plug in still affects your signal or whether a plug in uses 16 bit internal processing or more generally to detect any signal modifier stage in the audio chain between reading and playing To adjust the Bit Meter settings select Settings from the Options pop up menu or by using the 4 icon The Bit meter can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Window Related topics Metering Dithering 9 2 5 Spectroscope The Spectroscope shows a continuous graphical representation of the frequency spectrum analyzed into 60 separate frequency bands represented as vertical bars Peak levels are shown as a short horizontal lines above the corresponding band indicating recent peak maximum values The Spectroscope offers a quick spectrum overview For a
495. rocessor just as if it was a software plug in effect If you render a file using the External Gear plug in playback is not available during the rendering Related topics Master Section Audio Streaming Settings How do add effects Presets WaveLab 7 326 Audio Plug ins 12 3 Sonnox DeClicker e L Sonnox Ltd Sonnox DeClicker Sonnox DeClicker is one of three plug ins that form the Sonnox Restoration Toolkit The tools are not just for restoring old material but also for removing the clicks pops buzzes and background noise that can sometimes accidentally occur in new recordings A note on Touch Pad controls Several controls in these plug ins are Touch Pads These controls give a clear display of the numeric value of a control and respond to the following actions e Left Click and drag up down Increase decrease the value e Right Click and drag up down Fine adjustment of value e Double Click Directly edit value e Shift Left Click and drag up down Fine adjustment of value e Control Left Click Windows Cmd Click Mac Set to default Additionally for all controls including faders and knobs not just Touch Pads e Control Left Click Windows Cmd Click Mac Set to default DeClicker screen controls e Sonnox Menu Options Button Clicking this button brings down a menu of options and preferences It allows choice of the input output meter clip light hold duration permanent 2s 5s
496. roll wheel which allow you to zoom in and out in the track window Clicking each icon will display more or less tracks The active track is zoomed in while the remaining tracks shrink down to allow you to concentrate on one track See Zooming and scrolling for more information There is also the handy Navigator for quickly moving around the visible Workspace in the montage main window To make it easy to quickly move between different views and zoom levels WaveLab 7 144 Audio Montages you can also capture view settings as snapshots and apply these at any time using the Snapshots window The info line The info line is the grey area below the main montage track view It indicates what will happen when you click the mouse buttons with or without modifier keys depending on the location of your mouse much like tool tips for buttons This is useful since editing in the audio montage is based on mouse zones you click in different areas of the Clips to perform different actions The info line will also display positions and lengths when you are moving copying or resizing Clips For more information see Audio Montage contextual information Working with Clips When you add a single Clip to the montage by pasting importing from disk or using drag and drop the Paste context menu appears By selecting one of the menu items you can specify how the Clip is inserted and whether existing Clips should be affected or not etc You can
497. rom the Audio File Workspace via Process gt Pitch quantiz ing For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Adjusting Envelopes Formant 5 1 15 Presets WaveLab s powerful preset system allows you to create your own presets to store commonly used settings They are available every time you open WaveLab Presets can be saved for many parameters such as plug in settings Audio File Formats or File Attributes for example You can access the Presets pop up menu wherever you see one of these icons B or E Presets are saved as local files on your hard drive allowing you to conveniently back up or copy them for use on another computer They are also useful when used in conjunction with batch conversions and Scripting Working with Presets When working with Presets you save edit and load them from their own pop up menu De pending on the context the available functions sometimes vary but generally you can e Save Save As creates a new Preset file by saving the currently selected settings to your hard disk e Explore presets opens the folder where any existing Presets are stored This allows you to delete duplicate and organize your settings into sub folders using the flexibility of the operating system s file browser e Restore factory settings restores the current settings to the factory default e
498. round task monitor a aa AA AR aa 195 hae Log WINGO ca es Se he aea tc a ee a 195 7 3 Batch Processing PMG INS y sack ek RA p ee a 196 7 0 0 1 Audio Injector o oaa aeu ee ee a 197 Poa TAME coe God ba bee ae ee ee aoe OS 198 P08 Resizer ocioso be ee ee eee A a a 198 7 3 0 4 Fade InfOut 2 ee ense 198 TADO INSI a ee A a e ee o aiis 199 TADO Time Stretch an no orada a A as 199 73 0 7 Piten Corecom o o oe tae eed Bede ea aa 200 7 3 0 8 Normalize Level nananana a 200 WaveLab 7 CONTENTS v 7 3 0 9 Stereo MONOS co e ha A oe EE aS 200 7 3 0 10 Pan Normalizet i cac eac ee ea ee ee 201 7 3 0 11 Loudness normalizer 0 0 00 ee 201 7 3 0 12 DC Remover 0 a eb bb naana Baca he s Skt 202 7 3 0 13 Loudness Restorer 2 0 00 eee es 202 7 3 0 14 Meta Normalizer 2 20 000 0c ee 203 7 3 0 15 Meta Leveler 1 0 es 203 8 Podcasts 205 8 1 PUP Se o cis ee ok Abed bebe a a eS ed A ee a ee BE a 207 8 2 ESAS suk coe aa eee Aw el eh re eres os 207 8 3 Publish Menu nr ORE ee ee ae Re a a 207 8 4 Specific tool WANS sa Gk oR ANA Shs 208 8 4 1 File Browser s o ior sci ee ee ee 209 9 Control Window 211 9 1 Specific tool windows aS HE oe ea A he a OR ES 212 9 2 Shared tool windows a a ata eR Re A ww Oe Bard 213 9 2 1 PhASESCOPE e e doki ane oe e dee Ghee a Be 213 9 2 2 VU Meter i ns te ae ae sk aa a AE Sle al st A ee Pe 215 9 2 3 SINN bc ee O Ee a E aea a 216 9 2 4 BU ONION Sie a tare Whee A Ge eran Beale we ad
499. rray item last array item Print them out in the Log window logWindow printInfo a toString Call the Array s reverse function a reverse View the results in the Log window logWindow printInfo a toString String Objects Functions e toString e valueOf e charAt pos e charCodeAt pos e concat string1 string2 e indexOf searchString position e lastindexOf searchString position e localeCompare that e match regexp e replace searchValue replaceValue e search regexp e slice start end e split separator limit e substring start end e toLowerCase e toLocaleLowerCase e toUpperCase e toLocaleUpperCase Example Create a string variable var str new String WaveLab is a powerful editing tool Make it all upper case var capsStr str toUpperCase View the results in the Log window logWindow printInfo capsStr WaveLab 7 4 9 Scripting 75 Boolean objects Functions e toString e valueOf Example Test if an equation is true or false var isTrue 1 1 3 Convert the Boolean to a String and trace in the Log window logWindow printInfo isTrue toString Number Objects Functions e toString radix e toLocaleString O e toFixed fractionDigits e toExponential fractionDigits e toPrecision precision Example Convert a number into exponential notation var num new Number 13 3714 Show the result i
500. rred to Musicam files Typical filename extensions are mp2 mpa mpg mus m32 m44 and m48 MP3 files MP2 encoding Glossary contents 15 47 MP3 files MP3 MPEG 1 audio layer 3 is a patented digital audio encoding format using lossy audio compression designed by the Moving Picture Experts Group as part of its MPEG 1 standard and derived from MP2 MP3 is popular for PC and internet applications data compression ratios of 10 1 are typical Note that when you open an MPEG compressed file in WaveLab the file is converted to a temporary wave file that is much larger than the original compressed file so make sure that you have enough free space on your hard disk when opening MPEG compressed files On saving the temporary wave file is converted back to MP3 so from a user perspective the file handling is transparent apart from the size difference mentioned above The filename extension is mp3 MP2 files Audio File Format Dialog Glossary contents 15 48 Non destructive editing Non destructive editing When you delete or change a part of an Audio File in a non destructive system the audio is not deleted or permanently changed instead a set of point ers keeps track of all the edits so these can be readily reversed WaveLab provides com prehensive facilities for Non destructive editing Glossary contents 15 49 Normalize To Normalize is to raise the volume so that the sample with the highest level is set to the maxi
501. s The Track list Once you have created one or more tracks the CD window displays a list of all tracks in the currently active montage along with their corresponding properties From this list of CD tracks you can use the fields controls and menus to e Audition playback It is possible to audition playback at the selected track s start time with or without pre roll by clicking on the leftmost icons Click on the left hand button 1 in the audition column to play the track from its start time with a pre roll Click on the right hand button to play the track exactly from its start time Edit a tracks s name You can add edit a name for each track Double click in a cell to edit Note that to change the track name is to indirectly edit the marker name Edit a track s start end time You can edit the start and end time for each track This is the same as moving the track markers physically but can be done with more precision Double click in a cell to edit Pre gap time This displays the gap between the CD track start marker and where the first track s audio actually begins It can only be edited by physically moving the CD track start marker Post gap time This displays the gap between the end of the audio of the CD s last track and the CD track end marker It can only be edited by physically moving the CD track end marker Copy protection Select the checkbox to include a copy protection flag with the track This may prev
502. s You can adjust the behavior and display of the meters as desired and assign up to five sets of Spectrometer settings to the Preset buttons for instant access Open the Settings dialog by selecting Settings from the Functions menu or clicking the tool icon Note that you can apply your settings without closing the dialog by clicking the Apply button If you want to store your settings for later use or assign them to a Preset button select Save as from the pop up menu in the lower part of the dialog and specify a name for the preset in the file dialog that appears Now you can choose to make the settings instantly available for selection in the FFT Meter window by using the Assign to preset button submenu on the pop up menu e When you are finished click OK to close the dialog Selecting Spectrometer presets If you have assigned your settings to the Preset buttons in the Settings dialog you can quickly switch between different level scales and display modes by clicking one of the Preset icons 1 5 or selecting the desired preset from the Options pop up menu Exporting FFT data as ASCII text When using the Spectrometer in off line mode Monitor Edit cursor Position or Analyze audio election mode you can export the displayed FFT data as a text file by selecting WaveLab 7 296 Interface Elements Export FFT data as ASCII from the Options pop up menu The resulting text file can then be imported in
503. s gt Meta Data For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Specific tool windows WaveLab 7 5 5 Specific tool windows 123 5 5 6 Sample attributes This dialog allows you to define settings for an audio sample before loading it into a hardware or software sampler The settings do not process the sample in any way they just give the file properties that the receiving sampler can use This includes information about the pitch of the sample which can be detected automatically by WaveLab the key range that the sample should span and the velocity range to occupy For WAV and AIFF files this information is stored in the file s header By default there are no sample attributes in an Audio File Therefore you must explicitly create this information by clicking on the Create button first This dialog is useful if your sampler can take advantage of these additional tags If supported by your sampler it can save you time by allowing you to both edit and define a samples properties from within WaveLab You can access this dialog via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Sample At tributes For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics 5 5 7 Scripting window Audio File Workspace
504. s such as synthesizers and computers to communicate with each other through a system of channels and triggers Glossary contents 15 43 MIDI Channels MIDI provides 16 channels for sending data When processing MIDI triggers WaveLab needs to know which MIDI channel to monitor to receive a trigger Glossary contents 15 44 Mixing Mixing is the process of blending multiple sound files into a single file with control over the relative levels of each incoming file Glossary contents 15 45 Mobile phone Audio Files 3GP and 3G2 file formats are multimedia container formats designed to minimize storage and bandwidth requirements for use with mobile phones e 3GP 8GPP file format is defined by the Third Generation Partnership Project 3GPP for GSM based UMTS mobile phones e 3G2 3GPP2 file format is a multimedia container format defined by the 3GPP2 for CDMA2000 based mobile phones Tyoical file extensions are 3gp 3g2 Glossary contents WaveLab 7 15 46 MP2 files 405 15 46 MP2 files MP2 MPEG 1 audio layer 2 is an audio encoding format defined by ISO IEC 11172 3 alongside MPEG 1 and MPEG 3 using lossy audio compression The three audio layers MP1 MP2 and MP3 are different perceptual encoding techniques MP2 remains an important format for broadcast audio and is part of DAB digital radio and DVB digital television standards It is also the audio format used in HDV camcorders MP2 files are sometimes refe
505. s using the same controls If the markers are not visible click on the track expand arrow to reveal the track s markers Edit a track s start pause time for all tracks except the first one you can adjust the pause duration before the track begins playing If the pause checkbox is not visible click on the track expand arrow to reveal the track s markers and pause time setting Double click in the cell to edit the value Add ISRC code add an ISRC code for a track by Select clicking on the field under the ISRC column Edit a track name by Select clicking on the name in the list This also renames the track s start marker labels Add a comment add a comment to each track by Select clicking to edit its value Editing track times you cannot edit track start and end times directly in the track listing Instead open the tracks accompanying Audio File via Edit gt Edit Audio and adjust the track start and track end marker locations in the main waveform display The start and end times will update accordingly Completing your Audio CD In addition to editing via the track window you can also set overall CD settings via the Basic Audio CD Settings dialog You can use this dialog to add UPC EAN codes and adjust WaveLab 7 5 5 Specific tool windows 119 pauses and silences in your CD The Master Section is never used to process the signal to burn unlike in the montage This is why playback through the Master Section is an option t
506. s at any time using the lll Freeze meters command WaveLab 7 150 Audio Montages Using meter windows There can only be one instance of each Audio Meter For example if you dock one meter ina Workspace it will be automatically removed from the place where it was previously located Audio Meters can appear in the Audio File Audio Montage Workspaces as well as the Con trol Window They can be used e as a docked window in a Workspace e as a tabbed window in the control window e as an independent floating window In this mode it can be useful to make the window frameless from Window gt Hide frame to save screen space In this case the whole menu is accessed by right clicking The axis of most Audio Meters may be rotated to view the graphics horizontally or vertically Some meters can also have their visual style and display parameters customized via their corresponding settings dialog This can be accessed through the Functions gt Settings menu in each meter window or by using the 4 icon Related topics VU Meter Spectroscope Oscilloscope Bit Meter Phasescope Spectrometer Wavescope 6 1 1 VU Meter The vu meter is used to display the peak and average loudness decibel level of your Audio File It also displays the pan or the balance between the left and right channels in a stereo file The upper part of the level pan meter window shows the peak level and average loudness in the following way e Th
507. s name e Scroll the Montage drag the cursor to the left and right sides of the Montage to display what comes before or after e Paste a Clip drag a document s title bar tab or document button onto the Montage area to copy and paste its audio content You can also drag a compatible file directly from the File Browser the operating system s file browser or from another application Within the Podcast Workspace You can drag episodes in the Episodes list to reorder them Within the Master Section You can drag effects between different Effects slots to change the order of processing which takes place from top to bottom Within the Batch Processor Workspace e Change the order of effects you can change the order in which plug ins are pro cessed by dragging plug ins within the Audio plug in chain window e Add to batch process you can drag a file via its tab to the batch conversion tool or batch processor for instant processing Related topics Docking windows Switcher window 3 8 Playback shortcuts Playing back audio is a common repetitive task in WaveLab In addition to the playback command buttons in the Transport controls there are a few extra commands that can only be accessed via special keyboard shortcuts These shortcuts can be used even when the audio window is not the active window These special keyboard shortcuts cannot be customized They are e Space bar Start Stop WaveLab 7 3 9 Selec
508. s on a track is sometimes indicated by a tick in the column on the Import Audio CD dialog Import Audio CD Glossary contents 15 16 CD Text CD Text is an extension of the Red Book Compact Disc specifications standard for audio CDs The standard allows disc and track information album name song name and artist for example to be embedded on a standards compliant audio CD CD Text information is usually stored in the lead in area of the CD where there is roughly 5KB of space available Support for CD Text is common but not all CD players can display it Red Book CD DA Glossary contents WaveLab 7 398 Glossary 15 17 Chorus Chorus is an time based effect produced by combining the original signal with a number of moving delays and pitch shifted copies often panned across a stereo field Steinberg Chorus Glossary contents 15 18 Clip Clip A Clip contains a reference to a source Audio File on your hard disk as well as start and end positions in the file allowing Clips to play back smaller sections of their source Audio Files Any number of Clips can reference the same source file Note that a Clip is a reference to the original source file and does not contain audio data Focused Clip versus Select Clips It is important to note that there is a difference between a focused Clip and a selected Clip Some editing functions can only be executed on an individual Clip or Focused Clip while others can be exe
509. seconds and round to a whole number var lengthSecs activeWave size activeWave sampleRate logWindow printInfo This wave file is lengthSecs seconds long Select the first 10 seconds of the file activelWave select 0 10 activeWave sampleRate Trim the file to 10 seconds activeWave trim select the first two seconds of the file and fade it in activeWave select 2 activeWave sampleRate sample rate multiplied by tw o 2 seconds activeWave fadeIn linear select the last two seconds of the file and fade it out activeWave select activeWave size 2 activeWave sampleRate activeWave s ize activeWave fadeOut linear loop through 10 times and add a marker each second for i 1 i lt 10 i work out next cursor time var nextCursorPosition i activeWave sampleRate set cursor position forwards by a second activeWave setCursorPosition nextCursorPosition add a generic marker at the next cursor position and give it a name and comme nt WaveLab 7 4 9 Scripting 65 activeWave addMarker generic Marker i A comment for marker i write some information about the new marker var cursorTimeSecs nextCursorPosition activeWave sampleRate logWindow printInfo created a new marker at cursorTimeSecs seconds Related topics WaveLab Scripting Language ECMAScript Reference Scripting window Audio File Workspace Scripting window
510. seful tool to use when constructing and editing your montage You can access this dialog in the Audio Montage Workspace by choosing Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Files For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Specific tool windows Insert Audio Files 6 4 2 CD This specific tool window brings together all the functions for creating an audio CD or DVD A within WaveLab It displays a list of CD tracks along with information about each track You can edit each track and the CD s playback properties as well as access functions to check its conformity to Red Book standards add and edit CD text add UPC EAN codes generate a CD report and burn the CD There are also controls to preview skipping between each track and a number of other options including the ability to choose the Audio in Pause mode to determine whether gaps between track markers are replaced with silence the normal default or if they contain sound Adding tracks To create an audio CD in WaveLab you must at least have a CD start and end marker pair You can generate these automatically from audio Clips in the montage using the CD Wizard or by adding track markers manually For more information on creating a CD or DVD A see Authoring CDs and DVDs The Track list Once you have created one or more tracks the CD window displays a list
511. selection is defined To activate the Spectrum editor click on the Spectrum edit tool M in the command bar or via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Spectrum Editor This displays the Spectrogram if this is not already the case see The Spectrum display To select a region point and drag to define a rectangle The region selection defines a time and a specific frequency range This allows you to edit and process audio both in the time WaveLab 7 11 3 Specific tool windows 301 domain and in a specific frequency domain as opposed to standard wave editing which always operates in the full frequency domain Notes on spectrum selections When defining a region in a stereo file a mirrored region is automatically created in the other channel To define a region in only one channel press Shift while drawing the region Once you have a region selected if you place your mouse cursor inside the region a pop up appears showing the currently set frequency range Hz and the time range seconds milliseconds for the selection A selected region can be moved in any direction by clicking and dragging the region with the cursor If you press Shift whilst dragging a region it only moves horizontally thus retaining your selected frequency range If you press Ctrl Command Shift the region only moves vertically thus retaining the selected time range You can resize a region by placing the mouse cursor at the edges of t
512. settings for the display via the Wavescope Settings dialog This can be accessed via Functions gt Settings menu or by using the 4 icon Here you can set various color options for the background grid and waveform display as well as setting the waveform rendering speed and vertical zoom If Clear waveform when reaching right of pane is checked the waveform display is cleared each time the cursor reaches the right end of the display If unchecked the previous waveform is overwritten Tip Wavescope is a useful meter for visualizing audio during recording The Wavescope meter can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Win dow Related topics Metering WaveLab 7 46 WaveLab Concepts 4 6 Offline processing Offline processes are used for a variety of editing purposes and creative effects Offline processing refers to functions that are only performed when saving the file Offline means the process can t be monitored during playback either because they require too much processing power or because they require an analysis pass prior to processing Note that WaveLab only writes temporary files when applying an effect so the original Audio File is safe Only when saving the original is the original audio possibly modified These offline processes differ to realtime processes such as listening to effects v
513. sh to write CD Text data For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics CD Authoring CDs and DVDs Write Audio CD 11 1 17 CD Text Browser This dialog allows you to view CD text information about the selected disk when importing an audio CD using the Import Audio CD dialog You can access this dialog from the Import Audio CD dialog via Functions gt Examine CD Text You can also access it via its icon in the Import Audio CD window For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Import Audio CD 11 1 18 CD Wizard This dialog allows you to quickly create an audio CD track listing from the active montage The Clips in the montage are used to automatically generate CD track and splice markers from the Clip regions and cross fade points You can adjust any pause time before tracks adjust the gaps between track start markers and the track audio playing as well as generating any ISRC and UPC EAN codes Once you have chosen the options you require click Apply to generate the CD track listing in the CD window You can further edit the track listing that is created and then burn your audio CD using the Write Audio CD dialog For more information on creating Audio CDs see Authoring CDs and DVDs You
514. sition the cursor Audio selection indicator displays the length of the current selection or the total length of the Audio File if there is no selection Right click on this to display the entire audio range In WaveLab Left click also opens the Audio Range dialog so you can define or refine a selection e Zoom indicator displays the current zoom factor Click this to edit the zoom factor right click to display a pop up menu equivalent to selecting View gt Zoom File format details displays the number of audio channels bit resolution and sample rate Click to display Audio properties dialog Document button allows you to click and drag the current Audio File into an other document for example in the Audio Montage Workspace This is equivalent to dragging the file Tab Sample Key indicator indicates the key of the current Audio File if defined and opens the Sample Attributes window The status bar also indicates the progress of some background operations such as rendering an effect The operation can be paused or canceled using the buttons provided The Play through Master Section buttons Y and allow you to completely bypass the Master Section for playback or not with a setting for each file Audio File and Montage There are also the Save Restore Master Section presets buttons which allow you to store re store these settings for each file See Save Master Section Preset For an explanation of each param
515. size regions of audio you wish to edit Click and drag in the main waveform window to make a selection You can modify the selected region by click dragging on the edges of the selection You can also modify a selected audio region by holding down Shift and clicking on the waveform The selection extends shrinks to the clicked point If you hold the cursor over one channel of a stereo file you can make selections in that individual channel You can double click inside a region to select it then drag the mouse to select the next or previous regions that is you snap to markers while dragging Spectrum Selection cursor this cursor allows you to select and define regions when in the Spectrum view See Spectrum editor for more information on making selections and using the Spectrum view for advanced editing purposes 4 Pen tool this tool allows you to redraw the waveform directly in the wave window It can be used to quickly repair waveform errors by hand The Pen tool can only be used if the Zoom resolution is set to at least 1 8 one pixel on the screen equals 8 samples or higher If you wish to redraw the waveform of both channels in a stereo file at once press Shift while drawing Once you have defined an audio selection there are many editing tools available in the Edit menu of the Audio File Workspace for you to explore These range from basic editing com mands such as Copy and Paste to special functions which can perform tasks such as trim
516. sor Workspace Normalize Level Stereo to Mono Pan Normalizer Loudness normalizer Fade out DC Remover Loudness Restorer WaveLab 7 188 Batch Processing Metapass Plug ins Metapass plug ins are unique to the Batch Processor and require several passes before processing the audio After analyzing the audio a metapass plug in takes into account all other plug ins in the effects chain before processing the audio The following Metapass plug ins are available in the Batch Processor Workspace Meta Normalizer Meta Leveler Related topics Audio Plug ins Offline processing 7 1 2 1 Audio Injector This dialog is exclusive to the Batch Processor Workspace and allows you to insert an Audio File at the beginning and or end of the Audio File being processed The inserted file can also be cross faded with the original Audio File if required You can access this dialog from from the Batch Processor Workspace via Plug ins window gt Monopass Plug ins gt Audiolnjector For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Batch Processing Plug ins 7 1 2 2 Trimmer This dialog is exclusive to the Batch Processor Workspace and allows you to remove a spec ified duration from Oms to 60s of audio from the head and or tail of an Audio File You can access this dialog from the Batch Processor Workspace via Plu
517. sponse will be compro mised at high recording levels with unwanted clipping effects If the level is set too low noise levels may be high relative to the main sound being recorded Pan meters The lower part of the window shows the pan the difference in level between the left and right channel only applicable when monitoring stereo audio e The upper pan meters show the peak level difference between the channels graphically and numerically Note that the pan meters are two sided the level bars can go to the left or right indicating which channel is the loudest The two sides are shown in different colors which can be changed via the Settings dialog as explained previously e The lower pan meters show the average difference in loudness between the channels in a similar way This gives you a visual indication of whether a stereo recording is properly centered for example e If you are monitoring real time audio playback or input the maximum balance differ ence value peak and loudness for each channel is displayed numerically to the left and right of the meter bars The VU meter can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Window WaveLab 7 216 Control Window Related topics Metering 9 2 3 Oscilloscope The Oscilloscope offers a highly magnified view of the waveform around the playback cursor
518. ss this dialog from the Basic Audio CD window in the Audio File Workspace by choosing the Options gt Options or by clicking on the spanner icon For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Authoring CDs and DVDs Basic Audio CD WaveLab 7 11 1 Dialogs 245 11 1 15 Batch Renaming This dialog appears in various locations in WaveLab and allows you to rename a batch of files Clips or markers The Batch Renaming dialog offers a powerful set of facilities to convert remove format replace and insert text into existing names You can use simple options to match text or you can build your own regular expressions as required Batch renaming can be useful with large projects for example so you can apply easily iden tifiable names to all referenced files markers and Clips belonging to the project Batch renaming can be used for the following operations e to rename files e to rename Clips in Audio Montages e to rename markers in Audio Files and Audio Montages These functions share most of the same features with some minor differences The Batch Renaming dialog has three pages The first page defines which files clips markers should be renamed the second dialog page defines how the renaming should be executed The third page shows you a preview of the names that will be produced before you commit to
519. ssary or not As a rule if you re playing back or mixing down to 16 bits and the Bit Meter shows that more than 16 bits are used you should apply dithering e To see the actual resolution of an Audio File For example even though a file is in 24 bit format only 16 bits may be used Or a 32 bit file may only use 24 bits in this case the below segment would not be lit For this purpose the Bit Meter is best used in Analyze selection mode e To see whether a zeroed plug in still affects your signal or whether a plug in uses 16 bit internal processing or more generally to detect any signal modifier stage in the audio chain between reading and playing To adjust the Bit Meter settings select Settings from the Options pop up menu or by using the icon The Bit meter can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Window WaveLab 7 132 Audio File editing Related topics Metering Dithering 5 6 5 Spectroscope The Spectroscope shows a continuous graphical representation of the frequency spectrum analyzed into 60 separate frequency bands represented as vertical bars Peak levels are shown as a short horizontal lines above the corresponding band indicating recent peak maximum values The Spectroscope offers a quick spectrum overview For a more detailed analysis of the audio spectrum use
520. ssive clips OdB signal peaks Recording levels should be set so that they only rarely clip If the master level is set too high the sound quality and frequency response will be compro mised at high recording levels with unwanted clipping effects If the level is set too low noise levels may be high relative to the main sound being recorded Pan meters The lower part of the window shows the pan the difference in level between the left and right channel only applicable when monitoring stereo audio e The upper pan meters show the peak level difference between the channels graphically and numerically Note that the pan meters are two sided the level bars can go to the left or right indicating which channel is the loudest The two sides are shown in different colors which can be changed via the Settings dialog as explained previously e The lower pan meters show the average difference in loudness between the channels in a similar way This gives you a visual indication of whether a stereo recording is properly centered for example e If you are monitoring real time audio playback or input the maximum balance differ ence value peak and loudness for each channel is displayed numerically to the left and right of the meter bars The VU meter can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Window Related topics
521. standard ECMAScript Reference Glossary contents 15 29 Ensoniq Paris files Ensoniq Paris is an Audio File format used by the old Ensoniq Paris system It has 16 bit and 24 bit resolution The file extension is paf Glossary contents 15 30 Equalization Equalization EQ is a process by which certain frequency bands in an Audio File are increased or lowered in level to compensate for recording or playback inadequacies Steinberg GEQ 10 GEQ 30 Glossary contents 15 31 FFT FFT Fast Fourier Transform analysis is a mathematical method to convert a waveform from the Time Domain to the Frequency Domain FFT uses various mathematical shortcuts to carry out a spectral analysis trading compu tational speed for limitations in the number of samples and frequency bands used in the analysis Glossary contents 15 32 Focused Clip There can be no more than one Focused Clip See Clip WaveLab 7 402 Glossary Glossary contents 15 33 Formant Formants are the distinguishing frequency components of a sound Glossary contents 15 34 FTP Site File Transfer Protocol FTP is a network protocol used to copy a file from one host to another over a TCP IP based network such as the Internet An FTP site may require user based password authentication or it may allow anonymous user access Podcasts are published to FTP sites Publish menu FTP site Glossary contents 15 35 Headroom Headroom is the amount by w
522. t clicking 15 e 0 or F7 Stop When pressed while already stopped the cursor jumps to the previous playback start position A further O returns the cursor to the start of the file e Enter Numeric Pad or F8 Start e Ctrl Command F6 Plays from the beginning to the end of the selection if any Where there are markers it plays between them If there are no markers it plays from the beginning to the end of the Audio File e Win Ctrl F6 As above but playback starts with a preroll before the region and stops at its end e Shift F6 As above but playback ends with a postroll after the region e Win Ctrl Shift F6 As above but playback starts with a preroll before the region and ends with a postroll after the region Related topics Transport controls 3 9 Select clicking Select clicking is the act of selecting an object with the mouse and while it is selected clicking again This is a common interface interaction when renaming a file or folder in your computer s native file browser Throughout WaveLab there are places where you need to select click fields to edit values In some lists such as the Basic Audio CD window you need to select click cells to edit a track name or ISRC code Generally if a value can be edited a double click selects all characters in that cell and allows you to begin editing if not then try select clicking the cell instead Related topics Tab Groups Double click
523. t compro mising audio quality The filename extension is osq Glossary contents 15 53 PAL SECAM PAL is short for Phase Alternate Line SECAM is short for S quentiel couleur m moire Sequential Color with Memory They are related analog television encoding systems used WaveLab 7 15 54 Pan 407 in broadcast television systems in large parts of the world NTSC is a another analog system used in North America and parts of South America In digital applications PAL video mode is usually referred to as 576i i e a vertical resolution of 576 scan lines interlaced in analogue contexts it is often quoted as 625 lines SECAM Digital video uses its own colour space so in the digital domain the minor colour space differences that used to exist between PAL and SECAM are no longer present In digital video applications such as DVDs and digital broadcasting PAL SECAM video is based on 576 frame lines with two interlaced video fields per frame i e 50 fields per second yielding 25 frames per second Audio is pulse code modulated NTSC Glossary contents 15 54 Pan Pan is short for panoramic Pan is perceptually placing a mono or stereo sound source between two or more speakers We sense stereo position from a difference in loudness when the sound strikes each ear taking into account the time delay spectrum reverberation and other cues Steinberg Autopan Pan Normalizer Glossary contents 15 55 Peak
524. t ebb SOS SESH SES OOD Dare Ga o Whe dnd 314 Dae AA E E ohn St edie Daca ee att 315 TL3A7 TEU ols tg be SS As a ak a Wie GAS ndo 315 11818 OPA ons Gk oe ee ek ee Oe ek citas Ee a 316 11 3 19 Scripting window Audio Montage Workspace 317 11820 UO a ss rai oe sa A EII 317 E ke a ae te a She ee A Od ea 318 Dee NS ee hea kok woe ee hE ww Sal OR Rk Bee aR a Red 318 12 Audio Plug ins 321 TAT AUICIODGE s osei he a aS PY tac Gone E 323 122 Using Extemal eects sia ee eed aS eee ew a 324 123 Sonnox DeGlieker sa bee eee ee 326 12 4 Sonnox DeWeese caved Pewee nae ewe a ew ees 328 125 Sonnox DeBuzz6f ld oa ack o Ai A E re SS Oe 331 12 6 Steinberg AUtopan oea ea ARA CS EEE EEK a 335 12 7 Stenberg Chorus os i Sian ea A eee ee bnew ee a a 335 12 8 Steinberg Compressor asasan aaa 337 129 Steinberg DREGE cig eG A A RIA DA 338 12 10 Steinberg Mono Delay aaau aaa sar rr 340 12 11 Steinberg Distortion a ea A A it 341 12412 Stenberg Dual Fiter s socrate saae A e AD ad 342 12 13 Steinberg Envelope Shaper oo oo eee es 343 12 14 Steinberg Expander gt eo ee eA eS Se Oe Se eae wes 344 12 15 Steinberg Gate en oe ee a OS Bo a oo a 345 12 16 Stenberg GEQ 10 GEQ 30 i abe A A eee A es 347 12 17 Stenberg Limiter oe eraa a ke a dca AA oe a e a 348 1218 Steinberg MANNIE oe oe bo Oo eee oe ba eS aE Ges 349 12 19 Steinberg Mix Gto 2 os i i o aca KR SRE Re RE ee E 350 1220 Steinberg MIX SII rra A ad 351 12 21 Stein
525. t name of current program allows you to define or edit the name for the currently selected preset Preset list select a Preset from the list of those currently available VST 3 plugins have a simplified list of options About Preset files Each preset is stored as an individual file inside WaveLab s main presets folder This makes it easy to back them up or copy them to another computer You can change the location of this main Presets folder via Global Preferences gt Setting location You have the choice of the following locations a standardized location that can be accessed by all users of the computer That is all users will share the same settings a standardized location accessed by the current user the default That is each user has his her own private settings any specific location of your choice This allows you to customize it for your own re quirements a location relative to the application This allows you to use the application from an USB dongle Default locations By default the main Presets folder is found at WaveLab 7 5 1 Offline processing 103 e Windows 7 C Users User Name AppData Roaming Steinberg WaveLab 7 Presets e Windows XP C Documents and Settings User Name Application Data Steinberg WaveLab 7 Presets e Mac OS X root User Name Library Prefences WaveLab 7 Presets You can also find this folder by using the Open active settings folder link in the preferences pane
526. t rate is 1411 2kbits s Other considerations are that the maximum number of tracks is 99 the minimum duration of a track is 4 seconds including a 2 second pause the maximum playing time is 79 8 minutes and the ISRC should be included WaveLab provides Red Book compliant CD mastering CD Frame ISRC Glossary contents 15 63 Regular Expressions A Regular Expression regex for short is a formula composed of characters that have a special meaning called operators A simple example is in using x doc to search for all text documents in a file manager In this case the asterisk star character is an operator that matches any string before the doc in a filename In addition to WaveLab many software applications text editors like EditPad Pro and programming languages support regular ex pressions The characters are operators in WaveLab s regular expression engine You can submit regular expressions in a WaveLab text box wherever you see the Vicon Clicking on the light bulb icon gives a fly out menu listing special characters and short cuts to help you build a precise and well formed expression There are many helpful web based tutorials that explore the topic of regex WaveLab 7 410 Glossary About Regular Expressions Glossary contents 15 64 RF64 files RF64 is an audio file format You have an option set in Options gt Audio File editing preferences gt Files tab to support the RF
527. tch processing plug in in the Batch Processor Workspace In addition Pitch correction for a Clip is available from the Focused Clip window via Edit gt Pitch shift Note that for Batch processing and Clip processes the envelope option is not available For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Adjusting Envelopes 11 1 60 Pitch quantize This dialog allows you to correct the pitch of an Audio File The musical notes in the audio selection are quantized to the nearest semitone Pitch quan tize works best on recordings that have a single fundamental frequency such as voice or single instruments It can be useful for re tuning the pitch of an imperfect recorded vocal performance for example The dialog allows you to choose the reference frequency normally 440 Hz and the time taken for the pitch correction to reach the nearest semitone An explanation of when and how to adjust the Slur time is given using the What s this tooltips You can also choose to preserve the formants of the original material Choosing this option can sometimes help to produce a more realistic result when correcting the pitch of vocals or acoustic instrument sounds You can access this dialog from the Audio File Workspace via Process gt Pitch quantiz ing For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature clic
528. tection and correction are organized within the following groups of controls e Detection tab choose the method used to detect any errors Each different method has its own settings to determine when it will detect an error Click Detection 1 and 2 will search for clicks in certain frequency ranges while Digital Click Detection looks for clicks that are caused by clicks typical to digital errors e Correction tab specify the method used to correct any errors e Search Area tab specify the range of audio you wish to search for errors e Options tab this provides a range of preferences for playing back viewing and marking any errors found e Browse amp Correct panel step through your defined search region detecting each error in turn You can choose to correct any errors or mark them for later correction There are controls to skip between error markers and make fine adjustments to the WaveLab 7 11 3 Specific tool windows 309 selection You can also automatically detect and correct all marked errors in the search region Strategies to detect and correct errors There are several strategies that you can employ when detecting and correcting errors e Define an audio selection where you have identified an error then click Correct or Mark for subsequent correction e Use the function Detect next error to let WaveLab automatically find the next error and then click Correct or Mark for subsequent correction
529. ter acts differently When the signal level exceeds 6dB Soft Clip starts limiting or clipping the signal softly at the same time generating harmonics which add a warm tube like characteristic to the audio material Release 10 to 1000ms or Auto mode Sets the amount of time it takes for the gain to return to its original level when the signal drops below the threshold level If the Auto button is activated the limiter will automatically find an optimal release setting that varies depending on the audio material WaveLab 7 374 Audio Plug ins The Module Configuration button Using the Module Configuration button in the bottom right corner of the plug in panel you can set the signal flow order for the three processors Changing the order of the processors can produce different results and the available options allow you to quickly compare what works best for a given situation Simply click the Module Configuration button to change to a different configuration There are three routing options e C G L Compressor Gate Limit e G C L Gate Compressor Limit e C L G Compressor Limit Gate Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets 12 36 Crystal Resampler e 1 Crystal Resampler 7 AUE o Sample rate 1 11 11I EEI IA A lt gt e 44 1 kHz jo ee SS Quality l e l High I 1 l This plug in offers high quality sample rate conversion of Audio Files For example i
530. th date setFullYear year month date setUTCFullYear year month date toUTCStringQ Example Create a new date object var d new Date Print it out in the log window logWindow printInfo d Get just the hours logWindow printInfo d getHours RegExp Objects Functions e exec string e test string e toString Example Create a new regular expression defining a 5 digit number var reg new RegExp d 5 Test a string with it to see if it contains a 5 digit number var isFiveDigit reg test 12345 Trace the result to the log window logWindow printInfo isFiveDigit Error Objects Values e name e message Functions e toString WaveLab 7 4 10 The Spectrum display 79 Types of Native Errors available e EvalError e RangeError e ReferenceError e SyntaxError e TypeError e URIError Related topics WaveLab Scripting Language Scripting window Audio File Workspace Scripting window Audio Montage Workspace 4 10 The Spectrum display In WaveLab s Audio File Workspace the main wave editing and overview windows can be set to display your audio as a spectrogram Spectrum This spectrum mode allows a unique view of your audio and when used in conjunction with the Spectrum editor offers powerful audio restoration and processing functions The Spectrum display is a spectrogram where each vertical line represents the frequency spectrum at
531. that belongs to a Clip It helps to align Clips together by making Clips snap to other Clips at the cue point position Cue points are displayed as dotted vertical lines This pane provides you with a number of shortcuts for creating and working with Cue Points e Envelope allows you to access a number of controls for editing and working with a Clip s different envelopes e Fade in provides you with a range of tools for adjusting a Clip s Fade in curve WaveLab 7 166 Audio Montages e Fade out provides you with a range of tools for adjusting a Clip s Fade out curve e Colors up to 20 colors may be assigned to help distinguish particular Clips visually Select a Clip then click on a color Custom colors can be defined with great subtlety from Options gt Colors Select the Custom color to be defined then the parts to which it is applied then define the color value using the color wheel or type a set of RGB Red Green Blue values See Audio Montage Colors for more information When you choose a different Clip the properties in the Focused Clip window will update So for example if you select Envelope the corresponding controls will update to reflect the selected Clip s envelope information The Focused Clip window can be docked or floated You can reveal or hide the focused Clip window in the Audio Montage Workspace via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Focused clip For an explanation of each parameter an
532. the buzz fundamental While the Tone button is on a touch pad appears above the button and becomes a Tone level control It defaults to 18dB and has a range of 6dB to 96cB Sensitivity Knob and Touch Pad This controls the sensitivity of the buzz detection circuit Fully sensitive might allow the detection circuit to lock to inaudible and possibly undesirable frequencies Stronger buzzes which typically would be removed first will require a less sensitive setting Hum Buzz Mode Button This control switches between Hum mode and Buzz mode In Hum mode the band width limit for harmonic removal is O to 800Hz In Buzz mode the bandwidth limit for harmonic removal is O to 4000Hz Hum mode is less damaging and should be used when possible Enable Button This button enables the buzz removal processing It allows glitch less comparisons with and without the buzz removal It is important to note that with this button off i e the buzz removal processing is disabled the buzz detection circuit is still enabled and the Detect display will still show the degree of buzz detection Reduction Display The Reduction display indicates the level of audio that is being removed from the signal Attenuation Knob and Touch Pad dB The attenuation knob and touch pad determine the level of attenuation that the buzz removal circuit will apply up to a maximum of 96dB Generally this should be set so that the buzz is just inaudible Excessive use
533. the Audio Montage Workspace via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Script Note To view trace or log messages when executing scripts that contain the logWin dow function ensure that the Log window is visible and that it s warning filter buttons A 9 are selected For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Scripting ECMAScript Reference Log window 6 4 10 Groups This specific tool window displays a list of Groups within the current Audio Montage Groups are a selection of Clips that you can quickly re select via the Groups window You can group a number of Clips and nest Groups inside each other It is also possible to disable individual Groups and color Groups so you can identify them easily Grouping Clips To create a Group from a number of Clips 1 Select the Clips you want to group 2 Make sure you have the Groups window displayed 3 Select Group selected clips from the drop down menu or click the Group icon 4 Enter a name for the Group in the dialog that appears and click OK The new Group appears in the Group list All Clips included in the Group will also have the name of the Group prepended to the Clip names in each track Clicking on a Group in the Groups window will select all the Clips in your Montage so you can edit them together Adding Clips to an existing Group If you alrea
534. the Settings dialog e The over segment indicates clipping similar to a clip indicator If the below segment is lit there are more than 24 bits The bit meter will show the 24 higher bits and the below segment indicates the existence of extra lower bits Note that audio is always processed with more than 24 bits internally If the inter segment is lit this indicates that the audio data cannot really be expressed on a regular 24 bit scale there are floating point values in between bits thus the label inter This is typically the case if you apply effects thus the inter segment allows you to differentiate processed from non processed 24 bit PCM files When to use the Bit Meter e To check whether dithering is necessary or not As a rule if you re playing back or mixing down to 16 bits and the Bit Meter shows that more than 16 bits are used you should apply dithering e To see the actual resolution of an Audio File For example even though a file is in 24 bit format only 16 bits may be used Or a 32 bit file may only use 24 bits in this case the below segment would not be lit For this purpose the Bit Meter is best used in Analyze selection mode e To see whether a zeroed plug in still affects your signal or whether a plug in uses 16 bit internal processing or more generally to detect any signal modifier stage in the audio chain between reading and playing WaveLab 7 226 Control Window To
535. the Spectrometer The Spectroscope can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces lt can be used ei ther as a floating window or docked in the Workspace lt can also be docked in the Control Window Related topics Metering Spectrometer 5 6 6 Spectrometer The Spectrometer uses FFT Fast Fourier Transform techniques to display a continuous frequency graph providing a very precise and detailed real time frequency analysis e The current frequency spectrum is shown as a linear graph e Spectrum peaks are shown as a short horizontal lines indicating recent peak maxi mum values Snapshots By using the Add snapshot and Erase last snapshot buttons you can take and erase snapshots of the current spectrum These will be superimposed over the current peak spec trum graph in a color you can customize until you click the icon again to take a new snapshot One use for this is to check the effects of adding EQ for example Up to five snapshots can be superimposed on the display the sixth snapshot replaces the earliest one in the display and so on Don t confuse the order of snapshots with the numbered buttons these are Spectrometer presets see below Zooming You can adjust the frequency scale and range in the Settings dialog as described below but it s also possible to temporarily zoom in on a frequency area of interest This is done by clicking and dragging a rectangle in the Spectrosc
536. the audio range readSamples channelindex from numSamples Reads a number of samples from a given cursor position on a given channel e Use O for the eft channel e Use 1 for the right channel Returns the result in an array Example WaveLab 7 4 9 Scripting 69 buf activeWave readSamples 20 100 read 100 samples on left channel fr om sample index 20 for i 0 i lt 100 i logWindow printInfo buf i Audio Montage Scripting Commands Functions Preliminary info the Scripting API is an open project and will evolve according to user re quests size Returns the number of samples in the Audio Montage sampleRate Returns the sample rate of the Audio Montage numChannels Q Returns the number of output channels of the Audio Montage numTracks Returns the number of tracks of the Audio Montage cursorPosition Returns the current cursor position in samples setCursorPosition pos Sets the current cursor position at a certain sample location selectionStart Returns the index of the first selected sample or 1 if there is no selection selectionSize Returns the number of selected samples select presetName Loads the audio range preset and applies its setting to the active Audio Montage select start size Selects a number of samples starting from a given position setFocusedTrack index Sets the focused track addMarker type name comment Add a marker at t
537. the audio source and the mode for displaying information in the meters You can access the following monitoring functions from the Meters menu or via the Meters command bar e Monitor Playback the meters display the audio output of the Master Section after the dithering section unlike the Master Section s own meter e Monitor Audio Input the meters display the audio input you have chosen in the Audio Streaming Settings This is useful for monitoring audio while recording e gt a Monitor File Rendering the meters display what is being written to disk during file rendering taking into account Master Section settings with average minimum and maximum peak values computed After rendering the meter s freeze and remain frozen until you refresh or change the monitor mode WaveLab 7 5 3 Metering 109 Monitor Edit cursor position the meters display static information about the audio beneath the edit cursor Note that the Master Section settings are not taken into account in this mode Analyze audio selection this allows you to make a selection and have the meters display the average values over the selected range as a static display The Master Section settings are not taken into account in this mode When you change the selection you need to update the meter displays by selecting Refresh selection analysis from the Meters menu or by clicking the Refresh button on the Meters control bar If you have one of t
538. the balance between the unprocessed sound and the effect send level can be adjusted or controlled by effect envelope curves clip effects only Note that not all effects are capable of Send and if this feature is not available it is disabled The window only shows the effects of the focused Clip or the focused track according to the active mode Each plugin and track can be understood as being associated with a small Master Section A plug in can be inserted and sorted and you double click on an effect to Edit it When you close an effect window its parameters are saved into the montage and it can be be undone if necessary Use What s This help on the column headers for more details WaveLab 7 316 Interface Elements You can access this dialog in the Audio Montage Workspace via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Effects For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio Montages 11 3 18 DVD Audio This specific tool window allows you to author a DVD Audio disk from a collection of audio montages You can add your finished audio montages into this window check the DVD Audio layout for conformity and output a DVD Audio disk all from this window Note All included montages need to be in DVD A mode this can be set via Audio Montage properties Although DVD A has a different specification
539. the corresponding time location The bottom of the display corresponds to the lower frequencies while the upper part of the display represents the higher frequencies The intensity or level of the frequencies are either represented as a color spectrum from red maximum intensity to purple black minimum intensity or as a monochrome intensity depending on the setting in the Spectrum options dialog The vertical ruler on the left shows the frequency area in Hz for the spectrum You can view the Spectrum display in the Audio File Workspace by choosing the Spectrum tab below either of the waveform display windows Related topics Spectrogram options Spectrum editor 4 10 1 Spectrogram options This dialog allows you to adjust how the Spectrogram is displayed You can adjust the visual style of the spectrogram and its resolution You can also specify a cut off point above which frequencies are displayed and to plot them using a linear or logarithmic scale This can be useful for isolating a certain range of frequencies for example in sound restoration you may wish to focus on a high frequency band which is more accurately displayed using a linear scale WaveLab 7 80 WaveLab Concepts You can access this dialog from both wave windows in the Audio File Workspace via the Spectrum tab gt Edit settings For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For mo
540. the question How often does a given loudness vertical scale in dB appear in the whole file The percentage figure is relative to other peaks Some simple examples e 1 If for instance you have a sine of O dB 2 second followed by a sine of 6 dB 2 seconds This means the global audio material has as much O dB material as 6dB material you will see 2 peaks 0 6 dB each at 100 WaveLab 7 5 1 Offline processing 99 e 2 If for instance uou have a sine of O dB 1 second followed by a sine of 6 dB 3 seconds This means there are 3 times more 6 dB material than O dB material You will see a peak of about 33 at O dB and another peak of 100 at 6 dB This analysis is useful for learning about how the loudness of your music is distributed You can access this dialog in the Wave File Workspace via Analysis gt Loudness distri bution For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Loudness 5 1 11 Loudness normalizer This dialog allows you to adjust the loudness of a file Because it relates to loudness as opposed to maximum peak level this tool works quite differently from the Level Normalizer A typical application is to specify a loudness for example 12dB and the Loudness Normalizer processes the audio to match this level of loudness Like Gain Change increasing the loudness t
541. the question How often does a given loudness vertical scale in dB appear in the whole file The percentage figure is relative to other peaks Some simple examples e 1 If for instance you have a sine of O dB 2 second followed by a sine of 6 dB 2 seconds This means the global audio material has as much O dB material as 6dB material you will see 2 peaks 0 6 dB each at 100 e 2 If for instance uou have a sine of O dB 1 second followed by a sine of 6 dB 3 seconds This means there are 3 times more 6 dB material than O dB material You will see a peak of about 33 at O dB and another peak of 100 at 6 dB This analysis is useful for learning about how the loudness of your music is distributed You can access this dialog in the Wave File Workspace via Analysis gt Loudness distri bution For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Loudness 5 3 Metering WaveLab contains a variety of audio meters to help in monitoring and analyzing audio Meters can be used to monitor audio during playback rendering recording and also to analyze a specific selection of audio There are seven different audio meters in WaveLab each with its own separate window The meters are accessed via the Meters menu the Shared Tool windows menu or from the Meters control bar Monitor Modes You can choose
542. this help function For slice mixing you may need to experiment to see how many slices are needed Generally the more slices you use the more natural the sound will be up to a certain point Pre Cross fade The Loop Tone Uniformizer also includes the option to cross fade the end of the loop with the start of the newly processed section so that transition into the newly looped section is smoother during playback Use the envelope drag points or value sliders to adjust the cross fade A note about Post Cross fading WaveLab 7 11 1 Dialogs 259 If you have used the Loop Tone Uniformizer within a region of an Audio File the transition from the end of the loop into the original file in many cases won t be very natural This can be fixed as follows 1 Close the Loop Tone Uniformizer and open the Loop Tweaker 2 Click on the Cross fade tab and deactivate the Cross fade option the check box 3 Click on the Post Cross fade tab and make sure Cross fade is activated 4 Set up the post cross fade parameters and click Apply It can also be a useful tip to lock the loop markers after you use this command on a selection within an Audio File Once the loop is processed in place moving the loop markers will upset playback of the loop You can access this dialog in the Audio File Workspace via Process gt Loop Tone Uni formizer For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this ques
543. this dialog from Batch Processing Workspace gt Plug ins window gt MonoPass Plug ins gt Pitch Correction For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics WaveLab 7 7 1 Specific tool windows 191 Pitch correction Batch Processing Plug ins 7 1 2 8 Normalize Level This dialog allows you to change the peak level of your Audio File Enter the desired peak level in dB that you wish the audio selection to have You can also use Find current peak level to obtain a report on the peak level of the current audio selection or the peak level in the whole file if Process whole file if there is no selection is selected in the preferences You can choose to apply the same gain to both stereo channels Stereo Link or mix down to a mono file Mix to Mono with the assurance that no clipping will occur when both channels are mixed together To normalize the selected audio enter the desired peak level and click Apply You can access this dialog by choosing Process gt Level Normalizer in the Audio File Workspace This function is also available as a batch processing plug in You can access it from Batch Processing Workspace gt Plug ins window gt Multipass Plug ins gt Normalizer For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more in
544. tically thus retaining the selected time range You can resize a region by placing the mouse cursor at the edges of the region so that a double arrow appears and then clicking and dragging To remove a region that you have drawn click anywhere else on the waveform and it disappears If you have defined a region as a Source or Target it can be selected at any time to create a new Selection using the same dimensions Spectrum editor functions The Spectrum Editor has the following parts WaveLab 7 5 5 Specific tool windows 125 e Selection use this part to refine and define your selection s You can expand se lections shift selections around and define a source and target region for performing copy operations Operations use this part to perform copying filtering and processing operations For copying operations you require both a source and a target region to have been defined using the Selection tab You can choose which method to copy audio between the Source and Target regions You can also choose to apply processing to a single spectrum region using a variety of different modes See Spectrum Processing Modes for information on each mode type Master Section use this part to process and route selected spectral audio regions through the Master Section and its effects plug ins This allows for frequency selective processing A selected region s frequency spectrum can be routed to the Master Sec tion where you can
545. time waveform drawing of the audio signal being mon itored It can be useful when recording or rendering a file if Monitor File rendering mode is active Making settings You can adjust settings for the display via the Wavescope Settings dialog This can be accessed via Functions gt Settings menu or by using the 4 icon Here you can set WaveLab 7 9 3 Metering 229 various color options for the background grid and waveform display as well as setting the waveform rendering speed and vertical zoom If Clear waveform when reaching right of pane is checked the waveform display is cleared each time the cursor reaches the right end of the display If unchecked the previous waveform is overwritten Tip Wavescope is a useful meter for visualizing audio during recording The Wavescope meter can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Win dow Related topics Metering WaveLab 7 230 Control Window WaveLab 7 Chapter 10 Master Section The Master section contains WaveLab s Real Time Engine and is the final element in the signal path before your audio material is passed on to the audio hardware or before it is rendered to disk as an Audio File The Master section is where you can set the master volume level and add effects processors The Master Section is a shared tool window Th
546. ting window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Window Related topics Metering Dithering WaveLab 7 4 5 Metering 43 4 5 5 Phasescope The Phasescope indicates the phase and amplitude relationship between two stereo chan nels It is only really relevant when monitoring stereo audio material Reading the Phasescope It can be interpreted as follows e A vertical line indicates a perfect mono signal the left and right channels are the same e A horizontal line indicates that the left channel is the same as the right but with an inverse phase A random but roughly elliptical shape indicates a well balanced stereo signal If the shape leans to the left there is more energy in the left channel and vice versa the extreme case of this is if one side is muted in which case the Phasescope will show a straight line angled 45 degrees to the other side A perfect circle indicates a sine wave on one channel and the same sine wave shifted by 90 degrees on the other Generally the more you can see a thread shape the more bass there is in the signal the more spray like the display the more high frequencies are in the signal Phase Correlation meter At the bottom of the display you will find a Phase Correlation meter which shows the same information but in a different way e The green line shows the current phase correlation while the two red lines show the recent peak minimum and maximum values respectiv
547. tion mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Markers Adjusting Envelopes 11 1 40 Loudness distribution This dialog allows you to measure the most frequent loudness values found in an Audio File this is not the same as average loudness The graphic peaks found by the analysis represent these values The tool gives an answer to the question How often does a given loudness vertical scale in dB appear in the whole file The percentage figure is relative to other peaks Some simple examples e 1 If for instance you have a sine of O dB 2 second followed by a sine of 6 dB 2 seconds This means the global audio material has as much O dB material as 6dB material you will see 2 peaks 0 6 dB each at 100 e 2 If for instance uou have a sine of O dB 1 second followed by a sine of 6 dB 3 seconds This means there are 3 times more 6 dB material than O dB material You will see a peak of about 33 at O dB and another peak of 100 at 6 dB This analysis is useful for learning about how the loudness of your music is distributed You can access this dialog in the Wave File Workspace via Analysis gt Loudness distri bution For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help WaveLab 7 260 Interface Elements Related topics Loudness 11 1 41 Loudness normalizer This dia
548. tions to help you balance processing quality with CPU usage You can access this dialog in the Audio File and Audio Montage Workspaces via Transport gt Playback speed gt Edit speed For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Transport controls Command bars Context menus Global Preferences 11 1 62 Podcast options This dialog allows you to define a number of options for working with Podcasts You can choose how WaveLab handles pictures added to your Podcast select a different timezone to publish for and or define an external HTML editor You can access this dialog from the Podcast Section via Options gt Options For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics 11 1 63 Text format This dialog allows you to export text information from WaveLab in a choice of text formats or you send the text directly to your printer You can access this dialog from various locations in WaveLab wherever text is produced for output For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help WaveLab 7 270 Interface Elements Related topics 11 1 64 Repeat Clip This dialog allows you to make
549. to applications that allow graph plotting from text files Microsoft Excel for example The Spectrometer can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Window Related topics Metering Spectroscope 11 2 7 Wavescope The Wavescope meter displays a real time waveform drawing of the audio signal being mon itored It can be useful when recording or rendering a file if Monitor File rendering mode is active Making settings You can adjust settings for the display via the Wavescope Settings dialog This can be accessed via Functions gt Settings menu or by using the icon Here you can set various color options for the background grid and waveform display as well as setting the waveform rendering speed and vertical zoom If Clear waveform when reaching right of pane is checked the waveform display is cleared each time the cursor reaches the right end of the display If unchecked the previous waveform is overwritten Tip Wavescope is a useful meter for visualizing audio during recording The Wavescope meter can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Win dow Related topics Metering 11 2 8 Timecode This shared tool window displays the current time of the playback head or the
550. topics Global Preferences 11 1 66 Recording Dialog This dialog enables you to set up and record an Audio File from the input device specified in the Audio Streaming Settings dialog To set up a recording e In the File to create section select Temporary File or select Named File and browse to the folder where the recorded audio will be saved WaveLab 7 11 1 Dialogs 271 e Click the down arrow to select a preset audio format or click the audio format text to display the Audio File Format dialog and set up the format for your recorded audio Here you can create new Audio File Format presets if required for later use e Choose from Level or Spectrum display If you choose Level click the Settings button to bring up the Level Pan Meter Settings dialog e Click Record While the recording is in progress you can create named markers by clicking on the marker icons in the Actions section e Click Stop when the recording is complete An unsuitable recording is easily discarded or you can Close the dialog to edit the recorded file in the Audio File Workspace In WaveLab you also have further options available e Method use this tab to define options for starting stopping pausing the recording automatically You can select an input device and choose to start a recording at a specific time or stop it after a specific duration In WaveLab you can also choose to drop markers automatically and split a file into while recor
551. tring var str a sentence with spaces var encodedStr encodeURI str logWindow printInfo encodedStr Function Object Prototypes e toString toLocaleStringQ valueOf hasOwnProperty V isPrototypeOf V propertylsEnumerable V WaveLab 7 4 9 Scripting 73 Functions e toString e apply thisArg argArray e call thisArg arg1 arg2 Example Create a new custom marker Object function customMarker name comment timeSecs this name name this comment comment this timeSecs timeSecs Create a new instance of the custom marker var myMarker new customMarker A custom marker My custom marker comments 5 Use prototype function to add a new property to it customMarker prototype samples null myMarker samples activeWave sampleRate myMarker timeSecs Trace the results in the log window logWindow printInfo myMarker name logWindow printInfo myMarker samples Array Objects Functions e toString e toLocaleStringQ e concat item1 item2 e join separator e pop e push item1 item2 e reverse e shiftQ e slice start end e sort comparefn e splice start deleteCouni item1 item2 unshift item1 item2 Example WaveLab 7 74 WaveLab Concepts Create an empty array var a new Array Add some items to it a push first array item a push next a
552. trum display Spectrum editor Tools Zoom factor Peak Files 5 1 Offline processing Offline processes are used for a variety of editing purposes and creative effects Offline processing refers to functions that are only performed when saving the file Offline means the process can t be monitored during playback either because they require too much processing power or because they require an analysis pass prior to processing Note that WaveLab only writes temporary files when applying an effect so the original Audio File is safe Only when saving the original is the original audio possibly modified These offline processes differ to realtime processes such as listening to effects via the Master Section for example which only temporarily render an effect while audio is played through them Applying processing Processing can be applied to a selection or to a whole Audio File For certain processing operations processing the entire file is necessary This will be indicated by the effects re spective dialog If Process whole file if there is no selection is selected in the Audio File editing preferences editing tab the whole file will automatically be processed if no selection exists To apply processing to some audio proceed as follows 1 Make a selection If the file is in stereo you can apply processing to either channel or both by selecting one channel or both WaveLab 7 92 Audio File editing 2 Select the d
553. ture you need information on This can also be used to get help on any menu item Acti vate the question mark icon by selecting What is this from the Help system using Shift F1 or by selecting from the command bar button Steinberg on the internet This fly out menu opens a window on your browser with the appropriate URL to support update upgrade or register WaveLab You can also access the Steinberg Home Page Related topics Getting Help WaveLab 7 Chapter 3 Using the interface This section gives information on interface features that may not be obvious and which may help to speed up your workflow especially as your experience with WaveLab increases WaveLab is incredibly flexible in the ways that you can set up your working environment Interface elements can be arranged to suit your workflow the type of project you are creating and the size and number of your displays You can move reorder and detach windows and tabs from frames and tear off groups of but tons in the Toolbar You can slide and quickly partition different panes areas of the WaveLab window It s easy to set up different layouts for different projects and switch between them WaveLab has distinct Workspaces where you can work on a session Each Workspace lets you collect a number of files that you want to keep together This could be all of the Audio Files used in a single song for instance or all the Audio Files that go to make up a Podcast epis
554. u have chosen a file you wish to open double click it to open the file in the current Workspace You can also open it by dragging it onto an empty tabbed group or onto the tab bar of a tabbed group You can also drag the file over a wave view to insert it at a given point When you drag a file over a wave view a beam is displayed so as to clearly display the insertion point When browsing Audio Files the file browser also has a region panel When you select an Audio File its related regions are listed in this panel You can then drag the region from the list to insert only that part of the audio Double clicking on a region has the effect of opening the file in the Workspace and selecting that region You can access this dialog via Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt File Browser For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Specific tool windows 5 5 4 Marker Window The marker window is a specific tool window that allows you to create edit and use markers while working on an audio waveform From the Functions menu you can also access useful functions to convert marker types rename multiple markers and export the marker list as text The Marker list The marker window contains a list of any markers placed in the currently active file along with their corresponding details Click on a column header to sort
555. ug in uses 16 bit internal processing or more generally to detect any signal modifier stage in the audio chain between reading and playing To adjust the Bit Meter settings select Settings from the Options pop up menu or by using the icon The Bit meter can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Window WaveLab 7 5 3 Metering 113 Related topics Metering Dithering 5 3 5 Phasescope The Phasescope indicates the phase and amplitude relationship between two stereo chan nels It is only really relevant when monitoring stereo audio material Reading the Phasescope It can be interpreted as follows e A vertical line indicates a perfect mono signal the left and right channels are the same e A horizontal line indicates that the left channel is the same as the right but with an inverse phase A random but roughly elliptical shape indicates a well balanced stereo signal If the shape leans to the left there is more energy in the left channel and vice versa the extreme case of this is if one side is muted in which case the Phasescope will show a straight line angled 45 degrees to the other side A perfect circle indicates a sine wave on one channel and the same sine wave shifted by 90 degrees on the other Generally the more you can see a thread shape the more bass there is in the sig
556. ult setup is a stereo 44 1kHz montage If you wish to change the number of channels at a later stage you can by opening this dialog again via Edit gt Audio Montage properties See Multi channel surround setup below for more information on setting up for multiple channels There are also ways to generate a new montage automatically If you are working in the Audio File Workspace you can choose Edit gt Create Montage from Audio File to create a new Audio Montage with a selection or an entire Audio File You can also create a montage by importing different file formats directly into the Audio Montage Workspace Several of these are found in the File gt Import gt menu You can create a montage file e by importing an audio DDP file as an Audio Montage 142 Audio Montages importing an audio CD Cue file CD image as an Audio Montage This function allows you to open a cue file a text file containing information about how CD tracks corre spond to the audio in an associated CD image file The result will be a montage with Clips corresponding to the tracks in the cue sheet Cue sheets and CD images can be created in many programs including WaveLab by importing audio CD tracks directly to a montage using the Import Audio CD dialog from the Utilities menu by converting a Basic Audio CD into an audio montage from the Audio File Workspace by creating a montage from an Audio File using the Auto Split function by opening an Aud
557. uncing down You can select options for which regions of the session are rendered whether to create a new file or process in place and whether to mute the effects chain when finished You can also choose to copy marker locations to the new file You can access this dialog in the Audio File Workspace via the Render button from the Master Section window For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Rendering Audio Plug ins Audio File Format Dialog Master Section 10 2 Render Montage window This dialog allows you to process the montage session you are working on mixing down multiple tracks into a mono or stereo file and applying any active plug in effects you have active This process is sometimes also referred to as mixing or bouncing down You can select options for which regions of the session are rendered whether to create a named file or a temporary untitled file and whether to mute the effects chain when finished There are various options to render all or parts of the Montage into one or more files use What s this You can access this dialog in the Audio Montage Workspace via the Y Render button from the Master Section window For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topi
558. use them to set the corner frequency range and the input gain levels for each frequency bands e The handles at the sides are used to define the frequency range of the different fre quency bands e By using the handles on top of each frequency band you can cut or boost the input gain by 15dB after compression for that specific frequency band WaveLab 7 354 Audio Plug ins Bypassing frequency bands Each frequency band can be by passed using the B button in each compressor section Soloing frequency bands A frequency band can be soloed using the S button in each compressor section Only one band can be soloed at a time Using the Compressor section By moving breakpoints or using the corresponding knobs you can specify the Threshold and Ratio The first breakpoint from which the line deviates from the straight diagonal will be the threshold point For each of the four bands the following compressor parameters are available e Threshold 60 to 0dB Determines the level where Compressor kicks in Signal levels above the set threshold are affected but signal levels below are not processed Ratio 1000 to 8000 1 1 to 8 1 Determines the amount of gain reduction applied to signals over the set threshold A ratio of 3000 3 1 means that for every 3dB the input level increases the output level increases by only 1dB e Attack 0 1 to 100ms Determines how fast the compressor responds to signals above th
559. uter processor s capacity or pause the task temporarily You can access this window by choosing Workspace gt Shared tool windows gt Back ground task monitor It is available in the Control Window Audio File Workspace and Audio Montage Workspace You can also access this window in the Control Window by choosing Utilities gt Background task monitor You can choose to automatically open the Background task monitor when a rendering pro cess begins To enable this option select the checkbox via Options gt Global Preferences gt Options gt Make the Background Task Monitor visible when a task starts Since this window is a Shared_tool_window the location where it opens may vary For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Specific tool windows Control Window Rendering 11 2 10 Log window This shared tool window allows you to view log messages that have been issued by WaveLab When using WaveLab s scripting language for example the logWindow function outputs messages to this window There are a number of toggle buttons and these allow you to filter the types of messages displayed WaveLab 7 298 Interface Elements Note When using the logWindow method you need to have the Show informal notes button selected for the messages to be visible If no log messages are displayed make sure all th
560. uts are global to the application To edit shortcuts double click on the shortcut text or its placeholder or select a command and click Edit shortcut See Definition of shortcut s for more information Please note that some shortcuts cannot be edited these are unavailable grayed out New keyboard shortcuts are displayed in blue e Showing hiding in menus you can decide whether to hide show certain com mands in their respective menu by deselecting selecting their checkbox in the Menu column Triggering via a keyword you can enter a keyword which you can later use to activate a command by typing it into the Keyword field command bar Triggering from an external MIDI device you can assign a command to be trig gered by an external MIDI device using the MIDI Trigger checkbox For example this could be useful for issuing transport commands from your midi keyboard You can specify a sequence of up to three midi events Please note that according to the context not all types of shortcuts are available For example triggering via a keyword is not available within the recording context e Display in command bar For certain commands those with icons displayed you can also choose whether to display them in their corresponding command bar To do this select deselect the option in the Bar column You can define one key shortcut per command each shortcut can be a sequence of up to four keystrokes Note that for WaveLab 7
561. veLab 7 12 15 Steinberg Gate 345 mode operates more on peak levels As a general guideline RMS mode works better on material with few transients such as vocals and Peak mode better for percussive material with a lot of transient peaks Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets 12 15 Steinberg Gate e 1 Steinberg Gate Ys 00 E Center Q Factor 500 0 100 A y y side chain monitor Hold Release Analysis 60 Gating or noise gating silences audio signals below a set threshold level As soon as the signal level exceeds the set threshold the gate opens to let the signal through The following parameters are available e Threshold 60 to 0dB Determines the level where Gate is activated Signal levels above the set threshold trigger the gate to open and signal levels below the set threshold will close the gate e State LED Indicates whether the gate is open LED lights up in green closed LED lights up in red or something in between LED lights up in yellow e Filter buttons LP BP and HP When the Side Chain button see below is activated you can use these buttons to set the filter type to either low pass band pass or high pass e Side Chain button This button below the Center knob activates the sidechain filter The input signal can then be shaped according to set filter parameters Internal side chaining can be useful for tailoring how the Gate ope
562. vent sequence use an external MIDI device such as a MIDI keyboard or dedicated control surface to define a sequence of up to three MIDI events First you need to select the MIDI interface for incoming messages Press the key or button on your MIDI device and the corresponding MIDI event number will be displayed You can define a sequence by continuing to input further MIDI messages You could use a Program or Bank change message as a modifier for example Defining MIDI shortcuts can be useful if you want to use your external MIDI device to control the transport in WaveLab for example You can also use your external MIDI device to control WaveLab 7 11 1 Dialogs 279 almost any function within WaveLab Select a MIDI device via Preferences gt Options tab activate Use MIDI shortcuts and specify a MIDI input port so that MIDI events are sent rather than keyboard events You can access this dialog from the Customize commands window by selecting a command and choosing Edit shortcut For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Customize Commands Command bars 11 1 84 Signal generator This dialog allows you to generate complex synthesized sounds in mono or stereo You can layer different waveform generators together and if outputting a stereo file adjust different settings for both the left and
563. ver some exceptions to its behavior because of its central importance in WaveLab If you dock the Master Section in a Workspace then close that Workspace the Master Section will be automatically un docked and re displayed as an independent floating window This is done so that the Master Section remains visible at all times and is not closed with the Workspace the normal behavior for a Shared tool window If however you place it in the Control Window then it is not docked but part of a tab group As such if you then close the Control Window it will also hide the Master Section The Global menu in all menu bars always has an entry Master Section to easily reveal the Master Section if it is ever hidden in this manner If the Master Section is docked or in a tab group its main host will be made visible again The Master Section can be docked in some Workspaces Audio File Montage but not in some others for example the Podcast Workspace Related topics Render Wave window Render Montage window Plug ins settings Audio Plug ins 10 1 Render Wave window This dialog allows you to process the Audio File or selection you are working on applying any effects you have active WaveLab 7 10 2 Render Montage window 233 It applies all active plug ins to the selected audio region or the whole file and you can op tionally change the format of the rendered file This process is sometimes also referred to as mixing or bo
564. version You can also use any other bit of audio from the application s clipboard that has the same length as the one you wish to morph with To set up a basic effect morph proceed as follows 1 Start by making a selection range over the time you wish the effect morphing to take place 2 Now process this range using any Master Section effect s or use some other off line processing You cannot use processing effects that alter the length of the selection e g time stretching 3 Open the Effect Morphing dialog by choosing Edit gt Effect Morphing 4 Adjust your envelope points over time between 0 and 100 This will determine the level and direction of the morph For example starting at 100 and ending at 0 will fade out the effect you just applied 5 Choose Unprocessed selection for this example As mentioned previously you can also use any audio of the same duration from the clipboard 6 Click Apply to apply the Effect morphing You can access this dialog in the Audio File Workspace via Edit gt Effect morphing For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help 5 1 10 Loudness distribution This dialog allows you to measure the most frequent loudness values found in an Audio File this is not the same as average loudness The graphic peaks found by the analysis represent these values The tool gives an answer to
565. w describes the following possible actions Clip Select clip or group DO Select clip underneath Move clip s A A AA AT at e acontext menu is available e asingle left mouse click will select the Clip e a double click will select the Clip underneath if it exists WaveLab 7 182 Audio Montages e clicking and dragging will move the click in any direction There are a number of modifier keys available also including from left to right the Alt Option key e the Ctri Command key e the Shift key Various combinations also exist e the Alt Option key the Ctrl Command key e the Alt Option key the Shift key e the Ctri Command key the Shift key Related topics WaveLab 7 Chapter 7 Batch Processing This special Workspace allows you to process any number of audio or audio montage files with Master Section plug ins and presets offline effects and other plug ins that are unique to Batch Processing Each file is processed and then saved to a folder of your choice You can choose a different file format rename the file according to a set of rules and run an external application when the batch is finished You can process as many files as you wish taking advantage of multi processing on multi core processors if available You can save batch process files this allows you to run batches repeatedly if required For example you may have a folder of 24 bit Audio Files which you
566. w much processing power is used for RoomWorks The lower the value the more CPU resources will be used and the higher the quality of the reverb Inter esting effects can be created with very high Efficiency settings gt 90 Experiment for yourself Export button Determines if during audio export RoomWorks will use the maximum CPU power for the highest quality reverb During export you may wish to keep a higher efficiency setting to achieve a specific effect If you want the highest quality reverb during export make sure this button is activated Output meter Indicates the level of the output signal Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets WaveLab 7 362 Audio Plug ins 12 27 Steinberg Roomworks SE e v 1 Steinberg Roomworks SE s 00 E Pre Delay Reverb Time Diffusion 50 1 13 40 RoomWorks SE is a lite version of the RoomWorks plug in This plug in delivers high quality reverberation but has fewer parameters and is less demanding of CPU than the full version The following parameters are available Pre Delay Controls how much time passes before the reverb is applied This allows you to simulate larger spaces by increasing the time it takes for first reflections to reach the listener Reverb Time Allows you to set the reverb time in seconds Diffusion Affects the character of the reverb tail Higher values lead to more diffusion and a smoother sound
567. w the original pitch Set to 0 means the voice is muted Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets 12 24 Steinberg Pingpong Delay e L Steinberg PingPongDelay Ys 00 E Delay Feedback Lo filter Hi Spatial 250 1 40 0 50 0 18008 0 60 0 A a a a y y This is a stereo delay effect that alternates each delay repeat between the left and right channels WaveLab 7 356 Audio Plug ins The following parameters are available e Delay Sets the base note value for the delay from 0 1 to 5000 milliseconds e Feedback Sets the number of repeats for the delay e Filter Lo This filter affects the feedback loop and allows you to roll off low frequencies up to 800Hz The button below the knob activates deactivates the filter e Filter Hi This filter affects the feedback loop and allows you to roll off high frequencies from 20kHz down to 1 2kHz The button below the knob activates deactivates the filter e Spatial Sets the stereo width for the left right repeats Turn clockwise for a more pronounced stereo ping pong effect e Mix Sets the level balance between the dry signal and the effect If PingPongDelay is used as asend effect set this to the maximum value as you can control the dry effect balance with the send Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets WaveLab 7 12 25 Steinberg PostFilter 357 12 25 Steinb
568. ways e By using the knobs e By clicking on the numeric values and typing in new values e By using the mouse to drag points in the EQ curve display When using the mouse to change the parameter settings you can use the following modifier keys When no modifier key is pressed and you drag an EQ point in the display the Gain and Frequency parameters are adjusted simultaneously Shift Keep the Shift key pressed and drag the mouse to change the Q factor of the corresponding EQ band WaveLab 7 12 31 Steinberg Studio EQ 367 Alt Option Keep the Alt Option key pressed and drag the mouse to change the frequency of the corresponding EQ band Ctri Command Keep the Ctrl Command key pressed and drag the mouse to change the gain value of the corresponding EQ band The following parameters are available Band 1 Gain 20 to 24dB Sets the amount of cut boost for the low band Band 1 Inv button Inverts the gain value of the filter Use this button to filter out unwanted noise While looking for the frequency to omit it sometimes helps to boost it in the first place set the filter to positive gain After you have found it you can use the Inv button to cancel it out Band 1 Freq 20 to 2000Hz Sets the frequency of the low band Band 1 Q Factor 0 5 to 10 Controls the width or resonance of the low band Band 1 Filter mode For the low band you can select between three types of shelving filters a Peak
569. window shows hints to all the possible actions you can perform as you move the cursor around the main Audio Montage window The info line will also display positions and lengths when you are moving copying or resizing Clips WaveLab 7 6 7 Audio Montage contextual information 181 The object you are directly over is indicated along with any possible actions you can perform and any modifier keys that will enable further functions These hints are displayed using icons and text descriptions from left to right This option is enabled disabled in the Audio Montage Workspace via Options gt Audio Montage preferences gt All Audio Montages gt Display indications of possible ac tions Icons The following symbols are used in the contextual information display e if this appears this means there is a context menu available e indicates a left mouse click e indicates a double click e Pb indicates the object can be dragged in any direction inside the montage e X indicates the object can be dragged in any direction inside or outside the montage e 1 indicates the object can be dragged vertically e indicates the object can be dragged horizontally Modifier keys All hints are displayed along with any possible modifier key combinations Modifier keys are represented by the following symbols e 4 AIt Option key e Shift key e Ctri Command key Example From left to right the example belo
570. window shows the pan the difference in level between the left and right channel only applicable when monitoring stereo audio e The upper pan meters show the peak level difference between the channels graphically and numerically Note that the pan meters are two sided the level bars can go to the left or right indicating which channel is the loudest The two sides are shown in different colors which can be changed via the Settings dialog as explained previously e The lower pan meters show the average difference in loudness between the channels in a similar way This gives you a visual indication of whether a stereo recording is properly centered for example e If you are monitoring real time audio playback or input the maximum balance differ ence value peak and loudness for each channel is displayed numerically to the left and right of the meter bars The VU meter can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Montage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Window Related topics Metering 4 5 2 Spectroscope The Spectroscope shows a continuous graphical representation of the frequency spectrum analyzed into 60 separate frequency bands represented as vertical bars Peak levels are WaveLab 7 4 5 Metering 41 shown as a short horizontal lines above the corresponding band indicating recent peak maximum values The Spectroscope offers a qui
571. ws you to move the selection as a group You can also use the controls to delete or reset points in the envelope Use the envelope smoothing button to toggle the envelope points between a straight polygonal line or a curved path Click Apply to apply the envelope to the audio selection or file You can access this dialog in the Audio File Workspace via Process gt Level envelope For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio File editing Adjusting Envelopes 11 1 39 Loop Tone Uniformizer This dialog allows you to create sounds that will loop from audio that is seemingly un loopable These are normally sounds that constantly decay in level or continuously change in timbre The Loop Tone Uniformizer applies processing to the sound that evens out changes in level and timbral characteristics in order for a sound to loop properly For example this could be useful for creating looped samples for a softsynth or hardware sampler To use the Loop Tone Uniformizer you need to have a loop defined using a pair of loop markers gt 4 The original length of the loop is not changed Uniformizers This tab allows you to specify the method s used to even out the sound you wish to loop Choose between Slice mixing and or Chorus smoothing For a full explanation of how each of these methods operate use the What s
572. xample if you have a large number of Audio Files that you wish to encode as MP3 files or a group of stereo files that you need to downsample and convert to mono You can also take maximum advantage of your computer s architecture if you have a multiple processor cores by spreading the processing load across them These settings are selected in the Multitasking tab To use the Batch Converter tool 1 Click onthe plus sign icon to add files or just drag the files directly into the pane 2 Define an output file location and file format 3 Choose any options or performance settings from the Options and Multi tasking tabs 4 Click Start to begin you can also choose an option to start the process automatically when dragging the file in You can access this dialog by choosing Utilities gt Batch conversion of Audio Files For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Audio File Format Dialog 11 1 14 Basic Audio CD Settings This dialog allows you to edit various settings for the Basic Audio CD You can add optional UPC EAN codes to your CD adjust the pause time before the first track and add additional silence at the beginning and end of tracks You can also choose to play the audio through the Master Section and its effects before burning your audio CD See Basic Audio CD for more information You can acce
573. y e The green line shows the current phase correlation while the two red lines show the recent peak minimum and maximum values respectively these are the default colors which you can change e With a mono signal the meter would show 1 indicating that both channels are per fectly in phase e Similarly 1 indicates that the two channels are the same but one is inverted e Generally for a good mix the meter should show a value between O and 1 Unlike the main Phasescope the Phase Correlation meter is also available in Analyze audio selection mode showing an average value for the selected range Changing settings You can define display colors peak hold time and the resolution or number of samples to display from the Functions gt Settings menu The Phasescope meter can be found in the Meters menu of the Audio Files and Audio Mon tage Workspaces It can be used either as a floating window or docked in the Workspace or the Control Window Related topics Metering WaveLab 7 9 2 Shared tool windows 215 9 2 2 VU Meter The vu meter is used to display the peak and average loudness decibel level of your Audio File It also displays the pan or the balance between the left and right channels in a stereo file The upper part of the level pan meter window shows the peak level and average loudness in the following way e The Peak Level meters display the peak levels of each channel graphically and num
574. y and audio detail is retained up to 30dB into the noise floor For an introduction to the concept of dithering see Dithering The following parameters are available WaveLab 7 370 Audio Plug ins e Bit Resolution The UV22HR supports dithering to multiple resolutions e 8 16 20 or 24 bits You select the desired resolution by clicking the corresponding button e Hi Try this first it is the most all round setting e Lo This applies a lower level of dither noise e Auto black When this is activated the dither noise is gated muted during silent passages in the material Note that dithering should always be applied post fader on an output bus Related topics Audio Plug ins Master Section How do add effects Presets Dithering 12 34 Steinberg Vintage Compressor 1 Steinberg VintageCompressor 4s 00 E 1 0 A JE d y Attack Release 3 0 This is modeled after vintage type compressors This compressor features separate controls for input and output gain attack and release In addition there is a Punch mode which pre serves the attack phase of the signal and a program dependent Auto feature for the Release parameter The available parameters work as follows Input 24 to 48dB WaveLab 7 12 35 Steinberg VST Dynamics 371 In combination with the Output setting this parameter determines the compression amount The higher the input gain setting and the lower the output g
575. y open the Background task monitor when a rendering pro cess begins To enable this option select the checkbox via Options gt Global Preferences gt Options gt Make the Background Task Monitor visible when a task starts Since this window is a Shared_tool_window the location where it opens may vary For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon For more information see Getting Help Related topics Specific tool windows Control Window Rendering 6 5 10 Log window This shared tool window allows you to view log messages that have been issued by WaveLab When using WaveLab s scripting language for example the logWindow function outputs messages to this window There are a number of toggle buttons and these allow you to filter the types of messages displayed WaveLab 7 180 Audio Montages Note When using the logWindow method you need to have the Show informal notes button selected for the messages to be visible If no log messages are displayed make sure all the toggle buttons are selected A You can access this window via Workspace gt Shared tool windows gt Log It is available in the Control Window Audio File Workspace and Audio Montage Workspace You can also access this window in the Control Window via Utilities gt Log For an explanation of each parameter and interface feature click on or the What s this question mark icon Fo
576. y the method used to correct any errors Search Area tab specify the range of audio you wish to search for errors Options tab this provides a range of preferences for playing back viewing and marking any errors found Browse amp Correct panel step through your defined search region detecting each error in turn You can choose to correct any errors or mark them for later correction There are controls to skip between error markers and make fine adjustments to the selection You can also automatically detect and correct all marked errors in the search region WaveLab 7 120 Audio File editing Strategies to detect and correct errors There are several strategies that you can employ when detecting and correcting errors e Define an audio selection where you have identified an error then click Correct or Mark for subsequent correction e Use the function Detect next error to let WaveLab automatically find the next error and then click Correct or Mark for subsequent correction e Use the function Detect all errors to let WaveLab automatically find all errors in the predefined range Then browse the marked errors removing or adjusting each audio range in turn and click Correct to correct any specific errors or you can use the option Correct all You can access this dialog by choosing Workspace gt Specific tool windows gt Error Correction For an explanation of each parameter and interface featur
577. you to adjust that track s volume on both left and right channels for a stereo track Holding down Ctri Command will reset the sliders to OdB In a stereo track holding down Shift or right clicking and dragging on either the left or right fader will allow you to adjust the balance of one channel at a time Use Shift or right click and Ctrl Command to reset a single fader to OdB WaveLab 7 146 Audio Montages Multiple Clips and Groups It is possible to group multiple Clips together by holding down Shift or Ctr Command while selecting them You can then save them as a selection group so that later you can easily select all Clips in that Group with a single click You can even nest Groups inside each other See Groups for more information Playing back and using effects Playback in the Audio Montage works in much the same way as in the Audio File Workspace There are however some additional points to note Audio tracks are normally routed through the Master Section This allows you to add global effects to the Audio Montage or use the Render function to create a mixdown Audio File separate Audio Files in the case of a multichannel Montage or an intermediary Basic Audio CD You can also choose to route the audio from a track to the nearest track above for use with Clip effects that allow modulating audio inputs such as the Ducker plug in The routing is done using the Route to options on the Track context menu
578. your own categories You can continue to nest folders inside one another to build a standard tree structured menu system Below is an example of how this looks for a set of window layout presets ZA Saveas Restore layout before last applied preset Save current layout as default A Explore presets 2 Editing gt Film Mastering gt Colin Mixing Philippe B _last_ Tim gt i all meters BH meters on one monitor WaveLab 7 58 WaveLab Concepts Related topics Scripting 4 6 16 Rendering To Render effects into a temporary or final file you use the Render function note that the Save function from the File menu does not Render The Render function is part of the Master Section and in other applications is sometimes referred to as bouncing down or mixing down Rendering a file prints all audible settings and effects that the audio is being routed through in the Master section to the resultant Audio File This includes any plug ins the level of the faders and any dithering you have set in the Master Section In WaveLab you normally use the Render function to e Mix down a file in a Wave window to a new Audio File complete with Master Section effects dithering and other settings e Mix down a complete Audio Montage to an Audio File e Apply all settings in the Master Section to a file in a Wave window When you render a file you can choose the format of the new Audio File and whether

Steinberg WaveLab Elements 7

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents